Specifications Li
1
TOC MANAGEMENT SERVICES / (...„
I �6
BUILDING ADDITION
I
''/ A/3-115-51)
1
. ''z' S�'Ia . ,��.1 ` r , , d al; Sys � ✓'`�'� '�� • ,i` 1
i , ....-
i s 1s t / - �. i
1_- _ '`,'tip .:.. -L; - - . `I : 74 IS.i° :' ' ' ' `. °# - - �''
y, . - . -
_ jr,...
!" _ "— _.. , .. - - .
i iii
I
I PROJECT MANUAL
CONSTRUCTION SET
I
September 13 2000
I
Architect Project No. 993203
1
I
FIT
I ANKROM MOISAN ASSOCIATED ARCHITECTS
6720 S . Macadam, Suite 100, Portland. Oregon 97219 503/245 -7100 FAX 503/245 -7710
I
I
1,
TOC BUILDING ADDITION SEALS PAGE: 00007
J SEP 00 PAGE 1
PROJECT ARCHITECT
I
TOC Management Services Ankrom Moisan Associated
I Building Addition
6825 SW Sandburg Street 6720 SW Macadam Avenue,
Tigard, Oregon 97223 Suite 100
I Phone: (503) 620 -1710 Phone: (503) 245 -7100
Fax: (503) 620 -3935 Fax: (503) 245 -7710
Project Manager: Roger
I Superneau
rogers @amaa.com
I OWNER LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT
I TOC Management Services Rosenfeld Associates
6825 SW Sandburg Street 7785 NW Stark Street
Tigard, Oregon 97223 Portland, Oregon 97229
I Phone: (503) 620 -1710 Phone: (503) 297 -4222
Fax: (503) 620 -3935 Fax: (503) 297 -4333
O Contact: Jay Seeley Project Architect: Charlie
jay.seeley aC�toc.org Rosenfeld
rosenassoc@aol.com
I CONSTRUCTION CONSULTANT: STRUCTURAL ENGINEER
I Meadowlark Partners LLC VLMK Consulting Engineers
1750 SW Skyline Boulevard, Suite 224 3933 SW Kelley Avenue
I Portland, Oregon 97221 Portland, Oregon 97201 -4393
Phone: (503) 297 -6080 Phone: (503) 222 -4453
Fax: (503) 297 -6184 Fax: (503) 248 -9263
1 Project Contact: David Lintz Project Manager: Kevin Kaplan
bhncl @teleport.com kevinkavImk.com
11 , GENERAL CONTRACTOR:
I McCormack Pacific '\ ' `t
7190 SW Sandburg Street U
Tigard, Oregon +833 • I Nb6
Phone: (503) 624 -2090 /
Fax: (503) 639 -4134 •� / ` I
;! ., • -t.,
Project Contacts: Terry Edgar 2 9 .(--*
tedgar @mccormackpacific.com 1( 4
Jeff Perala OF a
jperala(a mccormackpacific.com
I
MECHANICAL ENGINEER: ELECTRICAL ENGINEER
MFIA, Inc. HK Electrical Engineers LLC
2007 SE Ash Street 220 E. Division
Portland, Oregon 97214 Sherwood, Oregon 97140
Phone: (503) 234 -0548, Ext. 22 Phone: (503) 625 -4443
Fax: (503) 234 -0677 Fax: (503) 625 -4187:
Project Engineer: Scott Miller Project Engineer: Greg Kohn
scott.miller @mfia- eng.com hkenggreg @cs.com
CIVIL ENGINEERING:
SURVEYING:
WRG Design
10450 SW Nimbus Avenue, Suite RA
Portland, Oregon 97223
Phone: (503) 603 -9933
Fax: (503) 603 -9944
Project Manager: Brent Sanborn, E.I.T.
bds @wrgd.com
Surveyor: Troy Tetsuka
tttCcr�.wrgd.com
i
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER
Geo Design
17400 SW Upper Boones Ferry, Suite 230
Portland, Oregon 97224
Phone: (503) 968 -8787
Fax: (503) 968 -3068
Project Manager: Jim Stone Architect's Project Number:
993203
I
I
1
1
I
I
I The following Specification Sections have been prepared by:
I Civil Consultant: WRG Design Inc.
10450 SW Nimbus Avenue
I Suite RA
Portland, Oregon 97223
Division 2 - Sitework
I 02230 Site Clearing
02300 Earthwork
02316 Trench Excavation and Backfill
I 02336 Watering
02370 Erosion Sedimentation Control
02510 Water Distribution
I 02531 Sanitary and Storm Pipe
02533 Sanitary and Storm Misc. Structures
I 02620 Subdrainage
02720 Unbound Bases, Courses and Ballasts
02740 Flexible Pavement
ii
IV 02741 Bituminous Tack Coat
02765 Pavement Marking
02771 Extruded Concrete Curbs
02772 Cast In Place Concrete Curbs
1 02775 Concrete Sidewalks and Driveways
I °liJ, /Do
g it.c_IS Prit--;.
szs s G I Id z`
II i47'? " '
&My 1aJ31lov
1
I
I
I
TOC BUILDING ADDITION SEALS PAGE: 00007
SEP 00
The Following Specification sections have been prepared by:
LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTANT: Rosenfeld Associates
7785 N.W. Stark St.
Portland, Oregon 97229
Phone: (503) 297 -4222
Fax: (503) 297 -4333
DIVISION 2 SITEWORK
02810 DESIGN / BUILD IRRIGATION SYSTEM
02900 LANDSCAPING
r
•
I
TOC BUILDING ADDITION TABLE OF CONTENTS: 00010
I SEP 00 PAGE 1
INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION
i SECTION 00007 SEALS PAGE
SECTION 00010 TABLE OF CONTENTS
I BIDDING REQUIREMENTS
1 SECTION 00320 GEOTECHNICAL DATA
CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
/ SECTION 00500 AGREEMENT FORM
SECTION 00650 CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
i SECTION 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS
SECTION 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
I DIVISION 1: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
I SECTION 01110
SECTION 01250 SUMMARY OF WORK
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
SECTION 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES
t SECTION 01310
SECTION 01330 PROJECT COORDINATION
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
SECTION 01340 DESIGN -BUILD REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 01410 DEFERRED SUBMITTALS
SECTION 01422 DEFINITIONS AND REFERENCE STANDARDS
SECTION 01450 QUALITY CONTROL
II SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
SECTION 01570 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
SECTION 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
g SECTION 01630 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
SECTION 01732 CUTTING AND PATCHING
I SECTION 01736
SECTION 01737 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES
SECTION 01740 CLEANING
A SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
1
I
I I
I
TABLE OF CONTENTS: 00010 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
I PAGE2 SEP00
DIVISION 2: SITEWORK
I ' SECTION 02230 SITE CLEARING
SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK
E SECTION 02316 TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
SECTION 02336 WATERING
SECTION 02370 EROSION SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
I SECTION 02510 WATER DISTRIBUTION
SECTION 02531 SANITARY AND STORM PIPE
SECTION 02533 SANITARY AND STORM MISC. STRUCTURES
l SECTION 02620 SUBDRAINAGE
SECTION 02720 UNBOUND BASES, COURSES AND BALLASTS
SECTION 02740 FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT
i- SECTION 02741 BITUMINOUS TACK COAT
SECTION 02765 PAVEMENT MARKING
SECTION 02771 EXTRUDED CONCRETE CURBS
I SECTION 02772 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE CURBS
SECTION 02775 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS
I SECTION 02810 IRRIGATION SYSTEM
SECTION 02821 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
SECTION 02848 PARKING BUMPERS
I SECTION 02871 BICYCLE RACKS
SECTION 02900 LANDSCAPING
I DIVISION 3: CONCRETE
SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
DIVISION 4: MASONRY- NOT USED
i DIVISION 5: METALS
I SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL
SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS
1 DIVISION 6: WOOD AND PLASTICS
SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY
1 SECTION 06174 WOOD I JOISTS
SECTION 06180 GLUED - LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION
I SECTION 06401 EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
SECTION 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
I
I
I TO BUILDING ADDITION TABLE LE OF CONTENTS: 00010
I SEP 00 PAGE 3
DIVISION 7: THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
11 SECTION 07140 FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING
SECTION 07170 BENTONITE WATERPROOFING
j SECTION 07181
SECTION 07190 PEDESTRIAN TRAFFIC COATINGS
WATER- REPELLENT
SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION
1 SECTION 07468 WOOD SIDING
SECTION 07521 CAP -SHEET BITUMINOUS ROOFING
SECTION 07610 SHEET METAL ROOFING
lir SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING & TRIM
SECTION 07840 FIRESTOPPING
SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALERS
III DIVISION 8: DOORS AND WINDOWS
I SECTION 08100 METAL DOOR AND FRAMES
SECTION 08212 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
I SECTION 08313 ACCESS DOORS
SECTION 08400 ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS
SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE
I SECTION 08800 GLAZING
SECTION 08950 TRANSLUCENT SANDWHICH PANEL SYSTEM
DIVISION 9: FINISHES
SECTION 09000 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE
I/ SECTION 09001 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE NOTES
SECTION 09002 MATERIALS AND FINISHES SCHEDULE
SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD
I SECTION 09300 TILE
SECTION 09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
1 SECTION 09637 STONE FLOORING
SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING
SECTION 09680 CARPET
SECTION 09720 WALL COVERING
SECTION 09820 ACOUSTICAL INSULATION
SECTION 09900 PAINTING
1
I
I
I
TABLE OF CONTENTS: 00010 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
I PAGE 4 SEP 00
DIVISION 10: SPECIALTIES
I SECTION 10100 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS
SECTION 10160 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS
1 SECTION 10200 LOUVERS & VENTS
SECTION 10401 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
SECTION 10520 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
I SECTION 10650 OPERABLE PARTITIONS
SECTION 10810 TOILET ACCESSORIES
i DIVISION 11: EQUIPMENT - NOT USED
DIVISION 12: FURNISHINGS
SECTION 12491 LOUVER BLINDS
1 DIVISION 13: SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION- NOT USED
I DIVISION 14: CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
SECTION 14242 HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATORS
I DIVISION 15: MECHANICAL - DESIGN BUILD
I SECTION 15000
SECTION 15950 MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
CONTROLS
I DIVISION 16: ELECTRICAL - DESIGN BUILD
SECTION 16000 DESIGN CRITERIA AND REQUIREMENTS
I SECTION 16010 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 16100 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
SECTION 16120 WIRES AND CONDUCTORS
SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES
SECTION 16150 MOTOR AND MOTOR CONTROLLERS
I SECTION 16180
SECTION 16500 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS
LIGHTING
SECTION 16720 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM
1
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
I
I
I
TOC BUILDING ADDITION GEOTECHNICAL DATA: 00320
I SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
g A. Identification of Geotechnical investigation of site, and use of Data resulting
from that investigation.
1.2 GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION REPORT
A. Investigation report has been prepared for site of this Work.
1. Site: 6825 SW Sandburg Street, Tigard, Oregon 97223
2. Prepared by: George Saunders, P.E.
3. Titled: Report of Geotechnical Engineering Services TOC Office
Building Addition, Tigard, Oregon.
4. Dated: April 18, 2000
5. Report may be inspected at office of Architect and copies may be
obtained at cost of reproduction and handling upon request addressed
to Architect accompanied by full payment.
B. Use of Data:
1. Report was obtained for Architect's use in design and is not a part of
Contract Documents.
2. Report is available for Bidder's /Contractor's information, but is not a
warranty of subsurface conditions.
3. Bidders should visit site and acquaint themselves with existing
conditions.
4. Prior to Bidding, Bidders may make their own subsurface
investigations to satisfy themselves as to site and subsurface
conditions, but such investigations may be performed only under time
schedules and arrangements approved in advance by Architect or
Owner.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Adjust work performed that does not meet technical or design requirements,
but make no deviation from Contract Documents without written approval
from Architect.
I
END OF SECTION
I
TOC BUILDING ADDITION AGREEMENT FORM: 00500
SEP 00 PAGE 1
1.1 GENERAL
A. An Agreement Form shall be executed in following form:
1. AIA Document A101, Standard Form of Agreement between Owner and
Contractor, latest edition is part of this Specification as though bound
herein.
2. Copy on file at Architect's office and may be examined during normal
working hours.
END OF DOCUMENT
$
I
11
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TOC BUILDING ADDITION CONSTRUCTION BOND FORM: 00601
SEP 00 PAGE 1
1.1 GENERAL
A. Performance and Payment Bond Form shall be executed in following form:
1. AIA Document A312. Performance and Bond and Payment Bond 1987
edition is part of this Specification as though bound herein.
2. Copy on file at Architect's office and may be examined during normal
working hours.
END OF DOCUMENT
I
4$
I
1
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
TOC BUILDING ADDITION CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE: 00650
SEP 00 PAGE 1
1.1 GENERAL
A. A Certificate of Insurance shall be executed in following form:
1. AIA Document G715, Certificate of Insurance, latest edition, is part of
this Specification as though bound herein. A copy is on file at
Architect's office and may be examined during normal working hours.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
TOC BUILDING ADDITION GENERAL CONDITIONS: 00700
SEP 00 PAGE 1
1
1.1 GENERAL
A. AIA Document A201, The General Conditions of Contract for Construction -
1987 Edition, is a part of this Specification as though bound herein.
B. A copy is on file at Architect's office and may be examined during normal
working hours.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TOC BUILDING ADDITION SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS (1987) : 00800
SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART 1 GENERAL
1 1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS
A. Following amendments contain change and additions to General Conditions,
AIA Document A201 -1987 Edition. Where any Articles of General Conditions
are modified or any Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause thereof is modified
or deleted by these supplements, unaltered provisions of that Article,
Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause shall remain in effect.
1.2 SPECIFICATION NUMBERING SYSTEM
A. Add the following to Subparagraph 1.1.6:
follow CSI Master Format numbering system; Specifications o g therefore y ,
numbering may not be consecutive, due to omission of non - applicable
Divisions and Sections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Add the following Paragraph:
1.1.8 DEFINITIONS:
Approved A product, component or process whose use in or on a
particular project is specified as a standard for comparison
purposes only. Product, component or process shall be
same or better than that named in function, performance,
reliability, quality, and general configuration. Determination
of equality in references to project design will be made by
Project Architect. Refer to procedures specified Division 1.
Architectural Building must be accessible to and usable by disabled
Barriers persons. Structural compliance with requirements of
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), in accordance with
standards of ADA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and
Facilities (ADAAG), and with State Building Code, is
required.
As required In accordance with applicable codes, industry standards, or
manufacturers recommendations.
I
1
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS (1987): 00800 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
Drawings Plans, profiles, cross sections, elevations, details, and other
working, supplementary and detail drawings, or
reproductions thereof, signed by Architect and /or respective
Engineer, which shows location, character, dimensions and
details of Work to be performed.
Construction Authorized representative of Owner whose instructions
Manager and decisions shall be limited to particular duties and
responsibilities entrusted to him or her in making decisions
regarding any and all portions of Work or materials therein 4
Design A registered professional Architect or Engineer who is
Professional responsible for overall aesthetic and technical design of
Project.
FOIC FOIC (Furnished by Owner /Installed by Contractor) means
Product in question will be furnished by Owner and installed
by Contractor. Contractor shall verify all requirements
affecting his or her work.
FOIO FOIO (Furnished by Owner /Installed by Owner) means
Product in question will be furnished by Owner and installed
Owner. Contractor shall verify all requirements affecting his
or her work.
Improvement General term encompassing all phases of Work to be
performed and is synonymous to term Project.
NIC NIC (Not in Contract) means Work in question will be
furnished by Owner.
Or approved Same as "Approved Equal ". Refer to procedures specified
Section 01630.
Project General term encompassing all phases of Work to be
performed under Contract and is synonymous to term
improvement.
I
i
I
V
TOC BUILDING ADDITION SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS (1987) : 00800
SEP 00 PAGE 3
Referenced Generally recognized documents issued by
Standards organizations involved in construction which specify
requirements for materials and /or techniques of installation
for products or materials. Refer to Section 01600.
I
Shop Supplementary plans or data which Division may
Drawings require Contractor /Subcontractor to submit for review.
1.4 CONFLICTS
A. Add the following Clause:
1.2.3.1 Should any discrepancy arise between elements of Contract
Documents, precedence shall be given in following order: 1. Agreement, 2.
Addenda in reverse order of issuance, 3. Supplementary Conditions, 4.
General Conditions, 5. Schedules, 6. Specifications and details on
Drawings. 7. General Drawings. On Drawings, written dimensions take
preference over scaled dimensions.
1.5 CORRELATION OF DOCUMENTS
A. Add the following Subparagraph:
1.2.6 Sections of Division 1 - General Requirements govern the execution of
the work of all sections of the specifications.
1.6 SPECIFICATION WORDING
A. Delete Subparagraph 1.5.1 and replace with the following:
1.5.1.S ecifications are of abbreviated or streamlined type and frequently
P tYp q Y
include incomplete sentences. Words such as "shall ", "shall be ", :`Contractor
shall ", and similar mandatory phrases shall be supplied by inference in same
manner as they are in a note on Drawings. Contractor shall provide Items
listed and perform all operations required, in accordance with Article 1.1.2 of
"General Conditions ", if and as modified in these Specifications.
In interest of brevity Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words
such as "all ", "each ", and "every" and articles such as "the ", "a ", and "an ", but
the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and
appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either
statement.
I
I
I
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS (1987): 00800 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 4 SEP 00
1.7 INFORMATION REQUIRED OF OWNER
A. Delete Subparagraph 2.2.5 and replace with the following:
2.2.5 Contractor will be furnished, free of charge, eight (8) copies of
Drawings and four (4) copies of Specifications. Contractor may secure
additional copies of prints of Drawings and Specifications from Architect at
Architect's usual charge for reproduction and handling. 1
1.8 ALTERING RESPONSIBILITIES OF OWNER
It
A. Add the following Paragraph:
9
2.5 ALTERING RESPONSIBILITIES OF OWNER
2.5.1 No provision in any referenced Standard, Specification, or Code
(whether or not specifically incorporated by reference in Contract Documents)
shall be effective to change privileges, duties, or responsibilities of Owner, or
any of Owner's consultants, agents, or employees form those set forth in
Contract Documents, nor shall it be effective to assign to Architect or any of
Architect's consultants, agents, or employees any duty or authority to
supervise or direct furnishing or performance of Work or any duty or authority
to undertake responsibility contrary to provision of Contract Documents.
1.9 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PAY CLAIMS AGAINST CONTRACTOR 1
A. Add the following Paragraph 2.6:
2.6 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PAY CLAIMS AGAINST CONTRACTOR
C OR
2.6.1 If Contractor fails, neglects, or refuses to make prompt payment of any
valid claim for labor or services furnished to Contractor or any Subcontractor
as such claim becomes due for Work performed on this Project, Owner may
pay such claim to person furnishing such labor or services, and charge
amount of payment against funds due, or to become due, Contractor by
reason of this Contract.
1.10 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES •
A. Add the following Clause: I
3.7.1.1 Architectural and Mechanical Plan Check fees to be paid by Owner.
Costs of special inspections and tests, if results of these inspections and
tests meet requirements of contract Documents, are to be paid by Owner.
I
TOC BUILDING ADDITION SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS (1987) : 00800
SEP 00 PAGE 5
1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL & NATURAL RESOURCES
A. Add the following Clause:
3.7.2.1 Contractor and subcontractors shall comply with federal, state, and
local ordinances and regulations dealing with prevention of environmental
pollution and preservation of natural resources that affect Work of this
Project.
1.12 ALTERING RESPONSIBILITIES OF CONTRACTOR
A. Add the following Paragraph:
3.19 ALTERING RESPONSIBILITIES OF CONTRACTOR
3.19.1 No provision in any referenced Standard, Specification, or Code
(whether or not specifically incorporated by reference in Contract Documents)
shall be effective to change privileges, duties, or responsibilities of
Contractor, or any of Contractor's consultants, agents, or employees from
those set forth in Contract Documents, nor shall it be effective to assign to
Architect or any of Architect's consultants, agents, or employees any duty or
authority to supervise or direct furnishing or performance of Work or any duty
or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to provision of Contract
Documents.
1.13 OFF -SITE INSPECTIONS
A. Add the following Clause:
4.2.2.1 Upon Contractor's request, Architect will inspect Construction
Components prior to job -site delivery. In such case, Contractor shall
reimburse reasonable per diem, travel, and lodging expenses incurred by
Architect, or other duly authorized agent of Owner, while making inspection.
1.14 ALTERING RESPONSIBILITIES OF ARCHITECT
A. Add the following Paragraph:
4.6 ALTERING RESPONSIBILITIES OF ARCHITECT
4.6.1 No provision in any referenced Standard, Specification, or Code
(whether or not specifically incorporated by reference in Contract Documents)
shall be effective to change privileges, duties, or responsibilities of Architect,
I
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS (1987): 00800 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 6 SEP 00 I
or any of Architect's consultants, agents, or employees from those set forth in
Contract Documents, nor shall it be effective to assign to Architect or any of
Architect's consultants, agents, or employees any duty or authority to
supervise or direct furnishing or performance of Work or any duty or authority
to undertake responsibility contrary to provision of Contract Documents. 1
1.15 DEFINITION OF "DAY"
A. Delete subparagraph 8.1.4 and replace as follows:
8.1.4 The term "day" shall mean a calendar day of 24 hours beginning at
12:00 midnight, unless elsewhere specifically stipulated otherwise. The term
"working day" shall mean any calendar day except Saturdays, Sundays, and
Legal Holidays at place of building.
1.16 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Add the following Clause:
8.1.3.1 No building or facility will be considered Substantially Complete
unless all utilities are connected and operating as required for normal use,
and building or facility is accessible by normal vehicular and pedestrian traffic
routes. 11
1.17 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
A. Add the following Subparagraph:
9.3.1.3. Until final completion, Owner will pay ninety p y ety five percent of amount
due Contractor on account of progress payment.
B. Add the following Subparagraph:
9.3.1.4. Form of application for payment shall be AIA Document G702, I
"Application and Certificate for Payment ", supported by continuation sheet or
sheets approved by Architect. I
C. Add the following Clause:
9.8.3.1 Payment shall be sufficient to increase total payments to ninety five
percent of Contract sum, less such amounts as Architect shall determine for
all incomplete Work and unsettled claims.
I
I
I
TOC BUILDING ADDITION SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS (1987) : 00800
SEP 00 PAGE 7
1.18 LIENS
A. Add the following Clause:
9.10.1.1. Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner harmless against any
liens and claims arising out of this Contract and filed or prosecuted against
Owner on account of any furnished labor or materials, provided Owner shall
have paid all amounts due to Contractor for said labor or materials.
1.19 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
A. Add the following Subparagraph:
10.1.5. If reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable
bodily injury or death to persons resulting from material or substance
encountered on site by Contractor, Contractor shall, upon recognizing
condition, immediately stop Work in affected area and report condition to
Owner and Architect in writing. Owner, Contractor, and Architect shall then
proceed in same manner described in Subparagraph 10.1.2.
B. Add the following Subparagraph:
10.1.6. Owner shall be responsible for obtaining services of a licensed
1 laboratory to verify presence or absence of Material or Substance reported by
Contractor and, in event such Material or Substance is found to be present,
to verify that it has been rendered harmless. Unless otherwise required by
Contract Documents, Owner shall furnish in writing to Contractor and
Architect names and qualifications of persons or entities who are to perform
tests verifying presence or absence of such Material or Substance.
Contractor and Architect shall promptly reply to Owner in writing stating
whether or not either has reasonable objection to persons or entities
proposed by Owner. If either Contractor or Architect has an objection to a
person or entity proposed by Owner, Owner will propose another to whom
Contractor and Architect have no reasonable objection.
1.20 INSURANCE
•
h following Clause:
Add the o g se :
11.1.2.1. Insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not
less than following limits, or greater if required by law.
I
1
I
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS (1987): 00800 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 8 SEP 00
a. Worker's compensation: As required by law
b. Employer's liability: $1,000,000
c. General liability as follows:
1) Form: General liability, including premises- operations;
independent contractor's protective; broad -form property
damage; and products and completed operations.
2) Bodily injury and property damage combined single
limits:
a) $1,000,000 each occurrence
b) $2,000,000 aggregate
3) Contractual liability with hold harmless coverage.
4) Project Owner to be additional insured.
d. Products and completed operations insurance: Furnish and
maintain for 2 year period after final payment and Contractor
shall continue to provide evidence of such coverage to Owner
on an annual basis during aforementioned period.
e. Property damage liability insurance shall include coverage
against explosion, collapse and underground damage.
f. Personal injury:
1) $1,000,000 aggregate
g. Umbrella excess liability as follows:
1) $1,000,000 over primary insurance.
h. Automobile liability, including owned, non - owned, and hire
vehicle as follows:
1) Bodily injury and property damage combined single
limits:
a) $1,000,000 each person
b) $2,000,000 each accident
2) Note: If State Law mandates no -fault automobile
insurance, Contractor shall conform to any specific
requirements in law.
i. Watercraft liability owned and non - owned, if watercraft are
utilized, as follows:
1) Bodily injury & property damage combined single limits:
a) $1,000,000 each person
b) $2,000,000 each occurrence
j. Aircraft liability owned and non - owned, if aircraft are utilized, as
follows:
1) Bodily injury & property damage combined single limits:
a) $1,000,000 each person
b) $2,000,000 each occurrence
1
I
T ADDITION SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 1
TOC BUILDING AD O S ( 987 0800 ) 0
SEP 00 PAGE 9
1.21 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE
A. Add the following Clause:
11.2.1.1 Required form of insurance certificate shall be ACORD 25 -S.
Cancellation notices and any endorsements subsequently issued amending
coverage or limits shall be delivered to owner by mail. Should insurance be
canceled or reduced prior to Contract close out and should any insurance
bearing on adequacy of performance be reduced prior to end of warranty
periods, and if Contractor fails immediately to procure other insurance as
1 specified, Owner reserves right to procure such insurance and to change cost
thereof to Contractors. If any of foregoing insurance coverages are required
to remain in force after final payment, an additional Certificate of Insurance
11 which evidences continuation of such coverage shall be submitted with final
application for payment.
1.22 CORRECTION OF WORK
A. Add the following Clause:
12.2.2.1 Date relating to Work found to be defective or not in accordance with
Contract Documents shall begin on date appearing on Certificate of
Substantial Completion, or if a Certificate of Substantial Completion is not
issued, on date appearing on final Certificate of Payment to Contractor,
whichever is earlier. Owner's occupancy or use of Work shall not alter date.
Contractor shall extend one -year time period stipulated in Contract
Conditions during which corrections must be made as required by various
individual Sections of Specification.
a. Weathertight and watertight warranties include replacement, at
no additional cost to Owner, of any damaged building materials
or building contents.
b. Without voiding specified Warranties nor relieving Contractor of
Contractor's responsibilities during Warranty Periods, Owner
reserves right to make temporary and emergency repairs as
necessary to maintain structure and its contents.
I
I
I
1
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS (1987): 00800 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 10 SEP 00
1.23 CONTRACT TERMINATION FOR OWNER'S CONVENIENCE
A. Add the following Paragraph: 1
14.4 CONTRACT TERMINATION FOR OWNER'S CONVENIENCE I
14.4.1 Owner may, at any time, terminate Contract for Owners' convenience
and without cause. Upon receipt of written notice from Owner of such I
termination for Owner's convenience, Contractor shall:
a. Cease operations as directed by Owner in notice.
b. Take actions necessary, or that Owner may direct, for protection
and preservation of Work.
c. Except for Work directed to be performed prior to effective date
of termination state in notice, terminate all existing Subcontracts 1
and purchase orders and enter into no further Subcontract and
purchase orders. In case of such termination for Owner's
conveniences, Contractor shall be entitled to receive payment
from Owner on same basis provided in Subparagraph 14.1.2.
I
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
TOC BUILDING ADDITION SUMMARY OF WORK: 01110
SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Project Title: TOC Management Services Building Addition.
B. Project Location: 6825 SW Sandburg Street, Tigard, Oregon 97223.
C. Owner: TOC Management Services.
D. Project consists of a two story 15,000 s.f. addition wood frame Type V -N
Construction office building:
1 1. Building Components: Cedar lap siding, standing seam architectural
metal roof, cap sheet bituminous roof, insulated glass windows in
aluminum frames, glue laminated beams, wood I joists, wood
studs /gypsum board interior partitions, suspended acoustical ceilings.
2. Finishes: Carpeting, stone flooring, sheet vinyl, ceraminc tile, wall
coverings.
3. Mechanical and Electrical: Design Build.
4. Site Work: Site development with grading, concrete walks, curbs,
asphaltic concrete paving, landscaping and irrigation systems.
E. Contract Documents, dated August 22, 2000 were prepared for Project by
Ankrom Moisan Associated Architects, 6720 S.W. Macadam, Suite 100,
Portland, Oregon 97219.
F. Work will be constructed under a single prime contract.
1.2 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS
A. Separate Contracts: Owner has awarded separate contracts for performance
of certain construction operations at site. Those operations will be conducted
simultaneously with work of this Contract.
B. Products furnished by Owner for installation by Contractor is identified as
FOIC (Furnished by Owner, Installed by Contractor), and includes following:
1. Equipment, identified as FOIC.
C. Products furnished by Owner and installed by Owner is identified as FOIO
(Furnished by Owner, Installed by Owner).
1
SUMMARY OF WORK: 01110 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
1. Equipment, identified as F
010.
2. Furniture.
3. Telecommunication system.
4. Security system.
D. Cooperate fully with separate contractors so that work under other contracts
may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work of this
Contract.
1.3 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR
A. Products furnished by Owner for installation by Contractor is identified as
FOIC (Furnished by Owner, Installed by Contractor).
1. Work includes rovidin support systems to receive Owner's
9 PP Y eceive Owner s
equipment, and mechanical and electrical connections.
2. Owner will arrange for and deliver necessary shop drawings, product
data, and samples to Contractor.
3. Owner will arrange and pay for delivery of Owner furnished items
according to Contractor's Construction Schedule.
4. If Owner furnished items are damaged, defective, or missing upon
delivery, Owner will arrange for replacement.
5. Contractor shall designate delivery dates of Owner furnished items in
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
6. Contractor will review shop drawings, product data, and samples, and
return them to Architect noting discrepancies or problems anticipated
in use of product.
7. Contractor is responsible for receiving, unloading, and handling Owner
furnished items at site.
8. Contractor is responsible for protecting Owner furnished items from
damage, including damage from exposure to elements. Contractor
shall repair or replace items damaged as result of his operations.
1.4 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES I
A. General:
1. During construction period Contractor to have full use of premises for
construction operations, including use of site. I
2. Contractor's use of premises is limited only for Owner's right to
perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.
I
TOC BUILDING ADDITION SUMMARY O F WO RK: 01110
SEP 00 PAGE 3
work to areas within contract limits
B. Use of Site: Confine operations of o
indicated. Do not disturb portions of site beyond areas in which Work is
indicated.
RI. Allow for Owner occupancy and use by public.
2. Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available to
Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times.
C. Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weathertight condition
throughout construction period.
1. Repair damage caused by construction operations.
2. Take all precautions necessary to protect building and its occupants
I during construction period.
I
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
TOC BUILDING ADDITION CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES: 01250
SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing the
following Contract modifications:
1. Requests for Information. (RFI)
2. Architect's Supplemental Instructions. (ASI)
3. Proposal Request. (PR)
4. Construction Change Authorization. (CCA)
5. Change Order. (CO)
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 00700: General Conditions
Section 01290: Payment Sec ment Procedures y
C. Section 01330: Submittal Procedures
D. Section 01630: Product Substitution Procedures
E. Section 01770: Closeout Procedures
1.3 RESPONSIBLE PARTIES
A. Immediately following Contract execution, Owner and Contractor to identify
each person who is responsible for executing Change Orders and other
modifications to the Contract.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Request for Information (RFI):
1. Written request submitted by Contractor to Architect on standard form
requesting clarification, interpretation, or additional information
pertaining to Contract documents.
I
I
I
1
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES: 01250 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
B. Architect's Supplemental Instructions (ASI):
1. Architect's written order of instruction to Contractor, signed by
Architect, which authorizes minor changes in Work that do not change
Contract Sum or Contract Time.
C. Proposal Request (PR): I
1. Initiated by Architect: Written request by Architect to Contractor to
quote change to Contract Sum and /or Contract Time for proposed 1
change to Contract Documents.
2. Initiated by Contractor: Written request by Contractor to Architect
proposing change to Contract Documents accompanied with quotation
for change to Contract Sum and /or Contract Time.
D. Construction Change Authorization (CCA): 1
1. Written order prepared by Architect, signed by Owner and Architect,
directing Contractor to proceed with change to Contract Documents
which affect Contract Sum and /or Contract Time, for subsequent
inclusion in a Change Order after change to Contract Sum and /or
Contract Time has been determined.
E. Change Order (CO): 1
1. Prepared by Architect and signed by Owner, Contractor, and Architect
stating their agreement to a change to Contract Documents and I
adjustment to Contract Sum and /or Contract Time.
1.5 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (RFI):
A. Submit RFIs numbered in sequential order, reviewed by Contractor with
respect to Construction Documents, with the following information:
1. Project name and address.
2. Architect's name.
3. Contractor's name.
4. Date of RFI.
5. Drawing and /or Specification reference.
6. Signature of Contractor reviewer.
7. Indicate "URGENT" on RFIs which may cause impact to the project I
schedule.
I
I
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES: 01250
1 SEP 00 PAGE 3
B. Architect will receive RFIs only from the Contractor; Architect will not accept
RFIs directly from subcontractors, suppliers, or other entities.
C. Architect will receive only legible, properly prepared RFIs.
1. Unreadable facsimile machine RFIs, illegibly written RFIs, or RFIs with
I incomplete information, will be returned promptly without action.
2. RFIs may be transmitted to Architect by facsimile machine.
a. Architect will return response by same method received from
Contractor.
3. Architect will review RFIs with respect to Contract Documents and
return response within 7 calendar days.
a. RFIs marked "URGENT" will take precedence over outstanding
RFIs and be answered by Architect as soon as possible.
D. Contractor, in being fully familiar with Construction Documents, shall not be
relieved of responsibility to coordinate the Work to prevent adverse impact to
Project schedule when submitting RFIs to Architect for clarification or
interpretation of Contract Documents, or additional information.
1.6 ARCHITECT'S SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS (ASI)
A. Architect's Supplemental Instructions may include supplementary or revised
Drawings and /or Specifications to describe minor changes to Contract
Documents.
B. Architect's Supplemental Instructions will be executed on AIA Form G710, or
other similar form designated by Architect.
1.7 PROPOSAL REQUEST (PR)
A. Proposal Request Initiated by Architect:
1. Proposal Request is a request for information only, and is not an
instruction or authorization to execute the change, or an order to stop
Work in progress.
2. Proposal Request may include supplementary or revised Drawings
1 and /or Specifications to describe a proposed change to Contract
Documents.
I
I
I
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES: 01250 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 4 SEP 00
3. Contractor shall submit cost and /or time uotations to Architect q c tect within
10 working days following receipt of Proposal Request.
B. Proposal Request Initiated by Contractor:
1. Proposal Request is for a change in the Work accompanied by a 1
detailed quotation of impact on Contract Sum and /or Contract Time.
2. Proposal Request may include revised Drawings and /or Specifications
to describe a proposed change to Contract Documents.
3. Proposal Request is a request for information only, and does not
authorize the Contractor to execute the change or stop Work in I
progress without the Architect's and Owner's authorization.
4. Contractor initiated Proposal Requests may take the form of a "Claim"
where Contractor finds it necessary for proper execution of the Work,
111
to propose a change in the Work that is not shown or indicated in
Contract Documents, and may affect Contract Sum and /or Contract
Time, which for which no Proposal Request or Construction Change
Authorization has been issued by the Architect.
a. Contractor's determination that Architect's response to an RFI
which affects Contract Sum and /or Contract Time may be
addressed by Contractor in a Proposal Request.
5. Architect shall respond to Contractor initiated proposals within 10
working days following receipt of Proposal Request.
1.8 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE AUTHORIZATION (CCA) I
A. A Construction Change Authorization is issued in lieu of a Proposal Request
when time is of the essence and change to Contract Sum and /or Contract I
Time cannot be determined prior to start of the work.
B. A Construction Change Authorization is executed on AIA Form G713 or other I
similar form designated by Architect, and may include supplementary or
revised Drawings and /or Specifications to describe change to the Contract
Documents.
C. Both Owner and Architect will sign and date a Construction Change
Authorization which directs the Contractor to proceed with change to the
Contract Documents prior to determination of cost and /or time.
D. Contractor shall submit to Architect itemized change to Contract Sum and /or
Contract Time within 10 working days when possible, and no more than 30
calender days, except for the following conditions:
I
I
TOC BUILDING ADDITION CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES: 01250
1 SEP 00 PAGE 5
1. Unit prices have been agreed upon and quantities cannot be
determined until work described in the CCA has been completed.
2. Owner has agreed that Contract Sum and /or Contract Time of can be
determined at completion of work described in the CCA.
E. When Owner, Architect, and Contractor concur on change to Contract Sum
and /or Contract Time, as described in the General Conditions for
"Construction Change Directives," the change to Contract Sum and /or
Contract Time will be included in a Change Order.
1.9 CHANGE ORDERS
A. Architect will prepare each Change Order utilizing AIA Document G701, or
other similar form acceptable to Owner.
B. Changes to Project Contract Sum and/or Contract Time listed or indicated in
Change Orders shall include or be determined by methods described in the
General Conditions, and as follows:
' 1. Proposal Requests approved for change to Contract Documents by
Owner and Architect that have not been converted to a Construction
Change Authorization.
2. Construction Change Authorizations where Owner, Architect, and
Contractor have agreed to change in Project Contract Sum and /or
Contract Time.
3. Changes to Project Contract Sum and /or Contract Time that have not
been documented by Proposal Request or Construction Change
I Authorization, but have been agreed upon by Owner, Architect, and
Contractor.
1.10 DOCUMENTATION FOR CONTRACT MODIFICATIONS
A. Cost and Time Quotations: Support quotation for changes in the Work with
sufficient substantiating data to allow Architect to evaluate quotation, to
include the following:
1. Labor expended in hours and unit cost.
2. Equipment cost.
3. Products, with quantities used and unit cost, including purchase
source.
4. Taxes, Insurance, and Bonds.
5. Credit for deleted work where applicable with same documentation as
required for cost increases for additional work.
I
1
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES: 01250 TOC BUILDING
ADDITION
PAGE 6 SEP 00
6. Overhead and profit, determined after credits have been deducted
from additions.
7. Justification for change in Contract Time.
B. For claims for Work not authorized through Proposal Requests or
Construction Change Authorizations, provide supporting documentation for
each claim for additional cost as indicated above for cost and time quotations
with the following additional information: 1
1. Name of Owner's authorized agent who ordered work, and date of
Order. I
2. Dates and hours work performed, and by whom.
3. Timecard records, including summary of hours worked, and hourly
rates paid.
4. Receipts and invoices for products used including quantities and unit
costs.
5. Receipts and invoices for equipment utilized, including dates and time
of use.
6. Provide the same documentation indicated above for subcontracts
same as required for Contractor's own forces.
C. Document requests for Product substitutions according to requirements of
Section 01630.
1.11 CORRELATING CHANGE ORDERS WITH OTHER REQUIREMENTS I
A. Revise Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment to record each
Change Order as separate item of work with adjustment to Contract Sum and I
Contract Time as described in Section 01290: Payment Procedures.
B. Revise Construction Schedule to reflect each change in Contract Time. I
C. Revise Subschedules to show changes for other items of work affected by
modifications to Contract Documents.
D. Record modifications in Record Documents.
END OF SECTION 1
I
I
I
I
TOC BUILDING ADDITION PAYMENT PROCEDURES: 01290
I SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART 1 GENERAL
I 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
I A. Administrative and procedural requirements governing Contractor's
Applications for Payment.
I 1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of Schedule of Values with preparation
I of Contractor's Construction Schedule.
1. Correlate line items in Schedule of Values with other required
I administrative schedules and forms, including:
a. Contractor's Construction Schedule.
I b. Application for Payment forms, including Continuation Sheets.
c. List of Subcontractors, principle suppliers, and fabricators.
d. Schedule of allowances.
I e. Schedule of alternates.
f. List of products.
2. Submit Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but
I no later than 7 days before date scheduled for submittal of initial
Applications for Payment.
1 B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to
establish format for Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for
each Specification Section.
I 1. Identification: Include following Project identification on Schedule of
Values:
I a. Project name and address.
b. Name of Architect.
I c. Project number.
d. Contractor's name and address.
e. Date of submittal.
I 2. Arrange Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to
indicate following for each item listed:
a. Related Specification Section or Division.
1 b. Description of Work.
c. Name of subcontractor.
d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator.
II e. Name of supplier.
a
I
PAYMENT PROCEDURES: 01290 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00 I
f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.
g. Dollar value; Percentage of Contract Sum to nearest one -
hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.
3. Provide a breakdown of Contract Sum in sufficient detail to facilitate
continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress
reports.
4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total to equal Contract Sum.
5. Provide a separate line item for each part of Work where Applications 1
for Payment may include materials or equipment, purchased or
fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.
6. Update and resubmit Schedule of Values prior to next Applications for
Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives
result in a change in Contract Sum.
1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications 1
and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.
1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of I
Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve
additional requirements. I
B. Payment Application Times: Each progress payment date is indicated in
Agreement. Period of construction Work covered by each Application for
Payment is period indicated in Agreement.
C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and Continuation I
Sheets G703.
D. Application Preparation: Compete every item of form. Include notarization I
and execution by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of
Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action.
1. Match entries with data on Schedules of Values.
2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change
Directives issued prior to last day of construction period covered by
application.
E. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each
Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24
hours. Submit one copy complete, including waivers of lien and similar
attachments, when required.
I
I
I
TOC BUILDING ADDITION PAYMENT PROCEDURES: 01290
SEP 00 PAGE 3
F. Waivers of Mechanic Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit
waivers of mechanics lien from subcontractors, sub - subcontractors and
suppliers for construction period covered by previous application.
1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested, prior to
deduction for retainage.
2 When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full
waivers.
3. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien of forms, and executed in a
manner, acceptable to Owner.
' G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that
must precede or coincide with this application include following:
1. List of subcontractors.
2. List of principal suppliers and fabricators.
3. Schedule of Values.
4. Contractor's Construction Schedule.
5. List of Contractor's staff assignments.
6. List of Contractor's principal consultants.
7. Copies of building permits.
8. Initial progress report.
9. Report of preconstruction meeting.
10. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
11. Performance and payment bonds.
12. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance.
H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: Following issuance of
Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment.
1. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial
Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated
portions of Work.
2. Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide
with this application include following:
a. Occupancy permits and similar approvals.
b. Warranties (guarantees) and maintenance agreements.
c. Test/adjust/balance records.
d. Maintenance instructions.
e. Final cleaning.
f. Application for reduction of retainage and consent of surety.
1 g. Advice on shifting insurance coverage.
I
I
PAYMENT PROCEDURES: 1
OCEDU S 0 290 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 4 SEP 00 I
h. List of incomplete Work recognized as exceptions to Architect's
Certificate of Substantial Completion.
Final Payment Application: Administrative actions and submittals that must
precede or coincide with this application include following: I
1. Completion of Project closeout requirements.
2. Completion of items specified for completion after Substantial I
Completion.
3. Ensure that unsettled claims will be settled.
4. Ensure that incomplete Work is not accepted and will be completed
without undue delay.
5. Transmittal of required Project construction records to Owner.
6. Proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 1
7. Removal of temporary facilities and services.
8. Removal of surplus materials, rubbish, and similar elements.
9. Change of door locks to Owner's access.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) I
PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
I
END OF SECTION
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
TOC BUILDING ADDITION PROJECT COORDINATION: 01310
SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Administrative and supervisory requirements for coordinating construction
operations including, but not necessarily limited to, the following:
1. General project coordination procedures.
2. Project meetings.
3. Construction schedule.
4. Field Engineering.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01600: Product Requirements, for coordinating general installation.
B. Section 01740: Cleaning, for coordinating progress and final cleaning.
' C. Section 01770: Closeout Procedures, for coordinating Contract closeout.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of these
Specifications to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of The
Work.
1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain best
results where installation of one part of Work depends on installation
of other components.
2. Coordinate installation of different components to assure maximum
accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
3. Coordinate storage or staging areas for all trades.
B. When necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved,
outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as
required notices, reports, and attendance at meetings.
C. Administrative Procedures:
1. Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative
procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and
assure orderly progress of Work.
1
1
PROJECT COORDINATION: 01310 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00 I
2. Administrative activities include, but are not limited to:
a. Preparation of Schedules.
b. Installation and removal of temporary facilities.
c. Delivery and processing of submittals.
d. Progress meetings. I
e. Project closeout activities.
D. Conservation: Coordinate construction operations to assure that operations I
are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and
materials.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare coordination drawings where careful
coordination is needed for installation of products and materials fabricated by
separate entities. i
1. Prepare coordination drawings where limited space availability
necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of
111
different components.
2. Comply with submittal requirements of Section 01330.
B. Staff Names: Within 15 days of commencement of construction operations,
submit a list of Contractor's principal staff assignments, including
superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. I
1. Identify individuals, their duties and responsibilities.
2. List personnel addresses and telephone numbers.
3. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, and temporary field office.
1.5 PROJECT MEETINGS
1
A. Preconstruction Conference:
1. Schedule a preconstruction conference prior to starting construction, at
a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but not later than 15 days
after execution of
a. Hold conference at Project site or other convenient location.
b. Conduct meeting to review responsibilities and personnel I
assignments.
I
I
I
1 1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION PROJECT COORDINATION: 01310
I SEP 00 PAGE 3
2. Attendees: Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its
I superintendent; subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers deemed
necessary by Contractor and Architect.
3. Participants shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude
I matters relating to Work.
4. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress,
including following:
I a. Construction schedule.
b. Critical work sequencing.
c. Designation of responsible personnel, and emergency off -hour
I contacts.
d. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
e. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
I f. Distribution of Contract Documents.
g. Submittals and approvals.
I h. Routing of correspondence.
i. Preparation of record documents.
j. Use of premises.
I k. Site access, traffic, and parking rules.
I. Office, work, and storage areas.
m. Safety procedures, and first aid.
I n. Housekeeping.
o. Security.
p. Working hours.
q. Inspection procedures.
r. Insurance.
s. Final inspection procedures.
I B. Preinstallation Conferences:
I 1. Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each
activity that requires coordination with other construction activities.
I 2. Attendees: Contractor, subcontractor(s), manufacturer's representative
if required by manufacturer or these Specifications, and fabricators
involved or affected by construction activity under consideration.
I Include code enforcement personnel if required by local codes.
a. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates.
3. Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for
I particular activity under consideration, including requirements for
following:
a. Contract Documents and related Change Orders.
I b. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and quality control Samples.
I
PROJECT COORDINATION: 01310 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 4 SEP 00
c. Mockups. I
d. Possible conflicts or compatibility problems.
e. Time schedule.
f. Weather limitations.
g. Manufacturer's preparation and installation recommendations. I
h. Warranty requirements.
i. Substrate acceptability.
j. Governing regulations.
I
k. Inspecting and testing requirements.
I. Safety.
m. Protection. I
4. Record significant discussions, agreements, and disagreements of
each conference.
a. Distribute record of meeting to concerned parties, including I
Owner and Architect within 72 hours after meeting.
5. Do not proceed with installation if conference cannot be successfully
concluded.
a. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments
to performance of Work and reconvene conference at earliest
feasible date.
C. Progress Meetings: I
1. Conduct progress meetings at Project site at regular scheduled
intervals.
a. Coordinate meeting dates with preparation of payment request.
2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, Contractor,
and subcontractors, suppliers, or other entities concerned with current I
progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of
immediate future activities.
a. Participants shall be familiar with Project and authorized to
conclude matters relating to The Work.
3. Agenda: Review items of significance that affect construction progress,
including following:
a. Construction Schedule.
b. Coordination of Work.
c. Status of Shop Drawing submittals and approvals.
d. Status of Proposal Requests.
e. Requests for information and clarification issues.
f. Project administration issues.
4. Distribute minutes of meeting to concerned parties within 72 hours
after meeting. I
I
TOC BUILDING ADDITION PROJECT COORDINATION: O ON. 01310
SEP00 PAGE5
5. Update Construction Schedule after p e each progress meeting.
a. Issue updated schedule concurrently with minutes of each
meeting.
' 1.6 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Bar -Chart Schedule: Prepare a fully developed, horizontal bar -chart type
Construction Schedule and submit within 30 days after date established for
commencement of Work.
B. Provide a separate time bar for each significant construction activity.
1. Provide a continuous vertical line to identify first working day of each
I week.
2. Include start-up, finish, duration, slack time, approval dates, material
' ordering, delivery dates, anticipated shutdowns, partial occupancy and
Owner use, Completion Date and other such information required to
allow Owner's monitoring of progress of project and identifying critical
I
3. path of events required to meet Completion Date.
Use same breakdown of units of Work as indicated in Schedule of
Values.
C. Distribution: Following response to initial submittal, print and distribute copies
to Architect, Owner, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply
with scheduled dates.
D. Schedule Updating: Revise schedule after each progress meeting, event, or
activity where revisions have been recognized or made.
1. Bring significant deviations from Schedule immediately to Owner's and
Architect's attention.
1.7 LAYOUT OF WORK
A. Survey and verify conditions of project site.
B. Record existing conditions prior to construction for comparison with Contract
Documents.
1. Report conflicts to Architect prior to start of Work.
2. Architect will provide revisions to Contract Documents or issue
instructions to deal with conflicts.
1
1
PROJECT COORDINATION: 01310 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 6 SEP 00 I
3. Be responsible for remedying conflicts which could have been
prevented by timely reviews of existing conditions.
4. Remedies, which vary from Contract Documents shall be approved by
Architect's and Owner's Representatives.
1.8 FIELD ENGINEERING 1
A. Engineering Services: I
1. Provide field engineering services as required for construction.
2. Locate and maintain an accurate benchmark on or near site which has
been established by a Registered Surveyor.
a. Relate subsequent elevations of finish grades and building
elements directly to this benchmark.
B. Existing Control Points:
1. Protect control points prior to starting Work, and preserve permanent
reference points during construction.
2. Make no changes or relocations of control points without prior written
notice to Architect's Representative.
3. Report to Architect's Representative when any reference point is lost I
or destroyed, or requires relocation because of necessary changes in
grades or locations.
C. Instrument Layout:
1. Using site bench marks and existing elevation control points, establish ,
lines and levels, located and layed out by survey instrumentation.
2. Locate water supply, storm and sanitary sewer lines.
3. Locate edge and level of paving, curbs, walks, and sloping landscape.
4. Locate building foundations, column locations, and floor levels.
5. Locate controlling lines and levels required for plumbing, mechanical
and electrical Work within 5 feet of building perimeter.
D. Corrections: I
1. Record changes in elevations or location of Work on project record
Documents.
2. Report errors in horizontal and vertical dimensions and grades prior to
starting Work.
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION PROJECT COORDINATION: 01310
SEP 00 PAGE 7
E. Verification:
1 1. Verify dimensions of new and existing Work.
a. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawings, modify to
accommodate. If field measurements differ significantly, notify
Architect prior to commencing Work.
2. Coordinate locations of openings through floors, roofs and walls with
Architectural, Mechanical and Electrical Drawings.
F. Documentation:
1. Submit documentation to verify accuracy of field engineering Work
fY Y 9
when requested by Architect.
END OF SECTION
1
I
I
1
1
1
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 01330
' SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART 1 GENERAL
1 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
' A. Administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required for
performance of Work, including Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01250: Contract Modification Procedures, for making changes to
' Contract Documents.
B. Section 01290: Payment Procedures, for submittal of Schedule of Values,
and Applications for Payment.
' C. Section 01310: Project Coordination, for preparation and submittal of
coordination drawings, Contractor's Construction Schedule, and for submittal
and distribution of meeting and conference minutes.
D. Section 01450: Quality Control, for submittal of inspection and test reports.
1 E. Section 01630: Product Substitution Procedures.
F. Section 01770: Closeout Procedures, for submittal of Project Record
Documents and warranties at Project closeout.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Coordination Drawings show relationship and integration of different
9 P 9
construction elements that require careful coordination during fabrication or
installation to fit in space provided or to function as intended.
1. Preparation of Coordination Drawings is specified in Section 01310
and may include components shown in Shop Drawings or Product
Data.
B. Product Data includes printed information, such as manufacturer's installation
instructions, catalog cuts, standard color charts, roughing -in diagrams and
templates, standard wiring diagrams, and performance curves.
C. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components,
cuts or containers of material, color range sets, and swatches showing color,
' texture, and pattern.
I
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 01330 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00 '
D. Field samples are full -sized physical examples erected on -site to illustrate
finishes, coatings, or finish materials.
1. Field samples are used to establish standard by which Work will be
judged.
E. Mockups are full -size assemblies for review of construction, coordination, 1
testing, or operation; they are not Samples. Mockups may by used to
establish standard by which Work will be judged when allowed to remain as
part of the permanent Work. 1
1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with '
performance of construction activities.
a. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance
of related construction activities to avoid delay.
2. Coordinate transmittal of submittals for related elements of Work so
processing will not be delayed by need to review submittals I
concurrently for coordination.
a. Architect reserves right to withhold action on a submittal
requiring coordination with other submittals until all related
submittals are received.
b. Partial submittals may be rejected as not complying with these
provisions of Contract.
3. Contractor shall certify that each item in submittal has been reviewed
and is in accordance with specified requirements for that item, and
that field dimensions, adjacent construction Work related to submittal
items, have been verified.
a. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed by Contractor, certifying
Contractor's review of submittal.
b. Architect will return submittals without action if Contractor has
not coordinated submittal and applyed signature prior to
transmittal to Architect.
4. Coordinate and ensure that no Work is preformed that is involved with
submittal until receiving Architect's stamped and signed approval. ,
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 01330
SEP00 PAGE 3
' B. Processing:
9
1 1. Identify each submittal with following:
a. Identity of Project, Contractor, subcontractor or supplier.
b. Reference to pertinent Contract Drawing sheet and detail
number(s), and Contract Specification Section number.
2. Submit items pertaining to only one Specification Section in each
I
3. submittal.
Number each submittal by Specification Section number and
sequential item number.
a. Retain numbering system throughout revisions with addition of
sequential letters for each revision to initial submittal.
4. Identify deviations from Contract Documents, and Product or system
limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of
completed Work.
5. Transmit each submittal from Contractor to Architect using a
transmittal form.
a. Architect will not accept submittals received from sources other
than Contractor.
C. Submittal log:
1. Maintain an accurate submittal log for duration of Work, showing
current status of submittals at all times.
2. Make log available to Owner and Architect for review upon request.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
' 2.1 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Scale and measurements: Make Shop Drawings accurately to a scale
sufficiently large to show pertinent aspects of item and its method of
1 connection to Work.
1. Show in detail, materials, dimensions, thicknesses, methods of
assembly, attachments, relation to adjoining Work, and other pertinent
data and information.
B. Coordination: Reference Shop Drawing details to Contract Drawing sheet
and detail number(s).
1
1
I
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 01330 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 4 SEP 00 ,
C. Shop Drawing Format and Submittals:
1. 8 '/% x 11 inch and 11 x 17 inch sheet size: Submit 2 copies.
2. Larger than 11 x 17 inches: Submit one reproducible transparency of
each sheet and one opaque blueline or blackline prints. '
3. Except for templates, patterns and similar full -size drawings, do not
submit sheets larger than 36 x 60 inches.
D. Reproducible transparency will be returned, marked with Architect's action
P P Y
taken and corrections or modifications required, to Contractor for
reproduction and distribution.
1. Do not permit use of unmarked Shop Drawings in connection with
construction.
2.2 PRODUCT DATA
A. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction
or system. '
B. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed
Product Data includes information on several products that are not required
or proposed for Work, clearly mark copies to indicate applicable information.
C. Include following information: I
1. Manufacturer's printed recommendations.
2. Compliance with trade association standards.
3. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards.
4. Performance characteristics and capacities.
5. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement.
6. Required clearances, wiring and piping diagrams, and controls.
7. Manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams, modified
as required to suit Project requirements.
8. Notation of coordination requirements.
D. Colors and Patterns:
1. Except where specific color and pattern is indicated in Contract ,
Documents, and whenever a choice of color or pattern is available in
specified products, submit 2 color and pattern charts to Architect for
selection.
TOC BUILDING ADDITION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 01330
SEP 00 PAGE 5
E. Submit following for each required submittal:
1. 2 copies for Architect.
2. Number of copies as required for Maintenance manuals.
' 3. Number of copies as required by Contractor for distribution.
F. Architect will retain 2 copies and return remainder, marked with action taken
' and corrections or modifications required, to Contractor for distribution.
1. Contractor shall retain number of copies required for maintenance
manuals.
2. Do not permit use of unmarked copies of Product Data in connection
with construction.
2.3 SAMPLES
A. Submit Samples for review of size, kind, color, pattern, and texture, and to
illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of Product.
' B. Where variation in color, pattern, or texture, or other characteristic is inherent
in material or product represented, submit at least 3 multiple units that show
' approximate limits of variations, or number of units indicated in individual
specification Sections.
' C. Submit following for each required submittal:
1. 2 samples for Architect.
' 2. Number of samples as required by Contractor for distribution.
a. Prepare and distribute additional sets to subcontractors,
manufacturers, fabricators, suppliers, installers, and others as
required for performance of Work.
' D. Field Samples: Full -size examples erected on -site to illustrate finishes,
coatings, or finish materials and to establish Project standard.
2.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE SUBMITTALS
A. Submit quality control submittals, including:
1. Design data
2. Certifications
3. Manufacturer's instructions
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 01330
TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 6 SEP 00 '
4. Manufacturer's field reports
5. Other quality control submittals required under individual Technical
Specifications of Project Manual.
B. Certifications: Where individual Technical Specifications Sections of Project
Manual require certification that a product, material, or installation complies
with specified requirements, submit a notarized certification from
manufacturer certifying compliance with specified requirements. '
1. Certification shall be signed by an officer of manufacturer or other
individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of company. ,
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A. Except for submittals for record or information, where action and return is '
required, Architect will review each submittal, mark to indicated action taken,
and return to Contractor.
111
1. Allow minimum 10 working days for Architect's review of each
submittal following receipt of submittal. '
B. Action Stamp: Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp, and
mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows: '
1. Final Unrestricted Release: When a submittal is marked "NO
EXCEPTION TAKEN," Work covered by submittal may proceed
provided it complies with requirements of Contract Documents. Final
payment depends on that compliance.
2. Final- But - Restricted Release: When "MAKE
a submittal is marked MAKE
CORRECTIONS NOTED," Work covered by submittal may proceed
provided it complies with notations or corrections on submittal and
requirements of Contract Documents. Final payment depends on that
compliance. ,
3. Returned for Resubmittal: When a submittal is marked "REVISE AND
RESUBMIT," do not proceed with Work covered by submittal, '
including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity.
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 01330
SEP 00 PAGE 7
a. Revise or prepare a new submittal according to notations and
resubmit. Repeat as necessary to obtain a mark releasing
submittal.
b. Do not use, or allow others to use, submittals marked "REVISE
AND RESUBMIT," at Project site or elsewhere where Work is
in progress.
' 4. Other Action: Where a submittal is for information or record purposes
or special processing or other activity, Architect will return submittal
marked "RECORD DOCUMENT."
C. Unsolicited Submittals: Architect will return unsolicited submittals to sender
without action.
END OF SECTION
I
I
1
I
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION DESIGN -BUILD REQUIREMENTS: 01340
SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Procedures for portions of work under this Contract that are Design - Build.
B. Contractor's responsibility is to coordinate and assume or assign to
subcontractors complete responsibility for design, contract documents,
calculations, submittals, permits, fabrication, transportation and installation.
1. Contractor responsible to submit and coordinate Design -Build
documents to City for separate permit at time of building permit
submittal.
2. Contractor responsible to fill out design build summary sheet.
3. Design -Build components of Work are defined as complete,
' operational systems, provided and installed for their intended use.
C. Design Professional is Architect or Engineer of Record on project.
' 1. Architect's or Engineer of Record's review of Design -Build submittals
shall be for design intent and shall not lessen nor shift responsibility
from Contractor or assigned subcontractor, to Owner nor Design
Professional.
2. Owner is not responsible to pay for any delays, additional products,
additional hours of work or overtime, restocking or rework required due
to failure by Contractor or Subcontractor to coordinate their work with
work of other trades on project or to provide Design -Build portion or
component in a timely manner to meet project Schedule.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01310: Project Coordination.
B. Section 01330: Submittals
C. Section 01770: Contract Closeout
1.3 DESIGN -BUILD COMPONENTS OF WORK
A. Design -Build Components:
1. Landscape Irrigation, SECTION 02810
DESIGN -BUILD REQUIREMENTS: 01340
QU TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00 '
2. Wood Joists, SECTION 06174
3. Glued- Laminated Construction, SECTION 06174
4. Translucent Sandwich Panel System, SECTION 08950
5. Division 15 Mechanical and Plumbing systems
6. Division 16 Electrical systems I
1.4 DESCRIPTIONS FOR SYSTEMS LISTED IN PROJECT MANUAL
A. Refer to systems descriptions in Part 1, General and Part 2, Products in each
technical specification section listed for references to Design Build Work.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to quality assurance described in Part 1, General in specification '
sections with Design Build Work.
B. Quality assurance described in specification sections shall be minimum '
acceptable standards for this project.
1. Should quality assurance not be defined within specific specifications, I
printed industry standards for "normal" quality practices shall govern.
1.6 REFERENCES I
A. Refer to references in Part 1, general, in each specification section with I
Design -Build Work.
1.7 SUBMITTALS '
A. Refer to submittals description in Part 1, General, in each specification
section with Design -Build Work. '
B. Design -Build submittals are required to contain:
1. Complete criteria
2. Design assumptions
3. Details
4. Calculations
5. Stamped by Design Build Engineer registered in State work is being ,
done.
6. Instructions for fabrication, assembly, installation and interface with
other trades. '
1
E
TOC BUILDING ADDITION DESIGN-BUILD UIREMENTS: 01340
R Q
SEP 00 PAGE 3
' 1.8 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS AND DEFINITIONS
A. Submit list of Design -Build Subcontractor and /or Engineers maximum fifteen
days after signing notice to proceed.
1. Submit design build summary sheet to governing authorities if
' required.
B. Design -Build Elements shown in contract Documents are shown for design
' intent.
C. Intent is to have Design -Build Entity responsible to design, provide,
coordinate and install Design -Build Component.
D. Design -Build Elements attached to structural frame or supplemental to
structural frame to be designed for anticipated loads outlined on structural
drawings or found in State Building Code.
E. Design -Build Elements to be coordinated with appropriate subcontractors.
F. Load reactions at interface between Design -Build Elements and structural
frame to be clearly defined to allow for a review by Engineer of Record.
1
1
I
U
I
I
DESIGN -BUILD REQUIREMENTS: 01340 TOC BUILDING ADDITION '
PAGE 4 SEP 00
DESIGN BUILD SUMMARY SHEET
I
CONTRACTOR INFORMATION SHEET OF
I
Name Phone Position
Mailing Address 111
PROJECT INFORMATION PLAN CHECK INFORMATION
I
Street Address Type of Check
I
Description of Work Plan Examiner
Date
Bidder Design Item a. Supplier a. Date of Remarks
I
b. Engineer Who Will Stamp Plans & Submittal
Calculations to City
c. Engineer's Telephone Number b. Sheet
I
Numbers
1.
1
2.
I
3.
I
4.
I
END OF SECTION
1
I
TOC BUILDING ADDITION DEFERRED SUBMITTALS: 01410
' SEP 00 PAGE 1
DEFERRED SUBMITTALS
' General Contractor shall fill in Name of Manufacturer and Name of Oregon Registered
Engineer who will stamp calculations and submittals for following systems to be
designed by Contractor. This information shall be inserted on Washington County
permit sets of documents by General Contractor. Drawings, Material Specifications, and
Calculations meeting specified requirements are to be submitted to Architect for review
' of conformance to design intent. Architect will then return copies of documents to
General Contractor for submittal to Washington County for final approval or separate
permit.
Specification Name of Name of Oregon
Section Item Manufacturer Registered Engineer
02810 LANDSCAPE
SPRINKLER SYSTEM
' 06174 WOOD I JOISTS
06180 GLUE - LAMINATED
' CONSTRUCTION
08950 TRANSLUCENT
SANDWICH PANEL
SYSTEM
09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILING
DIV. 16 FIRE ALARM,
DETECTION,
MONITORING SYSTEMS
END OF SECTION
I
1
I
TOC BUILDING ADDITION DEFINITIONS AND REFERENCE STANDARDS: 01422
SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in Conditions of Contract.
B. "Indicated ": Refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules in
' Drawings; or to other paragraphs or schedules in Specifications and similar
requirements in Contract Documents.
' 1. Terms such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" are
used to help user locate reference. Location is not limited.
C. "Directed ": Terms such as "directed," "requested," "authorized," "selected,"
"approved," "required," and "permitted" mean directed by Architect, requested
by Architect, and similar phrases.
D. "Approved": When used in conjunction with Architect's action on Contractor's
submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to Architect's duties and
' responsibilities as stated in Conditions of Contract.
' E. "Regulations ": Includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by
authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements
within construction industry that control performance of Work.
' F. "Furnish ": Means to supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading,
unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.
G. "Install ": describes operations at Project site including actual unloading,
temporary storage, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring,
applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and
similar operations.
H. "Provide ": Means to furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use.
I. "Installer ": Is Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor, either as an
employee, subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier, to perform a particular
construction activity, including installation, erection, application, or similar
operations.
1. Installers are required to be experienced in operations they are
' engaged to perform.
1
DEFINITIONS AND REFERENCE STANDARDS: 01422 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
2. Term "experienced" when used with term "installer" means having
successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in
size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements
indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction.
J. "Project site" is space available to Contractor for performing construction ,
activities, either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other work
as part of Project.
K. "Testing Agencies ": Are independent entities engaged to perform specific
inspections or tests, either at Project site or elsewhere, and to report on and, if
required, to interpret results of those inspections or tests.
1.2 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT EXPLANATION
A. Specification Format:
1. These Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections based '
on 16 division format and CSI /CSC's "Master Format" numbering
system. i
B. Specification Content:
1. Abbreviated Language:
a. Language used in Specifications and other Contract
Documents is abbreviated.
b. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate.
c. Words implied, but not stated, shall be interpolated as sense
requires.
d. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words
as singular, where applicable as context indicates.
2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in
Specifications.
a. Requirements expressed in imperative mood are to be
preformed by Contractor.
b. Subjective language is used for clarity to describe
responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor, or
by others when so noted.
I
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION DEFINITIONS AND REFERENCE STANDARDS: 01422
I SEP 00 PAGE 3
c. Words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on
I context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence
or phrase.
I 1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. Applicability of Standards: Unless Contract Documents include more stringent
I requirements, applicable construction industry standards have same force and
effect as if bound or copied directly into Contract Documents to extent
referenced. Such standards are made a part of Contract Documents by
I reference.
B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of Contract
I Documents.
C. Conflicting Requirements: Comply with most stringent requirement when
I compliance with two or more standards is specified and standards establish
different or conflicting requirements.
I 1. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently
equal, to Architect for decision before proceeding.
I D. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: Quantity or quality level shown or
specified shall be minimum provided or performed.
I E. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project must be
familiar with industry standards applicable to its trade, and is responsible for
I maintaining copies of standards needed to perform Work.
1. Make copies of applicable standards available upon request.
1.4 STANDARDS
I A. Reference to a technical society, institution, associations, or governmental
authority is made in accordance with their acronym as shown in following
table:
I AA Aluminum Association
900 19th St. NW Suite 300
I Washington, DC 20006
202 - 862 -5100
I
I
DEFINITIONS AND REFERENCE STANDARDS: 01422 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 4 SEP 00
AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association I
1827 Walden Office Sq., Suite 104 I
Schaumburg, IL 60173 -4268
847 - 303 -5664
AAN American Association of Nurserymen, Inc. I
See ANLA
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation I
Officials
444 North Capitol St., NW Suite 249 I
Washington, DC 20001
202 - 624 -5800
ACI American Concrete Institute I
P.O. Box 9094
Farmington Hills, MI 48333 -9094 I
248 - 848 -3700
ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, Public Law 101 -336 I
Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities
AFGA American Forest and Paper Association I
(Formerly: National Forest Products Association)
1111 19th St., NW, Suite 800
Washington DC 20036 I
800 - 878 -8878
AHA American Hardboard Association I
1210 W. Northwest Hwy
Palatine, IL 60067 -1897
847 - 934 -8800
I
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
One East Wacker Drive, Suite 3100 I
Chicago, IL 60601 -2001
800 - 644 -2400
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute I
1101 17th Street N.W.
Washington, DC 20036 -4700
I
202 -452 -7100
I
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION DEFINITIONS AND REFERENCE STANDARDS: 01422
I SEP 00 PAGE 5
' AITC American Institute of Timber Construction
7012 S. Revere Pkwy, Suite 140
Englewood, CO 80112
303 - 792 -9559
ALSC American Lumber Standards Committee
P.O. Box 210
Germantown, MD 20875
301 - 972 -1700
ANLA American Nursery and Landscape Association
(Formerly: American Association of Nurserymen)
1250 Eye St., NW, Suite 500
Washington DC 20005
202 - 789 -2900
ANSI American National Standards Institute
' 11 West 42nd Street., 13th Floor
New York, NY 10036 -8002
202 - 642 -4900
APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association
(Formerly: American Plywood Association)
P.O. Box 11700
Tacoma, Washington 98411 -0700
206 - 565 -6600
' APA Architectural Precast Association
P.O. Box 08669
Fort Myers, FL 33908 -0669
941 -454 -6989
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and
Air - Conditioning Engineers.
1791 Tullie Circle, NE
Atlanta, GA 30329 -2305
800 - 527 -4723
' ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
100 Barr Harbor Dr.
West Conshohocken, PA 19428 -2959
' 610- 832 -9500
1
DEFINITIONS AND REFERENCE STANDARDS: 01422
TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 6 SEP 00
AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute
1952 Isaac Newton Sq.
Reston, VA 20190
703 - 733 -0600
AWPA American Wood Preservers' Association
3246 Fall Creek Hsy, Suite 1900 '
Granbury, TX 76049 -7979
817- 326 -6300
AWS American Welding Society '
550 NW LeJeune Rd.
Miami, FL 33126
800 -443 -9353
BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
355 Lexington Ave., 17 th Floor
New York, NY 10017 -6603
212 -661 -4261
BIA Brick Institute of America
11490 Commerce Park Dr.
Reston, VA 22091 -1525
703 - 620 -0010
CISCA Ceiling and Interior Systems Construction Association '
1500 Lincoln Hwy, Suite 202
St. Charles, IL 60174
630 - 584 -1919
CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute
9891 Broken Land Pkwy, Suite 300
Columbia, MD 21046
301 - 596 -2584
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
933 N. Plum Grove Rd.
Schaumburg, IL 60173 -4758
847 - 517 -1200
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION DEFINITIONS AND REFERENCE STANDARDS: 01422
SEP 00 PAGE 7
' CS Commercial Standard of National Bureau of Standards
' (U.S. Department. of Commerce)
U.S. Government Printing Office
Washington, D.C. 20402
' 202 - 512 -1800
CTI Ceramic Tile Institute of America
' 12061 West Jefferson Blvd.
Culver City, CA 90230 -6219
310- 574 -7800
' DHI Door and Hardware Institute
(Formerly: National Builders Hardware Association)
' 14170 Newbrook Dr.
Chantilly, VA 20151 -2223
703 - 222 -2010
EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association
402 N. Fourth St., Suite 102
' Yakima, WA 98901 -2470
800 - 294 -3462
' FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association
(See GANA)
' FM Factory Mutual System
1151 Boston - Providence Tnpk.
Norwood, MA 02062 -9102
' 781- 762 -4300
FS Federal Specification Unit
' (Available from General Service Administration)
470 East L'Enfant Plaza, SW, Suite 8100
Washington, D.C. 20407
202 - 619 -8925
GA Gypsum Association
1 810 First St., NE, Suite 510
Washington, D.C. 20002
202 - 289 -5440
1
1
1
1
DEFINITIONS AND REFERENCE STANDARDS: 01422 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 8 SEP 00
GANA Glass Association of North America
(Formerly: Flat Glass Marketing Association)
3310 SW Harrison St.
Topeka, KS 66611 -2279
913- 266 -7013
GSA General Services Administration
F St. and 18th St. NW
Washington DC 20405
202 - 708 -5082
HPVA Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association '
1825 Michael Farraday Dr.
P.O. Box 2789
Reston, VA 22195 -0789
703 -435 -2900
MIA Masonry Institute of America '
2550 Beverly Blvd.
Los Angeles, CA 90057
213- 388 -0472
NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
8 South Michigan Ave., Suite 1000
Chicago, IL 60603
312 -456 -5590
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
One Batterymarch Park
P.O. Box 9101
Quincy, MA 02269 -9101
800 - 344 -3555
NFPA National Forest Products Association
(See AFPA)
NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association
P.O. Box 34518
Memphis, TN 38184 -0518
901 - 377 -1818
1
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION DEFINITIONS AND REFERENCE STANDARDS: 01422
SEP 00 PAGE 9
' NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association
O'Hare International Center
10255 W. Higgins Rd., Suite 600
Rosemont, IL 60018 -5607
800 - 323 -9545
NTMA National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association
3166 Des Planes Ave., Suite 121
Des Plaines, IL 60018
800 - 323 -9736
NWCB Northwest Wall and Ceiling Bureau
1032 -A N.E. 65th St.
' Seattle, Washington 98119
800 - 524 -4215
1 NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association
(Formerly: National Woodwork Manufacturers Association)
1400 E. Touchy Ave., G -54
Des Plaines, IL 60018
800 - 223 -2301
PCA Portland Cement Association
5420 Old Orchard Rd.
Skokie, IL 60077 -1083
' 847- 966 -6200
PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute
175 W. Jackson Blvd.
Chicago, IL 60604
312 - 786 -0300
PDCA Painting and Decorating Contractors of America, Oregon Council
3420 SW Macadam
Portland, Oregon 97219
503 - 236 -7964
PS Product Standard of National Bureau of Standards
(U.S. Department. of Commerce)
U.S. Government Printing Office
Washington, D.C. 20402
202 - 512 -1800
DEFINITIONS AND REFERENCE STANDARDS: 01422 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 10 SEP 00
SDI Steel Deck Institute
P.O. Box 25
Fox River Grove, IL 60021 I
847 -462 -1930
SDI Steel Door Institute I
30200 Detroit Rd.
Cleveland, OH 44145 -1967
216- 889 -0010 I
SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association
401 N. Michigan Ave. I
Chicago, IL 60611 -4267
312- 644 -6610
SJI Steel Joist Institute
3127 10th Ave., North Ext.
Myrtle Beach, SC 29577 -6760
803- 626 -1995
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' 1
National Association, Inc.
4201 Lafayette Center Dr.
P.O. Box 112130
Chantilly, VA. 20151 -1209
703 - 803 -2980
SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council
40 24th St., 6th Floor
Pittsburgh, PA 15222 -4643
412- 281 -2331
TCA Tile Council of America 4
100 Clemson Research Blvd.
Anderson, SC 29625
864 - 646 -8453
UL Underwriter's Laboratory, Incorporated
333 Pfingsten Road
Northbrook, IL 60062
800 - 704 -4050
I
I
TOC BUILDING ADDITION DEFINITIONS AND REFERENCE STANDARDS: 01422
SEP 00 PAGE 11
WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
P.O. Box 23145
Portland, OR 97281 -3145
503 - 639 -0651
WH Warnock Hersey
8431 Murphy Drive
Middleton, Wisconsin 53562
WMMP Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association
507 First St.
Woodland, CA 95695
800 - 550 -7889
WWPA Western Wood Products Association
Yeon Building
522 SW 5th Ave.
Portland, OR 97204 -2122
503 - 224 -3930
I
END OF SECTION
I
1
I
i
1
I
I
TOC BUILDING ADDITION QUALITY CONTROL: 01450
SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Administrative and procedural requirements for quality control services.
B. Quality control services include inspections, tests, and related actions,
including reports performed by Contractor, by independent agencies, and by
governing authorities.
I 1. Requirements do not include Contract enforcement activities
performed by Architect.
C. Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with
requirements specified or indicated.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01732: Cutting and Patching, for requirements for repair and
restoration of construction disturbed by inspection and testing activities.
1.3 RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Owner will contract separately for services of independent testing laboratory
to perform specified inspection and testing.
B. Inspections and testing costs required by defective Work or improperly -timed
1 notices shall be paid by Contractor.
C. Utilization of testing laboratory services shall in no way relieve Contractor of
obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract
Documents.
1.4 RETESTING
A. Contractor responsible for retesting where results of inspections and tests
prove unsatisfactory and indicate noncompliance with requirements.
I 1. Cost of retesting is Contractor's responsibility where tests prove
unsatisfactory and indicate noncompliance with requirements.
I
1
QUALITY CONTROL: 01450 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
1.5 ASSOCIATED SERVICES I
A. Cooperate with agencies performing inspections and tests.
B. Provide auxiliary services as requested.
C. Notify agency in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel.
9 Y p p g o pe sonnet.
D. Auxiliary services include, but are not limited to, following: I
1. Providing access to Work.
2. Furnishing incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate
inspections and tests.
E. Coordinate activities to accommodate services with a minimum of delay.
F. Contractor is responsible for scheduling inspections and tests.
1. Except where indicated as responsibility of testing agency, Contractor
is responsible for taking samples.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications for Inspection and Testing Agencies:
1. Engage inspection and testing service agencies that are prequalified 1
as complying with American Council of Independent Laboratories'
"Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory
Qualification" and that specialize in types of inspections and tests to be
performed.
2. Each independent inspection and testing agency engaged on Project
shall be authorized by authorities having jurisdiction to operate in
State where Project is located.
B. Duties of Testing Agency:
1. Testing agency shall cooperate with Architect and Contractor in
performing its duties.
2. Agency shall provide qualified personnel to perform inspections and
tests.
3. Agency shall notify Architect and Contractor of irregularities of
deficiencies observed in Work during performance of its services. I
I
TOC BUILDING ADDITION QUALITY CONTROL: 01450
SEP 00 PAGE 3
1 4. Except as otherwise specified, testing laboratory shall secure, handle,
and store samples and specimens for testing.
C. Submittals: Testing agency shall submit a certified written report of each
inspection and test to:
1. Architect
2. Contractor
3. Construction Consultant
4. Governmental agencies requiring submission of reports
5. Other persons as directed by Architect.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Applicable
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements of Section 1701 of [State of Oregon 1998 Edition
Structural Specialty Code based on Uniform Building Code 1997 Edition].
3.2 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS
A. Submit qualifications of observer to Architect/Engineer 30 days in advance of
required observations.
1. Observer subject to approval of Architect/Engineer and Owner.
B. When specified in individual specification Sections, require material or
Product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to
observe:
1. Site conditions
1 2. Conditions of surfaces and installation
3. Quality of workmanship
4. Start-up of equipment
5. Test, adjust, and balance of equipment applicable, and to initiate
instructions when necessary.
i C. Individuals to report observations and site decisions or instructions given to
applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturer's
written instructions.
I
I
QUALITY CONTROL: 01450 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 4 SEP 00
D. Submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation to Architect/Engineer I
for review.
3.3 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. Upon completion of inspection, testing, and sample taking, repair damaged
construction.
1. Restore substrates and finishes. I
2. Comply with Section 01732, "Cutting and Patching."
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality control service activities, and ,
protect repaired construction.
C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of
assignment of responsibility for inspection and testing.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
TOC BUILDING ADDITION TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS: 01500
SEP 00 PAGE 1
1 PART I GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Requirements for construction facilities and temporary controls, including:
1. Temporary utilities
2. Support facilities
3. Security
4. Protection.
B. Temporary utilities include, but are not limited to:
1. Water service and distribution.
2. Temporary electric power and light.
3. Temporary heat.
4. Ventilation.
5. Telephone service.
6. Sanitary facilities, including drinking water.
'I 7. Storm and sanitary sewer.
C. Support facilities include, but are not limited to:
1. Field offices and storage sheds.
2. Temporary roads and paving.
3. Temporary enclosures.
4. Hoists and temporary elevator use.
5. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities.
D. Security and protection facilities include, but are not limited to:
1. Temporary fire protection.
2. Barricades, warning signs, and lights.
3. Enclosure fence for site.
4. Environmental protection.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01560: Temporary Dust and Airborne Contaminant Control
I
1
TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS: 01500 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and
regulations of authorities having jurisdiction including, but not limited to:
1. Building code requirements. I
2. Health and safety regulations.
3. Utility company regulations.
4. Police and fire department rules.
5. Environmental protection regulations.
B. Standards: Comply with following: 1
1. NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and 11
Demolition Operations."
2. ANSI A10 Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction
and Demolition."
3. NECA Electrical Design Library "Temporary Electrical Facilities."
C. Comply with NEMA, NECA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary 1
electric service. Install service in compliance with NFPA 70 "National Electric
Code."
D. Inspections:
1. Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each
temporary utility before use.
2. Obtain required certifications and permits.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. 1
B. Operate in a safe and efficient manner. • I
C. Relocate temporary services and facilities as Work progresses.
D. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary conditions, or public
nuisances to develop or persist on -site. i
I
I
TOC BUILDING ADDITION TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS: 01500
SEP 00 PAGE 3
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Provide new materials, or use undamaged, used materials in serviceable
1 conditions, suitable for use intended.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
A. Provide new equipment, or use undamaged, used equipment in serviceable
conditions, suitable for use intended.
B. Heating Units: Provide temporary heating units that have been tested and
labeled by UL, FM or another recognized trade association related to type of
fuel being consumed.
C. Temporary Offices: Provide prefabricated or mobile units or similar job -built
construction with lockable entrances, operable windows, and serviceable
finishes.
D. Temporary Toilet Units: Provide self- contained, single- occupant toilet units of
chemical, aerated recirculation or combustion type.
1. Provide units ro erl vented and fully enclosed with a fiber- lass -
P P Y Y 9
reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material.
E. Fire Extinguishers: Provide hand - carried, portable, UL- rated, Class A fire
extinguishers for temporary offices and similar spaces.
1. In other locations, provide hand - carried, portable, UL- rated, Class ABC
dry- chemical extinguishers or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA
recommended classes for exposures.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
A. General:
1 1. Engage appropriate local utility company to install temporary service
or connect to existing service. Comply with utility recommendations.
I
I
I
TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS: 01500 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 4 SEP 00
2. Use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to Owner or I
Architect.
B. Water Service:
1. Install water service and distribution piping of sizes and pressures 1
adequate for construction until permanent water service is in use.
C. Electric Power Service:
1. Install weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution
system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics adequate
for purposes required during construction.
2. Locate area distribution boxes so that individual trades may furnish
and use 100 ft maximum length extension cords to obtain power and
lighting at points where needed for Work, inspection, and safety.
D. Lighting:
1. Provide temporary lighting that will provide adequate illumination for
construction operations and traffic conditions.
E. Heating: I
1. Provide temporary heat required by construction activities for curing or
drying of completed installations or for protection of installed
construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high
humidity.
2. Except where Owner authorizes use of permanent system, provide
vented, self- contained, LP gas or fuel oil heaters with individual space
thermostatic control.
a. Use of gasoline burning space heaters, or open flame, or
salamander heating units is prohibited.
F. Telephone: �
1. Provide temporary telephone service throughout construction period I
for personnel engaged in construction activities.
2. Provide a dedicated telephone line for a fax machine in field office.
3. Make telephone and fax service available to Architect for use in
•
connection with Work.
I
I
I TOC BUILDING ADDITION TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS: 01500
SEP 00 PAGE 5
1 G. Sanitary Facilities:
II. Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water fixtures.
2. Comply with regulations and health codes for type, number, location,
operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
I 3.2 SUPPORT FACILITIES
I A. Field Offices:
I 1. Provide insulated, weathertight temporary offices of sufficient size to
accommodate required office personnel at Project site.
2. Maintain until near Substantial Completion. Remove prior to
I
Substantial Completion.
3. Provide enclosed space within field office adequate for project
meetings.
i a. Furnish with table, chairs, and utilities.
B. Storage and Fabrication Sheds:
I 1. Install storage and fabrication sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to
accommodate materials and equipment involved.
C. Temporary Paving:
1. Construct and maintain temporary roads and paving to accommodate
traffic during construction period.
i a. Locate where same permanent facilities will be located; review
proposed modifications to permanent paving with Architect.
D. Temporary Enclosures:
1. Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in
I progress and completed, from exposure, weather, other construction
operations, and similar activities.
I E. Temporary Lifts and Hoists:
1. Provide facilities for hoisting materials and employees.
it 2. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are
considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities.
3. Temporary Elevator Use: Refer to Division 14 Sections for elevators.
I
TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS: 01500 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 6 SEP00
F. Temporary Identification Signs:
1. Prepare and install project identification and other signs of size 1
indicated.
a. Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs.
2. Prepare signs to provide directional information to construction I
personnel and visitors.
G. Stairs:
1. Provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate until
permanent stairs are available.
2. Cover finished permanent stairs with a protective covering of plywood
or similar material so finishes will be undamaged at time of
acceptance.
3.3 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES I
A. Temporary Fire Protection:
1. Install and maintain temporary fire protection facilities of types needed
to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses
until permanent fire protection facilities are operable.
2. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241.
3. Store combustible materials in containers in fire safe locations.
4. Maintain unobstructed access to fire protection equipment.
It
5. Provide supervision of welding operation, combustion type temporary
heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition.
B. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights:
1. Comply with standards and codes for erection of structurally adequate I
barricades.
2. Provide appropriate warning signs to inform personnel and public of
hazards being protected against.
3. Provide lighting, including flashing lights, where appropriate and
needed.
C. Enclosure Fence:
1. Install an enclosure fence with lockable entrance gates where
indicated.
I
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS: 01500
SEP 00 PAGE 7
2. Enclose entire site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate
construction operations to prevent people, dogs, and other animals
from easily entering site, except by entrance gates.
D. Security Enclosure and Lockup:
1. Install temporary enclosure of partially complete areas of construction
with locking entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism,
theft, or similar violations of security.
2. Where materials and equipment must be stored, and are of value,
provide a secure lockup.
E. Environmental Protection:
1. Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct
construction in ways and methods that comply with environmental
regulations.
2. Minimize the possibility of air, waterways, and subsoil becoming
contaminated or polluted or that other undesirable effects might result.
3. Restrict use of noise making tools and equipment to hours that will
minimize complaints from persons or firms near the site.
3.4 TERMINATION AND REMOVAL
A. Remove each temporary facility when need has ended, when replaced by
authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial
Completion, unless otherwise requested by Owner or Architect.
B. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are Contractor's
property.
1. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
C. Remove temporary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into
permanent paving.
1. Where temporary paving has occurred in areas intended for landscape
development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with
requirements for fill of subsoil in area.
a. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other
petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might
impair growth of plant materials or lawn.
I
TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS: 01500 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 8 SEP 00
2. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary
entrances, as required by governing authority. I
D. Substantial Completion: Clean and renovate permanent facilities used during
construction period.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
1
TI
I
TOC BUILDING ADDITION TEMPORARY DUST & AIRBORNE
SEP 00 CONTAMINANT CONTROL: 01560
PAGE 1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. All streets, roads or detours used for hauling materials shall be oil treated as
required to prevent dust, or continually watered to prevent dust. Dust prevention
measures, both indoors and outdoors shall be continuous until Final Acceptance
by Owner.
B. Provide interior dust control measures, such as temporary partitions (including
at attic spaces), taping of air spaces at doors, maintenance of filters and
protection of ducts, etc., as required to control dust from areas impacting existing
office areas. Coordinate to prevent accidental activation of particulate- sensing
fire detection system.
PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used
END OF SECTION
1 I I
I
I
I
1
1 TOC BUILDING ADDITION CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT: 01570
SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 WASTE MANAGEMENT GOALS
A. Reuse or recycle waste materials produced as a result of Project to minimize
impact of construction waste on landfills and to minimize expenditure of
energy and cost fabricating new materials.
B. Implementation of waste management plan for work performed on Project.
1. Section outlines examples of materials which can be recycled or
reused.
1.2 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN
A. Determine waste materials that can be reused or recycled as a result of work
performed on Project when practicable and cost effective.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 ON -SITE MATERIALS SORTING AND STORAGE DURING
CONSTRUCTION
A. Verify requirements of recycle or waste processor facilities for preparation of
materials they will receive, and what levels of contamination in materials is
acceptable.
B. Coordinate with local hauler to provide separate containers for recycling of
the following waste materials:
1. Wood
2. Metals (ferrous and non - ferrous)
3. Cardboard
4. Drywall •
5. Masonry and Concrete
6. Office paper
C. Follow source separation requirements for each waste and use appropriate
on -site container for each waste.
I
I
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT: 01570 TOC BUILDING ADDITION 1
PAGE 2 SEP 00
D. Provide separate containers for non - recyclable materials. I
E. Rebates: Paid or credited by hauler or recycling facility to Contractor.
F. Inform field personnel and subcontractors of recycling program.
G. Continuously monitor program to verify proper source separation and
avoidance of recyclable materials contamination.
1. Provide on -site container to facilitate recycling.
H. Recycling Processors and Facilities:
1. Comprehensive list of recycling facilities in Portland Metro area is
available from local building permit office or by contacting Metro at
234 -3000.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TOC BUILDING ADDITION PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS: 01600
SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Administrative and procedural requirements governing Contractor's selection
of products for use in Project.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01422: Definitions and Reference Standards.
B. Section 01630: Product Substitution Procedures.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. "Products" are items purchased for incorporation in Work.
1. Term "product" includes terms "material," "equipment," "system," and
terms of similar intent.
2. "Named Products" are items identified by manufacturer's product
name, including make or model number or other designation, listed in
manufacturer's published product literature.
B. "Materials" are products shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished, refined or
otherwise fabricated, processed, or installed to form a part of Work.
C. "Equipment" is a product with operational parts, whether motorized or
manually operated, that requires service connections, such as wiring or
piping.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product List: Before Contractor's first request for payment, submit a •
complete list of major products proposed for use in Project.
1. Include proprietary product names, manufacturer's name, and
installing Subcontractor's name.
I 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Provide products of same kind from a single source to
fullest extent possible.
1
I
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS: 01600 TOC BUILDING ADDITION 1
PAGE 2 SEP 00
B. Compatibility of Products: When given option of selecting products,
Contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods
that are compatible with previously selected products and construction
methods, or products specified to with those selected products to be
compatible.
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING a
A. Deliver, store, and handle products according to manufacturer's
recommendations.
B. Schedule delivery to minimize long -term storage at site.
C. Coordinate delivery with installation time to assure minimum holding time for
items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to
deterioration, theft, or other losses. 1
D. Deliver products to site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's
original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and
instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
E. Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with Contract ,r
Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly
protected.
F. Store products at site in a manner that will facilitate inspection and
measurement of quantity or counting of units.
G. Store products subject to damage by weather above ground, under cover in a
weathertight enclosure, and with ventilation adequate to prevent
condensation.
1. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by
manufacturer's instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION
A. General: Provide products that comply with Contract Documents, that are
undamaged, and new at time of installation.
I
I
TOC BUILDING ADDITION PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS: 01600
SEP 00 PAGE 3
B. Proprietary Specification Requirements: Where only a single product or
manufacturer is named, provide product indicated.
1. No substitutions are ermitte .
p d
1 C. Semiproprietary Specification Requirements: Where two or more products or
manufacturers are named, provide one of products indicated that complies
with Specifications. No substitutions are permitted.
D. Nonproprietary Specifications: When products or manufacturers are not
listed, Contractor may use any product by any manufacturer that complies
with Specifications and referenced standards.
E. Product Substitutions: Where products or manufacturers are named and
accompanied by term "equal," "approved," or "approved equal," comply with
Section 01630 for "Product Substitution Procedures" to obtain approval of an
unnamed product.
F. Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where a product or assembly listing
exact characteristics required, provide a product or assembly that provides
those characteristics and otherwise complies with Contract requirements.
G. Performance Specification Requirements: Where compliance with
performance requirements are specified, provide products that comply with
those requirements and are recommended by manufacturer for application
indicated.
H. Specified Standards, Codes, and Regulations: Where compliance with an
imposed code, standard, or regulation is specified, provide a product that
complies with that code, standard, or regulation.
I. Visual Matching: Where matching a sample, Architect's decision will be final
on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily.
J. Visual Selection: Where product requirements include phrase " .. as
selected from manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures, .. " or a
similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, and texture from product
line selected that complies with other specified requirements.
I
I
I
I
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS: 01600 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 4 SEP 00
K. Inappropriate Product Selections: If Contractor believes specified product,
method, or system is inappropriate for use, Contractor to notify Architect
before performing Work in question.
1. If notice of objection is not received prior to delivery to site, it will be
assumed by Owner that Contractor agrees specified products,
methods, and systems are appropriate for use in Project.
PART 3 EXECUTION _1
3.1 INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS
A. Comply with manufacturer's y th ufacturer s instructions and recommendations for installation
of products in applications indicated.
1. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located and aligned
with other Work.
2. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary from damage and
deterioration.
B Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with Manufacturers' I,
instructions, consult Architect for further instructions.
END OF SECTION
I
I
1
1
I
I
TOC BUILDING ADDITION PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES: 01630
SEP 00 PAGE 1
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Procedures for:
1. Contractor's responsibilities concerning substitutions.
2. Substitutions requests during bidding period.
3. Substitutions requests after award of Contract.
4. Substitutions not permitted.
I 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
•
A. Section 01422: Definitions and Reference Standards, for applicability of industry
standards to products specified.
B. Section 01600: Product Requirements, for requirements governing Contractor's
selection of products and product options.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Substitutions: Contractor proposals for changes in products, materials, equipment,
and methods of construction required by Contract Documents made during bidding
and after award of Contract are considered to be requests for substitution.
1. Following are not considered to be requests for substitution:
a. Revisions to Contract Documents requested by Owner or Architect.
b. Specified options of products and construction methods included in
Contract Documents.
c. Contractor's determination of and compliance with regulations and
orders issued by governing authorities.
B. Substitutions Accepted During Bidding Period: Substitutions requested and
accepted during bidding period are accepted by Addendum prior to award of
Contract, and thereafter are included in Contract Documents.
C. Substitutions Accepted After Award of Contract: Substitutions requested and
accepted after award of Contract are accepted only by Change Order, and
thereafter are included in Contract Documents.
I
I
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES: 01630 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
1.4 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Contractor's responsibilities for substitution requests made after award of Contract
are as follows:
1. Investigate proposed products and determine they are equal or superior in
respects to products specified.
2. Provide same guarantee for accepted substitutions as for products specified.
3. Make changes in, and coordinate, Work as may be required to incorporate
and install accepted substitutions.
4. Waive claims for additional costs which subsequently become apparent
which are related to substitutions. •
1.5 SUBSTITUTION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Equality of different materials or products shall be determined by methods set forth
in this Section.
1. No product or material shall be arbitrarily presumed to be "equal" without 1
having first been so
g judged by appropriate
J 9 Y procedures.
P
2. Provide comparison chart itemizing specified parts or components of
specified and proposed substitutions.
3. Comparative analysis to be evaluated by Architect or Engineer approving
substitution. 1
B. Decision of Architect will be final.
1. Architect will be sole judge of acceptability of any proposed substitution.
PART 2 PRODUCTS j
2.1 SUBSTITUTION REQUIREMENTS DURING BIDDING PERIOD
A. Submit request for approval of a substitution on CSI Substitution Request pp o R quest Form,
copy included at end of this Section. •
B. Substitution requests must be received in Architect's office no less than 10 working
days prior to Bid Date, unless otherwise stipulated in Instructions to Bidders.
I
I
I
TOC BUILDING ADDITION PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES: 01630
SEP 00 PAGE 3
1/ 2.2 SUBSTITUTIONS REQUESTED AFTER AWARD OF CONTRACT
A. Substitutions will normally not be considered after award of Contract, except due to
unforeseen circumstances.
B. Architect will receive and consider Contractor's request for substitution after award
of Contract when one or more of following conditions are satisfied, as determined
by Architect. If following conditions are not met, Architect will return requests
without action except to record noncompliance with these requirements.
1. Specified product cannot be provided within Contract time.
a. Architect will not consider request of product cannot be provided as a
result of failure to pursue Work promptly or coordinate activities
properly.
2. Specified product cannot receive necessary approval by a governing
authority, and requested substitution can be approved.
3. Specified product cannot be coordinated with other materials and Contractor
certifies that proposed substitution can be coordinated.
4. Specified product cannot provide required warranty and Contractor certifies
that proposed substitution provides warranty.
5. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, or
other considerations after deducting additional Owner's cost of compensation
to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other
construction, and similar considerations.
t C. Contractor's submittal and Architect's acceptance of Shop Drawings, Product Data,
or Samples for construction activities not complying with Contract Documents do
not constitute an acceptable or valid request for substitution, nor do they constitute
approval.
I 2.3 SUBSTITUTIONS NOT PERMITTED
A. Substitutions indicated or implied on submitted Shop Drawings or Product Data
without first requesting approval in accordance with requirements of this Section.
B. Where manufacturers, products, or systems listed in Specifications are not followed
with "or approved" or "Substitutions: Provide in accordance with requirements of
Section 01630," it is intended that substitutions are not permitted.
I
END OF SECTION
I
I
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES: 01630 TOC BUILDING ADDITION 111
PAGE 4 SEP 00
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST
TO:
PROJECT:
SPECIFIED ITEM: 1
Section Page Paragraph Description
I
PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION:
Attached data includes product description, specifications, drawings, photographs, performance and test 1
data adequate for evaluation of request including identification of applicable data portions.
Attached data also includes description of changes to Contract Documents and proposed substitution II
requires for proper installation.
Undersigned certifies following items, unless modified by attachments, are correct:
1. Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on drawings.
2. Undersigned pays for changes to building design, including engineering design, detailing, and construction
costs caused by proposed substitution.
3. Proposed substitution has no adverse effect on other trades, construction schedule, or specified warranty ;-
requirements.
4. Maintenance and service parts available locally or readily obtainable for proposed substitution.
Undersigned further certifies function, a earance, and quality of proposed
substitution are equivalent or superior to specified item q p p
Undersigned agrees, if this page is reproduced, terms and conditions for substitutions I
found in Bidding Documents apply to this proposed substitution.
Submitted by: I
Name (Printed or typed) General Contractor (if after award of Contract) I
Signature For use by NE
Firm Name „ Approved „ Approved as noted
Address „ Not Approved „ Received too late
City, State, Zip By
Date Date
Tel: Fax: Remarks
The Construction Specifications Institute September 1997 I
Northwest Region
I
I
TOC BUILDING ADDITION PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES: 01630
SEP00 PAGE5
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TOC BUILDING ADDITION CUTTING AND PATCHING: 01732
SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Requirements for cutting, fitting, and patching of Work required to:
1. Make several arts fit properly.
ro erl
P P P Y
2. Uncover work to provide for installing, inspecting, or both, of ill -timed
work.
3. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract
Documents.
4. Remove and replace defective work.
1 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01310: Project Coordination, for coordinating cutting and patching
with other construction activities.
B. Section 01736: Selective Demolition, for demolition of selected portions of the
1 building for alterations.
C. Section 01737: Alteration Project Procedures, for building alterations.
D. Divisions 15 and 16, for mechanical and electrical r
requirements and
limitations applicable to cutting and patching mechanical and electrical
installations.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Proposal for Cutting and Patching: Where cutting and patching involves
structural elements, submit for approval a proposal describing procedures.
Include the following information in the proposal:
1. Describe extent of cutting and patching required, how it will be
performed, and why it cannot be avoided.
2. Indicate changes to structural elements, and changes in appearance
J of visual elements. Include structural calculations.
3. List products proposed for use and entities that will perform the Work.
I
I
I
I
CUTTING AND PATCHING: 01732 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
4. Indicate dates that work will be performed, duration of the Work, and 1
when work will be uncovered for Architect's observation.
5. List utilities that cutting and patching work will affect. !
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that
would change their load carrying capacity of load deflection ratio.
1. Obtain approval before cutting and patching structural elements.
B. Do not cut and patch operating elements in a manner that would reduce their
capacity to perform as intended, cause increased maintenance, or decreased
it
operational life or safety.
C. Do not cut and patch exposed elements of construction that in Architect's
opinion would reduce visual aesthetic qualities, or result in visual evidence of
cutting and patching.
1. Remove and replace construction cut and patched in a visually `
unacceptable manner.
1.5 WARRANTY I
A. Cut and patch construction using methods and with materials in such a
manner as to not void any warranties required or existing.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Use new materials identical to existing materials.
B. Exposed surfaces: Where identical materials are not available, use materials
that visually match existing adjacent surfaces as nearly as possible.
C. Use materials whose installed performance is equal or better to that of I
existing materials.
S
I
I
I
TOC BUILDING ADDITION CUTTING AND PATCHING: 01732
SEP 00 PAGE 3
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to movement or
damage during cutting, excavating, patching, and backfilling.
B. After uncovering Work, inspect conditions affecting installation of new Work.
C. Discrepancies: If uncovered conditions are not as anticipated, immediately
notify Architect and secure direction before proceeding further.
1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide temporary support of work to be cut, including shoring and bracing as
required to maintain structural integrity of Work.
B. Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
3.3 GENERAL PERFORMANCE
A. Use skilled workers trained and experienced in necessary crafts and familiar
with requirements and methods required to restore surfaces to their original
condition.
B. Where required perform excavating and backfilling in accordance with
applicable requirements of Division 2 Sections of these Specifications.
C. Provide dust proof barriers where necessary to protect existing surfaces.
3.4 CUTTING
A. Perform cutting by and demolition b methods which will provided least damage
to other portions of Work.
B. Prior to cutting existing work, locate concealed utilities to eliminate possibility
of service interruption or damage.
C. Cut through concrete or masonry with a carborundum masonry saw or
diamond -core drill.
I
1
CUTTING AND PATCHING: 01732 TOC BUILDING ADDITION 1
PAGE 4 SEP 00
D. When masonry construction must be pierced, furnish and install a steel pipe
sleeve in opening and grout in place neatly.
1. Leave grout surface to match existing finish.
2. Fabricate sleeve one inch in diameter larger than pipe or insulation.
3. Back and caulk between sleeve and pipe with waterproof sealant.
4. At penetrations of fire- resistant rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor
construction: Seal voids with fire- resistant rated materials as require to
maintain assembly of fire- resistant rating of penetrated element, or as
required by Building Code.
3.5 PATCHING
A. Perform fitting and adjusting of products to provide a finished installation
complying with tolerances and finishes specified for type of construction
involved.
B. Where replacement of equipment and fixtures is required, restore existing
plumbing, heating, ventilation, air - conditioning, electrical, and similar systems
to full operational condition.
C. Refinish surfaces to match existing adjacent finish, patching with seams that
are durable and as invisible as possible.
1. Where possible, inspect and test patched area to demonstrate integrity
of seam.
2. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural
break.
3. For assembly, refinish entire unit.
4. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish
restoration into retained adjoining work in manner that will eliminate
evidence of patching and refinishing.
D. When finished surfaces are cut so that smooth transition with existing or new
work is not possible, submit to Architect, for approval, recommendation for
terminating surface along straight line at natural line of division. •
1. Where change of plane of 1/4 inch or more occurs, submit to Architect,
for approval, recommendation for providing smooth transition.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching work is performed. 1
END OF SECTION
I
I
TOC BUILDING ADDITION SELECTIVE DEMOLITION: 01736
SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Demolition and removed from site those items scheduled to be demolished
I and removed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS - NOT APPLICABLE
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be
performed.
1. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of work.
2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.2 DEMOLITION
A. Verify location and extent of selective demolition to be performed.
B. In company with Owner and Architect, visit site and verify extent and location
of selective demolition required.
1 1. Carefully identify limits of selective demolition.
2. Mark interface surfaces as required to enable workmen to identify
items to be removed and items to be left in place intact.
C. Prepare and follow an organized plan for demolition and removal of items.
1. Shut off, cap, and otherwise protect existing public utility lines in
accordance with requirements of public agency or utility having
jurisdiction.
2. Remove items or portion of items scheduled to be demolished or
removed, leaving surfaces clean, and solid.
3. Comply with pertinent regulations of governmental agencies having
jurisdiction.
I
I
1
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION: 01736 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
D. Demolished material shall be considered to be property of Contractor and
removed from job site.
1. Dispose of lead bearing materials in a manner and to
p g cation in
compliance with current federal, state, and local regulations.
2. Notify owner of disposal location prior to removal.
E. Use means necessary to prevent dust becoming a nuisance to public,
neighbors, and to other work being performed on or near site.
3.3 REPLACEMENTS 1
A. In event of demolition of items not so scheduled to be demolished, promptly
replace such items to approval of Architect and at no additional cost to
Owner.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES: 01737
SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Products and installation for patching and extending Work.
B. Transition and adjustments.
C. Repair of damaged surfaces, finishes, and cleaning.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01010: Summary of Work, for work sequence, Owner occupancy,
and protection of installed work.
B. Section 01732: Cutting and Patching.
C Section 01736: Selective Demolition.
1 D. Section 01740: Cleaning, for cleaning during construction.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS FOR PATCHING AND EXTENDING WORK
A. New Materials: As specified in product Sections; match existing Products
and work for patching and extending work.
1. Where new materials are indicated in the Drawings and product
Section for material is not included in the Project Manual, provide new
1 materials as specified in the Drawings.
B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspection and testing
1 Products where necessary, referring to existing Work as a standard.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that demolition is complete, and areas are ready for installation of new
Work.
1
1
ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES: 01737 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
B. Beginning of restoration Work means acceptance of existing conditions. 1
3.2 PREPARATION 1
A. Cut, move, or remove items as necessary for access to alterations and
renovation Work. Replace and restore at completion. 1
B. Remove unsuitable material not marked for salvage, such as rotted wood,
corroded metals, and deteriorated masonry and concrete. Replace materials
as specified for finished Work.
C. Remove debris and abandoned items from area and from concealed spaces. 1
D. Prepare surface and remove surface finishes to provide for proper installation
of new work and finishes.
E. Close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing work and salvage
items from weather and extremes of temperature and humidity. Insulate
ductwork and piping to prevent condensation in exposed areas.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate work of alterations and renovations to expedite completion
sequentially and to accommodate Owner occupancy.
B. Project Finishes: Complete in all respects including operational mechanical 1
and electrical work.
C. Remove, cut, and patch Work in a manner to minimize damage and to
provide a means of restoring Products and finishes to specified condition.
D. Refinish visible existing surfaces to remain in renovated rooms and spaces,
to specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent
finishes.
E. In addition to specified replacement of equipment and fixtures restore existing
plumbing, heating, ventilation, air conditioning, and electrical systems to full 1
operational condition.
F. Install Products as specified in individual Sections. j
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES: 01737
SEP 00 PAGE 3
3.4 TRANSITIONS
A. Where new Work abuts or 9.P
aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even
9
transition. Patched Work to match existing adjacent Work in texture and
appearance.
B. When finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is
not possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line
of division and make recommendation to Architect.
1 3.5 ADJUSTMENTS
A. Where removal of partitions or walls results in adjacent spaces becoming
one, rework floors, walls, and ceilings to a smooth plane without breaks,
steps, or bulkheads.
B. Where a change of plane of 1/4 inch or more occurs, submit to Architect a
recommendation for providing a smooth transition.
C. Trim existing doors as necessary to clear new
floor finish. Refinish trim as
required.
D. Fit work at penetrations of surfaces as specified in Division 1 Section "Cutting
1 and Patching."
3.6 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SURFACES
A. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces which are damaged, lifted,
discolored, or showing other imperfections.
B. Repair substrate prior to patching finish.
3.7 FINISHES
A. Finish surfaces as specified in individual Product Sections.
B. Finish patches to product uniform finish and texture over entire area. When
finish cannot be matched, refinish entire surface to nearest intersections.
1
1
1
ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES: 01737 TOC BUILDING ADDITION 1
PAGE 4 SEP 00
3.8 CLEANING
A. In addition to cleaning specified in Division 1 Sections, clean Owner occupied
9 P pied
areas affected by Work of this Project.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
i TOC BUILDING ADDITION CLEANING: 01740
SEP 00 PAGE 1
3 PART1 GENERAL
i 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Requirement for maintaining Project Building and Site in a standard of
1 cleanliness during construction period.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
1 A. Section 01500: Temporary Facilities and Control, for rodent and pest control,
and removal of temporary facilities.
I B. Section 01570: Construction Waste Management
0 C. Section 01770: Closeout Procedures.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
I A. In addition to standards described in this Section, comply with applicable
requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
I PART PRODUCTS
i 2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Provide personnel, equipment, and materials as needed to maintain specified
1 standard of cleanliness.
2.2 COMPATIBILITY
I A. Use only cleaning materials and equipment which are compatible with
Y 9 P
surfaces being cleaned, as recommended by manufacturer of material.
I PART 3 EXECUTION
I 3.1 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. General: Do not allow accumulation of scrap, debris, waste material, and
i other items not required for construction of this Work.
I 1. Twice each month at minimum, and more often if necessary,
completely remove scrap, debris, and waste material from job site and
dispose of in a legal manner.
1
1
1
CLEANING: 01740 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
2. Provide adequate storage for items and waste to be removed from job
site, observing requirements for fire and environmental protection.
B. Storage Areas: Maintain stored items in an orderly arrangement allowing
Y 9 9
maximum access, that does not impeding traffic or drainage.
1. Inspect . arrangement of stored materials weekly.
Y
a. Restack, tidy, or otherwise service arrangements.
C. Site and Structures:
1. Inspect site and structures weekly, and more often if necessary, and
111
pick up scrap, debris, and waste material.
a. Remove such items to place designated for their storage.
b. Maintain site in a neat and orderly condition.
2. Sweep interior spaces clean weekly, and more often if necessary.
a. Clean, for purpose of this subparagraph, is defined as meaning
free from dust and other material capable of being removed by
use of reasonable effort and a hand -held broom.
3. Prior to installation of succeeding materials, clean structures or
applicable portions thereof to degree of cleanliness recommended by
manufacturer of succeeding material.
4. Following installation of finish floor materials, clean finish flooring daily
Y
at times while Work is being performed in space in that finish materials
are installed to keep floor free from foreign material which may be
injurious to finish.
3.2 FINAL CLEANING
A. "Final Cleaning," for purpose of this Section, and except as may be 1
specifically provided elsewhere, to be interpreted as meaning level of
cleanliness generally provided by skilled cleaners using commercial quality
building maintenance equipment and materials.
B. Prior to Substantial Completion, remove from Project site tools, surplus
materials, equipment, scrap, debris, and waste.
C. Broom clean paved areas on site and public paved areas at approaches to
site.
D. Exterior Surfaces:
1. Visually inspect exterior surfaces and remove traces of soil, waste
materials, smudges, and other foreign matter.
1
1
1
1 TOC BUILDING ADDITION CLEANING: 01740
SEP 00 PAGE 3
2. Hose down entire exterior surfaces of structure if necessary to achieve
a uniform degree of cleanliness.
E. Interior Surfaces:
1. Visually inspect interior surfaces and remove traces of soil, waste
materials, smudges, and other foreign matter.
2. Remove paint droppings, spots, and stains.
3. Clean both sides of glass surfaces.
4. Polished surfaces: Apply polish recommended by manufacturer of
material to be polished.
1
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES: 01770
SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART 1 GENERAL •
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Administrative and procedural requirements for Contract closeout including,
but not limited to:
I 1.
2. Inspection procedures.
Project record document submittal.
3. Operation and maintenance manual submittal.
4. Submittal of warranties.
B. Closeout requirements for specific construction activities are included in
appropriate Sections.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01500: Temporary Facilities and Control, for removal of temporary
facilities.
B. Section 01740: Cleaning, Final Cleaning requirements.
9, 9 uirements. Q
1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Prior to requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion,
complete following.
1. In Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, date of
Substantial Completion is claimed, show 100 percent completion for
portion of Work claimed as substantially complete.
a. Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in
these Contract Documents.
b. If 100 percent cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete
1 items, value of incomplete construction, and reasons Work is
not complete.
2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
3. Submit warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements,
final certifications, and similar documents.
1 4. Obtain and submit releases enabling Owner unrestricted use of Work
and access to services and utilities.
a. Include occupancy permits.
1
1
1
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES: 01770 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
5. Submit:
a. Record Drawings
b. Record Specifications
c. Maintenance manuals
d. Other final record information.
6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items.
7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and transmit keys to
Owner.
a. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.
8. Complete startup testing of systems and instruction to Owner's
operation and maintenance personnel.
9. Discontinue and remove temporary facilities from site, along with
mockups, construction tools, and similar elements.
10. Complete final cleanup requirements. �.
11. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes,
including touchup painting.
B. Inspection Procedures:
1. On receipt of a request for inspection, Architect to proceed with 1
inspection or advise Contractor of unfilled requirements.
2. Architect will prepare Certificate of Substantial Completion following
inspection or advise Contractor of construction that must be
completed or corrected before certificate can be issued.
a. Architect will repeat inspection when requested and assured
that Work is substantially complete.
b. Results of completed inspection will form basis of
requirements for Final Acceptance.
3. Owner will allow Contractor no longer than [30] calendar days from
Date of Substantial Completion to remedy deficiencies.
1.4 FINAL ACCEPTANCE 1
A. Prior to requesting final inspection for certification of final 'acceptance and 1
final payment, submit following:
1. Final payment request with releases, including insurance certificates 1
for products and systems where applicable.
2. Updated final statement accounting for final additional changes to
Contract Sum.
1
1
' TOC BUILDING ADDITION CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES: 01770
SEP 00 PAGE 3
a. Architect will prepare a final Change Order after final
acceptance showing adjustments to Contract Sum which were
not made previously by Change Orders.
3. Certified copy of Architect's final inspection list of items to be
completed or corrected, endorsed and dated by Architect.
1 a. Certification to state each item has been completed or corrected
or otherwise resolved for acceptance.
4. Consent of Surety to Final Payment.
5. Evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with
insurance requirements.
B. Reinspection Procedure:
1. Architect will reinspect to verify status of completion upon receipt of
notice that Work, including list of items from earlier inspection, has
been completed.
a. Indicate items for which completion is delayed under
circumstances acceptable to Owner and Architect.
2. If Work is found to be complete following final inspection, Architect
will issue a certificate of final acceptance.
3. Should Architect and Owner determine that Work is incomplete or
defective:
a. Architect will promptly notify Contractor, in writing, listing
incomplete or defective Work.
1 b. Contractor to remedy deficiencies promptly, and notify Architect
when ready for reinspection.
1.5 RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Drawings:
1 1. Maintain a clean, undamaged set of Contract Drawings and Shop
Drawings, and identify as "RECORD DRAWINGS - PROJECT SET."
2. Mark Drawings to show actual installation and construction where
construction varies substantially from Work as shown.
a. Using an erasable colored pencil (not ink or indelible pencil),
1 clearly describe change by graphic line and note.
b. Date entries, and note related Change Order numbers where
applicable.
1 c. Call attention to entries by a "cloud" drawn around areas
affected.
d. Where overlapping changes occur, mark with different colors.
1
1
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES: 01770 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 4 SEP 00
3. Conversion of schematic layouts: 1
a. Design of future modifications of facility may require accurate
information as to final physical layout of items which are shown 1
schematically on Drawings.
b. Show on Project set of Record Drawings, by dimension
accurate to within one inch, centerline of each run of items 1
shown schematically on Drawings. Clearly identify item by
accurate note such as "cast iron drain ", "galv. water ", and like.
Show, by symbol or note, vertical location of item ( "under slab ",
„ "exposed", 1
"in ceiling lenum ex osed and like). Relate b
P ,
9 P ) by
identification descriptive to Specifications.
4. Final Record Documents: Prior to request for Substantial Completion,
secure from Architect at no charge to Contractor two complete sets of
sepia transparencies of Contract Drawings.
a. Carefully transfer change data shown on Project set of Record
Drawings to corresponding transparencies, coordinating
changes as required.
indicate 1
b. Clearly d cate at each affected detail and other drawings a full
9
description of changes made during construction, and actual
location of items.
c. Show final location of electrical junction boxes and outlets,
telephone and data outlets, supply and return registers, and
like.
d. Call attention to entries by a "cloud" drawn around areas
affected.
e. Make changes neatly, consistently, and with ro er media to
P P
assure longevity and clear reproduction.
B. Record Specifications: 1
1. Maintain one complete copy of Project Manual including Addenda,
and other written construction documents, such as Change Orders and
modifications issued during construction.
2. Mark Specifications to show changes in actual Work performed in
comparison with Specification text.
3. Note substitutions in reference to items specified.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1
1. Submit 3 copies of maintenance manuals prior to system start-ups and
instruction of operation and maintenance personnel.
2. Provide manuals in 8 -1/2 x 11 inch format with plastic /fiberboard
covers and colored flysheets separating sections, to include following:
TOC BUILDING ADDITION CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES: 01770
SEP 00 PAGE 5
1 a. Cover labeled as "Operating and Maintenance Instructions" with
name and address of Project, and names of Contractor and
Subcontractors.
b. Typewritten index near front of manual, providing immediate
information as to location within manual of emergency
1 information regarding installation.
c. Complete instructions regarding operation and maintenance of
equipment, including lubrication, disassembly, and reassembly.
1 d. Complete nomenclature of parts of equipment.
e. Complete nomenclature and part number of replacement parts,
name and address of nearest vendor, and other data pertinent
to procurement procedures.
f. Copy of guarantees and warranties issued.
g. Manufacturers' bulletins, cuts, and descriptive data, where
applicable, clearly indicating precise items included in this
installation and deleting, or otherwise clearly indicating,
manufacturers' data with which this installation is not
concerned.
h. Other data as required in applicable Sections of these
Specifications.
D. Other Documents:
1 1. Spare parts and materials extra stock.
2. One set of evidence of compliance with requirements of governmental
agencies having jurisdiction including, but not necessarily limited to:
a. Certificates of Inspection.
b. Certificates of Occupancy.
3. One set of certificates of insurance for products and completed
operations.
4. One set of evidence of payment and release of liens.
5. One copy of list of Subcontractors, service organizations, and principal
vendors, including names, addresses, and telephone numbers where
they can be reached for emergency service at times including nights,
weekends, and holidays.
1.6 INSTRUCTION
A. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper operation and maintenance of systems,
equipment, and similar items which were provided as part of Work.
1
END OF SECTION
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION SITE CLEARING: 02230
SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Clearing, grubbing, removing and disposing of trees, snags, stumps, shrubs,
1 brush, down timber, vines, vegetative growth and debris within the limits
designated on the plans or as required by the Engineer as well as the geotech
1 (see geotech report) .
1. Except such materials as are designated to remain or which are to be
removed in accordance with other sections of these specifications.
2. This work shall also include the preservation from injury or defacement
1 of all vegetation and objects designated to remain.
B. Clearing and grubbing shall consist of clearing the surface of the ground of the
I designated areas of all trees, stumps, down timber, logs, snags, brush,
undergrowth, hedges, heavy growth of grass or weeds, fences, structures,
pavement, debris, and rubbish of any nature, natural obstructions or such
1 material, which in the opinion of the Engineer is unsuitable for the foundation of
embankments, pavements, or other required structures, including the disposal
from the project of all spoil materials.
placement of
When Owner designates a disposal site or designates 1. 9 P 9 P
stripping and topsoil in landscape or other areas, this work shall also
include placement of stripping, topsoils and useable materials, resulting
from clearing and grubbing.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS:
A. All materials used in conjunction with this work shall be considered incidental to
1 the work.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION:
1 A. The areas denoted on the plans to be cleared and grubbed under this item shall
be staked on the ground prior to construction. The clearing and grubbing shall
1 be approved by the testing agency prior to any grading operations.
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION SITE CLEARING: 02230
PAGE 2 SEP 00
B. All spoil materials removed by clearing and grubbing shall be disposed of by
removal from the site by the Contractor at no additional cost to the owner or
placed as approved by the Engineer. Topsoil shall be segregated in the
Contractor's removal operation. Stockpiled for use in the landscape areas,
segregation and acceptance of this material shall be approved by the landscape
architect.
C. As far as practicable, waste asphaltic concrete and masonry shall be removed ,
from the site, however, isolated pieces 8" or smaller may be placed in
embankments. When embankments are constructed of such material, this
material shall be placed in accordance with the section, "Earthwork ".
1. Any broken asphaltic concrete or masonry which cannot be used in
construction and all other materials not considered suitable for use
elsewhere, shall be disposed of by the Contractor.
2. In no case shall any discarded materials be left in windrows or piles
adjacent to or within the project limits.
3.2 BLASTING
A. Blast will not be allowed. 1
3.3 EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES
A. The removal of existing structures and utilities required to permit orderly
progress of work, unless abandoned, shall be accomplished by local agencies,
unless otherwise shown on the plans. Abandoned structures and utilities shall
be removed by the contractor.
1. Whenever a telephone or power pole, pipeline, conduit, sewer, roadway,
or other utility is encountered and must be removed or relocated, the
Contractor shall notify the proper local authority or owner and attempt to 1
secure prompt action.
3.4 CLEARING AND GRUBBING t
A. In areas designated to be cleared and grubbed, all stumps, roots, buried logs,
brushes, grass, and other unsatisfactory materials shall be removed.
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION SITE CLEARING: 02230
SEP 00 PAGE 3
B. Tap roots and other projections over one and one -half (1-1/2) inches in diameter
shall be grubbed out to a depth of at least eighteen (18) inches below the
finished subgrade or slope elevations.
C. All holes remaining after the grubbing operation in embankment areas shall have
the sides broken down to flatten out the slopes, and shall be filled with
acceptable material, moistened and properly compacted in layers to the density
required in the Section "Earthwork ". The same construction procedure shall be
applied to all holes remaining after grubbing in the excavation areas where the
depth of holes exceeds the depth of the proposed excavation.
1
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION EARTHWORK: 02300
SEP 00 PAGE 1
1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This item shall consist of excavating, removing and satisfactorily disposing of
all materials within the limits of the work required to construct roads,
sidewalks, and other areas for drainage, building construction, or other
purposes in accordance with these specifications and in conformity with the
dimensions and typical sections shown on the plans and with the lines and
grades established by the Engineer as well as the geotech (see geotech
report) .
B. Classification: All material shall be defined as "Unclassified Excavation ", or
"Borrow Excavation ".
1 C. Unclassified Excavation: Unclassified excavation shall consist of the
excavation and disposal of all material, regardless of its nature, not otherwise
classified and included in the bid schedule under other pay items.
D. Borrow Excavation: Borrow excavation shall consist of excavation made from
borrow areas within the limits of the project outside the normal grading limits,
or from areas outside the project when specified.
1 PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS:
A. Any materials used in conjunction with this work shall be furnished by the
Contractor and will be considered incidental to the item.
B. When the volume of the excavation exceeds that required to construct the
embankments to the grades indicated, the excess shall be hauled off -site at
no additional charge to the owner.
1. When the volume of excavation is not sufficient for constructing the fill
to the grades indicated, the deficiency shall be supplied from borrow
sources at locations authorized by the Engineer.
C. Excavated Material: All suitable material taken from excavations shall be
used in the formation of embankment, subgrade, and for backfilling as
1 indicated on the plans or as directed by the Engineer.
1
EARTHWORK: 02300 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL 1
A. Earthwork and subgrade shall be completed as specified on the construction
plans and according to these specifications as well as the geotech (see
geotech report).
1. Finish grading for all pavement areas and building areas will be 1
required by the contractor, this shall include sidewalk areas.
2. Landscape areas will require final grading and placement of all topsoil. ,
Final grading shall be carried to the necessary depth to obtain the
specified depth of subgrade densification shown on the plans.
Likewise, on embankments, the depth of subgrade densification shall
be as shown on the lans or specified.
P P
3. Should the Contractor, through negligence or other fault, excavate
below the designated lines, he shall replace the excavation with
approved materials, in an approved manner and condition, at his own
expense. All excavating, moving, placing and depositing of all
materials are subject to approval by the Engineer and the Engineer
shall determine the suitability of material to be placed in
embankments.
4. All materials determined unsuitable shall be hauled off -site at no 1
additional charge to the owner. Topsoil shall not be used in fills or in
subgrades but shall be handled and placed as specified by the
Landscape Architect.
B. The Contractor shall inform and satisfy himself as to the character, quantity,
and distribution of all material to be excavated. No payment will be made for
any excavated material which is used for purposes other than those
designated. ,
1. All spoil areas shall be leveled to a uniform line and section and shall
present a neat appearance before project acceptance. 1
2. No additional payment will be made for haul of material on -site or off -
site.
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION EARTHWORK: 02300
SEP 00 PAGE 3
1 C. If existing pavement areas that will be left in place are damaged due to
hauling or to any other activity of the Contractor, they shall be replaced at the
1 Contractor's expense as directed by the Engineer. Those areas outside of
the pavement area which are disturbed due to the Contractor's operations
shall be restored to their original condition prior to final acceptance of the
1 project.
D. Spillage of excavation materials on paved areas shall be immediately cleaned
up by the Contractor. If required by the Engineer, cleanup shall include
brooming and flushing with water.
E. If it is necessary to interrupt existing surface drainage, sewers or
underdrainage, conduits, utilities, or similar underground structures, or parts
thereof, the Contractor shall be responsible for and shall take all necessary
precautions to protect and preserve or provide temporary services.
1. When such facilities are encountered, the Contractor shall notify the
Engineer, who shall arrange for their removal, if necessary.
1 2. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, satisfactorily repair all
damage to such facilities or structures which may result from any of his
operations during the period of the contract.
F. Where remaining ends of abandoned pipes or portions of other items partially
PP P P Y
removed under this specification would be left exposed, removal shall be
carried into the slope or below grade to furnish no evidence of their existence
in the finish surface. Remaining ends of sewer pipes and conduits shall be
1 capped or plugged in a watertight manner.
3.2 EXCAVATION
A. Excavation shall be performed as indicated on the contract plans to the lines,
grades, and elevation shown, or as directed by the Engineer, and shall be
' made so that the requirements for formation of embankments can be
followed.
1 1. During the process of excavation, the grade shall be maintained so
that it will be well drained at all times. Temporary drains and drainage
1 ditches shall be installed to intercept or divert surface water which may
cause damage to the project.
1
1
EARTHWORK: 02300 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 4 SEP 00
B. The Contractor shall make the distribution as indicated on the plans.
Widening or narrowing of the section and raising or lowering of the grade to
avoid haul will not be permitted. 1
1. The right is reserved to make minor adjustments or revisions in lines or
grades, if found necessary, as the work progresses due to
discrepancies in the plans or to obtain satisfactory construction.
C. The removal of existing utilities required to permit the orderly progress of 1
work, unless abandoned, will be accomplished by local agencies, unless
otherwise shown on the plans. All existing foundations shall be excavated
and removed.
D. The subgrade under areas to be paved shall be compacted to the depths and
to the densities at optimum moisture as shown on the plans or as specified in
the specifications.
1. When not otherwise shown or specified, excavate to a minimum depth
8 inches and compact to not less than ninety percent (92 %) of the
maximum dry density obtained from AASHTO T -99. 1
2. The ground surface which will be subgrade beneath floor slabs should
be compacted to a minimum ninety percent (92 %) of the maximum
dry density obtained from AASHTO T -99.
3. The contractor shall also proof roll the subgrade and obtain approval 1
from the engineer and testing agency prior to placement of the
aggregate base.
1
E. No payment or measurement for payment will be made for suitable materials
removed, manipulated, and replaced in order to obtain density. Any removal, 1
manipulation, aeration, replacement, and recompaction of suitable materials
necessary to obtain the required density shall be considered as incidental to
the excavation and embankment operations, and shall be performed by the
Contractor at no additional cost to the project.
F. Stones, rock fragments, or crushed asphalt concrete larger than eight (8) 1
inches in their greatest dimension will not be permitted in the top one (1) foot
of the specified subgrade.
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION EARTHWORK: 02300
SEP 00 PAGE 5
1 G. In cuts, all loose or protruding rocks on the back slopes shall be barred loose
or otherwise removed to line or finished grade of slope. All cut - and -fill slopes
1 shall be uniformly dressed to the slope, cross section, and alignment shown
on the plans or approved by the Engineer.
1 3.3 INCIDENTAL CONSTRUCTION
1 A. The excavation work to be done under the contract shall include the
excavation of such ditches and channel changes as may be called for by the
plans or as may be needed for proper drainage or for proper handling of
drainage water, irrigation waters and other waters in the vicinity of the
project.
1. It shall also include the construction of approaches, random fills and
other items incidental to the work, wherever such are ordered by the
Engineer.
B. Each ditch, channel change, approach, random fill or other incidental item
shall be constructed to such cross section, alignment and grade as the
1 Engineer may establish.
1. The materials excavated in connection with the construction of such
items and not needed for other purposes shall be used in the
construction of embankments or disposed of in such other manner as
approved by the Engineer.
3.4 PREPARATION OF EMBANKMENT AREA
1 A. Operations on earth work shall be suspended at any time when satisfactory
results cannot be obtained because of rain, freezing weather, or other
unsatisfactory conditions of the field. The Contractor shall drag, blade, or
slope the embankment to provide proper surface drainage.
1 1. Frozen material shall not be placed in the embankment nor shall
embankment be placed upon frozen material.
1 B. The material in the layers shall be of the proper moisture content before
rolling to obtain the prescribed compaction. Wetting or drying of the material
and manipulation when necessary to secure a uniform moisture content
throughout the layer shall be required.
EARTHWORK: 02300 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 6 SEP 00
1. Should the material be too wet to permit proper compaction or rolling,
all work on all portions of the embankment thus affected shall be
delayed until the material has dried to the required moisture content. 1
2. Sprinkling shall be done with approved equipment that will sufficiently
distribute the water. Sufficient equipment to furnish the required water
shall be available at all times.
3. Samples of all embankment materials for testing, both before and 1
after placement and compaction, will be taken at frequent intervals.
From these tests, corrections, adjustments and modifications of
methods, materials, and moisture content shall be made to construct
the embankment.
C. Engineered fill should be compacted in horizontal lifts not exceeding 8 inches
using standard compaction equipment. Engineered fill placed during rough
grading operations will be compacted to at least 95% of the maximum dry 1
density as determined by ASTM D1557 or equivalent. This criteria may be
reduced to 85% in landscaping or planter areas
1. Where the ASTM D 2922 and D 3017, or D1556 compaction test is 111
not applicable, compaction shall be performed by making a minimum
of six passes with a grid roller weighing not less than 16,000 pounds,
pulled with a D -7 dozer or equivalent. Water shall be applied as
needed. i
D. During construction of the embankment, the contractor shall route his
equipment at all times, both when loaded and when empty, over the layers as
they are placed and shall distribute the travel evenly over the entire width of
the embankment. The equipment shall be operated in such a manner that
cemented gravel or other chunky soil material will be broken up into small
particles and become incorporated with the other material in the layer.
E. There will be no separate measurement or payment for compacted
1
embankment, and all costs incidental to placing in layers, compacting,
discing, watering, mixing, sloping, and other necessary operations of the
embankments will be included in the contract price for excavation. 1
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION EARTHWORK: 02300
SEP00 PAGE7
1 3.6 EQUIPMENT
1 A. The Contractor may use any type of earthmoving, compaction, and watering
equipment he may desire or has at his disposal, provided the equipment is in
a satisfactory condition and is of such capacity that the construction schedule
can be maintained as planned by the Contractor and as approved by the
Engineer in accordance with the total calendar days or working days allowed
in the proposal of construction.
1. The Contractor shall furnish, operate and maintain such equipment as
is necessary to control uniform density, layers, section, and
smoothness of grade.
1 3.7 PREPARATION AND PROTECTION OF THE TOP OF THE SUBGRADE
A. On areas to be paved, the specified depth in cut areas and the top of
1 embankment shall be compacted to the density specified. When completed,
the surface shall be true to the lines, grades, and cross section shown on the
plans or as directed by the Engineer.
1. After all drains, structures, ducts, and other underground
appurtenances along the edges or under the pavement have been
completed, the subgrade shall be compacted to the depth and density
specified.
1 2. Any irregularities or depressions that develop under rolling shall be
corrected by loosening the material at these places and adding,
removing, or replacing material until the surface is smooth and
uniform.
B. At all times, the top of the subgrade shall be kept in such condition that it will
drain readily and effectively. In handling materials, tools, and equipment, the
Contractor shall protect the subgrade from damage. In no cases will vehicles
1 be allowed to travel in a single track.
1. If ruts are formed, the subgrade shall be reshaped and rolled.
1 Damage to the subgrade caused by the contractor shall be repaired at
no additional cost to the owner. Until the subgrade has been checked
and approved, no subbase, base, surface course or pavement shall be
laid thereon.
1
1
EARTHWORK: 02300 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 8 SEP 00
2. When the subgrade has been approved it shall be the contractor's 1
responsibility to protect and repair the subgrade as necessary at no
additional cost to the owner.
3.8 HAUL
A. No a ment will be made
p y ade separately or directly for haul on any part of the
work. All hauling will be considered a necessary and incidental part of the
work and its cost shall be considered by the Contractor and included in the
contract unit price for the pay items of work involved.
3.9 TOLERANCES 1
A. In those areas upon which a subbase or base course is to be placed, the top
of the subgrade shall be of such smoothness that;
1. When tested with a sixteen (10) foot straightedge applied parallel and
at right angles to the centerline, it shall not show any deviation in 1
excess of one -half (1/2) inch;
2. Or shall not be more than 0.05 foot from true grade as established by 1
grade hubs or pins.
3. Any deviation in excess of these amounts shall be corrected by 1
loosening, adding, or removing materials, reshaping, and
recompacting by sprinkling and rolling.
B. On shoulders, intermediate or other designated areas, the surface shall be of
such smoothness that it will not vary more than 0.10 of a foot from true grade
as established by grade hubs. Any deviation in excess of this amount shall
be corrected by loosening, adding, or removing materials, and reshaping at
no additional cost to the owner. 1
3.10 FINISHING:
A. All side slopes in excavation and fills shall be trimmed and shaped as 1
specified herein and shall be made free of all exposed roots and debris and
of all stones exceeding two (2) inches in size which are loose or liable to
become loosened.
1. Embankments need not be finished to a fine degree of perfection, but
shall be made as smooth, safe and sightly as practicable with the
compatibility of materials used in construction of the embankments.
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION EARTHWORK: 02300
SEP 00 PAGE 9
1 2. If directed by the Engineer, embankment slopes flatter than four to one
and constructed of rocky material shall be covered with a layer of
1 earth, talus or other fine material.
B. In the vicinity of bridge ends, culvert ends, inlets, walls, etc., all extraneous
1 matter shall be removed and the areas shaped and trimmed as directed.
C. All materials removed in connection with the above operations shall be
1 disposed of in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer.
1 END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL: 02316
SEP 00 PAGE 1
PARTI GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Excavation, bedding, backfill and removal or disposal of material as necessary in
installation of water lines and appurtenances, sewer lines and appurtenances,
conduits, conductors, culverts and any other installation requiring trenching.
1 1. Work includes, but is not limited to, sheeting, bracing, dewatering,
disposal of unsuitable materials, and importing approved bedding or
1 backfill material.
2. Work to be done in strict accordance with these specifications or as
' shown on drawings and in conformity with lines, grades, and dimensions
given by Engineer.
B. Unless otherwise provided in Contract, other work required under this item to
include removal of structures or portions thereof, grubbing of structure sites
which otherwise would not be grubbed, construction of subsequent removal of
' shoring or cofferdams, dewatering of excavated areas, protection of excavated
materials from weather and placement and compaction of excavated or imported
' material. Work done under this item to conform to all federal, state and local
safety regulations.
1 PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS:
1 A. Excavation Classification: All material excavated to be defined as "Unclassified
Excavation ".
1. Unclassified excavation to consist of excavation and disposal of all
material, regardless of its nature, not otherwise classified and included in
1 bid schedule under other pay items.
B. Bedding: bedding of pipes, conduits, cables and structures to be as shown on
' Plans or as directed by Engineer and to conform to following classifications.
bedding material to be placed in maximum eight inch lifts and thoroughly
1 compacted over full width of trench. Samples of proposed materials to be
submitted to Engineer for approval.
1
1
TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL: 02316 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
1. Fine Bedding: Fine bedding material to be any non - plastic, granular
material which will pass 100% on a 3/4 inch minus sieve and retain at
least 50% on a No. 16 sieve, such as pit run gravel or sand, or non-
plastic soil excavated from trench.
2. Coarse Bedding: Coarse bedding material to be crushed or pit run gravel 1
which will pass 100% on a 2 inch sieve and retain at least 50% on a
inch sieve. material to be non - plastic and not more than 3% to pass on a
#200 sieve.
C. Backfill:
1
1. Class B backfill to be used in all other locations where Class A backfill is
not designated. Material used for Class B backfill to be earth, sand,
gravel, rock or combinations thereof, free of humus, organic matter,
vegetable matter, frozen material, clods, sticks, and debris and containing
no stones having a dimension greater than three inches. materials to 1
predominate in finer sizes and, in place, to present no voids and no
isolated points or areas of larger stones which would cause fracture or
denting of utility or structure or subject it to undue stress. Backfill material
to have a minimum dry unit weight of 90 pounds per cubic foot in its
compacted state.
2. Class A backfill '
ac Ito be used under paved areas, in trenches parallel to
streets, other areas subject to wheel traffic, at structures or as designated
on plans. backfill material to be 3/4 inch minus crushed aggregate as
specified in section 02316. Top of rock elevation to be held down at
specified depth in areas designated to receive asphalt paving. All Class A
backfill will be placed in eight inch lifts and compacted to 95% maximum
dry density per ASTM D -698 (standard proctor).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR UTILITY PROPERTIES AND 1
SERVICES:
A. At points where Contractor's operation could cause damage or interference to
railway, telegraph, telephone, television, power, oil, gas, water, irrigation, or
other private, public or municipal utilities, Contractor to suspend work until all
arrangements necessary for protection thereof have been made by Contractor.
1
1
1
•
1 TOC BUILDING ADDITION TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL: 02316
SEP 00 PAGE 3
1 B. Contractor to notify all utility offices which are affected by construction operation
at least 48 hours in advance of excavation. Under no circumstances Contractor
' to expose or interrupt any utility without first requesting permission and being
granted to do so from affected agency.
1 1. Contractor to be responsible, once permission from utility has been
granted, to locate, if necessary, and expose all of existing underground
utilities in advance of trenching operation.
' C. Contractor to be solely and directly responsible to Owner and utility companies
Y Y P tY P
for any damage, expense, or claims of any kind brought because of injuries,
damages or delay which may result from carrying out of work to be done under
Contract.
1 D. In event of interruption to domestic water or to other utility services as a result of
accidental breakage, or as a result of being exposed, unsupported, or a lack of
coordination, Contractor to promptly notify Engineer and agency involved.
Contractor to cooperate with said authority in restoration of service as promptly
as possible and to bear any and all costs of repair.
' 1. Interruption of water or utility service not to be allowed to exist outside
working hours unless prior approval of Engineer or agency involved is
1 granted.
E. Neither Owner nor its officers or agents to be responsible to Contractor for
1 damages as a result of location of underground utilities being other than that
shown on plans or for existence of underground utilities not shown on plans.
3.2 FIELD RELOCATION
A. During construction, minor relocations of line may be necessary. Such
relocations to be made only with approval from Engineer. Unforeseen
obstructions encountered as a result of such relocations will not become subject
' to claims for additional compensation by Contractor to any greater extent that
original lump sum of contract or unit price of utility being installed.
1 3.3 OPENING TRENCHES
A. Contractor not to begin trench excavation until necessary material is on hand to
1 complete work involved.
1
1
TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL: 02316 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 4 SEP 00
1. Trenches to be opened in accordance with lines and grades given for 1
work, at such times and as far in advance of work as may be required by -
Engineer. 1
2. Not more than a total of 300 feet of trench to be opened in advance of
completed utility unless authorized by Engineer. Related structures must
be completed and backfilled at time of line installation.
3.4 BARRICADES, GUARDS AND SAFETY PROVISIONS: 1
A. To protect persons from injury and to avoid property damage, adequate
barricades, construction signs, warning lights, and guards as required to be
placed and maintained during progress of work and until it is safe for public use.
1. Watchmen or flag personnel to be provided as necessary. 111
2. Rules and regulations of all local and Federal authorities regarding safety
1
provisions to be observed. Contractor will be solely responsible for
accidents caused by inadequate or insufficient safety provisions.
3.5 PAVEMENT REMOVAL
A. All bituminous and concrete pavements, regardless of thickness to be cut with a 1
saw or other approved device prior to excavation. Width of pavement to be cut
equal to prescribed width of trench at ground surface or as shown on plans.
1. Pavement removed during excavation to be piled separately from other
excavation materials and removed from site. Pavement not to be used
as backfill material. Uneven pavement edges to be sawcut before
patching pavement.
3.6 OBSTRUCTIONS 1
A. This item refers to obstructions which may be encountered and do not require
1
replacement.
1. Obstructions to construction of trench such as tree roots, stumps, 1
abandoned piling, buildings and concrete structures, Togs, rubbish, and
debris of all types to be removed without additional compensation from
Owner.
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL: 02316
SEP 00 PAGE 5
1 2. Engineer may, if requested, make changes in trench alignment to avoid
major obstructions, if such alignment changes can be made within
1 perpetual easement and right -of -way and without adversely affecting
intended function of facility or increase costs to Owner. Sewer and water
trenches must be maintained at a minimum specified separation,
1 however.
1 3.7 INTERFERING STRUCTURES OR ROADWAYS
A. Contractor to remove, replace and /or repair any damage done by Contractor
during construction to fences, buildings, cultivated fields, drainage crossings, and
any other properties at his own expense without additional compensation from
Owner.
1 1. Contractor to replace or repair these structures to a condition as good or
better than their original condition prior to commencing work in area.
' B. Where paved roadways are cut, backfill will be Class A as defined hereinbefore.
New pavement to be equal or better than existing paved surface and not to
1 deviate by more than one - quarter inch from existing finish elevation.
C. If Contractor encounters existing structures which will prevent construction and
1 are not adequately shown on plans, he is to notify Engineer before continuing
with work in order that Engineer may make such field revisions as necessary to
' avoid conflict with existing conditions.
1. cost of waiting or "downtime" during such field revisions to be borne by
1 Contractor without additional cost to Owner or liability to Engineer.
2. If Contractor fails to so notify Engineer when a conflict of this nature is
' encountered, but proceed with construction despite this interference, he
will do so at his own risk with no additional payment.
3.8 EASEMENTS
A. Any damage to private property, either inside or outside limits of easements
1 provided by Owner, to be responsibility of Contractor.
1. Before final payment will be authorized by Engineer, Contractor will be
' required to furnish Owner with written releases from property owners
where special agreements or easements have been obtained by
Contractor or where Contractor's operations for any reason, have not
been kept within construction right -of -way obtained by Owner.
1
1
TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL: 02316 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 6 SEP 00
2. Any such special agreements must be in written form and not to involve 1
Owner or Engineer as to liabilities in any way.
3.9 GRADES
A. Bottom of trench to be excavated to lines and grades shown on plans or 1
established by Engineer with proper allowance for pipe thickness and required
bedding. Any trench excavated below grade to be returned to grade at
Contractor's expense, with fine bedding material.
1. Bedding to be placed over full width of trench in thoroughly compacted
layers as previously specified herein. Grades to be smooth without
humps or sags.
B. Engineer to be notified with reasonable notice in advance when a section has
been excavated and is ready for installation of utility line or structure. Engineer
at that time will make a determination as to suitability of excavation foundation '
and will give notice to Contractor to proceed or remove unstable material as
covered in "Foundation Stabilization ".
3.10 WIDTH OF TRENCH
A. Trenches to be excavated to a sufficient width to permit proper installation of 1
piping, conduits or related improvements.
1. For installation of utilities or conduits, minimum width of trenches to be 18
inches.
2. For purposes of payment, maximum width of trench to be two feet plus 1
inside diameter of pipe, culvert or conduit.
B. In cases where excessive width of excavation would cause damage to an
adjacent structure, trench not to be excavated in excess of minimum width as
specified herein or detailed on drawings. 1
3.11 BORING
A. Boring may be used as an approved method in lieu of open trench excavation if
PP P
approved by Engineer. Contractor to first show just cause and furnish Engineer
with a detailed construction schedule outlining methods, time schedule and
proposed safety measures to be incorporated in construction.
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL: 02316
SEP 00 PAGE 7
1 1. Upon receiving approval, Contractor will not deviate from his proposed
schedule without first obtaining approval of Engineer and other respective
1 agencies involved in that portion of work.
3.12 DE- WATERING
A. Whenever water is encountered in trench or excavation area, Contractor to pump
' or otherwise dry bottom of trench or excavated area before pipe or conduit
installation is commenced.
' 1. Contractor not to allow water encountered in trench or excavated area to
escape down any pipe or conduit in place unless he first obtains written
approval from Engineer for this method of de- watering.
' 2. Contractor will be responsible for cleaning and /or flushing as required,
complete pipe, conduit, or structure. Any soil, aggregate or other foreign
matter in utility prior to acceptance must be removed at Contractor's
expense prior to final acceptance of work.
1 3.13 SHORING AND SHEATHING
A. Contractor to use whatever means necessary to maintain safe working
1 conditions and protect adjacent property and structures from damage due to
excavation. Contractor to conform to all federal, state and local regulations
' governing shoring, sheathing and excavation.
1. When shoring or sheathing is installed, trench width to be increased
t accordingly. Shoring or sheathing to remain in place until utility or
structure is backfilled to a point where caving could not damage
installation.
' 2. No payment will be made for shoring or sheathing. All costs involved in
placement and removal of shoring and sheathing to be considered
incidental to work.
3.14 LOCATION OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS
no so as material I
A. During excavation Contractor to locate excavated m a not to block any
public right -of -way, traveled roadways, public or private; and unless otherwise
approved by Engineer, roadways to be kept open to at least one lane of traffic.
1
1
1
TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL: 02316 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 8 SEP 00
1. Contractor to store or waste excavated materials only in designated areas 1
unless otherwise approved by Engineer. Utmost care to be taken to
prevent spillage or damage to property adjacent to project. '
B. Excavated materials unsuitable for backfill as described herein or not required to
meet original or specified grades to be removed as soon as possible or at least
by completion of backfill.
1. No utilities will be considered for payment until these surplus materials 11
have been removed and backfill completed as specified hereinbefore or
as otherwise directed by Engineer. No additional payment will be made to
contractor for disposal of excess materials.
3.15 FOUNDATION STABILIZATION
A. When in opinion of Engineer, existing material in bottom of trench or excavated
area is unsuitable for supporting pipe, conduit or structure or related
appurtenances, excavation below flowline of pipe or base of other structure to be
executed to a suitable depth as directed by Engineer. Backfill of excavated area
to be performed as specified under Coarse Bedding. 1
3.16 MAINTENANCE OF BACKFILL
A. Notwithstanding type of backfill placement, back
filled typ p e t, bac filled trench or excavation
surface to be maintained until all construction has been completed and accepted
by Owner and Engineer. This maintenance to include but not be limited to
addition of backfill in settled areas and surface rock or pavement in roadways to
keep trench reasonably smooth and free from excessive ruts and potholes.
END OF SECTION
11
11
1
0
0
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION WATERING: 02336
SEP 00 PAGE 1
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Furnishing and applying water required for following:
1. Compaction and preparation of excavations, embankments,
subgrades, subbases, base courses and surfacings.
2. Alleviation or prevention of dust nuisance and
1 3. Any other use which is deemed necessary and ordered by Engineer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Water used in work to be free of silts and other materials deleterious to
quality of material to which it is applied or with which it is mixed.
' B. Unless otherwise specified in Special Provisions, Contractor to make all
P P
necessary arrangements for obtaining water and to pay all costs involved in
1 its procurement.
1 1. Contractor to furnish, install and maintain equipment necessary to
pump, haul and place water. An adequate supply of water to be
maintained at all times.
1 PART 3 EXECUTION
' 3.1 ENGINEER'S DIRECTION
A. Watering work at all times to be subject to control of Engineer. It is to be done
1 only when and where directed by Engineer, rates of application to be as he
directs, and manner of application to meet with his approval.
B. Watering to be performed at any hour of day and on any day of week that
Engineer may determine necessary for proper performance or protection of
work and for adequate alleviation of dust nuisance.
1
1
1
WATERING: 02336 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
1. Wastage of water or watering which is detrimental to other work to be
avoided and such operations ceased until Engineer determines what
corrective measures to be taken.
3.2 EQUIPMENT
Watering to be by means of tank trucks equipped with spray bars, by hose and
nozzle or by other means, any and all of which shall insure uniform and controlled
application.
END OF SECTION II
11
11
1
11
11
11
1
1
11
1
1
n
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION EROSION SEDIMENTATION CONTROL: 02370
SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
' A. An Erosion /Sedimentation Control (ESC) Plan is required on this project.
Implementation of the ESC Plans and the construction, maintenance,
replacement, and upgrading of these ESC facilities is responsibility of
' Contractor until all construction is completed and approved and
vegetation /landscaping is established. See also as a requirement geotech
report.
B. Boundaries of clearing limits shown on this plan shall be clearly flagged in the
field prior to construction. During the construction period, no disturbance
1 beyond the flagged clearing area shall be permitted. The flagging shall be
maintained by the contractor for the duration of the construction.
1 C. The ESC facilities shown on this plan must be constructed in conjunction with
all rough grading and site utility construction, in such a manner as to ensure
' that sediment and sediment laden water do not enter the drainage system,
roadways, or violate applicable water standards.
' D. The ESC facilities shown on this plan are the minimum requirements for
anticipated site conditions. During the construction period, these ESC
facilities shall be upgraded as needed for unexpected storm events or site
' conditions to ensure that sediment and sediment laden water do not leave
the site.
1 PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
' A. All materials used in conjunction with this work shall be considered incidental
to the work.
PART 3 EXECUTION
1 3.1 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE
A. The ESC facilities shall be inspected daily by the contractor and maintained
as necessary to ensure their continued functioning.
1
1
EROSION SEDIMENTATION CONTROL: 02370 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
B. At no time shall more than one foot of sediment be allowed to accumulate 1
within a trapped catch basin. All catch basins and conveyance systems shall
be cleaned prior to paving. The cleaning operation shall not flush sediment 1
laden water into the downstream system.
C. Stabilized construction entrances will be constructed at the beginning of 1
construction by the owner's phase IV Infrastructure contractor. These
entrances shall be maintained by the contractor of this project for the duration
of the project. Additional measures may be required to ensure that all paved
areas adjacent to the project are kept clean for the duration of the project.
D. Sediment fences and straw bale barriers shall be removed when they have
served their useful purpose and when approved by the engineer, but not
before the upslope area has been permanently stabilized. Sediment fences
and straw bale barriers installed by others will be removed by those who
installed the materials.
E. Construction and maintenance of graveled construction entrances, temporary
sediment fences, and straw bale sediment barriers shall follow the guidelines
established in the City of Portland's "EROSION CONTROL PLANS
TECHNICAL GUIDANCE HANDBOOK ".
F. All erosion control work shall follow the guidelines established in the 11
"EROSION CONTROL PLANS TECHNICAL GUIDANCE HANDBOOK ".
G. All materials shall be in good physical condition to provide proper sediment 11
retention.
H. Sediment fences and barriers shall be inspected by the contractor 11
immediately after each rainfall and at least daily during prolonged rainfall.
Any required repairs shall be made immediately. 1
END OF SECTION 11
11
11
D
0
1
I TOC BUILDING ADDITION WATER DISTRIBUTION: 02510
SEP 00 PAGE 1
1
PART 1 SUMMARY
I 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
I A. Drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this
section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION
1 A. This work shall consist of the construction of water supply lines, service lines,
valves, fire hydrants and other incidental items necessary for the complete
1 installation of a domestic water supply system.
1. All work shall conform to applicable sections of the current Oregon
I State Plumbing Code, Oregon State Health Division Administrative
Rules for Domestic Water Supply Systems, A.W.W.A. standards, and
City of Tigard standards.
I PART 2 PRODUCTS
I 2.11 MATERIALS
I A. General: Material types, sizes and classes will be as shown on the plans or
as specified herein.
I B. Pipe:
1. Ductile Iron Pipe. Ductile iron pipe shall be Class 52, thin cement
I mortar Tined, push -on type joints in nominal 18' lengths, conforming to
AWWA C110 (ANSI A 21.51), AWWA C104 (ANSI A 21.4), and
AWWA CIII (ANSW 21.11), with a working pressure of not less than
I 250 psi and shall be manufactured by U.S. Pipe or Pacific States Cast
Iron Pipe or equivalent approved by Architect.
1 2. PVC Pressure Water Pipe. PVC pressure water pipe shall be of the
sizes designated on the drawings, and shall conform to AWWA
I Standard C 900 -81, Class 150, C.I. -size, rubber ring bell pipe.
3. Copper Tubing: One and one -half inches and smaller: Type "K" hard
1 tempered copper and wrought copper solder joint fittings.
1
1
WATER DISTRIBUTION: 02510 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
4. Copper Tubing: Two inches and larger: Type "K" hard drawn co
9 YP copper
and wrought copper solder joint fittings.
C. Fittings:
1. Ductile Iron Fittings. All tees, crosses, bends, reducers, combinations 1
thereof shall have a pressure rating of 125 psi and conform to AWWA
C151 (ANSI A 21.10) and AWWA C111 (ANSI A 21.11). Mortar lining
for fittings shall be the same thickness specified for pipe. All fittings
shall be mechanical joint unless specified otherwise.
2. Cast Iron Fittings for PVC Pipe. Cast iron fittings shall be Tyler Pipe
Industries, short-short body or equal, Class 250, manufactured and
tested in accordance with AWWA specifications C110 for Bell '
dimensions and cement lined in accordance with AVWVA C -104 with
bell ends for C -900 pipe.
D. Couplings:
1. Flexible Couplings. Flexible couplings shall be Dresser, Smith - Blair, or
approved equal, ductile iron couplings for Ductile Iron Pipe or
equivalent.
2. PVC Couplings. PVC couplings shall be Ring -tite, Fluid -Tite, or an
approved equal type with rubber ring gaskets.
1
E. Waterline Valves - 2 Inches to 10 Inch: All valves from two inches to 10 inch
in size shall be iron body gate bronze - mounted, double disc, parallel seat,
NBR valves with o -ring seals, rated at 200 psi working pressure, non - rising
stems, two inch square operating nut, conforming to AVVWA C -500. "0" ring
C509 -80, packing shall contain manufacturer's name and model number.
1. All valves shall opened by counter - clockwise rotation. Smaller valves
shall be as specified on drawings.
F. Waterline Valves Larger than 10 Inch Size:
1. All waterline valves, larger than 10 -inch shall be butterfly valves.
2. Butterfly valves shall be the rubber seated type, suitable for direct -
burial service and suitable for 150 psi working pressure and 150 psi
pressure differential across the valve. Valve ends shall be mechanical
joint, unless otherwise specified. Furnish all joint accessories with
valve. ;
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION WATER DISTRIBUTION: 02510
SEP 00 PAGE 3
1 3. Valve shall be equipped with iron body and either 304 stainless
circular shaft or high - tensile steel hexagon shaft with 304 stainless
steel journals. Shaft and disc seals shall be designed for a bottle -tight
seal.
1 4. Valve disc shall be either cast iron alloy conforming to ASTM A 436,
Type!, or chrome edge cast iron with Buna -N rubber seat bonded to
' the valve body, or shall be cast iron with rubber disc seat and 304
stainless steel body seat integrally cast into the valve body.
5. Valve operator shall be as specified below. Except as herein noted,
the butterfly valve shall conform to AWWA C504 -70 for Class 150B.
6. The butterfly valve shall be furnished with totally enclosed, integral
' valve operator design to withstand a minimum of 300 foot -pound input
torque without damage to the valve or operator.
7. Operators shall be fully gasketed and greased packed and designed to
withstand submersion in water to a pressure of 10 psi.
1 8. Valves shall open with a counterclockwise rotation of an AWWA nut.
A minimum of 30 turns of the operating nut shall be required to move
the disc from a fully opened position to a fully closed position.
1 Operators shall have two -inch square wrench nut.
' 9. Joint materials for mechanical joint or push -on joint for cast iron pipe
shall conform to AWWA C111.
10. Joint materials for flanged joints shall consist of 1/8 inch thick, full -
faced, one - piece, cloth inserted, rubber gaskets conforming to Section
7 of AWWA C207.
1 11. Bolts and nuts shall conform to Section 8 of AWWA C207.
G. Corporation Stops: Corporation stops shall be Mueller, with AWWA taper
threaded CC inlet, and compression connection outlet.
1 H. 90 Ellis: Ford type L- 14 -33, 114-44 or equivalent. Must have female iron pipe
thread inlet, and compression type outlet.
1 1 . Angle Valve: Angle valves shall be Mueller H- 14255.
1
1
1
WATER DISTRIBUTION: 02510 TOC BUILDING ADDITION I
PAGE 4 SEP 00
J. Meter Boxes: Brooks No. 4 meter box for 1" and smaller meters, including I
concrete lid w /C.l. reading lid or equivalent, in non - traffic areas. Reference
plan details for larger meter boxes. ,
A lid approved for traffic areas shall be installed in traffic locations.
K. Fire Hydrants: 5 1/4" valve openings, traffic style fire hydrant. 2 - 2 1/2"
N.S.T. hose nozzles, 1- 4 1/2" N.S.T. pumper nozzle. 6" mechanical joint I
inlet. Depth of bury to match plan.
1. 1 1/2" national pentagon operating nut with o -ring seals,
counterclockwise opening conforming to AWWA C502. Hydrants shall
be as approved by City of Tigard.
L. Wet Taps: Tapping sleeve shall be ductile iron for all size on size taps or as I
noted on drawings. All other tapping sleeves shall be epoxy coated steel.
M. Service Lines: Three - quarter inch through two and one half inch service pipe 1
shall be copper. Three inch and larger service lines shall conform to the pipe
specifications shown above.
1
N. Backflow Preventers: Backflow preventers shall be equal in all respects to I
the Febco 806 double detector check, or CLA -VAL Model 16 double detector
check or as shown on drawings.
O. Valve Boxes: Valve boxes shall be Rich 926 -C, 18 -inch top 24 -inch bottom, 1
two piece sliding type cast iron with 5 1/4" and shall be Mueller H -10364 of
appropriate length for the installation. The word "water" shall be cast into the
I
top of the lid.
1. Extension stems for valve operators will be required where the pipe
1
cover is more than four feet. The extension stem shall be constructed
of steel and the operating nut shall be brought to a point 18 inches
below the surface of the ground or pavement.
1
2. Each hydrant shall have a shut -off valve between the mainline and the
hydrant. The valve shall be AWWA approved, as specified, and I
furnished with a traffic type valve box.
P. Gravel for Drainage: Gravel for drainage under fire hydrants and blow offs 1
shall be 3/4 inch round rock or graded river gravel free of organic matter,
sand, loam, clay or other fines.
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION WATER DISTRIBUTION: 02510
SEP 00 PAGE 5
' Q. Concrete for Thrust Blocking: Concrete for thrust blocking shall conform to
9 9
ASTM C 94, Alternative 2 and shall be proportioned to obtain a 28 -day
1 compressive strength of 3,000 pounds per square inch.
R. Pressure Test Equipment: The Contractor will provide the necessary
equipment and materials including mainline taps and stops required to
perform the pressure test. This item is considered incidental to the work and
there will be no specific compensation for pressure testing. The equipment
will include but not be limited to the following:
Clean barrel or similar container for test make -up water.
2. Pressure gauges for proper range.
3. Hydraulic force pump, suitable hose and suction pipe as required.
Y P P pp q
1 S. Disinfection: The Contractor will provide all equipment, material and labor
necessary to properly disinfect and test the completed work. This item is
1 considered incidental to the work and there will be no specific compensation
for disinfection. Proceed in accordance with ANSI /AWWA C651 standard.
T. Contractor's Responsibility for Materials:
I. The Contractor shall be responsible for all material furnished by him.
All such material which is defective in manufacture or has been
damaged after delivery shall be replaced by the Contractor at his
expense.
' 2. Responsibility for safe storage. The Contractor shall be responsible
for the safe storage of all material furnished to or by him and accepted
1 by him until it has been incorporated in the completed project and
accepted by the Owner.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 TRENCH EXCAVATION, BEDDING AND BACKFILL
A. Trench excavation, bedding and backfill shall conform to the requirements of
Section 02316.
1
1
1
WATER DISTRIBUTION: 02510 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 6 SEP 00
Placement: '
A. All pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades as r
shown on the drawings or staked in the field.
1. Fittings, valves, and hydrants shall be at the required locations and
with joints centered, spigots home and all valve and hydrant stems
plumb.
2. Butterfly valves with off -set operators shall be uniformly placed so that 1
the operator is closest to the edge of the roadway, if applicable.
3. No deviation shall be made from the required line or grade except with
approval of the Architect.
B. The interior of all pipe and accessories shall be kept free from dirt and foreign
matter at all times during the installation.
C. The installation recommendations of the various equipment or material
manufacturers shall be strictly adhered to, in addition to the following
requirements. The Contractor shall provide all special tools and devices such
as jacks, chokers and similar items necessary for the installation and cutting
of the pipe. 1
1. Preparation of trench bottom: Water pipe may be laid directly on the
trench bottom or on earth mounds as recommended by the
manufacturer. Provide adequate room for proper connections and
maintain correct grade and alignment. No pipe shall be laid in a wet or
frozen trench. Grade of trench bottom shall be uniform and smooth.
Humps and sags will not be tolerated.
2. Lowering pipe and accessories into trench: Proper implements, tools, 1
and equipment shall be provided by and used by the Contractor for the
safe and efficient handling of materials and execution of the work. All
pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and accessories shall be carefully
lowered into the trench using suitable equipment in such manner as to
prevent damage to pipe and fittings. Under no circumstances shall
pipe or accessories be dropped or dumped into the trench. 1
3. Jointing pipe shall be done in accordance with manufacturer's
specifications for the particular type of pipe to be installed. Pipe shall
not be deflected either vertically or horizontally in excess of that
recommended by the manufacturer. 1
1
1
TOC BUILDIN G ADDITION WATER DISTRIBUTION: 02510
SEP 00 PAGE 7
' 4. When i e lain is not in progress, the open ends of installed pipe
laying P 9 � e P PP
shall be closed by approved means to prevent entrance of trench
water, rodents or foreign material into the line. Pipe line installation
shall normally start at a low point and progress upgrade, particularly
1 with bell /spigot joint pipe.
5. Whenever water is excluded from the interior of the pipe, adequate
backfill shall be placed on the pipe to prevent floating. Any pipe which
has floated shall be removed from the trench and be relayed as
directed by the Architect.
6. Pipe lengths at rigid structures: When pipe enters or passes through a
rigid structure such as a concrete vault, a flexible joint in the pipe shall
1 be located not more than three feet three inches either way from the
structure or fittings. A seal ring shall be provided in such a case to
prevent water seepage alongside the pipe.
done Jointing pipe to fittings shall be do e in accordance with
manufacturer's specifications for the particular type of pipe and fitting
to be installed.
8. Water /sewer line crossings and separations shall be made in
accordance with the current requirements of the Oregon State Health
Department and the Department of Environmental Quality.
9. Non - metallic main line pipes shall have an electrical conductor such as
'Terra- Tape" installed above and centered on the pipe. The tape shall
1 be within 12" to 18" of the ground surface. If power, telephone or
similar utility cable are installed in main line trenches, additional
electrical conductors will not be required.
3.3 REACTION OR THRUST BLOCKING
1 A. Reaction or thrust blocking shall be applied at bends crosses, valves, caps,
tees, etc., and where changes in pipe diameter occur at reducers or in
1 fittings.
1. The design of concrete thrust blocking is shown in the thrust blocking
1 details and requirements on the drawings or standard detail sheets.
1
1
1
WATER DISTRIBUTION: 02510
TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 8 SEP 00
2. Concrete for thrust blocking hall meet the e requirements given
hereinbefore. Other types of joint restraint or reaction devices shall be
as shown on drawings.
B. Thrust blocking shall be placed between solid undisturbed ground and the
fitting to be anchored.
3.4 VALVE BOXES 1
A. Valve boxes as described hereinbefore shall be installed on all valves as
shown on standard details or the Drawings. Valve boxes shall be 1
permanently supported independent of the pipe. The valve boxes shall be
centered and plumb over the valve operator with the box cover flush with the
finished surface. 1
3.5 FIRE HYDRANTS AND BLOWOFFS
A. Fire hydrants and blowoffs y o s shall be constructed in accordance with the
standard details and at locations designated on the drawings.
B. Location: Fire hydrants and blowoffs shall be located as shown on the
drawings or designated by the Architect. 1
1. Unless noted otherwise, when placed behind the curb or sidewalk, the
hydrant bowl shall be set so that the hydrant or hose nozzle caps on '1
street side shall be 1'6" behind the back of walk, or 5 feet behind the
curb when no walk is present.
2. When placed adjacent to a roadway, without curbs, the hydrant shall
Y y
be located not less than five feet nor more than 10 feet from the
finished edge of pavement line. All hydrants and blowoffs shall stand
plumb.
3. Pumper nozzles shall be at right angles to and facing the curb or street 1
centerline in non -curb sections.
4. Hose nozzles shall be parallel to the curb or street centerline, but not 1
more than 18" above the finish grade or natural ground.
5. Excavation or mounding at the base of hydrant to conform with this
dimension will not be allowed.
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION WATER DISTRIBUTION. 02510
1 SEP 00 PAGE 9
C. Connection to main: Each hydrant shall be connected to the main with a six
inch gate valve, unless shown otherwise.
1. Lengths of pipe and use of couplings between main and valve and
1 valve and hydrants shall be as shown on the standard details or the
Drawings.
2. Each blowoff shall be connected to the main with a two inch minimum
pipe branch controlled by an independent two inch gate valve.
D. Drainage pits: A drainage pit two feet in diameter and two feet deep shall be
excavated below each hydrant and blowoff. The pipe shall be filled
completely with drainage gravel as hereinbefore specified, six inches above
1 the waste opening.
1. No hydrant or blowoff drainage pit shall be connected to a sewer.
There shall be no connections made to any hydrant or blowoff that
would allow back - siphonage into the distribution system.
2. The Contractor shall verify proper drainage of all fire hydrant barrels
and blowoff standpipes prior to final approval.
t j E. Thrust blocking: Thrust blocking, in accordance with the standard details in
the drawings, shall be provided and shall be so placed as not to obstruct the
drainage outlet of the hydrant or blowoff. Other types of joint restraint shall
be as noted on the drawings.
3.6 PLUGGING DEAD ENDS
A. Standard manufactured plugs or caps shall be used for plugging all dead end
1 fittings. Plugs and caps shall be properly installed and a thrust block
provided. The design of the thrust block shall be in accordance with the
standard details.
3.7 SERVICE CONNECTIONS
1 A. This item covers all work, materials, and equipment necessary to complete
the service connection from the main line to and including connection, if
1 applicable, to the user provided service line.
1
1
1
WATER DISTRIBUTION: 02510 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 10 SEP 00
1. Work shall include the furnishing and installation of mainline taps or
saddles, corporation stops, curb stops, meter if required, valve or
meter box as required, and necessary service pipe and couplings to
connect to the user provided service line.
2. Excavation, bedding and backfill shall be in accordance with Section 1
02316.
B. Work shall be performed in accordance with the specific manufacturer's 1
recommendations using the proper tools in good repair. Saddles or pipe taps
shall not be placed within one foot of a pipe joint or other tap. Service lines
or materials damaged before acceptance shall be removed and replaced by
and at the expense of the Contractor.
C. Valve and meter boxes shall be installed in accordance with the standard
details. The top of the box shall be flush with finish grade. The box shall be
plumb and centered and firmly supported independent of the pipe. 1
D. Corporation stops, if specified, shall be in the open position and curb stops or
meter stops shall be closed before the line is backfilled.
E. A four foot length of two by four wood stake shall be placed two feet in the
ground adjacent to the valve or meter box, or end of the service line. The two
by four shall be painted green and bear the letters "WS" for water service.
3.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS 1
A. Contractor to furnish and install the backflow prevention assembly in
accordance with current standards of the Oregon Health Division and the City
of Tigard. Contractor shall provide the backflow preventer device, including
valves, piping, supports, vault, vault drain, etc. as required to provide a
complete, connected and operational system.
1. Contractor shall complete the Oregon Health Division standard 1
performance test. The test shall be completed by an Oregon Certified
Tester. 1
3.9 PRESSURE TESTING OF THE NEW SYSTEM
A. Pressure and leakage tests shall be made on all newly laid pipe and /or 1
appurtenances. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary equipment and
material, make all taps in the pipe as required, and conduct the tests.
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION WATER DISTRIBUTION: 02510
SEP 00 PAGE 11
B. The test shall be conducted after the trench has been partially backfilled with
the joints left exposed for inspection, or when completely backfilled, as
permitted by the Architect. Where any section of pipe is provided with
concrete reaction blocking, the test shall not be conducted until at least seven
days have elapsed after the concrete thrust blocking is installed. If high -early
cement is used for the concrete thrust blocking, the time may be cut to two
days.
C. Final pressure and leakage tests shall be delayed until all trench excavation
for other utilities, etc., included in the contract and within the limits of the test,
has been completed.
D. The hydrostatic pressure test shall be conducted in the following manner
unless otherwise approved by the Architect in accordance with ANSI /AVWVA
C600 standard:
I. After the trench has been backfilled or partially backfilled as specified
in Section 02224, all air shall be expelled from the system by slowly
filling the pipe with water. The pipe shall be filled a minimum of 24
hours prior to conducting the test.
2. The pump shall be connected to the pipe in a manner satisfactory to
the Architect, and the pressure in the system raised to 150 psi at the
lowest point in each valved section. The pump shall then be valved off
and the pressure held for a period of two hours.
3. At the end of the test period, the pump shall be operated until the test
pressure is again attained. The pump suction shall be in a barrel or
similar device, or metered so that the amount of water required to
restore the test pressure may be measured accurately.
4. The leakage shall be defined as the quantity of water necessary to
restore the specified test pressure at the end of the test period. No
pipe installation will be accepted if the leakage is greater than the
number of gallons per hour determined by the following formula:
L = ND (P)� /2
1 5,500
in which:
1
1
WATER DISTRIBUTION: 02510 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 12 SEP 00
L = allowable leakage in gallons per hour
9 9 P
N = number of joints in the length of pipe tested
D = nominal diameter of pipe in inches
P = average test pressure during the leakage test in pounds per
square inch i
5. Should any test of pipe laid disclose leakage greater than that allowed,
all defective joints or pipe shall be located, repaired, and retested at
Contractor's expense, until the leakage is within the specified
allowance.
3.10 DISINFECTION OF COMPLETED PIPE LINE
A. Before being placed in service, and before certification of completion by the
Architect, all new water systems, or extensions to existing systems, or any
replacement in existing water systems, shall be disinfected according to
AWWA C651 and current standards of the Oregon State Health Division as
hereinafter expanded. The tablet method as approved by AWWA may be
used in lieu of the following procedure, if approved by the Architect.
I. Flushing: Before sterilizing, all foreign matter shall be flushed from the
pipe lines and reservoirs, except when using the AWWA specified
table method. The Contractor shall provide hoses, temporary pipes,
ditches, etc., as required to dispose of flushing water without damage
to adjacent properties. Pipe flushing velocities shall be at least 2.5
fps. For larger diameter pipe where it is impractical or impossible to
flush the pipe at 2.5 fps velocity, the pipe line shall be cleaned in place
from the inside by brushing and sweeping, then flushed at a lower
velocity.
Where facilities are available, a scouring velocity of four feet per 1
second is recommended. The following table lists openings required
to develop velocities.
1
,1
1
1
1
I TOC BUILDING ADDITION WATER DISTRIBUTION: 02510
SEP 00 PAGE 13
1 TABLE 1
Required Openings to Flush Pipelines
I (40 -psi Pressure)
Pipe Size 2.5 fps 4 fps
(in.) Flushing Velocity Flushing Velocity
I Flow Orifice Flow
(gpm) In.) Hydrant Openings (gpm) Hydrant Openings
No. Size No. Size
I (in.) (in.)
I 4 100 15/16 1 2 -1/2 160 1 2 -1/2
6 220 1 -3/8 1 2 -1/2 350 1 2 -1/2
8 390 1 -7/8 1 2 -1/2 630 1 2 -1/2
I 10 610 2 -5/16 1 2 -1/2 980 2 2 -1/2
I 12 880 2 -13/16 1 2 -1/2 1400 2 2 -1/2
14 1200 3 -1/4 2 2 -1/2 1930 3 2 -1/2
i 16 1565 3 -5/8 2 2 -1/2 2510 3 2 -1/2
or: 1 4 -1/2
I 18 1980 4 -3/16 2 2 -1/2 3180 3 2 -1/2
I 2. Chlorination of pipelines: Before being placed into service, all new mains,
reservoirs, and repaired portions of extensions must be chlorinated so that a
I chlorine residual of at least ten parts per million remains in the water after 24
hours standing in the pipe. This residual may ordinarily be expected with an
initial application of 25 parts per million although some conditions may require
I more. Ineffective preliminary flushing of the main may require a larger
application of chlorine to produce the desired residual. A mixture of water
I and a chlorine- bearing compound of known chlorine content may be used.
Acceptable chlorine bearing compounds and solutions necessary for an initial
25 ppm application are shown in Table 2. The amounts shown in Table 2
1 should be considered minimum quantities.
1
1
WATER DISTRIBUTION: 02510 TOC BUILDING ADDITION I
PAGE 14 SEP 00
TABLE 2 I
Amount Required to Give 25 PPM CL 1
Per 100 Feet of Pipe Length
Pipe Gal. per 1
Size 100 ft.
(In.) Length A B C D E
4 65.3 0.014 Ib. 0.02 Ib. 0.04 Ib. 0.03 gal. 0.01
gal. II
6 146.5 0.031 Ib. 0.05 Ib. 0.09 Ib. 0.07 gal 0.02
gal.
8 261.0 0.054 Ib. 0.08 Ib. 0.16 Ib. 0.12 gal. 0.04
gal.
10 408.0 0.085 Ib. 0.12 Ib. 0.24 Ib. 0.19 gal. 0.07
gal.
12 588.7 0.120 Ib. 0.18 Ib. 0.35 Ib. 0.28 gal. 0.10
gal.
1
A. 100% chlorine
B. High Test Calcium /Sodium Hypochlorite (65 -70% cl) 1
1. In lieu of injecting chlorine solutions by the above table, a chlorine gas -
water mixture may be applied by means of a solution feed chlorinating
device or dry gas may be fed directly through effective diffusion of the
gas into the water within the pipe being treated. Chlorinating devices
for feeding solutions of chlorine gas or the gas itself must provide
means for preventing the backflow of water into the chlorine cylinder.
a. Point of application: The preferable point of application of the
chlorinating agent is at the beginning of the pipe line or any
valved section and through a corporation stop in the top of the
pipe. The water injector for delivery of the gas -water mixture
into the pipe should be supplied from a tap on the pressure side
of the gate ^valve controlling the flow into the pipe line
extension. Chlorine or chlorine- bearing compounds, in powder I
form, can be mixed with enough water to be pumped or injected
into the pipe under the same conditions as above.
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION WATER DISTRIBUTION: 02510
SEP 00 PAGE 15
Valves should be manipulated so that the strong chlorine
solution in the new pipe will not flow back into the supply line.
Check valves may be used if desired.
b. Rate of application: Water from the existing distribution system
shall be controlled so as to flow slowly into the main to be
chlorinated. The feed rate of the chlorine mixture shall be in
such proportion that at least ten ppm residual may be obtained
after 24 hours. (The initial application should be at least 25
PPm)•
c. Retention period: Treated water shall be retained in the pipe
line long enough to destroy all non -spore forming bacteria. This
period should be at least 24 hours and chlorine residual of at
least ten ppm throughout the line should be obtained at the end
of the retention period.
Note: Shorter retention P eriods with increased chlorine
concentrations may be used under certain circumstances.
d. Chlorinating valves and hydrants: In the process of chlorinating
pipe lines, all valves should be operated while the pipe line is
filled with chlorinating agent.
e. Reservoirs and tanks, after being thoroughly cleaned, shall be
filled with a 50 mg /I chlorine solution for three hours or a 200
mg /I solution of free available chlorine may be sprayed or
brushed on and allowed to dry for three hours or the reservoir
may be filled with a 25 mg /I solution of free available chlorine for
24 hours. After chlorine treatment, the facilities shall be drained
and /or flushed with potable water. A reservoir having received
the sprayed or brushed on treatment need not be flushed.
f. Final flushing and bacteriological tests: Following a retention
period of 24 hours, all treated water in the main shall be
thoroughly flushed from the newly laid pipe line at its extremities
until the replacement water is of the same quality normally
served from the distribution system. The satisfactory quality of
water delivered from the new main must be verified by
bacteriological samples collected from points along the new
main. Samples should not be collected from unsterilized hoses.
1
1
WATER DISTRIBUTION: 02510 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 16 SEP 00
3. Disinfection of new work on existing pipelines or structures shall be
done in such a manner as to prevent contamination from entering the
distribution system. The following methods shall be employed in
addition to any other precautions the Contractor may take to prevent
the entrance into the system of contamination. The contractor shall
bear all liability and make all corrections necessary should the
distribution system become contaminated. f'
a. When old trenches are opened, liberal quantities of hypochlorite
will be applied to the open excavation. The trench shall be kept
dewatered during repairs to the old line or installation of the new
line.
b. The interior of all pipe and fittings to be used in the new 1
installation shall be swabbed with a five percent hypochlorite
solution before being installed.
c. The new installed line shall be thoroughly flushed from both ,1
directions if possible.
d. The completed line shall then be isolated and disinfected with
500 mg /I chlorine dosage for at least one -half hour.
e. After disinfection, the line shall again be flushed until the
discolored water is eliminated.
f. Bacteriological samples shall be taken on both sides of the
repair. Service connections shall not be reopened until
bacteriological test results indicate water is safe.
END OF SECTION 1
j
1
1
1 '
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION SANITARY AND STORM PIPE: 02531
SEP 00 PAGE 1
1 PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this
section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION:
A. This section covers all work necessary for the installation of sanitary sewer
and storm pipe, fittings and accessories of the sizes and classes indicated on
the drawings. All work shall conform to applicable sections of the current
Oregon State Plumbing Code, the Oregon Department of Environmental
Quality Standards and the City of Tigard.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS: SANITARY SEWER PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. General:
Sanitary sewer pipe shall have flexible gasket joints. Joints on all fittings
shall be the same as the joints used on the pipe. Caps or plugs shall be
furnished with each fitting, outlet, or stub as required with the same type
gasket and /or joint in the pipe.
B. Concrete Pipe:
1. Nonreinforced concrete pipe shall conform to requirements of ASTM
C14. Unless otherwise specified, pipe shall conform to Class 2 design
requirements.
2. Reinforced concrete, nonpressure pipe shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM C76 or C655 and shall be of the class
specified. Unless otherwise specified, pipe shall meet the design
requirements of Wall B. Reinforced concrete low head pressure pipe
shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C361.
1 3. Gaskets shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C443.
1
1
1
SANITARY AND STORM PIPE: 02531 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
4. All concrete i e must be at least seven days old before it can be
PP Y
installed, if it has been steam cured. If the pipe has not been steam
cured, it must not be used prior to curing for 21 days.
C. Ductile Iron Pipe: 1
Ductile iron pipe shall conform to the requirements of ANSI A21.50 -1 or
AWWA C150 -1, cement lined push -on joint. The minimum thickness class
shall be Class 50 (through 12 -inch diameter pipe) and Class 51 (for 14 -inch
diameter and larger pipe).
D. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC):
1. Type:
a. ASTM 3034 SDR 35 dia. 4 -15"
b. ASTM F -697 SDR 35 dia. 18 -24"
c. ASTM C -900; D -1784 DR 18 dia. 4 -12" 1
2. Gaskets shall conform to the requirements of ASTM 477 and ASTM
3212. Threaded connections shall conform to the requirements of
ASTM D2464 for schedule 80 pipe. Solvent welded joints shall
conform to the applicable requirements of ASTM D2466 and D2467. 1
E. Polyethylene (PE)(Smooth - wall): sip
1. Polyethylene pipe shall conform to the manufacturers specifications for
durability. It shall be premium high density polyethylene resin qualified
as Type III, Category 5, Class C, Grade P34 in ASTM D1248 -81 and
be listed by the plastic Pipe Institute as a PE 3408. The minimum wall
thickness shall be SDR 13.5.
2. All pipe and fittings will be joined together by the method of thermal
butt or socket fusion.
F. Fittings:
1. Tee fittings shall be provided in the sewer main for side sewers.
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION SANITARY AND STORM PIPE: 02531
SEP 00 PAGE 3
2. All fittings shall be of sufficient strength to withstand all handling and
load stresses encountered. All fittings shall be of the same materials
as the pipe unless otherwise approved.
3. Material joining the fittings shall be free from cracks and shall adhere
tightly to each joining surface.
4. All fittings shall be capped or plugged, and gasketed with the same
gasket material as the pipe joint, fitted with an approved mechanical
stopper, or have an integrally cast knockout plug. The plug shall be
able to withstand all test pressures without leaking, and when later
removed, shall permit continuation of piping with jointing similar to
joints in the installed line.
5. Concrete Pipe. Fittings shall be manufactured integrally and be of a
class at least equal to that of the adjacent pipe.
6. Ductile Iron. Fittings shall be mechanical or push-on of the class as
9 P
specified. Mechanical joint cast iron fittings shall conform to AVWVA
C110 and shall be of a class at least equal to that of the adjacent pipe.
Push -on joint fittings shall be gray iron with body thickness and radii of
curvature conforming to ANSI A21.10.
7. PVC Pipe. Fittings shall conform to the applicable portions of the
following specifications: ASTM D1785, ASTM D2729, ASTM D2466,
ASTM 2467, ASTM D3033, and ASTM D3034. Fitting joints shall be
the same as the pipe joints.
1 G. Grout:
Grout shall be of the nonshrinking type. Sika 212, Euco N -S, Five Star, or
approved equal nonmetallic cementitious commercial grout exhibiting zero
shrinkage per ASTM C -827 and CRD -C -621. Grout shall not be amended
with cement or sand and shall not be reconditioned with water after initial
mixing.
1
1
1
1
SANITARY AND STORM PIPE: 02531 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 4 SEP 00
H. Proof Test:
The Agency or City may require that a joint system be prequalified as to the ,111
watertightness capability of the joint system. Material and test equipment for
proof testing shall be provided by the manufacturer. When approved, internal
hydrostatic pressure may be applied by a suitable joint tester. Each pipe 1
material and joint assembly may be subject to the following three proof test at
the discretion of the Engineer.
1. Pipe in Straight Alignment. No less than three nor more than five
pipes selected from stock by the Agency or City Hall shall be
assembled according to the manufacturer's installation instructions
with the ends suitably plugged and restrained against internal
pressure. The pipe shall be subjected to ten psi hydrostatic pressure
for ten minutes. Free movement of water through the pipe joint wall
shall be grounds for rejection of the pipe.
2. Pipe in Maximum Deflected Position. A test section shall be described 1
hereinafter for each pipe material. The pipe shall be subjected to ten
psi hydrostatic pressure for ten minutes. Free movement of water
through the pipe joint or pipe wall shall be grounds for rejection of the
pipe. 1
3. Joints under Differential Load. The test section shall be supported on
blocks or otherwise as described hereinafter for each pipe material.
There shall be no visible leakage when the stressed joint is subjected
to ten psi internal hydrostatic pressure for ten minutes.
a. Concrete Pipe. For deflected position, a position one -half inch
wider than the fully compressed position, shall be created on
one side of the outside perimeter. For differential load one pipe
shall be supported so that it is suspended freely between
adjacent pipe bearing only on the joints. In addition to the
weight of the suspended pipe, a test load shall be added as
given in the following table:
1
1
1
1
I TOC BUILDING ADDITION SANITARY AND STORM PIPE: 02531
SEP 00 PAGE 5
I
I TEST LOADS FOR PIPES UNDER DIFFERENTIAL LOAD
Pipe Load Per Foot Laying Total Load for Pipe
Size Length Up to 4 Feet 4 Feet and Over
(Inches) (Pounds) (Pounds)
4 650 2,600
6 1,000 4,000
8 1,300 5,200
10 1,400 5,600
12 1,500 6,000
15 1,850 7,400
18 2,200 8,000
21 2,500 10,000
24 & Over 2,750 11,000
b. Ductile Iron Pipe. For deflected position, a position 1/2 -inch
I wider than the fully compressed section shall be created on one
side of the outside perimeter. For differential load, one of the
pipes shall be supported so that it is suspended freely between
adjacent pipe bearing only on the joints. A force shall be
applied per the following table along a longitudinal distance of
12 inches immediately adjacent to one of the joints:
1 Pipe Size Force Pipe Size Force
(Inches) (Pounds) (Inches) (Pounds)
I 4 600 15 3,700
6 900 18 4,400
1 8 1,200 21 5,000
10 15,000 24 & Over 5,500
12 18,000
two 12 -1/2 foot lengths c. PVC Pipe. For deflected position, the shall g
be joined, then deflected along an arc of 720 -foot radius (0.11
feet offset at the end of each length from a tangent at the joint).
For differential load, two lengths shall be joined and uniformly
I supported for at least two feet on both sides of the joint and
adjacent pipe to 95 percent of its vertical diameter.
i
1
1
SANITARY AND STORM PIPE: 02531 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 6 SEP 00
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 WORKMANSHIP: 1
A. Line and Grade:
Survey control hubs for both line and grade shall be provided by the
Contractor in a manner consistent with accepted practices. The Contractor
shall establish line and grade for pipe by the use of lasers or by transferring
the cut from the offset stakes to the trench at whatever intervals necessary to
maintain the line and grade. The Contractor shall check line and grade as
necessary.
1. In the event that the limits prescribed herein are not met, the work
shall be immediately stopped, the Engineer notified, and the cause
remedied before proceeding further with the work.
2. Variance form the established line and grade shall not be 9 reater than
1/4 -inch for grade, and 1/2 -inch for line, providing that such variation
does not result in a level or reverse - sloping invert. 1
3. Variation in the invert elevation between adjoining ends of pipe, due to
nonconcentricity of joining surface and pipe interior surfaces, shall not 111
exceed 1/64 -inch per inch of pipe diameter, or 1/2 -inch maximum.
B. Pipe Handling:
The Contractor shall unload pipe only by approved means. Pipe shall not be
unloaded by dropping to the ground and shall not be dropped or dumped into
trenches.
1. The Contractor shall inspect all pipe and fittings prior to lowering into
trench to insure no cracked, broken, or otherwise defective materials
are used.
2. The Contractor shall clean ends of pipe thoroughly, remove foreign
matter and dirt from inside of pipe, and keep it clean during laying and
joining. The Contractor shall lower pipe into the trench in such a
manner as to avoid any physical damage to the pipe. 1
3. The Contractor shall remove all damaged pipe from the job site.
1
1 TOC BUILDING ADDITION SANITARY AND STORM PIPE: 02531
SEP 00 PAGE 7
1 C. The Contractor shall not break into an existing sanitary sewer line until just
before the project is ready to be accepted. When a Contractor ties into a
"live" line, the Contractor shall keep the new line plugged at the downstream
end of the construction to prevent entry of groundwater into the Agency or
City sanitary sewer system.
D. Foreign Material:
The Contractor shall take all precautions necessary to prevent excavated or
other foreign material from entering into the pipe during the laying operation.
At all times, when laying operations are not in progress, the Contractor shall
use a mechanical plug at the open end of the last laid section of pipe to
prevent entry of foreign material or creep of the gasketed joints.
E. Pipe Laying:
Y : 9
Pipe laying shall proceed upgrade with spigot ends pointing in the direction of
the flow.
1. After a section of pipe has been lowered into the prepared trench, the
Contractor shall clean the end of the pipe to be joined, the inside of the
joint, and the rubber ring (if required) immediately before joining the
pipe; and make assembly of the joint in accordance with the
recommendations of the manufacturer for the type of joint used.
2. The Contractor shall provide all special tools and appliances required
for the jointing assembly.
3. After the joint has been made, the pipe shall be checked for alignment
and grade. The trench bottom shall form a continuous and uniform
bearing and support for the pipe at every point between joints.
F. Movable Shield:
When pipe is laid within a movable trench shield, the Contractor shall take all
necessary precautions to prevent pipe joints from pulling apart when moving
the shield ahead. The bottom of the shield shall not extend below the
springline of the pipe without recompacting the pipe zone.
1
1
1
1
SANITARY AND STORM PIPE: 02531 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 8 SEP 00
G. Cutting Pipe:
When cutting or machining the pipe is necessary, the Contractor shall use
only tools and methods recommended by the pipe manufacturer and
approved by the Agency or City. The Contractor shall cut cast iron or ductile
iron pipe with milling type cutter or with rolling pipe cutter and shall not flame
cut.
H. Transition Fittings:
When joining different types of pipes, the Contractor shall use approved
ridged fittings. All flexible fittings will not be approved.
1. Shear ring /ridge transition couplings meeting the ASTM C564 or equal
shall be used.
2. PVC couplers or adapters shall meet the ASTM 3034 -SDR 35/C900-
DR 18 -D1784 specifications.
3. Ductile iron transition couplings shall meet the ASTM A536 -80 for 1
center and end rings, ASTM D2000 3 BA75 for gaskets and AWWA C-
111-80 for bolts and nuts.
Concrete Closure Collars:
The Contractor shall pour closure collars against undisturbed earth and
remove all water from the excavation. The Contractor will also:
1. Construct suitable forms to obtain shapes that will provide full bearing
surfaces against undisturbed earth as indicated.
2. Use closure collars only when approved by the Agency of City, and
then only to make connections between dissimilar pipe or where
standard rubber - gasketed joints are impractical.
3. Before the closure collars are installed, the Contractor shall wash pipe
to remove all loose material and soil from the surface on which they
will be placed.
,
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION SANITARY AND STORM PIPE: 02531
SEP 00 PAGE 9
J. Pipe Zone Material:
The Contractor shall install 3/4 inch minus rock for pipe zone material
uniformly on both sides of the pipe up to the horizontal centerline of the pipe.
Material shall be sliced with a hand shovel or tamper plate to insure proper
support within the haunching area. 3/4 "x0 shall be used to the top of the pipe
zone.
3.2 TEST AND ACCEPTANCE:
A. All gravity sanitary and storm systems shall be video inspected, pass the
required compaction test (AASHTO T99), and a deflection test. All sanitary
lines shall pass a air test prior to acceptance, pass the required manhole
tests, and shall be free of visible leaks.
1. On sanitary sewer pipe 42 inches in diameter and larger, individual
1 joints may be tested by an approved joint testing device. Required test
will be determined by type of system (sanitary or storm) and location
(street or easement). All details of testing procedures shall be subject
to approval of the Agency.
B. Test Equipment:
The Contractor shall furnish all necessary testing equipment and perform the
tests in a manner satisfactory to the Agency or City. Any arrangement of
testing equipment which will provide observable and accurate measurements
of either air or water leakage under the specified conditions, will be permitted.
1 Gauges for air testing shall be calibrated with a standardized test gauge.
3.3 LINE CLEANING
1 A. Prior to the internal pressure testing and inspection of the system by the
Agency or City, the Contractor shall ball and flush and clean all parts of the
system.
1. The Contractor shall remove all accumulated construction debris,
rocks, gravel, sand, silt, and other foreign material from the system at
or near the closest downstream manhole. If necessary, the Contractor
shall use mechanical rodding or bucketing equipment.
2. Upon the Agency or City inspection of the system, if any foreign matter
is still present, the sections and portions of the system will be
reflushed and cleaned as required.
1
1
SANITARY AND STORM PIPE: 02531 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 10 SEP 00
1
3.4 MANHOLES
A. The first three sanitary manholes built on any project, shall be tested. Unless
otherwise approved by the Agency, acceptance tests shall be conducted on a
random sample of 15 percent of sanitary sewer manholes selected by the
Agency or City. Each manhole which fails acceptance testing will obligate the
Contractor to test additional manholes, selected at random, by the Agency or
City.
B. Sanitary sewer manholes shall be tested for acceptance after backfilling the
trench, compaction requirements have been met, road base rock have been
has been installed, and chimney seals are installed. Any defects in the
manholes shall be corrected prior to paving the streets.
C. Hydrostatic Testing:
The test will consist of plugging all inlet and outlets and filling the manhole
99 9 9
with water to the rim. Leakage in each manhole shall not exceed 0.2 gallons •
per hour per foot of head above the invert. Leakage will be determined by
refilling to the rim using a calibrated or known volume container.
D. Vacuum Testing:
The test will consist of plugging all inlets and outlets. The test head shall be
placed at the inside of the top of the cone, and shall include grade rings and
casting, and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. 1
1. A vacuum of 10- inches of mercury shall be drawn and measured for
the vacuum to drop to 9 inches. The manhole shall pass if the time for
the vacuum reading to drop to 9- inches meets or exceeds the values
indicated in the following table:
1
t
1
1
1
I TOC BUILDING ADDITION SANITARY AND STORM PIPE: 02531
SEP 00 PAGE 11
I Dept of Manhole Allowable Time
(feet) (sec)
48 -inch 60 -inch 72 -inch
I 8 20 26 33
10 25 33 41
12 30 39 49
14 35 46 57
16 40 52 65
18 45 59 73
20 50 65 81
22 55 72 89
24 59 78 97
I 26 64 85 105
28 69 91 113
30 74 98 121
I or vacuum Storm manholes shall not be required to pass a hydrostatic o a cuum test.
I 3.5 AIR TESTING SANITARY SEWER PIPE
i A. General:
After completion of the system, including service connections and backfilling,
the Contractor shall conduct a low pressure air test. The Contractor shall
provide all equipment and personnel for the test.
I 1. The method, equipment, and personnel shall be subject to the
approval of the Agency and City. The Agency or City may, at any
time, require a calibration check of the instrument used. The pressure
1 gauge used shall have minimum divisions of 0.10 psi and have an
accuracy of 0.0625 psi (one ounce per square inch). All air used shall
pass through a single control panel.
1
B. Safety Precautions:
1 All plugs used to close the sewer for the air test must be capable of resisting
the internal pressures and must be securely braced, if necessary.
1
1
1
SANITARY AR AND STORM PIPE: 02531 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 12 SEP 00
1. All air testing equipment must be placed above ground and no one
9 p g
shall be permitted to enter a manhole or trench where a plugged line is
under pressure. All pressure must be released before the plugs are
removed. The testing equipment used must include a pressure relief
device designed to relieve pressure in the line under test at 10 psi or 1
less and must allow continuous monitoring of the test pressures in
order to avoid excessive pressure.
2. The Contractor shall use care to avoid the flooding of the air inlet by
infiltrated ground water. The Contractor shall inject the air at the upper
plug if possible. Only qualified personnel shall be permitted to conduct
the test.
C. Method:
All air testing shall be by the Time Pressure Drop Method. The test
procedures are described as follows:
1. Clean the lines to be tested and remove all debris where noted.
2. The Contractor has the option of wetting the lines prior to testing.
3. Plug all open ends with suitable test plugs; brace each plug securely.
4. Check the average height of ground water over the line. The test
pressures required below shall be increased 0.433 psi for each foot of
average water depth over the line.
5. Add air slowly to the section of system being tested until the internal
air pressure is raised to 4.0 psi greater than the average back
pressure of any ground water that may submerge the pipe. 1
6. After the internal test pressure is reached, at least two minutes shall
be allowed for the air temperature to stabilize, adding only the amount 1
of air required to maintain pressure.
7. After the temperature stabilization period, disconnect the air supply.
8. Determine and record the time in seconds that is required for internal
air pressure to drop from 3.5 psi to 2.5 psi greater than the average
back pressure of any ground water that may submerge the pipe.
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION SANITARY AND STORM PIPE: 02531
SEP 00 PAGE 13
1 9. Compare the time recorded in (h) with the time required as determined
hereinafter.
D. Acceptance:
The system shall be considered acceptable when tested as described above
if the section under test does not lose air at a rate greater than 0.003 cfm per
I square foot of internal pipeline surface, or 2 cfm, whichever is greater. If a
line fails to meet these requirements, the Contractor shall repair or replace all
defective materials or workmanship. This specification shall also be
considered as satisfied if the time, as measured by the above - described
method, is not less than the time as computed according to the following
procedure:
1 1. Record the diameter in inches and the length in feet of all pipe in the
section to be tested, including the service connections, in a table
1 similar to the one shown below:
Diameter Length K= C=
(Inches) (Feet) 0.011d 0.0003882dL
TOTAL TIME REQUIRED BY SPECIFICATION = SECONDS
ACTUAL TIME AS DETERMINED BY TEST
SECONDS
2. Using the nomograph (Appendix IV, Exhibit D), place a straightedge
from the "d" column (diameter in inches) to the "L" column (length in
11 feet). Read the corresponding "K" and "C" values and record them in
the table.
3. Add all values of "K" and all values of "C" for the section being tested.
4. If the total of all the "C" values is more than one, the time required by
the specifications shall be the total of all the "K" values.
5. If the total of all the "C" values is more than one, the time required by
the specifications shall be found by dividing the total of all the "K"
values by the total of all the "C" values. The quotient is the time
1 required by.the specifications. To make this division with the
nomograph, use the scales "C" and "K" and read the quotient (time)
from the "tq" scale.
1
1
1
SANITARY AND STORM PIPE: 02531 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 14 SEP 00
6. In the event that the "D" and "L" values for a particular section of the
system do not fall within the limits of the nomograph, the values "K"
and "C" may be computed from the following equations:
"K" = 0.011 d "C" = 0.0003882d L.
3.6 DEFLECTION TEST FOR FLEXIBLE PIPE r
A. Sanitary and storm systems constructed of flexible pipe materials shall be
deflection- tested. The test shall be conducted by pulling an approved
mandrel through the completed pipeline. The diameter of the mandrel shall
be 95 percent of the nominal pipe diameter unless otherwise specified by the
Agency.
1. Testing shall be conducted after the line has been completely balled
and flushed out with water, and compaction and air test have
completed and accepted. Air test for storm lines will not be required.
3.7 VIDEO INSPECTION OF GRAVITY SYSTEMS
A. All sanitary and storm systems shall be video inspected and taped prior to the
Agency or City acceptance of the systems. If the system is video inspected
by a private firm, an Agency or City representative shall be present during the
taping.
1. A copy of the video tape, and a written TV Inspection Report on a form
approved by Agency and City, shall be supplied to the Agency. The
video tape shall be recorded in color and on VHS format.
3.8 VIDEO INSPECTION FOR WARRANTY ACCEPTANCE 1
A. The sanitary and storm sewer line shall be video inspected during the one 1
year warranty period to determine any defects in the system that are to be
corrected by the developer or contractor. The inspection for sanitary shall be
completed during wet weather period of the year. 1
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION SANITARY AND STORM MISC. STRUCTURES: 02533
SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Work necessary for construction of manholes and cleanouts. Details are
shown on Drawings or in appendix of Contract Documents. All work to
conform to applicable sections of Oregon State Plumbing Code, Oregon
Department of Environmental Quality Standards, and current standards of
Unified Sewerage Agency.
1 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS:
A. Base Rock: Clean 3/4 inch minus gravel or crushed rock conforming to
Section AGGREGATE BASE COURSE.
B. Forms: Exterior exposed surfaces to be smooth -faced plywood. Others to be
matched boards, plywood, or other approved material.
C. Concrete: Concrete to conform to requirements of ASTM C94, alternative 2.
Compressive field strength for Manhole Bases and misc. concrete structures,
to not be less than 3,000 psi at 28 days. Maximum size of aggregate to be 1-
1/2 inch. Slump to be between two and four inches.
D. Precast Manhole Sections: Precast manhole sections to be minimum 48 -inch
conforming to ASTM C 478. Minimum wall thickness to be four inches.
Cones to be eccentric and have same wall thickness and reinforcement as
manhole section.
1 1. Flat top slab details, for shallow manholes, if applicable, are shown on
Drawings or appendix. In general, flat top manholes will be used for
manholes less than five feet in depth. Top and bottom of all sections
to be parallel. Joints to be tongue- and - groove or Keylock type.
E. Precast Base Sections and Bases: At option of Contractor, precast base
sections or manhole bases may be used. Submit shop drawings to Engineer •
for approval prior to casting.
F. Drop Manholes: Provide inside or outside drop assembly for single or
multiple drop manholes where shown on Drawings or approved by Engineer.
1 Drop assembly details, if applicable, are shown on Drawings, or in appendix.
1
1
SANITARY AND STORM MISC. STRUCTURES: 02533 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
G. Manhole Extensions: Concrete grade rings for extensions to be a maximum
of twelve inches high and to be approved by Engineer before installation.
1. In eneral manhole extensions will be used on all manholes in roads
oads
or streets or in other locations where a subsequent change in existing
grade may be likely. Extensions will be limited to a maximum height of
12 inches.
2. Finish grade for manhole covers to conform to finished ground or ,.
street surface unless otherwise specified by Engineer.
H. Nonshrink Grout: Nonshrink grout to be Sika 212, Euco N -S, Five Star, or 11
USA approved equal nonmetallic cementitious commercial grout exhibiting
zero shrinkage. Grout not to be amended with cement or sand and not to be
reconditioned with water after initial mixing. Unused grout to be discarded
after 20 minutes and not to be used.
Chimney Seals_ Internal and external rubber seal and seal extensions to be
as manufactured by Cretex Specialty Products, or USA approved equal.
Sleeves and extensions to have a minimum thickness of 3/16 inches and to
be extruded from a high grade rubber compound conforming to applicable
requirements of ASTM C923.
1. Bands used for compressing sleeve and extension against manhole to
be fabricated from 16 gauge stainless steel conforming to ASTM A240
type 304, and screws, bolts, or nuts used on this band to be stainless
steel.
J. Pipe Stubouts for Future Sewer or Service Connections: Pipe stubouts to be
same type as approved for use in lateral, main, or trunk sewer construction.
1. Strength classifications to be same class as in adjacent trenches.
Where there are two different classes of pipe at a manhole, higher
strength pipe will govern strength classification.
2. Rubber gasketed watertight plugs to be furnished with each stubout
adequately braced against all hydrostatic or air test pressures.
1
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION SANITARY AND STORM MISC. STRUCTURES: 02533
SEP 00 PAGE 3
K. Manhole and Cleanout Frames and Covers:
I. Frames and covers to be cast iron of size and shape shown on
Drawings. Castings to be tough, close - grained gray iron, sound,
1 smooth, clean, free from blisters, blowholes, shrinkage, cold shuts,
and all defects, and to conform to ASTM A 48, Class 30B. Plane or
grind bearing surfaces to insure flat, true surfaces. Covers to be true
and seat within frame at all points.
2. Watertight frames and covers to be cast iron of size and shape
detailed on drawings and conform to ASTM A48, Class 30. Covers to
be true and seat within frame at all points. Cap screws for watertight
manhole covers to be high temper phosphor bronze with 60,000 psi
minimum tensile strength conforming to ASTM B 139. Provide two
sets of compatible wrenches to Owner prior to final acceptance of
work.
L. Manhole s: Ste Steps to be provided and located as specified. Material to
Steps: P P
be 3/4" galvanized steel, or wrought iron safety type conforming to ASTM A-
123/A615 or Plastic with reinforcing bar.
1. A minimum' /z inch grade 60 meeting requirements of ASTM A615
encapsulated with injection molded Copolymer Polypropylene with
serrated surfaces.
1 M. Preformed Plastic Gaskets: Gaskets to be Kent Seal 2 or Ram Neck
conforming to Federal Specification SS -S- 00210.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
A. Conform to applicable portions of Section TRENCH EXCAVATION AND
BACKFILL. Backfill around manholes to be of highest class of trench backfill
immediately adjacent, as specified.
3.2 ROCK BASE
A. Remove water from excavation as required. Place rock base as shown on
Drawings (12 inch minimum compacted depth of 3/4" minus crushed
aggregate) and compact as specified for Class A backfill in Section TRENCH
1 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL.
1
1
SANITARY ARY AND STORM MISC. STRUCTURES: 02533 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 4 SEP 00
3.3 CONCRETE BASE
A. Construct concrete base as specified. Vibrate to densify concrete and screed 1
to provide a level, uniform bearing for manhole sections over full
circumference. Provide a keyway in top of base to match joint of precast
manhole sections used.
B. Deposit sufficient Nonshrink grout on base to assure a watertight seal
between base and manhole wall or place first precast section of manhole in
concrete base before concrete has set, if preferred. Contractor to verify that
each section is properly located and plumb. 1
3.4 PLACING PRECAST MANHOLE SECTIONS
A. Clean jointing surface of all sections to remove foreign materials. Thoroughly
wet joint with water prior to placing nonshrink grout. Place mortar on groove
of lower section. Set next section in place. Fill joint completely with
nonshrink grout of proper consistency.
1. Trowel interior and exterior surfaces smooth on standard tongue -and-
groove joints. Wipe or otherwise clean excess nonshrink grout from
inside of Keylock joint. 1
B. When Keylock joint is used, it is intent that void between tongue- and - groove
be completely filled with nonshrink grout and that interior and exterior end
faces of section be seated fully on previously placed section.
C. Apply an approved curing compound or comparable approved method. Chip •
out and replace all cracked or defective mortar. Completed manholes to be
rigid and watertight.
3.5 MANHOLE INVERT
A. Construct manhole inverts in accordance with details shown on Drawings
with smooth transitions.
1. Remove all sharp edges or rough sections which tend to obstruct flow. 1
Where a full section of pipe is laid through a manhole, break out top
section as indicated and cover exposed edge of pipe completely with
mortar and trowel surfaces smooth.
2. Provide broom finish to all areas above crown of outlet pipe. 1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION SANITARY AND STORM MISC. STRUCTURES: 02533
SEP 00 PAGE 5
3.6 DROP MANHOLES
A. Construct drop assemblies at locations indicated and as shown on Drawings.
When cast or ductile iron pipe is used, connect to sewer pipe with an
1 approved adapter. All details of construction to be approved by Engineer.
3.7 FLEXIBLE JOINTS
A. Provide watertight flexible joints in sewers not more than 1.0 foot from
manhole walls. Lay pipes entering manholes on firmly compacted base rock
1 or undisturbed earth. Base rock to be as specified hereinbefore.
3.8 PIPE STUBOUTS FOR SERVICE CONNECTIONS
A. Install stubouts from manholes for future sewer connections as shown or
required by Engineer. Length to be as shown on drawings or as directed by
1 Engineer.
1. Grout pipes in precast walls or manhole base to provide watertight
seal around pipes.
2. Construct invert channels in accordance with details shown on
drawings.
3. Provide compacted base rock as specified hereinbefore to undisturbed
earth under all stubouts.
B. Install semipermanent plugs in end of stubouts with gasket joints similar to
sewer pipe being used. Plugs to be capable of withstanding all internal or
external pressures without leakage. All plugs to be braced to prevent
1 blowoffs. Measurement and payment of stubouts will be in accordance with
Section 02531.
3.9 TEMPORARY PLUGS
A. Install 1/2 inch plywood temporary plugs in pipe stubouts at locations shown.
Backfill against plugs to provide temporary seal.
3.10 MANHOLE EXTENSIONS
A. Install extensions as shown on Drawings and to height determined by
Engineer. Lay grade rings in mortar with sides plumb and tops level. Seal
joints with mortar as specified for manhole sections. Extensions to be
watertight.
1
1
�
SANITARY AND STORM MISC. STRUCTURES: 02533 TOC BUILDING ADDITION ,
PAGE 6 SEP 00
3.11 MANHOLE FRAMES AND COVERS
A. Install frames and covers on top of manholes to positively prevent all 1
infiltration of surface or groundwater into manholes. Frames to be set in a
bed of mortar with mortar carried over flange of ring as shown on Drawings.
Set rings so tops of covers are flush with surface of adjoining pavement or
ground surface, unless otherwise shown or directed.
3.12 CONNECTION TO EXISTING MANHOLES 1
A. Connect sewers to existing manholes at locations indicated and as specified
in Drawings. Provide all diversion facilities and perform all work necessary to
maintain sewage flow in existing sewers during connection to manholes.
Break out existing manhole bases and grout as necessary to provide smooth
flow into and through existing manholes.
3.13 SEWER CLEANOUT 1
A. Construct in accordance with details shown on Drawings or in appendix.
1
3.14 HYDROSTATIC TESTING
A. Complete all testing as required by Unified Sewerage Agency. 1
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION SUBDRAINAGE: 02620
SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Furnish all labor, material, equipment and services required for installation of
1 all perimeter footing drainage and wall drainage lines as detailed and
indicated on Drawings.
1 1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C33, Concrete Aggregates
B. ASTM C412, Concrete Drain Tile
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Drain Tile and Pipe: Standard quality, conforming to ASTM C412 "Standard
Specifications for Concrete Drain Tile ". Type ADS perforated plastic drainage
pipe with soil -guard envelope approved in lieu of concrete tile at Contractor's
option.
B. Wyes, Tees and Ells: Standard manufactured shapes.
C. Filter Fabric: Mirafi 140, Confil D689, Supac 5 -P, Nicolon 40/30, Exxon
Chemical Co. GTF 125EX, CZ Fibertex, Polyfelt TS 500.
1 D. Joint Covering (Concrete Tile): 15 Ib. asphalt saturated roofing felt.
E. Sand and Gravel: Washed natural river sand and round rock, 1/2" to 3/4" pea
gravel with not more than 5% passing No. 200 sieve, or ASTM C33 #7 size
gravel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. Drains:
1. See Drawings for location and details of drains. Verify location of
existing underground utilities and protect from damage during
installation.
•
1
SUBDRAINAGE: 02620 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
2. Excavate trench at least 12" wide, grading bottom for proper drainage.
Bottoms of trenches to be accurately graded to provide uniform
bearing and support of pipe throughout its entire length. •
3. Place filter fabric as soon as excavation is complete. Fabric to
completely encapsulate drainage rock.
4. Pipe sections to be lowered into trenches carefully and to be set firmly
to lines and grades with joints accurately fitted. Lay perforated pipe
with perforations down. Cover open tile joints with 4" wide felt strips,
covering top half of tile.
5. Backfill around and over footing drainage line with pea gravel, round
rock or river gravel to approximately 8" to 12" above pipe, then cover
with one layer of fabric filter, then backfill to underside of finish grade
course.
6. Backfill materials to be orous fill. First st layers to be carefully, but
solidly, rammed and tamped into spaces around pipe, care being
exercised to avoid any displacement of pipe. Subsequent layers to be
solidly compacted by tamping.
7. Connections to sewers, manholes, and other appurtenances to be
made in accordance with Drawings of with requirements of local
codes.
END OF SECTION 1
1
1
1
r
r
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION UNBOUND BASES, COURSES
SEP 00 AND BALLASTS: 02720
PAGE 1
PARTI GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Furnishing and placing base course material composed of crushed aggregate
blended with either natural sand or fine aggregate or both.
1. Base course to be constructed on a prepared underlying course in
accordance with these specifications and to conform to dimensions
and typical cross section shown on plans and with lines and grades
established by Engineer as well as geotech (see geotech report).
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Crushed Base Coarse Aggregate: Permeable base aggregate material to
conform in all respects to requirements set forth in latest edition of State of
Oregon Standard Specifications for Highway Construction.
1. Gradation for permeable base aggregate to be 3/4 " -0" minus or as
j specified on plan for various uses indicated. Gradation for Dense
base aggregate material to be 1 '/2' -0" minus.
1 B. Certification of Aggregate: Prior to placing of aggregate base course
material, Contractor to produce test results from a certified testing laboratory
indicating suitability of material.
1. Samples for test to be taken in presence of Engineer. Final
acceptance of material will, however, be from samples taken on
finished grade in compacted state.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EQUIPMENT
1 A. All equipment necessary for proper construction of this work to be in first -
class working condition before construction is permitted to start. Crushers
and all other equipment must be able to produce a consistent product
meeting specifications.
1
1
1
UNBOUND BASES, COURSES TOC BUILDING ADDITION
AND BALLASTS: 02720 SEP 00
PAGE2 1
3.2 PREPARING UNDERLYING COURSE
A. Underlying course to be checked and accepted by Engineer before placing
Y 9 P c 9
and spreading operations are started. Any ruts or soft spots, yielding places
due to improper drainage conditions, hauling, or any other cause, to be
corrected and rolled to required density before base course is placed thereon.
B. To protect underlying course and to insure proper drainage, spreading of 1
base to begin along centerline of pavement on a crowned section or on high
side of pavement with a one -way slope.
3.3 THICKNESS AND NUMBER OF LAYERS
A. If required compacted depth of subbase or base course exceeds six inches,
to be constructed in two or more layers of approximately equal thickness.
Maximum compacted thickness of any one layer not to exceed six inches. 1
B. In general, each layer to be placed in spreads as wide as practicable and to -
full width of course before a succeeding layer is placed. 1
C. Soft Spot replacements to be authorized by engineer prior to constructing,
3.4 SPREADING
A. Aggregate, unless otherwise permitted by Engineer, not to be spread more
than 2,000 square yards in advance of rolling. Any necessary sprinkling to be
kept within these limits. No material to be placed in snow or on a soft,
muddy, or frozen underlying course.
B. Owner may make tests to determine maximum density and proper moisture 1
content of base material, and this information will be available to Contractor.
C. Base material to be at a satisfactory moisture content when rolling is started 1
and any minor variation prior to or during rolling to be corrected by sprinkling
or by aeration if necessary.
D. During mixing and spreading process, sufficient caution to be exercised to
prevent incorporation of subgrade, subbase, or shoulder material in base
course mixture.
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION UNBOUND BASES, COURSES
SEP 00 AND BALLASTS: 02720
PAGE 3
1. Mixing to produce a homogeneous mixture of unsegregated and
uniformly dispersed materials as placed in position for compacting.
3.5 FINISHING AND COMPACTING
A. After spreading, aggregate to be thoroughly compacted by rolling. Rolling to
continue until aggregate is thoroughly set, interstices of material reduced to a
minimum, and until creeping of material ahead of roller is no longer visible.
1. Blading and rolling to be done alternately, as required or directed, to
obtain a smooth, even, and uniformly compacted base.
B. Compaction requirements for dense graded aggregate base are a minimum
of 95% of modified proctor or AASHTO T -180.
C. Aggregate Base to be approved by Engineer prior to placement of Concrete
or Asphalt Paving.
D. Course not to be rolled when underlying course is soft or yielding or when
rolling causes undulation in base course.
1. When rolling develops segregated areas or irregularities that exceed
'/z -inch when tested with a 10 foot straightedge, irregular surface to be
loosened, refilled with same kind of materials as that used in
constructing course, and rolled again as required.
E. In areas inaccessible to rollers, base course material to be tamped thoroughly
with mechanical tampers.
1 F. Sprinkling during rolling, if necessary, to be in amount and by equipment
approved by Engineer.
3.6 SURFACE TEST
A. After course has been completely compacted and graded to grade hubs,
surface to be tested for smoothness and accuracy of grade and crown.
1. Any portion lacking required smoothness or failing in accuracy of
grade or crown to be scarified, reshaped, recompacted, and otherwise
manipulated as Engineer may direct until required smoothness and
accuracy are obtained.
1
1
UNBOUND BASES, COURSES TOC BUILDING ADDITION
AND BALLASTS: 02720 SEP 00
PAGE 4 1
2. Finished surface not to vary more than 0.05 foot from true grade or
more than % inch from a 10 foot straightedge when applied to surface r
parallel with, and at right angles to, centerline.
3.7 PROTECTION 1
A. Work on base course to not be accomplished during freezing temperatures
nor when subgrade is too wet. When aggregates contain frozen material or
when underlying course is frozen, construction to be stopped.
B. Hauling equipment may be routed over completed portions of base course,
provided no damage results and provided that such equipment is routed over
full width of base course to avoid rutting or uneven compaction. 1
1. Engineer in charge to have full and specific authority to stop all hauling
over completed or partially completed base course when, in his 1
opinion, such hauling is causing damage.
2. Any damage resulting to base course from routing equipment over 1
base course to be repaired by Contractor at his own expense.
3.8 MAINTENANCE
A. Following completion of base course, Contractor to perform all maintenance
work necessary to keep base course in a condition satisfactory for paving.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT: 02740
SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Furnishing and placing a bituminous surface course composed of mineral
aggregate and bituminous material, mixed in a central mixing plant and
placed on a prepared course in accordance with these specifications.
1. Conform to dimensions, typical cross sections, lines and grades shown
on the plans or established by the Engineer as well as the geotech
(see geotech report).
B. When specified on the plans, the surface course to be constructed in two or
more courses. Each course to be constructed to the depth, typical section, or
elevation required by the plans and to be rolled, finished, and approved
before the placement of the next course.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Asphaltic Concrete: The asphaltic concrete materials and aggregate
gradation to conform in all respects to the requirements set forth in the latest
edition of the State of Oregon Standard Specifications for Highway
Construction. The various classes of asphaltic concrete are noted on the
plans. The mix design to be in accordance with these specifications.
B. Composition of Mixtures:
I. The bituminous plant mix to be composed of a mixture of aggregate,
filler if required, and bituminous material. The several aggregate
fractions to be sized, uniformly graded, and combined in such
proportions that the resulting mixture meets the grading requirements
of the job mix formula.
2. The composition limits tabulated to govern, but a closer control
appropriate to the job materials will be required for the specific project
in accordance with the job mix formula. The final designated
gradations to produce a relatively smooth curve when plotted on a
semilogarithmic gradation chart.
1
1
1
FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT: 02740 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE2 SEP00
3. The mixture to meet the requirements of the following ASTM tests:
g : s
ASTM D 1559 1
(Marshall Method)
Number of blows each end of specimen 50
Stability (Minimum) 1200
Flow (Maximum) hundredths of an inch 16
Flow (Minimum) hundredths of an inch 8 1
C. Job Mix Formula:
1. Work not to begin nor any mixture to be accepted until the Contractor
has submitted a satisfactory job mix formula for a certified testing
laboratory for all tests required herein. The job mix formula for each
mixture to be in effect until modified in writing by the Engineer.
2. The job mix formula to establish a single percentage of aggregate 1
passing each required sieve size, a single percentage of bituminous
material to be added to the aggregate and a single temperature at
which the mixture is to be delivered at the point of discharge.
3. Test results for the job mix formula to be submitted to the Engineer for
review and revision or approval a minimum of seven days prior to
producing any mixture.
4. The Engineer will be the sole judge in determining the acceptability of
test methods and test results in establishment of the job mix formula.
Approval of the job mix formula does not relieve the Contractor in any 1
way of the responsibility for delivery to the job site of bituminous
mixture meeting the requirements specified herein.
5. When unsatisfactory results or other conditions make it necessa ry, the
Engineer may establish a new job mix formula.
6. The applicable OSHD gradation represents the limits which determines
suitability of aggregate for use from the sources of supply.
7. The final gradation decided on within the limits designated in the table
to be well graded from coarse to fine and not to vary from the low limit
on one sieve to the high limit on the adjacent sieves, or vice versa. In
no case will the gradation of the bituminous surface course be allowed
to extend outside the limits of the broad band specification. 1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT: 02740
SEP 00 PAGE 3
8. Once a lant is producing the mixture to the satisfaction of the
P P 9
Engineer, the scales and cold bins to be locked into position and not
1 moved unless authorized by the Engineer.
1 9. The bituminous content of the mixture to be calculated on the
percentage basis by weight of the total mix.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 WEATHER AND SEASONAL LIMITATIONS
A. The surface course to be constructed only upon a dry surface, when the
atmospheric temperature is above 40 ° F, and when the weather is not foggy
1 or rainy. The temperature requirements may be waived, but only when so
approved by the Engineer.
3.2 HAULING
A. Trucks used for hauling bituminous mixtures to have tight, clean, smooth
1 metal beds.
1. To prevent the mixture from adhering to them, the beds to be lightly
coated with a minimum amount of paraffin oil, lime solution, or other
approved material.
2. When necessary for temperature control, trucks to have a suitable
cover to protect the mixture from adverse weather.
B. The paver to be equipped with a receiving and distribution system of
sufficient capacity for a uniform spreading operation and capable of placing
the mixture uniformly in front of the screed without segregation of materials.
C. The paver to be designed to compensate for minor irregularities of the base
1 on which it is supported so that such will not be reflected immediately in the
surface of the layer being placed.
1. The weight of the paver to be supported on tracks of wheels none of
which to contact the mixture being laid. The contact area of the screed
or strike -off assembly to be uniform over the entire width of the strip of
mixture being placed.
1
1
1
FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT: 02740 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 4 SEP 00
D. Pavers to be equipped with a manual or an automated paver control system.
P Y
E. The screed or strike -off assembly to effectively produce a finished surface of
the required evenness and texture without tearing, shoving and gouging the
mixture. i
3.4 ROLLERS
A. Rollers to be in good condition, capable of reversing without backlash, and 1
operating at slow speeds to avoid displacement of the bituminous mixture.
1. The number, type and weight of rollers to be sufficient to compact the
mixture to the required density while the mixture is still in a workable
condition. 1
2. The use of equipment which results in excessive crushing of the
aggregate will not be permitted. j
3.5 TRANSPORTATION AND DELIVERY OF THE MIXTURE
A. The mixture to be placed at a temperature between 260 °F.and 300 °F. When
the mixture is being placed during warm weather and the Engineer has
determined that satisfactory results can be obtained at lower temperatures,
he may allow the mixture to be mixed and delivered at the lower
temperatures. 1
B. No Toads of mixture to be transported from the mixing plant to the point of use
so late in the day as to prevent the spreading and compacting of the mixture
during daylight, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
1. If placing of material during other than daylight hours is permitted by
li
the Engineer, adequate lighting to be provided.
3.6 PREPARATION FOR PLACING
A. Immediately before placing the bituminous mixture, the existing underlying
course to be cleaned of loose or deleterious material.
1. A power sweeper equipped with a blower to be used, supplemented
with hand brooms if necessary, or the material to be removed by other
means approved by the Engineer.
t
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT: 02740
SEP 00 PAGE 5
B. The mixture shall be laid only upon an approved underlying course which is
Y 9
dry and in suitable condition, and when weather conditions are favorable.
1. No mixture to be placed when the air temperature in the shade and
away from artificial heat is 40 ° F. or lower, unless so directed by the
Engineer.
2. Engineer may permit work to continue when overtaken by such rains
only to provide for laying that material which is in transit from the plant,
provided the mixture is within the temperature limits specified.
1 C. Contractor will establish references at reasonable intervals for line and grade
control of the placing operations. The Contractor to furnish, place and
maintain such supports, wire, devices and materials as may be required to
provide continuous line and grade reference control to the automatic paver
control system on either or both sides of the paving machine.
1. Dual floating beams of at least 20 feet in length may be used for
1 9 9 Y
grade control, providing the Contractor can meet the line and grade
requirements established in these specifications.
2. Other paver control systems will be accepted providing the Contractor
provides proof that the established lines, grades, cross - sections and
tolerances can be met.
D. Hauling over material already placed to not be permitted until the material has
been thoroughly compacted as specified, and allowed to cool to atmospheric
temperature.
E. Contractor to verify that all valve boxes, manholes, catch basins, and other
1 appurtenances and structures are exposed and adjusted to finish grade.
Adjustment of these structures is considered a part of the bid item and no
separate payment will be made for verification and adjustment.
MACHINE MAC E SPREADING
A. Upon arrival, the mixture to be immediately spread to the full width required
with an approved bituminous paver.
1 1. It to be struck off in a uniform layer of such depth that, when the work
is completed, it will have the required thickness and will conform to the
grade and surface contour required.
1
1
FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT: 02740 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 6 SEP 00
2. The speed of the paver to be regulated to eliminate pulling and tearing
of the bituminous mat.
B. For adjoining panels, the mixture to placed i
� g p be p aced n strips of a minimum width of
eight feet. After the first strip or width has been compacted, the second width
to be placed, finished, and compacted in the same manner as the first width.
1. After the second strip has been placed and rolled, a 10 foot
straightedge to be placed across the longitudinal joint to determine if
the surface conforms to grade and contour requirements.
2. Contractor to provide a straightedge and level, and continually confirm
grade and acceptable tolerances through the paving operation.
C. Exposed vertical edges of paved strips to be free of all accumulations of dirt
or other foreign material before any mixture is spread in an adjacent lane. If
joint faces become dry or dusty, the contact surfaces should be given a light
coat of tack coat.
1. If the spreading machine should drift from an adjacent lane during l
construction, the unfilled space to be carefully filled with fresh hot
mixture obtained from the truck or the hopper of the spreading
machines.
D. In areas where, because of irregularities or unavoidable obstacles, the use of
mechanical spreading and finishing equipment is impractical, the mixture may
be hand spread. It to be spread with rakes in a uniformly loose layer to the
full width required and of such depth that, when the work is completed, it will
have the required thickness and will conform to the grade and surface
contour shown on the plans. Contractor to avoid segregation of materials in
hand spreading operations.
I
E. Vertical surfaces of existing pavement and curbs, catch basins, manholes,
and the like, against which asphaltic concrete is to be placed, to be ,
completely painted with tack coat immediately ahead of placing the asphaltic
concrete pavement.
1. Against curb faces, Contractor to apply the tack in a neat workmanlike
manner so as not to blacken the curb face above the finished surface.
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT: 02740
SEP 00 PAGE 7
1 F. Contractor should pay special attention to radius corners and intersection
wings. Generally these to be paved in conjunction with the main street or lot
1 paving. Where conditions warrant this impractical, the Contractor may elect
to use other methods, as approved by the Engineer.
3.8 COMPACTION OF MIXTURE
A. After spreading, the mixture to be thoroughly and uniformly compacted with
power rollers as directed by the Engineer. Rolling of the mixture to begin as
soon after spreading as it will bear the roller without undue displacement or
hair checking. On the first strip spread, rolling to start in the center and
continue toward the opposite edge.
B. Initial rolling to be done longitudinally. The rollers to overlap on successive
trips. Alternate trips of the roller to be of slightly different lengths.
C. The speed of the roller shall, at all times, be slow to avoid displacement of the
hot mixture. Any displacement occurring as a result of reversing the direction
of the roller, or from any other cause, to be corrected at once by rakes, and
1 fresh mixture.
D. Sufficient rollers to be furnished to handle the output of the plant. Rolling to
continue until all roller marks are eliminated, the surface is of uniform texture
and true to grade and cross section, and a density of at least 95% of the
laboratory density is obtained as determined by ASTM D1559 (50 blow
method).
1. The sample will be taken as frequently and at such locations as the
Engineer elects, and the results of the laboratory testing will be made
known to the Contractor as soon as practicably possible.
2. The responsibility of the Contractor is to obtain specified density at all
times, and delay in advising the Contractor of test results to not act as
1 a waiver of this responsibility.
3. When it is determined as above that specified density is not being
obtained, all paving operations to be discontinued and the work to not
be resumed until corrective measures have been taken.
1 E. To prevent adhesion of mixture to the roller, wheels to be kept properly
moistened, but excessive water will not be permitted.
1
•
1
1
FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT: 02740 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 8 SEP 00
F. In areas not accessible to the roller, the mixture to be thoroughly compacted
with hot hand tampers.
G. Any mixture which becomes loose and broken, mixed with dirt, or in any y way
defective to be removed and replaced with fresh hot mixture and immediately
compacted to conform to the surrounding area. This work will be done at the
Contractor's expense. Skin patching to not be allowed.
3.9 JOINTS 1
A. The mixture at the joints to comply with the surface requirements and present
the same uniformity of texture, density, smoothness, etc., as other sections of
the course. In the formation of all joints, provision to be made for proper
bond with the adjacent course for the specified depth of the course. 1
1. Joints to be formed by cutting back on the previous day's run to
expose the full depth of the course; the exposed edge to be given a 1
light coat of tack coat as specified under "Bituminous Tack Coat ". The
fresh mixture to be raked against the joint and thoroughly tamped and
rolled. 1
3.10 ADJOINING PAVEMENTS DESIGNATED TO REMAIN
A. The matching edge of all existing pavements designated to remain to be saw
cut the full depth of the pavement in a straight and true line. The saw cut
edge to be protected from damage until the finished surface has been
completed.
1. Edges which are damaged to be resawed the entire length of the
matching joint prior to placing the finished surface. No additional
payment to be made for saw cutting pavement, it to be considered 1
incidental to the work.
3.11 SHAPING EDGES 1
A. While the surface is being compacted and finished the Contractor to carefully
trim the outside edges of the pavement to the proper alignment. Edges so
formed to be beveled while still hot with the back of a rake or a smoothing
iron and thoroughly compacted by tampers or by other satisfactory methods. 1
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT: 02740
SEP 00 PAGE 9
' 3.12 SURFACE TESTS
1 A. Tests for conformity with the specified crown and grade to be made by the
Contractor immediately after initial compression. Any variation to be
corrected by the removal or addition of materials and by continuous rolling.
inch for B. The finished surface to not vary more than one - quarter i ch fo the su rface
course when tested with a 10 foot straightedge applied parallel with, or at
right angles to, the centerline.
C. After the completion of final rolling, the smoothness of the course to again be
tested; humps or depressions exceeding the specified tolerances or that
retain water on the surface to be immediately corrected by removing the
defective work and replacing with new material, as approved by the Engineer.
This to be done at the Contractor's expense.
I 3.13 BITUMINOUS AND AGGREGATE MATERIAL CONTRACTOR'S
RESPONSIBILITY
A. Samples of the bituminous and aggregate materials that the Contractor
proposes to use, together with a statement of their source and character,
1 must be submitted and approval must be obtained before each use of such
material begins.
1 1. The Contractor to require the manufacturer or producer of the
bituminous and aggregate materials to furnish material subject to this
and all other pertinent requirements of the Contract.
1 2. Only those materials which have been tested and approved for the
intended use to be acceptable.
B. The Engineer or his authorized representative to have access, at all times, to
all parts of the paving plant for the purpose of inspecting the equipment, the
1 conditions and operation of the plant, for the verification of weights or
proportions and character of materials, and to determine the temperatures
maintained in the preparation of the mixtures.
' certified The Contractor to furnish vendor's cert fled ests for each load of bitumen tests
to the project. The report to be delivered to the Engineer before
permission is granted for use of the material. T
1
1
FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT: 02740 TOC BUILDING ADDITION 1
PAGE 10 SEP 00
1. The furnishing of the vendor's certified test report for the bituminous 1
material to not be interpreted as a basis for final acceptance. All such
test reports to be subject to verification by testing sample materials 1
received for use on the project.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
•
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION BITUMINOUS TACK COAT: 02741
SEP 00 PAGE 1
1
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Furnishing and applying bituminous material to curbs, a previously prepared,
bonded and /or bituminized binder or existing pavement or joints and sawcut
edges in accordance with these specifications.
PART2 PRODUCTS
1 2.1 MATERIALS:
1 A. Bituminous Materials:
1. Type, grade, controlling specification, and application temperature for
bituminous material to be as follows:
Application
1 Type and Grade Specification Temperature
0 0
Emulsified asphalt CSS -Ih AASHTO M208 -72 75 - 130 F
2. Engineer reserves right to change type and grade of bituminous
material used should construction problems arise, subject to materials
on hand.
B. Quantity of Material:
1. Approximate amount of bituminous material per square yard for tack
coat to be as provided in Table I. Engineer will designate exact rate of
application after observing application on a test strip.
' TABLE I - QUANTITY OF MATERIAL
Material Amount
1 part bituminous material plus 0.02 to 0.2 gal.
per
1 part water square yard
•
1
1
BITUMINOUS TACK COAT: 02741 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 WEATHER LIMITATIONS 1
A. Tack coat to be applied only when existing surface is dry, when atmospheric
temperature is above 60 F, and when weather is not foggy or rainy.
3.2 APPLICATION OF BITUMINOUS MATERIAL
A. Immediately before applying tack coat, full width of surface to be treated to be
swept with a power broom to remove all loose dirt and other objectionable
material.
B. Application of bituminous material to be made by means of a pressure 1
distributor at pressure, temperature, and in amounts directed by Engineer.
C. Following application, surface to be allowed to cure without being disturbed 1
for such period of time as may be necessary to permit drying out and setting
of tack coat. i
1. Surface to then be maintained by Contractor until next course has
been placed. Suitable precautions to be taken by Contractor to protect
surface against damage during this interval.
D. All curbs, longitudinal and transverse joints to be coated with a sufficient
amount of tack coat material prior to placing adjacent panel. This may be
accomplished with hand distribution equipment.
1. Contractor to be responsible for removing any tack applied to exposed
curb faces or other finish surfaces. Tack all surfaces between layers.
3.3 BITUMINOUS MATERIAL CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY:
A. Samples of bituminous material that Contractor proposes to use, together 1
with a statement as to its source and character, must be submitted and
approved before use of such material begins.
1. Contractor to require manufacturer or producer of bituminous material
to furnish material subject to this and all other pertinent requirements
of contract. Only satisfactory materials so demonstrated by service
tests to be acceptable.
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION BITUMINOUS TACK COAT: 02741
SEP 00 PAGE 3
1
B. Contractor to furnish vendor's certified test reports for each truckload, or
1 equivalent, of bituminous material shipped to project. Report to be delivered
to Engineer before permission is granted for use of material.
1 1. Furnishing of vendor's certified test report for bituminous material not
to be interpreted as a basis for final acceptance. All such test reports
I to be subject to verification by testing samples of material received for
use on project.
1 END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
•
1
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION PAVEMENT MARKING: 02765
SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Traffic lane and parking stall striping, handicap symbols painting, and
directional arrow painting.
1 1.2 SITE CONDITIONS
1 A. Environmental Requirements:
1. Do not apply marking paint when wind velocity exceeds 15 mph.
2. Do not apply marking paint when pavement temperature is less than
40 °F., and ambient air temperature is less than 45 °F.
1.3 SCHEDULING
1 A. Perform pavement marking work after installation and curing concrete curbs,
and walks.
B. Perform pavement marking work after curing and sealing asphaltic concrete
paving.
1 PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Paint:
1. Fuller O'Brien, South San Francisco, CA,
415- 761 -2300.
2. General, Tru -Test Paint, Portland, OR,
503 - 665 -6191.
3. Miller Paint Co., Portland, OR, 503 - 223 -4491.
1 4. PPG Industries, Coatings & Resins Division, Pittsburgh, PA, 412 -434-
3131; Lake Oswego, OR,
503 - 636 -2343.
1
1
PAVEMENT MARKING: 02765 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
5. Rodda Paint Co., Portland, OR, 503 - 233 -6016, 1
255 -3724, 245 -0788.
6. Sherwin- Williams Co., Portland, OR, 503 - 223 -8134.
B. Other Manufacturers: Submit Substitution Request prior to bid date in 1
accordance with Section 01600, Material and Equipment.
2.2 MATERIALS ,
A. Traffic Marking Paint:
1. Industry Standard: AASHTO M -248, Type 3F.
2. Acceptable Traffic Marking Paints:
a. Fuller O'Brien: Traffic Line Paint, 382 -12 and 382 -15. 1
b. General: Tru -Test Supreme Zone Marking Paint, 1010 White
and 1012 Yellow. '
c. Miller: Traffic Line Paint, S -260 White and S -261 Yellow.
d. PPG Industries: Pittsburgh Traffic and Zone Marking
g e Ma king Paint 22
Line, White and Yellow.
e. Rodda: Traffic Paint, White 671 and Yellow 670.
f. Sherwin - Williams: White B29 W1 and Yellow B29 Y2. 1
2.3 EQUIPMENT:
A. Apply paint with motor powered atomizing spray striping machine.
B. Adjust pavement marking equipment controls to level required to apply paint
at specified film thickness.
1
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION PAVEMENT MARKING: 02765
SEP 00 PAGE 3
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PROTECTION AND PREPARATION
1 A. Protection: Place temporary barricade and rope or plastic cone barriers to
keep vehicular traffic off striping until paint is dry.
1 B. Surface Preparation:
1. Pressure wash paving surface and blow dry wet areas prior to applying
paint.
1 2. Engineer will review line and symbol layout prior to starting striping
work.
1 3. Perform satisfactory film thickness test prior to applying paint.
3.2 PAVEMENT STRIPING
t edges, true alignment, and uniform wet film
A. Spray apply paint with straight edg g ,
thickness of 17 mils with thickness variation not to exceed 2 mils.
B. Form handicap symbols and arrows with templates.
1 C. Apply white paint to paving areas.
1 D. Apply yellow paint to curbs and no parking striped paving areas.
E. Apply parking area striping in 3" wide lines.
3.3 ADJUSTING
1 A. Remove misplaced marking paint from concrete surfaces.
B. Cover misplaced paint on asphaltic concrete with asphalt emulsion.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1 TOC BUILDING ADDITION EXTRUDED CONCRETE CURBS: 02771
SEP 00 PAGE 1
1
PART 1 GENERAL
1 1.1 SUMMARY
A. Materials and installation of machine extruded concrete curbs for perimeter of
parking lots, wheel bumpers, and other as detailed.
1 1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C309, Liquid Membrane - Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete.
PART2 PRODUCTS
1 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
' A. Schneider "Perm -A- Curbs ", Concrete Construction Co., Westside Concrete
Co.
B. Other Manufacturers: Submit Substitution Requests prior to bid date in
accordance with Section 01600, Material and Equipment.
1 2.2 MATERIALS
1 A. Concrete: Special no slump mix with not less than seven sacks cement per
cubic yard of concrete and to attain minimum of 3000 psi compressive
strength in 28 days.
1 B. Curing Compound: Acrylic type meeting requirements of ASTM C309 at
application rate of 300 s.f. per gallon.
PART 3 EXECUTION
1 3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. Pattern and Section: Plan and Details as shown on Drawings. Separately
form ends and corners as detailed where not suitable for machine forming.
Where extruded curbs abut poured curbs, exposed faces to align.
1
1
•
1
EXTRUDED CONCRETE CURBS: 02771 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
B. Bonding To Pavement: Apply epoxy resin bonding adhesive to pavement in
a zig -zag pattern as wide as curb and with 6" frequency of pattern. Place 1
curbs within recommended contact time, generally one hour maximum.
C. Control Joints and Weep Holes: Using handsaw and guide template, cut 1
joints through curbs at 20' maximum spacing and 2' from each corner. Finish
cut edges with cement edging tool. Install weep holes through curb where
required to prevent ponding water.
D. Curing and Protection: Spray curbs with curing compound immediately after
placing and finishing. Barricade and protect curb from traffic until set. Patch
curbs with damaged finishes and replace any sections not bonded to
pavement. 1
END OF SECTION 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
I TOC BUILDING ADDITION CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE CURBS: 02772
SEP 00 PAGE 1
1
PART 1 GENERAL
I
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Construction of portland cement concrete curb constructed in accordance
with this specification at locations shown on plans or designated by Engineer
I and in reasonably close conformity to lines, grades, dimensions and designs
shown on plans or established by Engineer.
1 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
I A. Portland Cement Concrete: Portland cement concrete to be 3000 psi in 28
days and to contain no additives to cause rapid heating or setting. Entrained
1 air to be a required additive in amount of five percent, plus or minus one
percent.
I B. Preformed Expansion Joint: Preformed expansion joint fillers for concrete to
conform to requirements of AASHTO M 153 or AASHTO M 213 except that
I those furnished under AASHTO M 213 to be tested in conformance to ASTM
D1751and to be1/2".
I 1. Fillers conforming to AASHTO M 213, except that binder, if other than
bituminous material, may also be used provided that they otherwise
meet this specification and provided further that they have been
I demonstrated to be rot and vermin proof for a period of at least five
years.
I 2. Unless otherwise specified or called for by plans, kind furnished may
be one or another of above specified as Contract may elect.
1 C. Curing Compound: White pigmented curing compound to conform to
requirements of ASTM C -309.
1 D. Acceptance of Materials: All materials and concrete mix will be subject to
inspection for suitability as Engineer may elect prior to or during incorporation
I of materials into work.
1
1
1
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE CURBS: 02772 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION OF BASE
A. Areas on which structures are to be constructed will be compacted to not less 1
than ninety percent (95 %) of maximum dry density per ASTM D -698
compaction control test, for a depth of one (I) foot.
B. Subgrade to be maintained in a smooth, compacted condition, in conformity
with required section and established grade until concrete is placed.
Subgrade to be in a moist condition when concrete is placed.
C. Where specified or shown on plans, Contractor to place and compact 1
aggregate base course for curb base. Placement of aggregate base course
to be considered incidental to curb bid item.
3.2 FORMS
A. Forms to be of wood or steel, straight, and of sufficient strength to resist
1
springing during depositing and consolidating concrete.
B. Outside forms to have a height equal to full depth of curb or gutter. 1
C. Inside form of curb to have a batter as indicated and to be securely fastened
to and supported by outside form.
D. Wood forms to be two inch nominal surfaced plank or approved plywood
forms.
E. Steel forms to be of approved section with a flat surface at top.
1
F. Benders or thin plank forms may be used on curves, curb returns or grade
changes. Back forms for curb returns maybe made of I /2'inch benders, for 1
full height of curb, cleated together.
G. Curb forms to be carefully set to alignment and grade and to y g g d t conform to
dimensions of curb. Forms to be held rigidly in place by use of stakes placed
at intervals not to exceed four feet. Clamps, spreaders, and braces to be
used where required to insure rigidity in forms.
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE CURBS: 02772
SEP 00 PAGE 3
1
H. Forms on front of curb to be removed not Tess than two hours nor more than
1 six hours after concrete has been placed. Forms back of curb to remain in
place until face and top of curb have been finished as specified in paragraph:
1 Finishing. Forms not to be removed while concrete is sufficiently plastic to
slump in any direction.
I. Forms to be cleaned and coated with form oil each time before concrete is
placed. Wood forms may, instead, be thoroughly wetted with water before
concrete is placed.
1 3.3 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Concrete to be placed and compacted in forms without segregation.
Concrete to be thoroughly consolidated by tamping and spading or with
approved mechanical vibrators.
3.4 FINISHING
A. Prior to removal of curb face forms, top surfaces of curbs to be finished true
to grade by means of a straightedge float, not less than 10 feet in length,
' operated longitudinally over surface of concrete. Form clamps to be
constructed so as not to interfere with such operation.
B. Edges of top of curb to be rounded with an edging tool to radius shown on
plans. Floated surfaces to then be brushed with a fine -hair brush with
longitudinal strokes.
C. Immediately after removing front curb form, face of curb to be troweled or
rubbed with a wood or concrete rubbing block and water until blemishes, form
marks, and tool marks have been removed. Surface, while still wet, to be
brushed in same manner as gutter and curb top.
D. Except at grade changes or curves, finished surfaces not to vary from testing
edge of a 10 foot straightedge more than 0.01 foot when placed on top and
' face of curb.
E. Irregularities exceeding above to be satisfactorily corrected. Visible surfaces
' and edges of finished curb to be free of blemishes and form and tool marks,
and to be uniform in color, shape, and appearance.
1
1
1
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE CURBS: 02772 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 4 SEP 00
1
3.5 CURB FORMING MACHINES
A. Curb-forming machines for constructing curb will be approved
g g pp oved based on trial
use on job. Use of equipment to be discontinued at any time during
construction if equipment produces unsatisfactory results, and work to be
accomplished as specified hereinbefore. Unsatisfactory work to be removed
and reconstructed for full length between regularly scheduled joints.
Removed portions will be disposed of as directed.
3.6 CURING 1
A. After concrete has been placed and finished, as specified, it is to be cured by:
1. Application of a white pigmented liquid membrane - forming compound
applied uniformly to damp concrete by pressure spray methods, and;
2. By keeping concrete protected and constantly moist for at least 72
hours.
B. Concrete curb to be kept from
p contact and strain for at least seven days.
3.7 CONTRACTION JOINTS 1
A. Transverse contraction joints of weakened plane or dummy type to be formed
in exposed surfaces of portland cement concrete structures opposite
contraction joints in abutting portland cement concrete, over contraction joints
in concrete underlying new concrete and at other locations in new structures
as required to confine contraction joint spacing to a maximum of 15 feet.
B. Joints to be formed by grooving, by insertion and removal of plates or other 1
devices, by insertion and leaving in place of preformed bituminous filler, by
sawing or by other means approved by Engineer.
1. Top width of joint not to be less than 1/8 inch nor greater than 1/4 inch,
1 g 4 inch,
and depth of joint to be such that at least 1/3 of cross - sectional area of
curb at joint to be severed.
2. Edges of joints to be tooled, unfilled grooves to be clean and neat, and
joint filler to be even and flush with surface of concrete.
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE CURBS: 02772
SEP 00 PAGE 5
' C. If joints are constructed by sawing, sawing to be performed as soon as
practicable after pouring and prior to occurrence of any uncontrolled cracking.
' 3.8 EXPANSION JOINT
A. Expansion joints to normally be placed at 45 foot intervals and will be
required on each side of driveways at point of high curb.
1 3.9 MARKING OF SERVICE CROSSINGS
1 A. At each location where sewer and water services cross under curb, upper
surface of curb to be plainly stamped with an "S" in case of sewer services,
and "W' in case of water services. Stamp characters to be four inches high
and three to four inches wide overall. Impressions made by stamps in
concrete to be 1/4" deep and 1/4" to 3/8" wide. Characters to be plainly visible
and easily read from street side of curb.
' 3.10 PROTECTION
1 A. Completed curbs to be protected from damage until accepted. Contractor to
repair damaged concrete and clean concrete discolored during construction.
' Curbs that are damaged to be removed and reconstructed for entire length
between regularly scheduled joints. Refinishing damaged portion will not be
acceptable. Removed damaged portions to be disposed of off project site by
Contractor at no additional cost to Owner.
3.11 WEATHER PRECAUTIONS
1 A. Cold Weather:
1. Place no concrete on frozen subgrade and remove ice and snow from
reinforcing, forms, and embedded items.
1 2. Temperatures: Raise temperature of all surfaces in contact with
concrete above 40 ° F prior to concrete placement. Minimum concrete
1 temperature during placement: 65 ° F. Minimum air temperature during
first 24 hours after protection removal: 50 ° F.
3. Use of salts or chemical admixtures to prevent concrete freezing is
prohibited. Do not permit temporary heaters to locally over -heat or
over -dry concrete.
1
•
1
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE CURBS: 02772 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 6 SEP 00
4. Assume responsibility, including costs, for testing suspected frozen
concrete. Remove and replace freeze - damaged concrete at
Contractor's expense.
1
B. Warm Weather: When air temperature exceeds 90 ° F. and when wind
exceeds 20 mph place concrete in accordance with following requirements:
1. Maximum concrete temperature at time of placement: 75 ° F. 1
2. Mix concrete minimum possible time, and place as soon as possible
thereafter. Sprinkle forms, reinforcing, embedded items, and subgrade
with cool water immediately prior to concrete placement.
3. Protect unstripped formwork and exposed concrete surfaces against
1
excessive drying with water spray or other approved method.
4. Assume responsibility, including costs, for testing suspected damaged 1
concrete. Remove and replace damaged concrete at Contractor's
expense.
3.12 BACKFILLING CURBS
S
A. Curb to be backfilled with approved materials prior to any placement of base 1
course aggregate or paving operations.
1
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
I TOC BUILDING ADDITION CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS: 02775
SEP 00 PAGE 1
I PART1 GENERAL
I 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
I A. Construction of portland cement concrete sidewalks and driveways.
B. Sidewalks and driveways to be constructed in accordance with this
I specification and related sections, at respective locations shown on plans or
designated by Engineer and in reasonably close conformity to lines, grades,
dimensions and designs shown on plans or established by Engineer.
I C. All work in a public right of way or easement to meet
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation
1 Officials
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
APA American Plywood Association
I ACI American Concrete Institute
I PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CEMENT
1 A. Portland cement to be ASTM C -150, Type 1, unless otherwise specified or
approved.
1 2.2 CONCRETE AGGREGATE
1 A. Aggregate to be natural, dean gravel conforming to ASTM C -33.
2.3 BASE COURSE AGGREGATE
I A. Base rock to be clean 3/4 -inch minus crushed rock, conforming in all respects
I to requirements set forth in latest edition of State of Oregon Standard
Specifications for Highway Construction.
1
1
1
CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS: 02775 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
2.4 CONCRETE
A. Concrete used under this section to be certified by materials supplier or 1
contractor to meet compressive strengths specified (3,000 psi in 28 days if
not otherwise specified) and to conform to ASTM C -94.
1. A minimum of 6 sacks of cement to be used per cubic yard of concrete
and maximum aggregate size to be 1 -1/2 inches for smooth texture
surface finish and 3/4 inch for exposed aggregate surface finish.
2. Cement, sand, aggregate and water to be proportioned in a workable
mix so as to provide a compressive strength of 3,000 psi after 28 days
of curing, in conformance with ACI 318 -771. Concrete slump at time of
placement to be between 2 inches and 4 inches. Concrete to include 1
a 5% (+ one percent) entrained air additive.
2.5 AIR ENTRAINMENT 1
A. Air entrainment add mixture to comply with ASTM C -309, Type 1 (clear or
translucent). 1
2.6 JOINT FILLERS
A. Expansion joint material for concrete to have a 3/8 inch nominal thickness,
conform to requirements of AASHTO M -153, equal to Sonneborn Sonoflex F,
or approved substitute.
2.7 CURING MATERIAL
1
A. Curing material to be a white pigmented liquid membrane forming compound.
2.8 TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES
A. Necessary traffic control barricades, lighting, signs, etc., fo conform to 1
Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices.
2.9 SURFACE - MORTAR RETARDANT 1
A. Surface mortar retardant, for exposed sections, to be equal in all respects to
Sikamix 199 Rugasol -S, manufactured by Sika Corporation.
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS: 02775
SEP 00 PAGE 3
1 2.10 CONCRETE CLEANER
A. Concrete surface cleaner to be equal to Heavy Duty Concrete Cleaner,
manufactured by ProSo Co., Inc.
1 PART 3 EXECUTION
1 3.1 GENERAL
A. All work to comply with following incorporated minimum specifications:
1 ACI 304 - Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and
Placing Concrete.
' ACI 305 - Hot Weather Concreting
ACI 306 - Cold Weather Concreting
ACI 308 - Recommended Practice for Curing Concrete
1 ACI 309 - Recommended Practice for Consolidation of Concrete
3.2 TEST POUR
' A. Contractor to make all arrangements for pouring test sections for each
9 P 9
' specified surface finish prior to proceeding with any work. Test sections to
vary in concrete aggregate, surface finish techniques and timing, seeding
finish surface with varied amounts of additional aggregate, etc., as required to
develop and document specific materials and procedures acceptable to
Owner. Contractor to obtain Owner's approval prior to proceeding with work.
' 3.3 PREPARATION FOR HANDLING AND PLACEMENT OF CONCRETE
A. In preparation for placing of concrete, all sawdust, chips and other
' construction debris or extraneous matter to be removed from interior of forms
or base. Any standing water to be removed and a firm, stable base verified.
1 B. Struts, stays and braces serving temporarily to hold forms in correct shape
and alignment prior to placing of concrete to be removed when concrete
placing has reached elevation rendering their service unnecessary. These
' temporary members to be entirely removed from forms and not buried in
concrete.
1
1
1
1
CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS: 02775 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 4 SEP 00
3.4 PREPARATION OF BASE
A. Areas on which sidewalks and driveways are to be constructed to be brought 1
to proper lines and grade and compacted to not less than ninety percent
(95 %) of maximum density, at optimum moisture, as determined by AASHTO
T -99 compaction control test. Base to be moistened before portland cement
is placed thereon and to also be moist and firm at time concrete is placed.
3.5 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE/WEATHER PRECAUTIONS 1
A. Cold Weather: 1
1. Place no concrete on frozen subgrade and remove ice and snow from
reinforcing, forms, and embedded items. 1
2. Temperatures: Raise temperature of all surfaces in contact with
concrete above 40 °F prior to concrete placement. Minimum concrete 1
temperature during placement: 65 °F. Minimum concrete temperature
for 72 hours after placement: 55 °F. Minimum air temperature during
first 24 hours after protection removal: 50 °F. 1
3. Use of salts or chemical admixtures to prevent concrete freezing
prohibited. Do not permit temporary heaters to locally over -heat or
over -dry concrete.
4. Assume responsibility, including costs, for testing suspected frozen
concrete. Remove and replace freeze - damaged concrete at
Contractor's expense.
B. Warm Weather: When air temperature exceeds 90 °F. and when wind
exceeds 20 mph place concrete in accordance with following requirements: ,
1. Maximum concrete temperature at time of placement: 75 °F. Mix
concrete minimum possible time, and place as soon as possible
thereafter. 1
2. Sprinkle forms, reinforcing, embedded items, and subgrade with cool
water immediately prior to concrete placement. Protect unstripped
formwork and exposed concrete surfaces against excessive drying
with water spray, or other approved method. 1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS: 02775
SEP 00 PAGE 5
1 3. Assume responsibility, including costs, for testing suspected damaged
concrete. Remove and replace damaged concrete at Contractor's
1 expense.
3.6 GENERAL
A. Sidewalks to be constructed between suitable forms of sufficient strengths to
t g
1 resist springing during depositing and consolidating concrete and of a height
equal to full depth of finished sidewalkor driveway approach.
1. Forms to be set with upper edge true to line and grade and to be held
rigidly in place by stakes placed at intervals not to exceed four feet.
' B. No concrete to be used which does not reach its final position in forms within
one and one -half hours after introduction of water to mix at batch plant.
1 1. Rate of delivery of concrete during concreting operation to be such as
to provide for proper handling, placing and finishing of concrete. Rate
to be such that interval between batches or loads to not exceed twenty
1 minutes. Concrete which has hardened or attained an initial set to not
be retempered or remixed.
2. Concrete to be placed so as to avoid segregation of materials and any
' displacement of forms or reinforcement. Use of long troughs, chutes
and pipes for conveying concrete from mixer to forms to be permitted
only by written authorization of engineer.
C. When placing operations would involve dropping concrete more than five
feet, deposit through sheet meal or other approved conduits.
D. After initial set of concrete, forms not to be jarred and no strain to be placed
1 on any component of work.
E. Concrete to be placed in each section or contiguous section monolithically
1 and without construction joints, to greatest extent possible.
3.7 TEST AND INSPECTION
A. Slump tests, air entrainment, and cylinder tests may be conducted on poured
P Y Y P
' in place concrete at frequency determined by Owner. All tests, initiated by
Owner, to be at Owner's expense. Owner will designate an independent
testing laboratory and contractor to notify laboratory 48 hours prior to all
pours so that tests can be scheduled and performed.
1
1
CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS: 02775 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 6 SEP 00
3.8 CONCRETE CONSOLIDATION
A. Concrete, during and immediately after depositing, to be thoroughly
1
consolidated. Consolidation to be done by mechanical means, such as
spading, or high frequency vibrators, and to ensure smooth surfaces and
dense concrete along form surfaces or in corners, etc. '
3.9 FORMS
A. All forms to be of A '
PA grade "B" or better plywood or metal and to be built
mortar tight and of sufficient rigidity to prevent distortion due to pressure of
concrete and /or construction operations.
1. Forms to be substantial and unyielding and to be so designed that
finished concrete will conform to proper dimensions and contours.
Side of forms to take into account concrete placement and
consolidation operations.
1
2. All lines and forms for concretes i 1/4" sections to not vary more than 1/4 in
ten feet. Maximum variation from plumb to not exceed 1/4". '
B. All forms to be treated with approved and nonstaining form oil or wax or
saturated with water immediately before placing concrete. Any material
which will adhere to or discolor concrete will not be allowable.
3.10 REMOVAL OF FORMS r
A. In determination of time for removal of forms and discontinuance of heating,
consideration to be given to location and character of concrete, weather and
other conditions influencing setting of concrete and materials sued in mix.
Recommendations, precautions and requirements of ACI 347 -68 and ACI
318 -11 to be met.
1. Normally, forms to not be removed for a period of 4 days following placement '
of concrete. If high -early strength cement is used, these periods may be
reduced by engineer. Methods of form removal likely to cause overstress of
concrete to not be used.
111
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS: 02775
SEP 00 PAGE 7
' 3.11 SURFACE FINISH
A. Street side sidewalks and driveways to be finished to smooth and uniform
texture by troweling and floating, and, if so directed by Engineer, by cross-
' brooming perpendicular to traffic. Surface to be lightly grooved or marked
into squares or other shapes to match other such markings on similar existing
surfaces in vicinity, or as designated by Engineer. Edges to be tooled to 1/4-
' inch radius.
B. On -site walkways, crosswalk intersections, and plazas to be finished to a
' smooth, broomed, burlap or exposed aggregate surface, as specified on
drawings.
C. Finished surface of concrete to not vary more than 0.02 of a foot from testing
edge of a 10 -foot straight edge, except at grade changes. Irregularities
exceeding above to be satisfactorily corrected. Completed surface to be
1 uniform in color and free of surface blemishes and tool marks.
D. Completed surface to be uniform in color and free of surface blemishes, tool
1 marks, and to match existing adjacent sections to greatest extent possible.
Surface finish to be completed in accordance with procedures and schedules
' established in Owner approved test section.
E. For exposed aggregate surface finishes, Contractor to apply a surface mortar
' retardant as soon as concrete has been screeded and lost its sheen, and in
conformance with manufacturer's recommendations.
1. Depending upon approved test section, Contractor may be required to
' "seed" surface with additional aggregate and float it into surface, prior
to application of retardant. Apply retardant with a low pressure sprayer
and cover surface with wet burlap, curing paper, or plastic film to
1 prevent surface from drying.
2. Within 12 to 24 hours after application of retardant, Contractor to
1 remove retarded surface mortar using a stiff broom and low pressure
water hose.
1 3. Apply a concrete cleaner, in conformance with manufacturer's
recommendations, to remove oil residues, scum, excess mortar, etc.
1
1
1
1
CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS: 02775 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 8 SEP 00
3.12 CURING
A. After concrete has been placed and finished as specified, it to be cured by: '
1. Application of a white pigmented liquid membrane - forming compound
applied uniformly to damp concrete by pressure spray methods, or
2. By keeping concrete protected and constantly moist for at least 72
hours. Vehicular traffic to be kept off surface for at least seven days
and longer is so directed.
3.13 EXPANSION JOINTS ,
A. Expansion joints to be provided as follows: '
1. Between driveways and portland cement concrete pavements;
2. Transversely in walks at a distance of six to eight feet in from curbs 111
which occur at walk ends;
3. Transversely in walks opposite expansion joints in
y pp p joints adjoining curbs and
elsewhere at such locations in work that distance between transverse
expansion joints does not exceed 25 feet;
4. Around poles, posts, driveways, boxes and other fixtures which
protrude through, into or against structures;
5. Alongside or transverse to new surfacing at such locations and
frequencies as is necessary to provide for expansion of both new and
abutting portland cement concrete.
B. Width of joint and thickness of filler to be not less than 1/2 inch, and where
new concrete surfacing abuts other surfacing, to be not less than 3/4 inch.
Typically except as noted, transverse expansion joints to be at right angles to
alignment, vertical to surface, and to provide complete separation of new
concrete.
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS: 02775
SEP 00 PAGE 9
1
3.14 CONTRACTION JOINTS
A. Transverse contraction joints of weakened plane or dummy type to be formed
joints P Y tYP
in exposed surfaces of sidewalks and incidental surfacings at such locations
as are required to confine contraction joint spacing to a maximum of 5 feet or
as shown on plans. Joints to be formed to a depth of 1/3 of thickness of
1 concrete and to a width of about 1/8 inch. Joint edges to be tooled smooth.
3.16 PROTECTION
A. Completed concrete surface to be protected from damage until project is
accepted. Contractor to repair damaged concrete and clean concrete
discolored during construction. Surfaces that are damaged to be removed
and reconstructed for entire length between regularly scheduled joints.
Refinishing damaged portion will not be acceptable. Removed portions to be
disposed of off project site by Contractor at no additional cost to Owner.
' END OF SECTION
•
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION IRRIGATION SYSTEM: 02810
SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Design & Build an Irrigation System conforming to this
' Performance Specification. Install new and repair existing
irrigation system so as to result in a singularly controlled system
providing even water distribution to all landscaped areas of project
site.
1.2 Related work specified elsewhere:
1 A. Section 02230 Site Clearing
B. Section 02300 Earthwork
' C. Section 02900 Landscaping
1.3 PERMITS AND CODES
1 A. Obtain and pay for any permits and / or inspections required by
governing agencies and utility companies.
' B. Conform to local codes governing work described in these
specifications.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Maintain during construction and provide the Owner with Record
' Drawings showing arrangement and locations of new lines,
valves, and heads, with valve operation times.
' 1. Major underground elements to be noted with
triangular measurements from a permanent feature.
' 1.5 STANDARDS
A. Uniform Plumbing Code. If more restrictive than specified, contact
Landscape Architect for clarification.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
1 A. Two (2) sets complete product submittals covering all materials
and equipment required for the finished system.
B. During the course of the installation; keep updated record
documents and make available to the Landscape Architect or
Owner as may be required.
1
IRRIGATION SYSTEM: 02810 TOC BUILDING ADDITION 1
PAGE 2 SEP 00
1
1.7 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUALS 1
A. Provide Four (4) copies of all operations and maintenance
manuals, including but not limited to: 1
1. Manufacturer's model numbers
2. Product descriptions for equipment used 1
3. Procedures regarding winterization shut -down and spring
1 start -up.
1.8 EXISTING CONDITIONS 1
A. Before proceeding with installation of any section, verify ground
measurement and system layout correlation.
111
1. Contractor to provide necessary adjustments in field to assure
complete and uniform coverage. 1
2. All field adjustments are to be without cost to the Owner.
3 Locate and protect all existing utilities. If damage occurs, notify 1
proper agency and obain repairs.
B. Verify with County and Document: 1
1. Projected water flow rate 1
2. Static and residual pressure
3. Other factors affecting engineering of sprinkler system.
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Provide protection at all times to prevent dirt or debris from entering
piping or equipment. Storage of materials shall be kept orderly and to
accepted practices for full protection of the material from damage. 1
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Entire system to be unconditionally wan anted as to materials and 1
workmanship, including but not limited to, settling of backfill areas, or
damage to planting, lawns, paving, etc., for a period of one year from final
acceptance.
1
1
•
1 TOC BUILDING ADDITION IRRIGATION SYSTEM: 02810
SEP 00 PAGE 3
i
1 1. Areas or materials requiring repair to be at no cost to the
Owner.
1 1.11 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Installation by a contractor with a minimum of two (2) years experience
I doing similar work and who has a minimum of five (5) successful
sprinkler installations of comparable size in the greater Portland Area.
I 1. Submit project name and address of five (5) projects completed
within the last two years with bid.
I 1.12 WORKMANSHIP
A. These specifications govern installation, equipment, material, and
1 workmanship.
1. Installation shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations and local and / or State codes.
1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1 2.1 MATERIALS
I A. Irrigation: All materials and equipment incorporated in the system shall
be new, undamaged, of standard quality, and are subject to testing as
specified.
1
1. Pipe. Tubing and Fittings: Galvanized iron, PVC, or
1 polyethylene, as specified in plan schedules.
2. Galvanized Pipe and Fittings: Standard weight, hot -dip
I galvanized iron or steel pipe, threaded and coupled. Pipe
shall meet the requirements of ASTM A 120. All pipe fittings shall
be standard threaded galvanized malleable iron fittings. .
1 3. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe and Fittings;
PVC compound Type 1, Grade 1, conforming to ASTM D 1784
specifications. Pipe and Fittings shall be free from
I defects in material workmanship, and handling. PVC
solvent weld pipe shall be of PVC 1120 material and shall have
200 psi minimum pressure rating. PVC threaded pipe shall be of
I PVC 1120 material and shall be schedule 80 which conform to
ASTM D 2466, Type I, Grades 1 or 2.
1
1
IRRIGATION SYSTEM: 02810 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
D G
PAGE 4 SEP 00
4. Automatic Controllers: Rainbird or Toro.
Electrically timed device for automatically opening and closing
control valves for predetermined periods of time and mounted so
that all normal adjustments will be conveniently located for use by
the operator. Provide for new single controller operation for
existing and renovated landscape areas. 1
5. Sprinkler Heads: Rainbird, Toro, and /or Hunter.
Pattern and coverage as required to provide uniform 1
coverage of turf, shrub and groundcover plantings as shown on
Landscape Plan.
6. Valve Box: "Ametek" with locking lid, size as required. 1
7. Gate Valves: Heavy duty brass conforming to the requirements of
ASTM B 62. Valves shall be of the same size as the pipes on
which they are placed and shall have union or flange connections.
Service rating (for nonshock cold water) shall be 150 psi. 1
8. Automatic Control Valves: Rainbird or Toro.
Remote control valves shall be globe pattern with flanged or
screwed connections as required. Threaded valves shall be
provided with union connections. Valves shall be of normally
closed design and shall be electric solenoid operated, having
1 maximum rating of 6.5 watts utilizing 24 volt AC power.
9. Quick Coupler Valves: (Provide one (1) for winterization at P.O.C.)
Service rating not less than 150 psi for nonshock cold water.
Couplers shall be of one piece construction with steel reinforced
side handles attached. All couplers shall have standard male pipe
threads at the top. Couplers furnished with quick 1
coupler valves unless otherwise specifed.
10. Drain Valves: 3/4 inch in size, made from bronze or brass, manual
angle globe type, with rising stem, hex brass union,
removeable bonnet and stem, and adjustable
packing gland. Valves shall be designed for underground
installation with suitable cross wheel for operation with a standard
key, and shall have a service rating of not less than 150 psi.
The Contractor shall furnish three standard operating keys. 1
11. Hose Bibs: Bronze or brass, angle type threaded to accomodate
a 3/4 inch hose connection. 1
12. Double Check Valve Assemblies (DCVA's): Installed, inspected,
and tested in accordance with the applicable portions of local
codes and regulations.
14. Check Valves: Heavy duty bronze or brass.
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION IRRIGATION SYSTEM: 02810
SEP 00 PAGE 5
15. Electrical Wire and Splices: Comply with Section 9 -29.3. Wire:
' ASTM B -3 copper, type UF, AWG, size no. 14 minimum.
Connectors: Scotch lock #3570, Rainbird PT101 -104, or
approved equivalent..
1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
1 3.1 PREPARATION
A. Inspect the conditions in the field, and verify that work may properly
begin. Start work denotes acceptance.
B. Install sleeves under surfaces to be paved.
C. Determine total number of zones required to operate new and existing irrigation
system and install one controller capable of meeting requirements. Multiple
1 controller locations will not be accepted.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Source Connection and Controller: Locate the water source and
determine requirements. Insure existing backflow prevention and
' manual globe valve operate and meet local codes. Verify controller
location and electrical source. Install controller and wiring per
manufacturer's specifications. All above - ground wiring to be installed
' in rigid conduit meeting codes for low voltage wire.
B. Excavation: Pipe trenches snaked slightly to allow for expansion and
contraction of piping. Main or supply lines shall be a minimum of 18"
deep. Zone lines shall be a minimum of 12 inches deep. The bottom of
the trenches shall be smooth and free of sharp rocks or objects that
' may damage pipe. Trenches shall slope to a low point to allow lines to
completely drain. Install 3/4 inch drain valve at mainline low points.
Provide minimum five (5) cubic foot gravel sump.
' C. Sleeve Installation: Class 40 PVC pipe sleeves installed prior to
paving bneath all paved areas, including walks and drives (diameter to
be minimum 4 "). Bed pipe in minimum three (3) inches of fine sand.
Provide minimum 12 inches fine sand cover over top of pipe. Mark
sleeve ends with orange painted 2 x 4 stakes and attach together w/ wire.
Extend sleeves 12 inches beyond paved edges into planter.
' D. Pipe installation: Lay pipe in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations, "snaked" slightly and supported at all points within the
' trench. Cut all pipe square, chamfer edges and deburr, wipe surface free
of all moisture or dirt. Solvent -weld all joints except those requiring
threaded fittings. Align pipe in trench with manufacturer's stampings
IRRIGATION SYSTEM: 02810 TOC BUILDING ADDITION 1
PAGE 6 SEP 00
visible to surface for inspection prior to backfill. Do no solvent welding in 1
the rain or in temperature below 40 degrees F.
E. Valve installation: Flush mainline thoroughly prior to installing automatic 1
control valves, gate valves, etc., in shrub beds. Provide valve boxes or
sleeves with locking lids at each location. Valves shall be horizontal,
firm, and set on a clean, three inch deep pea gravel base. All valves
shall have a minimum of one union. All valves with flow adjustment to
be set for proper performance.
F. Control Wiring: Lay in trenches next to lines when practical. Place in
conduit above ground. Control wire shall be red, and the common
neutral wire, white. Provide 18 inches curled coil at each valve
connection and at 100 -foot intervals along mainline. Provide additional
spare Ground and One additionalHot Wire accessible to all valves. Tag
spare wire so that it may be readily identified as a spare. Bundle wire 1
with tape. Provide 18 inch coil at controller location. Avoid field splicing.
Provide locator tape in trench with wire.
G. Head Installation: Install swing joints or "funny pipe" at all heads.
Provide Teak -free joints with free movement. Cap heads temporarily and
test all piping and joints at maximum source pressure for one hour.
Repair all leaks and retest as stated above.
H. Backfill Procedure: Backfill trenches by bedding pipe in fine soil and
tamp firm. Fill trench to six inches below surrounding grade and water
settle. Fill remaining trench with topsoil and tamp firm.
I. Adjustment and Balancing: Adjust sprinkler nozzles to provide uniform 1
coverage and to limit sprinkler over -throw onto unwanted areas,
windows, and building surfaces
J. Clean Up: Remove debris, equipment, surplus materials, etc., from each
area as the divisions are completed. At completion of system, site should
be neat and orderly.
K. Submittals: At completion of the project and before final inspection,
submit the following to the General Contractor for inclusion in Owner's 1
Maintenance Manual: Accurate "as- built" drawings, parts list schedule,
written operating and maintenance procedures including: winterization
procedures, and schedules indicating required open valve times for each
valve necessary to apply one (1) inch of water per week to landscaped 1
areas.
1
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES: 02821
SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
' A. Fence framework, fabric, and accessories.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03300: Cast -In -Place Concrete, for anchorage of posts to concrete.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data on fabric, posts, accessories, fittings and
1 hardware.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate plan layout, spacing of components, post foundation
1 dimensions, hardware anchorage, and schedule of components.
C. Samples: Submit two samples of fence fabric illustrating construction and
1 colored finish.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the
' products specified in this Section with minimum three years documented
experience.
B. Provide and install products in accordance with requirements and
recommendations of the following:
' C. Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (CLFMI) - Product Manual.
ASTM F567 - Installation of Chain -Link Fence.
1.5 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
1
1
1
II
1
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES: 02821 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS 1
A. Materials and Components: Provide in conformance with recommendations
of CLFMI Product Manual.
B. Fence Fabric: PVC coated steel, CLFMI Class 2a; black color.
C. Intermediate Posts: As required.
D. Terminal, Corner, Rail, and Brace Posts: As required.
E. Tension Wire: PVC coated steel, 6 gage thickness single strand; black color. 1
F. Post Anchor Plates: Galvanized steel, size as required.
G. Gates: Finish same as fence materials.
2.2 ACCESSORIES 1
A. Fittings: Galvanized steel; Sleeves, bands, clips, rail ends, tension bars,
fasteners and fittings, and the like, as required for a complete installation.
PART 3 EXECUTION 1
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install framework, fabric, accessories in accordance with ASTM F567.
B. Set posts plumb, with anchor plates securely attached to structure.
C. Stretch fabric between terminal posts or framework.
D. Position bottom of fabric 2 inches maximum above finished grade.
E. Fasten fabric to line posts and bottom tension wire with tie wire at maximum 1
15 inches on center.
F. Attach fabric to end and corner posts with tension bars and tension bar clips. 1
G. Install bottom tension wire stretched taut between terminal posts. 1
' TOC BUILDING ADDITION CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES: 02821
SEP 00 PAGE 3
3.2 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch.
B. Maximum Offset From True Position: 1/2 inch.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION PARKING BUMPERS: 02848
SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
1 A. Precast concrete parking bumpers.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 02742: Bituminous Concrete Pavement
B. Section 02765: Pavement Marking
C. Section 07900: Sealants
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A 615 -89, "Specification for deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement ".
B. ASTM C 33 -86, "Specification for Concrete Aggregates ".
1 C. ASTM C 150 -89, "Specification for Portland Cement'.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PARKING BUMPERS
A. Precast concrete with cast openings for pins chamfered edges and free from
pits and rock pockets.
1 1. Strength: 3000 psi
2. Cement: Meet requirements of ASTM C 150, Type 11.
3. Aggregates: Meet requirements of ASTM C 33.
4. Reinforcing Steel: Meet requirements of ASTM A 615, Grade 60. Two
#3 bars minimum, full length of bumper.
r 2.2 PINS
A. Galvanized steel pipe.
1. Size: 3/4 inch diameter.
2. Length: 24 inches long.
R
PARKING BUMPERS: 02848 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Locate precast units as shown on Drawings. 1
B. Level with paving and aligned with sidewalks.
C. Recess anchoring pins 1 inch below top of bumper.
1. Backer rod on top of pin. 1
2. Self leveling sealant.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
�1
1
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION BICYCLE RACKS: 02871
SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Bike Racks.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03300: Cast -In -Place Concrete.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's Specifications and other Data needed to show
compliance with specified requirements including installation instructions.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver roducts to jobsite in their Manufacturer's original containers, with
P 1
labels intact and legible. Maintain packaged materials with seals unbroken
and labels intact until time of installation.
B. Store above ground, under cover and protected from damage.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 BIKE RACK
A. Manufacture: Huntco used to set standard for other listed manufactures and
does not show preference.
1. Brandir International
2. Columbia Cascade; Cycloops
3. Creative Pipe Inc.
4. Huntco
5. Life Rax
6. Substitutions: Submit according to requirements of Section 01630.
B. Material: 2 -3/8 inch OD x 2 inch ID x 1.54 inch Wall, ASTM 53 Schedule 40,
1 Steel Pipe.
1
1
BICYCLE RACKS: 02871 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
C. Model:
1. Huntco BR 7 1
2. In Ground Anchor Mount.
2.5 OTHER MATERIALS 1
A. Provide other materials required for a complete and proper installation. 1
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Surface conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work of this
Section will be performed.
1. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of
Work.
2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3. Protect work of others from damage.
1
B. Install work of this Section in accordance with Drawings, and manufacturer's
recommended installation procedures.
3.2 CLEANING
3
A. Clean, without damaging, exposed surfaces affected by work of this Section
and repair as necessary. 1
B. Remove from jobsite refuse and debris created by this work, and dispose of
in a legal manner. !�
END OF SECTION
,I
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION LANDSCAPING: 02900
SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide all landscaping sheet L -1.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 02230 Site Clearing
2. Section 02300 Excavation and Fill
3. Section 02810 Irrigation System
1.2 STANDARDS
A. Provide plant materials true to name and variety established by the
American Joint committee on Horticultural Nomenclature
"Standardized Plant Names ", latest edition. Provide plants
complying with the recommendations and requirements of ANSI Z60.1
"Standard for Nursery Stock" and specified below.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Four (4) Copies of new plantings plant list., including list of vigorous
transplanted plant material from onsite (stored at Joyce Farms and to be reused
to augment gaps in old landscape).
B. Deliver invoices, labels or other acceptable proof of quantities of
Imported Topsoil, Mulch, Textural Soil Amendments, Fertilizer,
Barkdust, and Plant Materials.
C. Two (2) copies of typewritten instruction recommending maintenance
procedures for the Owner for one full year. Submit at completion of
installation.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Warranty all plant materials for a period of one year or one full growing
season, whichever is longer, against defects including death and
unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from neglect by Owner,
abuse or damage by others, or unusual phenomena or incidents
are beyond the landscape installer's control.
B. Remove and replace all plant materials found to be dead or in an
unhealthy condition during guarantee period. Furnish and plant
replacements which comply with specified requirements.
1
1
1
LANDSCAPING: 02900 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING 1
A. Protect all landscaping materials from damage during shipping, delivery,
strorage and planting. Replace damaged materials with new
undamaged ones at no extra cost to Owner. Provide Tarpaulin and anti -
dessicant protection from potential heat and wind damage exposure.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Ship landscape materials with certificates of inspection as required by
governmental authorities. Comply with governing regulations applicable
to landscape materials. 1
B. Analysis and Standards: Package standard products with
manufacturer's certified analysis. For other materials, provide analysis
by recognized laboratory made in accordance with methods established
by the Association of Official Agricultural Chemists wherever applicable
or as further specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Topsoil: Free draining, fertile, friable, garden or river sandy loam
possessing characteristics of representative loams available in the
vicinity of project site; free of roots, bulbs and seeds of all noxious weeds,
sticks, clods, stones, vegetation, and debris. Topsoil stockpiled on
site may be used if it meets above requirements.
B. Plants: Grown in a recognized nursery in accordance with accepted
horticultural practices.
1. Provide healthy, vigorous stock grown under climatic condition
similar to conditions in the locality of the project and free of
disease, insects, eggs, larvae and defects such as knots, sun -
scald, injuries, abrasion, or disfigurement. 1
2. Provide freshly dug plants, cold storage plants are not acceptable.
3. Do not prune prior to delivery. Do not bend or bind -tie trees or
shrubs in such manner as to damage bark, break branches or
destroy natural shape.
1
1
i TOC BUILDING ADDITION LANDSCAPING: 02900
SEP 00 PAGE 3
1
4. Container stock shall have grown therein a minimum of four
months and maximum of one year, with roots filling the
container but showing no evidence of being root- bound.
i 5. Plant types and locations per drawings.
6. Stored plant material shall be vigorous in root development and
I top - growth production or it will be rejected.
I C. Grass Material: Sod - provide strongly rooted sod, not less than 2 years
old and free of weeds and undesireable native grasses and machine cut
to pad thickness of 3/4 ", ( +,- 1/4 "), excluding top growth and thatch.
I Provide only sod capable of vigorous growth and development when
planted (viable, not dormant)
1 . 1. Provide sod of uniform pad sizes with maximum 5% deviation in
either length or width. Broken pads or pads with uneven ends will
I not be acceptable. Sod pads incapable of supporting their own
weight when suspended vertically with a firm grasp on upper 10%
will be rejected.
1 2. Sod : Three way Perennial Rye and Fescue mix.
i D. Soil Amendments:
1. Dolomite lime, minimum 85% total carbonates.
1 2. Gypsum: Granular (calcium sulfate) as manufactured by Webfoot
Fertilizer Co., Inc. or approved equal.
i 3. 'Garden Blend No. 1': As manufactured by Pro Gro Soils, Inc.
Wilsonville Oregon.
1 4. Complete Fertilizers: Approved brands meeting requirements of
applicable state fertilizes laws. Uniform in composition, dry and
I free flowing. Deliver to the site in original unopened containers,
each bearing manufacturer's guaranteed analysis. Tree Planting
fertilizer: Par Ex Triple 16 . Top -dress fertilizer: Par Ex 20- 4 -4 -12.
I Shrub fertilizer: 'Webfoot' 22 -16 -8, slow release.
5. Mulch: Organic mulch free from deleterious materials and suitable
for top dressing of Trees, Shrubs, and Ground Covers and
I consisting of 3/4" minus rotted Hemlock bark to 2 1/2" Depth over
all Shrub Beds, Tree Rings, and Ground Cover Plantings,
excepting only Seeded or Sodded Lawn Areas.
1
LANDSCAPING: 02900 TOC BUILDING ADDITION 1
PAGE 4 SEP 00
1
6. Anti - Dessicant: Emulsion type, film- forming agent designed to
permit transpiration but retard excessive loss of moisture from
plants. Deliver in manufacture's fully identifiable containers and
mix in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
7. Tree Wrap: Tree -wrap tape not less than 4" wide, designed to
prevent bore damage and winter freezing.
E. Miscellaneous Materials:
1. Stakes and Guys: Stakes and deadmen of sound new hardwood,
treated softwood, or redwood, free of knotholes and other defects.
Provide miscellaneous hardware, wire and accessories as shown
on details.
2. Tree Paint: Treheal or approved equal. Use paint which is
waterproof, antiseptic, adhesive, elastic and free of kerosene, coal
tar, creosote, and other substances harmful to plants. Do not use
shellac.
3. Herbicide : Where effective, use full strength 'White Vinegar'.
Where effective control can not be attained using above, apply
'Roundup' as manufactured by Monsanto Corporation. Apply per
manufacturer's specifications.
4. Pre - emergents: 'Surflan', 'Ronstar, or 'Devrinol'. Apply prior to
barkmulch installation and per manufacturer's specifications.
F. Plant Schedule: See Planting Plans. 1
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Examine grades, verify elevations and observe conditions which affect
work of this section. Require detrimental conditions,be corrected prior to
proceeding with installation.
B. Determine location of underground utilities and perform work in a
manner which will avoid possible damage. Hand excavate, as required,
to minimize possibility of damage to underground utilities. If damage
occures notify proper agency and obtain repairs.
C. Apply herbicide to all areas of weed . rowth to receive landscaping.
9 P 9
1
1 TOC BUILDING ADDITION LANDSCAPING: 02900
SEP 00 PAGE 5
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Incorporate the following amendments into the top eight inches of soil:
1. Nine (9) cubic yards 'Pro Gro Garden BlendNo. 1' per 1000
1 square feet.
2. KG 120 (available at Hobbs and Hopkins in Portland OR
239 -7518) - apply at 12 lbs per 1,000 s.f. (50% slow release N by
volume)
3. Lime at (50) pounds per 1000 square feet.
B. Apply top dress fertilizer eight (8) weeks after seeding at the rate of five
(5) pounds per 1000 square feet.
C. Trees and Shrubs - Agriform 21 gram tablets (20 -10 -5)
D. Stake deciduous trees with "Rigid Guy" system. Attach to 2"x 2" stakes, 8 '
in length with minimum 2' below grade. Stain dark brown.
E. Install re -emergent ent er manufacturer's specifications. See division 2.1
P 9 per P
� E -4
F. Mulch shrub areas with minimum2 1/2" and maximum 3" layer of
screened 3/4" minus one year old (dark brown color) Hemlock Bark.
G. Tree and Shrub backfill - Blend the following thoroughly:
1. 70% existing topsoil
2. 30% 'Garden Blend No. 1'
Dig each planting pit two times the diameter of the root ball (trees 24"
larger than rootball. Create a mound cf topsoil in the middle of planting
pit and center root ball . Backfill with specified planting mix and water
settle thoroughly. Final grade of root crowns of all Trees and Shrubs
shall be one inch above finish grade.
H. Plant trees after final grades are established and prior to planting of
lawns, unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect. If planting of trees
occurs after lawn work, protect lawn areas and promptly repair damage
to lawns resulting from planting operations.
1
1
LANDSCAPING: 02900 TOC BUILDING ADDITION li
PAGE 6 SEP 00
1
I. Proceed with and complete the landscape work as rapidly as possible
working within the weather and seasonal limitations for each kind of 1
landscape work required. Do not plant in subfreezing weather or in
temperatures exceeding 90° F.
J. Upon completion of work remove all installation debris and equipment, I
and leave area in broom -clean condition at the time of Owner's Final
Acceptance.
1
END OF SECTION 1
1
1
.1
11
1
i
1
1
•
I
1
1
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE: 03300
SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Concrete Reinforcement.
B. Concrete Accessories.
C. Concrete Curb.
D. Concrete Sidewalks.
E. Concrete Pavement.
F. Moisture intrusion barrier for interior slabs to receive floor finish.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 02765: Pavement Marking.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ACI 117 -90 Standard Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction
and Materials.
B. ACI 301 -96 Standard Specification for Structural Concrete.
C. ACI 315 -92 Details & Detailing or Concrete Reinforcement.
D. ACI 318 -95 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete &
Commentary.
E. ASTM
1. C33 Spec. for Concrete Aggregates.
2. C39 Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens.
3. A82 Spec for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement.
4. C94 Spec for Ready Mixed Concrete.
1 5. C143 Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete.
6. C150 Spec for Portland Cement.
7. C171 Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete.
8. C172 Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete.
1
1
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE: 03300 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
9. C231 Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Pressure Method.
10. C260 Spec for Air - entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
11. C494 Spec for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
12. A615 Spec for Deformed & Plain Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement.
13. C631 Spec for Bonding Compounds for Interior Gypsum Plastering.
14. A706 Spec for Low Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement.
15. C881 Spec for Epoxy- Resin -Base Bonding Systems for Concrete.
16. C932 Spec for Surface Applied Bonding Agents for Exterior
Plastering.
17. C1107 Spec for Non - shrink Grout.
1.4 SUBMITTALS 1
A. Product Data:
1. Submit manufacturers product information on concrete accessory
materials, including sealer, hardener, and their VOC content. 1
a. Provide schedule of specific areas to receive each type of
P YP
sealer and hardener, and moisture intrusion barrier.
2. Submit manufacturers product information and sample of vapor
barrier, including mil, permeance, and other physical properties and
typical values.
B. Reinforcement Shop Drawings:
1. Submit steel reinforcing placement drawings prior to fabrication of
reinforcing.
2. Comply with requirements in ACI 315.
3. Identify and dimension each type of reinforcing bar.
C. Mix Design Data:
1. Submit a mix design formula, with supporting test date per AC1, at •
least 10 days prior to delivery of concrete.
D. Test Reports:
1. Submit copies of laboratory and field test reports for concrete work.
2. Refer to Section 01450, Quality Control.
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE: 03300
SEP 00 PAGE 3
E. Certificates:
1. Submit letter from concrete supplier that concrete delivered meets
requirements of this Specification.
F. Batch Ticket:
1. Provide a batch weight ticket with each truck for inspection agency.
2. Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94 in Article 16 Batch Ticket
Information.
G. Reinforcement Test Reports: Submit two copies of mill test reports on grade
60 reinforcing prior to placing concrete.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reinforcing Steel Standards:
1. CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice"
2. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete,
' Commentary on Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
3. ASTM A615 and Supplement #1.
4. ASTM A82, Cold Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement.
B. Mix Design Qualifications:
1. Employ testing laboratory or concrete supplier acceptable to Architect
to perform materials evaluation, testing, and design of concrete mixes.
C. Plant Certification:
1. Ready Mix Plant to follow NRMCA certification regulations.
2. Ready Mix Plant and Equipment: Comply with requirements of ASTM
C 94, Sections 8, 9, 10, 11, and 12.
D. Mixing and Delivery Equipment:
1. Maintain scales, mixers, trucks, storage bins and conveyers in good
working condition.
2. Clean mixing and delivery equipment as required by:
a. ASTM C 94.
b. National Ready -Mixed Concrete Association, NRMCA.
1
1
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE: 03300 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 4 SEP 00
1
E. Testing Agency: Document design mix requirements.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND GE, A D HANDLING
A. Deliver reinforcement to the job site bundled, tagged, and marked.
1. Tag to indicate bar size, lengths, and other information corresponding
to markings shown on Shop Drawing placement diagrams.
B. Store reinforcement in a manner to prevent damage and accumulation of dirt
and excessive rust.
1.7 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Temperature and Weather Requirements:
1. Do not lace concrete when temperature or weather will affect
P p
performance or appearance of concrete.
2. Maximum wind velocity for unprotected floor slabs, stairs, ramps,
walks and curbs: 15 mph.
3. Minimum Ambient Air Temperature: 40 degrees F.
4. No precipitation expected within 8 hours for unprotected concrete
surfaces.
B. Substrate Requirements: 1
1. Do not place concrete on muddy or frozen soil.
2. Remove water and ice from footing trenches.
3. Remove ice from formed surfaces.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 1
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Ready Mixed Concrete:
1. Columbia Sand & Gravel.
2. Ross Island Sand & Gravel.
3. Oregon Ready Mix.
4. Western - Pacific.
5. Lewis Rock & Ready Mix.
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE: 03300
SEP 00 PAGE 5
1 6. Best Mix Concrete.
2.2 REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Bars: Intermediate grade steel conforming with "Specifications for
Billet -Steel Concrete Reinforcing Bars ", ASTM A 615, Grade 60, unless
specifically noted as grade 40.
B. Weld Type Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706, Grade 60.
C. Reinforcing Accessories:
1. Chairs, Spacers, and Hangers: PVC protected steel, nylon or nylon
coated.
2. Reinforcing Tie Wire: ASTM A 82, 16 gauge, double annealed iron
wire.
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement:
1. Standard: ASTM C 150, Type I, IA, 11, or IIA and UBC Standard 19 -1,
1 Part I.
B. Aggregates:
1. Standard Aggregates:
a. ASTM C 33
2. Seeding Aggregates: 3/8 inch to 5/8 inch diameter round aggregate in
color selected by Architect.
C. Water: Clean, free of oils, acids, organic material.
D. Admixtures:
1. Air - Entraining: ASTM C 260.
1 2. Chemical Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A water reducing or Type D
water reducing and retarding.
3. Mineral Admixture: ASTM C 618, Class F or Class C.
1
1
1
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE: 03300 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 6 SEP 00
2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Moisture Intrusion Barrier for interior floor.
1. Products: Provide one of the following:
a. CS 2000 by Creteseal
b. Pre: Seal by Re:Source America. Distributed by Re:Source
Oregon.
2. Warranty: 10 year Labor and Material for replacement of flooring that
delaminates due to moisture migration, excessive vapor emission or
contaminates.
B. Liquid Membrane Forming Curing Compound:
1. Solvent Based Acrylic: 111
a. Standard: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Clear.
b. Burke: Spartan -Cote. 1
c. Horn: Horn Clear Seal 150.
d. Sonneborn: Kure -N -Seal.
e. W. R. Meadows: Sealtight CS -309.
C. Bonding Agent:
1. Standards:
a. ASTM C 932.
b. ASTM C 881. 1
c. ASTM C 631.
2. Acceptable Agents:
a. Hornweld by A. C. Horn.
b. Weld -crete by Larsen.
c. Thorobond by Thoro System Products.
d. Sonocrete or Sonobond by Sonneborn.
D. Patching Compound:
1. Acceptable Compounds: Epolith Patcher or Sonopatch by Sonneborn.
E. Concrete curing membrane:
1. Reinforced Laminated Paper for Traffic Areas: ASTM C 171, Orange 1
Label Sisalkraft by Fortifiber Corp.
1
1
1 TOC BUILDING ADDITION CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE: 03300
SEP00 PAGE7
2. Reinforced Laminated Paper for Nontraffic Areas: ASTM C 171,
Sisalkraft SK -10 by Fortifiber Corp.
F. Granular Fill: Self draining 3/4 inch minus with no more than 3 percent
passing #200 sieve.
2.5 MIXING
A. Proportioning:
1. Comply with ACI 211.1.
2. Proportion concrete in accordance with ACI 301.
B. Proportion Adjustments:
1. Mix designs may be adjusted when material characteristics, site
conditions, weather, test results or other circumstances warrant.
a. Submit proposed revised concrete mixes to Architect for
approval.
C. Read Mix Plant Mixing Procedures:
Ready 9
1. Comply with ASTM C 94.
2. Mix full load for 3 minutes at high speed upon arrival at site.
3. Mix additional 5 minutes after adding water.
D. Site Mixing:
1. Use drum type batch machine mixer, mixing not Tess than 1 -1/2
minutes for one cu. yd. or smaller capacity.
2. Increase mixing time at least 15 seconds for each additional cubic yard
or fraction thereof.
E. Design Mix Requirements:
1. Maximum Coarse Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch.
1 2. Maximum Slump for Footings, Walks, Curbs, Walls, and Floor Slabs:
As indicated on structural drawing.
3. Entrained Air: 5 percent + or - 1 -1/2 percent.
4. Minimum Compressive Strength: As indicated on structural drawings.
5. Probability of Test Falling Below Specified Strength: 1 out of 5.
1
1
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE: 03300 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 8 SEP 00
6. Maximum Pozzolan Content: 15 percent of weight of cementitious 1
material.
7. Water Reducing Admixture: Contractor's option. 1
8. Water /Cement Ratios:
a. 0.42
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Shop Fabrication of Steel Reinforcing: 1
1. Comply with: Air
a. CRSI, Manual of Standard Practice, MSP -1.
a. ACI 301.
b. ACI 315.
c. ACI 318.
2. Comply with ACI 318, Chapter 7, Details of Reinforcement, for bending
dimension. 1
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 FORMWORK
A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork in accordance with ACI
301.
B. Construct formwork so concrete structures are of size, shape, alignment, 1
elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. 1.
D. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form - release agent, according to
manufacturer's instructions before placing reinforcement.
E. Leave formwork for structural elements in place until concrete has achieved
28 -day design compressive strength.
F. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in Work and apply new form- 1
release agent.
1. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless 1
approved by Architect.
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE: 03300
SEP 00 PAGE 9
3.2 GRANULAR FILL
1 A. Place minimum 6 inches aggregate base.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCING STEEL
A. Comply with CRSI, Manual of Standard Practice, MSP -1.
B. Cleaning Reinforcing: Remove loose rust, mill scale, earth, and other
materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete.
C. Support reinforcing to prevent displacement with metal chairs, runners,
bolsters, spacers, and hangers.
D. Set wires so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete
surfaces.
E. Stagger reinforcing bar splices 36 inches minimum at alternate bars.
ord with ACI Chapter 12, Development Lap continuous bars in accordance C p ment & p
Splices of Reinforcement.
G. Placement tolerance not to exceed 1/4 inch plus or minus.
H. Construct hooked reinforcing to comply with ACI 318:
1. Section 7.1 Standard Hooks
2. Section 7.2 Minimum Bend Diameters.
3. Section 7.3 Bending.
I. Notify Architect of items interfering such as conduit, pipes, inserts, sleeves,
etc., and obtain written approval on procedure before placement of concrete.
J. Minimum Concrete Cover for Reinforcing Bars: Comply with ACI 318,
Chapter 7, Paragraph 7.7, Concrete Protection for Reinforcement unless
otherwise noted.
3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Comply with ACI 301 and 304, placing concrete in a continuous operation
within planned joints or sections.
1
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE: 03300 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 10 SEP 00
B. Consolidate placed concrete using mechanical vibrating equipment with hand
rodding and tamping.
C. Work concrete around reinforcement, embedded items and forms.
D. Cold Weather Protection: `
1. Protect concrete from physical damage or reduced strength caused by
air temperatures below 45 degrees F.
2. Comply with recommendations in ACI 306R.
E. Hot Weather Protection:
1. Protect concrete from shrinkage crack damage until protected by
curing procedure.
2. Protect concrete from physical damage or reduced strength caused by
air temperatures above 75 degrees F. 1
3. Comply with recommendations in ACI 305R.
3.5 FINISHING 1
A. Smooth Form Concrete Surfaces:
1. Provide smooth form finish for concrete exposed to public view.
2. Comply with ACI 301.
3. Remove fins and projections.
4. Patch tie holes and defects.
B. Floated Slab Finish: �.
1. Provide floated finish for slab surfaces to receive washed, troweled,
and broomed finish.
2. Comply with ACI 301.
3. Begin floating when water sheen has disappeared and surface has
stiffened sufficiently to permit float finishing.
4. Check surface plane with a 10 foot straightedge at two or more angles
during or after first floating.
5. Cut high spots and fill low spots during floating to level to class B
tolerance, 1/4 inch in 10 feet.
6. Refloat immediately to a uniform sandy texture.
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE: 03300
SEP 00 PAGE 11
C. Troweled Slab Finish:
1. Provide troweled finish for interior slab surfaces exposed for walking,
to receive resilient or carpet floor covering, or to receive ceramic tile or
terrazzo flooring.
2. Comply with ACI 301.
3. Provide a floated finish as specified above.
4. Power trowel slab to smooth surface free of defects except minor
trowel marks.
5. Eliminate trowel marks by hand troweling slab when surface is
sufficiently hard.
11 6. Perform final hand troweling when trowel rings as trowel is moved over
slab surface.
7. Trowel to Class B tolerance, 1/4 inch in 10 feet, for terrazzo and
ceramic tile, 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
8. Grind slab surfaces or fill with underlayment to remove defects of
sufficient magnitude to show through intended floor covering.
D. Broom Slab Finish:
1. Provide a broom finish for exterior walks, treads, slabs and ramps.
2. Comply with ACI 301.
1 3. Provide a floated finish as specified above.
4. Draw a broom or burlap belt across surface to give slab a course
transverse scored texture.
E. Joint Finishing:
9
1 1. Tool radius exterior slab, walk, ramp, and curb edges.
2. Cut or form interior floor slab crack control joints.
3. Cut or form exterior curb slab and ramp crack control joints.
F. Horizontal Surface Finish Tolerances:
1. Finish concrete horizontal surfaces as specified in ACI 301.
3.6 CURING AND HARDENERS
A. Curing:
1. Exterior i lk
s dewa sand interior slab on grade: Wet cure for minimum 7
days.
1
1
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE: 03300 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 12 SEP 00
2. Exterior Concrete: Spray apply solvent based or acrylic curing
compound to concrete surface after finishing as soon as concrete is
free of surface water, at manufacturer's recommended rate. 1
B. Curing Procedure:
1
1. Comply with recommendations in ACI
p y 308.
2. Cover exposed surfaces and keep concrete and form surfaces wet for
72 hours minimum.
3.7 MOISTURE INTRUSION BARRIER
A. Interior floor slabs to receive resilient flooring, carpeting, or other coatings.
1. Apply on freshly placed concrete to waterproof, seal, harden, and cure
concrete in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
2. Warranty requires a trained applicator approved by manufacturer, or a
manufacturer's technical person on -site during applications. Include
cost of a technical person in work of this section.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Do not place concrete or reinforcement in footing forms until Architect or his
representative has examined compacted soil and aggregate materials within
forms.
B. Do not place concrete until Architect or his representative has examined
1
formwork and reinforcing steel.
1. Notify Architect 24 hours prior to concrete placement for inspection of
reinforcing.
2. Adjusting Reinforcing: Adjust location of reinforcing as required.
C. Test Requirements:
1. When special Inspection is required by Building Code, Owner will
employ an Independent Testing Laboratory to evaluate concrete
delivered to and placed at site.
a. Notify Independent Testing Laboratory 24 hours prior to delivery
and placement of concrete. t
2. Concrete strength tests for quantities less than 50 cubic yards will not
be required when waived by Building Official and Architect.
1
1
1 TOC BUILDING ADDITION CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE: 03300
SEP 00 PAGE 13
3. Comply with Building Code, Section 1701 for evaluation and
acceptance of concrete.
D. Ready Mixed Concrete Inspection and Testing:
: P 9
1. Sample each truck load of ready mixed concrete, complying with
ASTM C172.
2. Perform one slump test for each truck load of ready mixed concrete,
complying with ASTM C 143.
3. Perform one air content test for each set of compressive strength
I
4. specimens, complying with ASTM C 231.
Make one set of 5 of compressive strength specimens for each day of
structural concrete pouring or each 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof
for each class of concrete, complying with ASTM C 31.
5. Test one specimen in accordance with ASTM C 39 after curing 7
days, one specimen after curing 28 days, and retain one specimen for
1 testing after 35 days or as directed by Architect.
6. Batch Ticket:
a. Receive a batch weight ticket from each truck; batch ticket to
comply with requirements of ASTM C 94 in Article 16 for Batch
Ticket Information.
b. Verify water /cement ratio.
1) No water may be added if load is at specified ratio.
2). Reject truck if ratio does not conform.
1 3.8 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Surface Repairs for Exposed Concrete:
1. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water and brush -coat area to be
V patched with Bonding Agent.
2. Fill honeycomb voids and rock pockets with patching compound.
3. Compact in place and screed as recommended by patching compound
1 manufacturer.
4. Finish to match adjoining work.
5. Strike off excess mortar at surface.
6. If defects in color and texture of surface cannot be repaired, remove
and replace concrete.
1
r
1
1
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE: 03300 TOC BUILDING ADDITION 1
PAGE 14 SEP 00
B. Physical Barrier Protection: 1
1. Barricade area containing fresh concrete slabs, stairs, ramps and
walks for 24 hours minimum.
2. Cover fresh concrete with plywood where exposed to public,
pedestrian, and animal traffic.
END OF SECTION 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION STRUCTURAL STEEL: 05120
SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Steel beams, plates and bolts.
T B. Shop and field welding.
weldin
P 9
C. Field bolting.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01450: Quality Control, for independent testing agency procedures.
B. Section 05500: Metal Fabrications, for loose bearing plates and
miscellaneous steel framing.
C. Section 09900: Painting, for field applied finish paint.
D. Structural Drawings: Structural Notes.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A36 Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
1 B. ASTM A53 Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black, and Hot - Dipped, Zinc -
Coated, Welded and Seamless.
1 C. ASTM A108 Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold Finished, Standard
Quality.
D. ASTM A307 Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI
Tensile Strength.
E. ASTM A325 Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated,
120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.
F. ASTM A500 Specification for Cold- Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.
G. ASTM A572 Specification for High- Strength Low - Alloy, Columbium -
Vanadium Structural Steel.
1
1
STRUCTURAL STEEL: 05120 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
H. ASTM C1107 Specification for Packaged, Dry, Hydraulic- Cement Grout
(Nonshrink). 1
1.4 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. Bearing plate anchor bolts embedded in footings installed under Section
1
03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Indicate complete details for fabrication, instructions, assembly, and 1
installation of structural steel.
2. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between
shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld.
3. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop
and field bolts.
B. Welder certificates signed Cates s gned by Contractor certifying that welders comply with
requirements specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
C. Weld Inspection Reports:
1. Comply with Section 01450, Quality Control.
D. Mill test reports signed by manufacturers certifying that their products comply
with requirements.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed
structural steel work similar in material, design, and exterit to that indicated 1
for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in fabricating structural
steel similar to that indicated for this Project, with a record of successful in-
service performance, and sufficient production capacity to fabricate structural
steel without delaying the Work.
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION STRUCTURAL STEEL: 05120
SEP 00 PAGE 3
1. Fabrication must be preformed in accordance with AISC and UBC
Specifications including testing and inspection.
C. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and
P Y PP P 9 P
documents:
1. AISC, Manual of Steel Construction, Eighth Edition including
Specification for Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel
for Buildings.
2. AISC's "Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings."
3. Research Council on Structural Connections' (RCSC) "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
4. UBC Standard 22 -1.
D. Welding Standards:
1. Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding
Code — Steel."
2. Use welders certified by AWS and State of Oregon for structural
welding, and who have undergone recertification in the last 12 months.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver structural steel to Project site in such quantities and at such times to
I ensure continuity of installation.
B. Store materials off ground; protect steel members from erosion and
deterioration.
1. Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and
nuts that become dry or rusty before use.
2. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.
1.8 SEQUENCING
1 A. Supply anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction
without delaying the Work.
1. Provide setting diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions, as
required, for installation.
1
1
1
STRUCTURAL STEEL: 05120 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 4 SEP 00
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 STEEL MATERIALS 1
A. Steel Beams: ASTM A572 Grade 50; Fy = 50 ksi as specified on structural
drawings and UBC Standard 22 -1. '
B. Square and Rectangular Steel Tubing: Cold- formed, ASTM A 500, Grade B,
Fy = 46 KSI.
C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B, Schedule 40, Fy = 35 KSI.
1
D. Standard Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A.
E. High Strength Bolts: ASTM A 325, Type 1.
1. Direct - Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325, uncoated.
F. Concrete Anchors: Parabolt by USM.
G. Electrodes: AWS A5.1 or A5.5, E70XX. 1
H. Shop Prime Paint: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate -free, non -
asphaltic, rust - inhibiting primer. �
2.2 GROUT MATERIALS
A. Nonmetallic Nonshrink Grout: ASTM C 1107, 0 percent shrinkage.
1. Nonmetallic Grout by Burke. 1
2. Nonmetallic by A. C. Horn.
3. Sealtight 588 by W. R. Meadows.
4. Masterflow 713 by Master Builders.
5. Sonogrout by Sonneborn.
6. Thoroset Non - metallic by Thoro System Products. 1
7. Five Star Grout by U. S. Grout.
8. Upcon by Upco Chemical.
B. Cement Grout:
1. Fast Setting Cement by Burke. 1
2. Embeco 153 by Master Builders.
3. Thorogrip by Thoro System Products. 1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION STRUCTURAL STEEL: 05120
SEP 00 PAGE 5
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate and assemble structural steel in shop to greatest extent possible.
1. Fabricate in accordance with approved shop drawings and referenced
r standards.
2. Use welds for shop connections and bolts for field connections, except
where otherwise indicated.
B. Welded Connections:
■ 1. Comply with AWS Structural Welding Code D1.1.
2. Fabricate frames with welded joints using flux core arc welding
process.
3. Provide 1/4 inch minimum fillet welds and full penetration butt welds.
4. Grind exposed welds smooth.
C. Bolted Connections:
1 1. Provide anchor bolts for connecting to other work.
2. Drill and tap steel as required to receive bolted connections.
3. Make bolt holes 1/16 inch larger than nominal bolt diameter.
4. Make anchor bolt holes 1/8 inch larger than nominal bolt diameter.
5. Do not thread bolts at shear plane.
D. Beam Connections:
1. Provide shop and field framed connections.
2. Comply with standard details, for framed beam connections in Table II
or Table III, Case I in AISC, Manual of Steel Construction, unless
otherwise indicated.
3. Fabricate gusset plates from 3/8 inch minimum thickness steel plate.
2.4 SHOP PRIMING
A. Shop prime steel surfaces, except the following:
1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar.
1 2. Surfaces to be field welded.
3. Surfaces to receive sprayed -on fireproofing.
4. Galvanized surfaces.
1
1
1
STRUCTURAL STEEL: 05120 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 6 SEP 00
B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose
mill scale, and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to
SSPC -SP -5. 1
C. Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions and SSPC -15, to provide a dry film thickness of
not less than 2.0 mils.
D. Apply 2 coats of shop paint to inaccessible surfaces after assembly or 1
erection.
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to provide
State Building Code required tests and inspections.
1. Comply with requirements of Section 01450, Quality Control.
B. Shop - bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's
"Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325".
C. Shop - welded connections will be visually inspected, and tested according to
AWS D1.1. Inspection procedures will be at testing agency's option.
D. Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace structural pace t uctural steel that inspections
and test reports indicate do not comply with specified requirements.
E. Additional testing will be performed at Contractor's expense to determine
compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements. 1
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION 1
A. Before erection proceeds, verify elevations of concrete bearing surfaces and 1
locations of anchorages for compliance with requirements.
B. Do not proceed with erection until unsatisfactory conditions have been 1
corrected.
. 1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION STRUCTURAL STEEL: 05120
SEP00 PAGE7
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection
to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary
construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads.
3.3 ERECTION
A. Set structural steel accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured
from established lines and levels, in accordance with Drawings, approved
1 shop drawings, and AISC and UBC referenced standards
B. Anchor Bolts:
' 1. Set anchor bolts with double nuts and plywood or steel templates.
2. Cast anchor bolts in anchoring cement or cast -in -place concrete.
C. Bearing Plates:
111 1. Set bearing plates on cleaned bearing surfaces, using wedges, shims,
or setting nuts as required.
2. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned
and plumbed.
3. Solidly pack below bearing plates with nonmetallic, nonshrink grout.
4. Use metallic, nonshrink grout for bearing plates supporting vibrating
mechanical equipment.
ID. Maintain erection tolerance of one in 300 and within 1/2 inch from design
dimension.
E. Align and adjust various members forming part of a complete frame or
structure before permanently fastening. Perform necessary adjustments to
compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.
F. Field Connections:
1 1. Install bolted connections as detailed.
2. Comply with UBC Standard 22 -2 and RCSC's "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for high strength
bolts.
3. Comply with AWS D1.1 for methods, procedures, appearance and
quality of welds for welded connections.
1
1
STRUCTURAL STEEL: 05120 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 8 SEP 00
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to provide 1
State Building Code required tests and inspections.
1. Comply with requirements of Section 01450, Quality Control. i
B. Field- bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's
"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
C. Field- welded connections will be visually inspected, and tested according to
AWS D1.1. Inspection procedures will be at testing agency's option.
D. Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace structural steel that inspections
and test reports indicate do not comply with specified requirements.
E. Additional testing will be performed at Contractor's expense to determine 1
compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted
connections, and abraded areas of shop paint.
1. Apply same type primer paint as used in shop to a dry film thickness of
not less than 2.0 mils. ir
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION METAL FABRICATIONS: 05500
SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Metal fabrications including, but not limited to:
1. Steel ladders.
2. Loose bearing and leveling plates.
3. Wood connector plates.
4. Elevator machine beams.
5. Support angles for elevator door sills.
6. Steel framing and supports for countertops
7. Pipe bollards.
1 8. Gratings.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03300: Cast -In -Place Concrete.
B. Section 05120: Structural Steel.
C. Section 06100: Rough Carpentry.
D. Section 09900: Painting.
E. Section 14242: Hydraulic Passenger Elevators.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A36 Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
B. ASTM A53 Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black, and Hot - Dipped, Zinc -
Coated, Welded and Seamless.
C. ASTM Al23 Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron
and Steel Products.
D. ASTM A153 Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware.
1
1
1
METAL FABRICATIONS: 05500 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
E. ASTM A283 Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength
Carbon Steel Plate.
F. ASTM A307 Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI
Tensile Strength.
G. ASTM A366 Specification for Steel, Sheet, -
p et, Carbon, Cold Rolled,
Commercial Quality.
H. ASTM A500 Specification for Cold- Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 1
I. ASTM A501 Specification for Hot - Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing. 1
J. ASTM A570 Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot - Rolled,
Structural Quality. 1
K. ASTM A611 Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold - Rolled, Structural
Quality. 1
L. ASTM A780 Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot -
Dip Galvanized Coatings.
M. ASTM A786 Specification for Rolled Steel Floor Plates.
N. ASTM B221 Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded
Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes. 1
O. ASTM C1107 Specification for Packaged, Dry, Hydraulic- Cement Grout
(Nonshrink).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer's Specifications and other Data needed to show
compliance with specified requirements.
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION METAL FABRICATIONS: 05500
SEP 00 PAGE 3
B. Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show dimensions, fabrication, installation
clearances, anchorage, and interface of Work of this Section with Work of
adjacent trades.
1. Indicate welds by American Welding Society symbols.
C. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures.
1 D. Welder certificates certifying that welders comply with requirements specified
in "Quality Assurance" Article.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing metal fabrications
similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-
service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce
required units.
B. Perform welding with electric arc process and in accordance with AWS "Code
for Arc and Gas Welding in Building Construction."
1. AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code."
2. AWS "Standard qualification procedure."
C. Welder Qualifications:
1. Use welders certified by AWS and State of Oregon for structural
welding, and who have undergone recertification in the last 12 months.
D. Comply with requirements /recommendations of American Institute of Steel
Construction Specifications for design, fabrication and erection of structural
steel for buildings and AISC manual of steel construction.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Special inspection as required by UBC 1701 for welding and drilled anchor
bolts of this Section.
B. Provide ladders that comply with OSHA requirements.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to job site marked to identify location for which they are
intended.
1
1
1
METAL FABRICATIONS: 05500 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 4 SEP 00
1. Use markings corresponding to markings shown on approved Shop
Drawings.
B. Store off ground, under cover and protected from damage.
1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Where metal fabrications are indicated to fit other construction, verify
dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings.
1. If field measurements vary significantly from
ry g y Contract Documents,
obtain Architect's approval before proceeding.
1.9 COORDINATION 1
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting 1
drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including
sleeves, concrete inserts, and anchor bolts, that are to be embedded in
concrete or masonry. 1
1. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS J
A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view in complete
Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, without blemishes, pitting,
seam marks, mill markings, or roughness.
2.2 FERROUS METALS 1
A. Steel plates, shapes and bars: ASTM A 36, Fy =36 ksi. 1
B. Steel Plates, Bent or Cold- Formed: ASTM A 283, grade C.
C. Rolled -Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786, rolled from plate complying with
ASTM A 36, or ASTM A 283, Grade C or D.
D. Steel Tubing, Cold- Formed: ASTM A 500 Grade B; Seamless where
exposed. 1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION METAL FABRICATIONS: 05500
SEP 00 PAGE 5
1
E. Steel tubing Hot - Formed: ASTM A 501. Seamless where exposed.
F. Steel pipe: ASTM A 53, Grade A; Fy = 35 ksi. Schedule 40.
1. Where exposed to view: Type S.
2. Where concealed: Type E.
G. Sheet steel: ASTM A 366.
1 H. Gratings: ANSI A202.1.
I. Light gage steel 16 gauge and heavier formed from steel of ASTM A 570,
Grade D, Fy = 50 ksi.
J. Light gage steel 18 gauge and lighter formed from steel of ASTM A 611,
Grade A, Fy = 33 ksi.
2.3 ALUMINUM
A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063 -T6.
2.4 FASTENERS
A. General:
1. For exterior use and where built into exterior walls, provide zinc- coated
fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe /Zn 5.
2. Provide fasteners of type, grade, and class required for particular use.
B. Standard Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon -head, ASTM A 307, Grade A.
C. High Strength Bolts: ASTM A 325N.
D. Expansion Anchors: ICBO approved FS FF -S -325, Group II, Type 4, Class 1
1. Select anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain,
without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when
installed in masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in
concrete.
E. Toggle Bolts: FS FF -B -588, tumble -wing type, class and style as needed.
1
1
METAL FABRICATIONS: 05500 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 6 SEP 00
F. Lag Bolts: Square -head type, ASME B18.2.1.
G. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3., cadmium plated steel.
H. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1., flat head, carbon steel. 1
I. Plain Washers: ASME B18.22.1., round, carbon steel.
J. Lock Washers: ASME B18.21.1., helical spring type, carbon steel.
K. Beveled Washers: ANSI B27.4., provide for bolt heads or nuts bearing on 1
sloping flanges.
2.5 GROUT 1
A. Nonmetallic Nonshrink Grout: ASTM C 1107, 0 percent shrinkage. 1
1. Nonmetallic Grout by Burke.
2. Nonmetallic by A. C. Horn. 1
3. Sealtight 588 by W. R. Meadows.
4. Masterflow 713 by Master Builders.
5. Sonogrout by Sonneborn.
6. Thoroset Non - metallic by Thoro System Products.
7. Five Star Grout by U. S. Grout.
8. Upcon by Upco Chemical.
2.6 WELDING 1
A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Comply with ASTM A 233, E70XX
series; select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.
2.7 PAINT
A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Rust- inhibiting primer:
1. "10 -99 Tnemac Primer."
2. "Rustoleum" Number 5769 Primer.
3. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section
01630.
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION METAL FABRICATIONS: 05500
SEP 00 PAGE 7
B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High- zinc -dust content paint for regalvanizing
welds in steel, complying with SSPC- Paint -20.
2.8 FABRICATION
A. Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field
splicing and assembly.
B. Except as otherwise shown in Construction Documents or reviewed Shop
Drawings, use materials of size, thickness, and type required to produce
reasonable strength and durability in Work of this Section.
C. Fabricate with sharp, accurate angles and surfaces which are true to required
lines and levels.
D. Form exposed connections with hairline joints; use concealed fasteners
wherever possible.
1. When countersink heads are used, draw tight, and nick threads to
prevent loosening.
2. Punch and shear metals cleanly and accurately.
3. Cut abutting members to fit with full bearing contact.
M 4. Form elbows and bends to uniform radii, free from buckles and twists,
and with finished surfaces smooth.
5. Miter and cope member intersections within 2 degrees, fit to within
0.02 inches, and weld around.
6. Where exposed to weather, form to exclude water; allow for expansion
I
7. and contraction.
Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning.
E. Welding:
1. Provide 3/16 inch minimum fillet welds.
2. Provide full penetration butt welds.
3. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush.
F. Steel Ladders:
1. Fabricate for locations shown, with dimensions, spacings, details, and
anchorages as indicated.
a. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1.
1
1
1
METAL FABRICATIONS: 05500 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 8 SEP 00
b. Siderails: Continuous, 1/2- by -2 -1/2 -inch steel flat bars, with 1
eased edges , space not more than 18 inches apart.
c. Bar Rungs: 3/4- inch - diameter steel bars, spaced 12 inches o.c. 1
2. Mortise rungs into side rails, weld securely.
3. Support each ladder at top and bottom at 12 inches from each end,
and not more than 60 inches o.c. throughout length with welded or
bolted steel brackets.
4. Grind welds smooth and flush.
5. Galvanize ladders at exterior locations, and at interior where indicated.
G. Ladder Safety Post: 1
1. Steel, telescoping tubular section; automatic locking device.
2. Stainless steel spring balancing mechanism for up and down
movement.
3. Finish: Black enamel.
4. Manufacturer: "Model 1 LadderUp" by Bilco Company, or approved. 1
H. Pipe Bollards:
1. Fabricate from Schedule 40 steel pipe; grind exposed osed ends smooth.
p
2. Galvanize surfaces not embedded in concrete.
Bar Gratings: Fabricate per NAAMM p M Metal Bar Grating Manual.
1. Securely anchor frame to structure. 1
2. Where size and spacing of bars is not shown, determine size from
NAAMM Metal Bar Grating Manual's Load Tables for safe uniform load
of not less than 100 PSF and connected concentrated loads of 300
pounds.
2.9 ALLOWABLE FABRICATION TOLERANCES 1
A. Maximum variation from dimensions shown: 1
1. Overall length with both ends finished: 1/32 inch.
2. Overall length of member without finished ends:
a. For members up to 30 ft. long: 1/16 inch
b. For members over 30 ft. long: 1/8 inch
B. Twists, bends, and kinks are not allowed.
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION METAL FABRICATIONS: 05500
SEP 00 PAGE 9
2.10 FINISHES
A. General: finish metal fabrications after assembly.
B. Galvanizing: Hot - dipped method per ASTM A 123 for steel, and A 153 for
1 steel hardware.
C. Shop prime steel surfaces, except the following:
1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar.
2. Within 2 inches of surfaces to be field welded.
3. Stainless steel.
D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Properly clean metal surfaces as required for
applied finish and for proposed use of item.
I 1. Remove loose mill scale, grease, dirt and foreign matter by scraping or
sandblasting.
2. Clean surfaces in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council
SSPC -SP -3, "Power Tool Cleaning ".
E. Shop Priming: Apply one coat primer with a uniform dry film thickness of 2.0
1 mils. minimum.
2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to provide
State Building Code required tests and inspections.
1. Comply with requirements of Section 01450, Quality Control.
B. Shop - welded connections will be visually inspected, and tested according to
AWS D1.1. Inspection procedures will be at testing agency's option.
C. Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace structural steel that inspections
and test reports indicate do not comply with specified requirements.
D. Additional testing will be performed at Contractor's expense to determine
9 P P
compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements.
1
1
1
METAL FABRICATIONS: 05500 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 10 SEP 00
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS 1
A. Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be
installed. 1
1. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of
Work.
2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION 1
A. Install Work of this Section in accordance with:
1. Construction Documents.
2. Reviewed Shop Drawings.
3. Requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction. 1
4. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures.
B. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing 1
metal fabrications to in -place construction.
C. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. 1
D. Set work accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, with edges and
surfaces plumb, level, true, and free from rack.
1. Align to tolerance of one in 300.
E. Field and Shop Welding: Comply with AWS recommended procedures of
manual- shielded metal -arc welding for appearance and quality of weld and
for methods to be used in correcting welding work. 1
1. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush.
F. Do not cut, weld, or abrade surfaces which have been hot-dip g alvanized 1
after fabrication and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections.
G. Provide bolt holes 1/16 -inch larger than nominal bolt diameter.
t diameter.
H. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge drilled or punched holes with a burning 1
torch.
1
1
I
111 TOC BUILDING ADDITION METAL FABRICATIONS: 05500
SEP 00 PAGE 11
I Provide standard plate washers under bolt heads and nuts.
1 J. Do not thread bolts at shear plane.
K. Set bearing plates using wedges, shims, or leveling nuts with anchor bolts
1 and non - shrink grout.
L. Set bollards in concrete footing, and fill with concrete.
M. Galvanize lintel and shelf angles for masonry veneer, and other surfaces as
indicated.
•
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
1 A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted
connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with
1 the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC -Pa -1 for
touching up shop - painted surfaces.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded
areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
I TOC BUILDING ADDITION ROUGH CARPENTRY: 06100
SEP 00 PAGE 1
I PART 1 GENERAL
1 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Framing with dimension lumber.
I
B. Sheathing.
1 C. Subflooring.
1 D. Underlayment.
E. Wood furring, grounds, nailers, and blocking.
I F. Nails, bolts, screws, framing anchors and other rough hardware required to
perform rough carpentry.
I 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
1 A. Section 06174: Wood I Joists.
I B. Section 06180: Glued- Laminated Construction.
C. Section 06200: Finish Carpentry, for exterior exposed wood.
1 D. Section 06402:Interior architectural Woodworking, for interior exposed wood
and casework.
I E. Section 07521: Gap -Sheet Bituminous Roofing, for nailers and blocking.
I F. Section 09250: Gypsum Board.
G. Structural Drawings: Structural Notes.
I 1.3 REFERENCES
1 A. ASTM A36 Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
1 B. ASTM A307 Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI
Tensile Strength.
1
1
1
ROUGH CARPENTRY: 06100 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
C. ASTM A653 Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) by the
Hot Dip Process Drawing Quality Special Killed.
D. ASTM C79 Specification for Gypsum Sheathing Board.
E. ASTM D226 Specification for Asphalt- Saturated Organic Felt Used in 1
Roofing and Waterproofing.
F. ASTM D882 Test Methods for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting. 1
G. ASTM E84 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of building
Materials.
H. ASTM E96 Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 1
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data for the following:
1. Sheathing. 1
2. Underlayment.
3. Air - infiltration barriers.
B. Material certificates rt Cates for dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum
allowable unit stresses.
1. Indicate species and grade for each use and design values approved
by the ALSC's Board of Review. 1
C. Wood treatment data for each type of preservative treated wood product.
1. Include certification by treating plant stating type of preservative
solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative
retained, and compliance with applicable standards. 1
D. Wood treatment data for fire retardant treated wood products.
1
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION ROUGH CARPENTRY: 06100
SEP 00 PAGE 3
1. Include certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with
specified standard and other requirements as well as data relative to
bending strength, stiffness, and fastener - holding capacities of treated
materials.
2. Provide material test reports from an independent testing agency
indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance of
requirements indicated.
E. Research or evaluation reports acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction
indicating compliance with State Building Code for the following:
1. Air - infiltration barriers.
2. Metal framing anchors.
' 3. Power - driven fasteners.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use skilled workers, trained and experienced in necessary crafts, familiar with
specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of Work
of this Section.
B. Codes and standards:
1. In addition to complying with applicable codes and regulations of
PP 9
governmental agencies having jurisdiction, unless otherwise
specifically directed or permitted by Architect, comply with the
following:
a. Western Wood Products Association, Product Use Manual, for
selection and use of products.
b. Western Wood Products Association, Grading Rules for
I
c. Western Lumber.
National Forest Products Association, National Design
Specifications for Wood Construction, for conformance with
structural lumber and fastenings.
d. United States Product Standards, Standard for Construction
and industrial Plywood, PS1 ANSI A199.1 and American
Softwood Lumber Standard PS 20.
e. American Plywood Association, Plywood Specification and
Grade Guide APA C20, and Plywood Design Specification APA
1 Y510.
1
11
ROUGH CARPENTRY: 06100 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 4 SEP 00
C. Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Obtain each type of fire retardant treated wood 1
from one source by a single producer.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with UBC, Chapter 23 and UBC Standards No. 23 -1, 23 -2, 23 -3, 1
23-4, and 23 -6.
B. Special inspections are required as stated in for UBC Section 106 and 1
Chapter 17.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 11
A. Protection:
1. Cover wood and protect from weather exposure.
2. Deliver materials to job site and store, shored up off ground surface on
blocks or raised platform.
3. Cover to protect from weather and space bundles to allow for air
circulation.
4. Examine wood sheathing upon delivery and reject panels which are
delivered with broken corners or edges crushed by bundling straps.
5. Identify framing lumber as to grades, and store each grade separately
from other grades.
6. Do not overload, in place, floor or roof framing with temporarily stored
materials.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate
provision in work of those trades to interface with Work of this Section. 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMBER, GENERAL 1
A. Lumber Standard: Comply with American Softwood Lumber Standard, PS 20. 3
B. Dressing Requirements: Smooth four sides, S4S.
C. Maximum Moisture Content for Lumber 3 Inches and Less in Least
Dimension: 19 percent at time of dressing. 1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION ROUGH CARPENTRY: 06100
SEP 00 PAGE 5
2.2 GRADE AND TREATMENT STAMPS
A. Identify each piece of framing lumber by grade stamp of West Coast Lumber
Inspection Bureau, Western Wood Products Association.
B. Identify each wood sheathing panel as to species, grade, and glue type by
stamp of American Plywood Association.
C. Stamp each preservative treated lumber piece with AWPB grade stamp or
furnish certificate of inspection with each shipment.
1 D. Identify each fire retardant treated wood piece, lumber and sheathing, with
classification marking of UL, Timber Products Inspection, Inc., or other testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to Architect and authorities having
1 jurisdiction.
2.3 PRESERVATIVE TREATED MATERIALS
I Provide lumber and plywood complying with a
A. General: p yw applicable
requirements of the following:
1. Lumber: AWPA C2.
2. Plywood: AWPA C9.
B. Do not use chemicals containing chromium.
C. For exposed wood to receive stained finish, use chemical formulations that
do not bleed through, contain colorants, or adversely affect finishes.
D. Pressure treat wood with waterbourne preservatives to a minimum retention
of 0.25 lb/cu. ft.
' E. After treatment, kiln dry to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for
lumber, and 15 percent for plywood.
F. Treat the following wood items:
1 1. Cants, nailers, blocking, curbs, equipment support bases, stripping
and similar items in associated with roofing and flashing.
1 2 Floor plates sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping and similar items
in contact with concrete or masonry.
3. Decking lumber.
1
ROUGH CARPENTRY: 06100 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 6 SEP 00
G. Where possible, precut material before treatment. Apply field treatment
complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces. 1
H. Products:
1. Nisus Corporation: BORA -CARE Wood Preservative.
p
2. Chemical Specialties, Inc.: ACQ Preserve.
3. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section
01630.
2.4 WOOD MATERIALS 1
A. Concealed Dimension Lumber: Provide species and of grades indicated
111
according to the ALSC National Grading Rule provisions of the WWPA,
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Studs and Plates, Douglas Fir or Hem -Fir Stud
Non -Load Bearing: Grade
2. Studs and Plates, Load Bearing: Douglas Fir No. 2 & BTR
3. Joists, up to 4 inch Nominal
1
Thickness: Douglas Fir -Larch No. 2
4. Beams, Stringers and Posts, 1
Up to 4 inch Nominal or Thicker: Douglas Fir -Larch No. 1
5. Bucks, Blocking, Bridging,
Stripping and Miscellaneous: Douglas Fir No. 2
6. Sills, Sleepers, Plates, Nailing Pressure Treated
Blocks and Other Wood in Contact Douglas Fir -Larch No. 2
with Concrete or Masonry:
1
7. Concealed Boards for Furring. Common No. 3; VVWPA or
Standard; WCLIB
8. Concealed Decking Douglas Fir -Larch Commercial
Dex
B. Exposed Framing Lumber: Provide species and of grades indicated
according to the ALSC National Grading Rule provisions of the inspection
agency listed.
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION ROUGH CARPENTRY: 06100
SEP00 PAGE7
1. Douglas Fir or Hem -Fir, Select Structural; WWPA.
2. Redwood, Clear Structural; RIS.
C. Structural Use Panels: Provide APA performance rated panels complying
with grade, span rating, and exposure durability classification indicated,
meeting PS 1, ICBO NER -108, APA PRP108, and UBC Standard 25 -9.
1. Subflooring: C -D plywood, T & G, Index 24/16, Exposure 1; 3/4 inch
thickness, unless otherwise noted.
2. Wall Sheathing: C -D plywood, square edges, Index 15/32, Exposure 1;
% inch thickness, unless otherwise noted.
3. Roof Sheathing:C -D plywood, square edges, Index 15/32, Exposure 1;
5/8 inch thickness, unless otherwise noted.
4. Plywood Backing Panels: For mounting electrical or telephone
equipment, fire retardant treated, Grade C -D Plugged, Exposure 1;
1/2 Inch thickness, unless otherwise noted.
2.5 GYPSUM SHEATHING
A. Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 79, Type X, water resistant core gypsum
sheathing, 4 feet by 2 feet wide with V- shaped grooved long edges, for
horizontal application; 5/8 inch thickness, unless otherwise noted.
d Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 79, Type X
B. Glass Fiber Surface yp g yp X, non -
' combustible water resistant core gypsum sheathing surfaced on front and
back with glass fiber mats, 4 feet wide by 8, 9 or 10 feet lengths, with square
edges; 5/8 inch thickness, unless otherwise noted.
2.6 AIR - INFILTRATION BARRIER (BUILDING WRAP)
A. Air infiltration barrier, meet requirements of ASTM D 882 Method A, for
breaking strength; ASTM E 84 for zero flamespread; and ASTM E 96 for
water vapor transmission.
' 1. DuPont "Tyvek ", or approved.
I 2.7 MEMBRANE FLASHING
' A. Ice & Water Shield manufactured by:
1. W.R. Grace & Co., or approved.
2. Stormguard by GAF.
1
ROUGH CARPENTRY: 06100 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 8 SEP 00
B. Material is 0.040 inch thick minimum, 36 inches wide, composed of polyolefin
film laminated to rubberized asphalt.
2.8 ROUGH HARDWARE AND FASTENERS
A. Rough Hardware: 1
•
1. Steel Items: Comply with ASTM A7 or ASTM A36.
a. Exterior and Where Indicated: Hot -Dip galvanize complying with
ASTM A 653, G60 coating.
b. Interior Dry Locations: Manufacturer's standard rust inhibitive
prime coating or zinc coating.
2. Steel Framing Connectors:
a. Simpson Strong -Tie Company, Inc; product numbers as
1
indicated in Drawings
b. Substitutions: Submit according to requirements of Section
01630. 1
3. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, and Screws:
a. Lag Screws and Lag Bolts: Square or hex head.
b. Wood Screws: Flat head carbon steel.
c. Bolts: ASTM A 307.
d. Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel.
f. Plain Washers: Round carbon steel.
g. Lock Washers: Helical spring carbon steel.
h. Minimum Fastener Sizes: As indicated in Drawings.
4. Nails and Staples:
a. Exterior, Wet Area and Preservative Treated Wood: Hot dip
galvanized common wire nails, except as otherwise indicated.
b. Interior Dry Area Wood: Cadmium plated Common wire nails,
except as otherwise indicted.
c. Fastener Lengths: Minimum as indicated in nailing schedule,
1
unless otherwise noted.
5. Drilled Expansion Bolts /Screws, Powder Activated Drive Pins, Power
Driven Fastening Devices.
a. Attachment to Concrete: Kwik -Bolt or sleeve Anchor by Hilti,
Red Head Wedge Anchor by Phillips, Trubolt or Dynabolt by
Ramset, Parabolt by U.S.M. 1
b. Attachment to Masonry: Sleeve Anchor by Hilti, Red head.
Sleeve anchor by Phillips.
c. Powder Activated Drive Pins: Hilti or Ramset.
d. Power Driven Fastening Devices to Concrete or Masonry: As
approved by Architect. 1
1
1
1 TOC BUILDING ADDITION ROUGH CARPENTRY: 06100
SEP 00 PAGE 9
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Construction Adhesive /Glue: Per Industry Standard APA AFG -01.
PART 3 EXECUTION
' 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Produce joints which are tight, true, and well nailed, with members
assembled in accordance with Drawings and applicable building codes and
regulations.
1. Erect and secure Work in a rigid, substantial manner, plumb and level.
2. Do not shim framing components.
B. Provide and locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to
allow attachment of other construction.
C. Provide field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of
preservative treated lumber and plywood.
D. Selection of Lumber Pieces:
1. Hand select exposed framing members.
P 9
2. Select individual pieces so that knots and obvious defects do not
interfere with placing bolts or nails for proper connections.
3. Cut out and discard pieces with defects which render a piece unable to
I
4. serve its intended function.
Lumber may be rejected by Architect, whether or not it has been
installed, for excessive warp, twist, bow, crook, mildew, fungus, or
mold, as well as for improper cutting and fitting.
3.2 WOOD FRAMING
A. Installation of Wood Framing:
1. Install joists and rafters at spacing indicated in Drawings.
2. Set horizontal and sloped members with crown up.
3. Install wall studs at maximum 16 inches on center, with wide
dimension placed perpendicular to wall, unless otherwise indicated.
a. Provide minimum nominal 2 x 6 studs for wall studs over 12 feet
of unsupported length.
1
1
ROUGH CARPENTRY: 06100 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 10 SEP 00
4. Install single bottom plates and double top plates, except where 1
otherwise indicated.
a. Overlap double top plates at corners, intersections, and running
1
ends; stagger running ends 4 feet minimum. Locate ends over
studs.
b. Single top plates may be installed at interior nonload bearing
walls and at window sills.
5. Install double floor joists under parallel partitions.
6. Install triple studs at corners and wall intersections.
7. Install framing with 1/4 inch maximum deviation from indicated
alignment.
8. Do not splice structural framing members between supports.
9. Studs may be notched in lower 1/5 of height of stud for electric and
plumbing pipes, but no part of notch shall be deeper than 25 percent
of depth of stud. Cover notches with metal plate, Simpson SS Stud
Shoe, or approved.
10. Holes of diameters up to 25 percent of stud may be drilled through 1
center of studs, but not in middle 1/3 of stud height; cover face of stud
with metal plate, Simpson SS Stud Shoe, or approved, where face is
less than 2 inches from hole edge. 1
11. Limit notches or drilled holes to maximum one per stud.
12. Cutting, drilling or notching of beams and girders is not permitted.
13. 2 x 6 joists and larger may have holes of 1 inch diameter maximum
drilled in center 1/3 of their depth, center 1/3 of their span, at 24 inches
o.c. minimum.
14. Hang mechanical equipment, mechanical and sprinkler piping larger
than 2 inch diameter, or other items producing hanger load over 50
lbs. by a system approved by Architect.
a. Provide additional framing for any hanger producing a load over
200 lbs. to transfer loads to main structural beams or walls.
B. Bearings: 1
1. Provide full bearing, unless otherwise shown or indicated.
1
2. Finish bearing surfaces for structural members to provide sure and
even support.
3. For sloping framing members, make minimum cuts or notchs at ends
as required to give uniform bearing surface.
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION ROUGH CARPENTRY: 06100
SEP 00 PAGE 11
C. Installation of Steel Connectors for Wood Framing:
1 1. Install connectors, such as hangers, stirrups, anchors, straps, ties,
bases and caps, with nails and bolts of largest sizes, types and
amount specified by manufacturer of connector.
2. Provide "U" type hangers where joists, beams and girders frame into
side of beams, ledgers and headers.
3. Provide post caps and bases at posts and columns.
4. Where model numbers for connectors are not indicated, provide type
of connector designed to carry indicated dead loads plus snow and live
' loads.
D. Blocking and Bridging:
1 1. Blocking:
a. Install minimum 2 inch nominal thick blocking where indicated,
and as required, to support toilet accessories, cabinets, toilet
compartments, plumbing, fire protection, mechanical, electrical
equipment, and the like.
1 b. Install blocking for wall mounted door stops.
c. Install solid blocking between joists and rafters at points of
support including bearing walls, beams and ledgers, but not
where joists are supported on metal hangers.
d. Block edges of discontinuous sheathing, and edges of
sheathing where such blocking is shown Drawings. Install
nominal 2 x 4 or thicker blocking at unsupported joints in wall
sheathing.
e. Install blocking between studs at intersection of wall and ceiling
or floor where ceilings or floors do not occur at top of plates of
stud wall.
f. Install nominal 2 inch thick by depth of stud blocking at mid -
height of walls.
g. Install fire stop blocking in wood framed walls and partitions at
1 each floor level and at ceiling line of top story.
h. Install smoke stop blocking at combustible blind spaces
exceeding 10 feet in any dimension, to create a barrier to
passage of flame at 10 feet maximum intervals. Do same at
furred spaces and utility chases.
i. Install smoke stop blocking at double stud wood - framed walls
and partitions at maximum intervals of 10 feet in any dimension.
j. Install smoke stop blocking along and in line with run of each
1 stairway in adjacent wood stud walls and partitions.
1
1
ROUGH CARPENTRY: 06100 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 12 SEP 00
2. Bridging: 1
a. Install wood cross bridging, not less than 2 x 3 inch nominal, 16
ga. steel cross bridging of equal strength, or solid blocking 1
between joists where span of joists exceeds 8 feet.
b. Install bridging at a maximum distance of 8 feet between a line
of bridging and a joist bearing.
c. Do not anchor cross bridging until dead loads are in place.
Space cross bridging members 1/4 inch minimum apart to avoid
rubbing.
E. Alignment: 1
1. For framing members receiving a finished surface, align finish
subsurface to vary not more than 1/8 inch from plane of surfaces of
111
adjacent furring and framing members.
F. Furring: 1
1. Install vertical furring at 24 inches maximum on center, unless
otherwise noted, on interior face of concrete or masonry walls 1
indicated to receive gypsum board finish.
2. Install closure furring strips at edges and penetrations of furred
surfaces and at each floor and ceiling surface. 1
G. Temporary Support:
1. Adequately brace structure for wind and earthquake forces until floor,
roof and wall have been secured.
2. Continue temporary bracing until finish gypsum board has been
applied.
3.3 SHEATHING INSTALLATION 1
A. Verify blocking is in place and located properly prior to installation of 1
sheathing.
B. Placement of Wood Sheathing: 1
1. Place wood sheathing panels with face grain perpendicular to supports
and continuously over at least two supports, except where otherwise
indicated. Stagger end joints 4 feet at adjacent panels.
2. Adjust layout to eliminate sheathing pieces less than one foot wide. 1
1
1
1 TOC BUILDING ADDITION ROUGH CARPENTRY: 06100
SEP 00 PAGE 13
1 3. Center joints accurately over supports, unless otherwise indicated.
Provide 1/8 inch gap between panels at joints using spacer tool,
' including at tongue and groove joints.
4. For wall sheathing, back panel edges with studs or 2 x 4 blocking.
5. Block roof sheathing as shown.
' C. Placement of Underlayment:
1 1. Place underlayment with smooth side up and with face grain across
supports.
' 2. Offset end and edge joints at least 2 inches from joints of subfloor
panels.
3. Provide 1/32 inch gap between panels at joints.
1 D. Placement of Gypsum Sheathing:
1. Apply 24 inch wide sheathing horizontally with tongue edge up.
Stagger ends.
2. Apply 48 inch wide sheathing vertically.
' 3. Back panel edges with studs or 2 x 4 blocking.
4. Secure with type of screws recommended by sheathing manufacturer,
4 inches on center along each stud and at perimeter.
E. Protect wood sheathing and underlayment from moisture by use of
9 Y Y
waterproof coverings until panels in turn have been covered with next
1 succeeding component or finish.
3.4 FASTENING
A. Wood Framing:
1 1. Use only common wire nails or spikes of dimension and spacing
shown on Nailing Schedule, unless otherwise indicated.
' 2. For conditions not covered in Nailing Schedule provide penetration into
piece receiving point of not less than 1 /2 length of nail or spike,
provided, however, that 16d nails may be used to connect two pieces
1 of nominal 2 inch thickness.
3. Drive nails perpendicular to grain, not toenailed.
4. Nail without splitting wood.
a. Prebore as required to prevent splitting wood.
b. Remove split members and replace with members complying
with specified requirements.
1
ROUGH CARPENTRY: 06100 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 14 SEP 00
B. Wood Sheathing: 1
1. Use minimum common nail size as indicated on structural drawings for 1
nailing wood sheathing.
2. Space nails at minimum of 6 inches on center at panel edges, and 12
inches on center in panel field.
3. Staples may be used in lieu of nails, providing a schedule is submitted
to Architect for approval showing each nail size and spacing required
and staple size and spacing proposed as substitute, accompanied with
supporting test data.
4. Refer to Drawings for special nailing requirements. 1
C. Gypsum Sheathing:
1. Use 11 gage 7/16 inch diameter head galvanized roofing nails 1 3/4
inches long, spaced at 6 inches on center at panel edges, and at 10
inches on center in panel field. 1
2. Keep perimeter fasteners 3/8 inch from edges and ends of units.
3. Provide minimum nailing in accordance with Table No. 23 -I -Q of UBC.
D. Powder Activated Drive Pins:
1. Anchor bottom plates of non -load bearing stud walls to concrete slab 1
substrates with 1/4 inch diameter by 2 -1/2 inches long powder
activated drive pins at 32 inches on center maximum and at 6 inches
from plate end.
E. Bolting: 1
1. Drill holes 1/16 inch larger in diameter than bolts being used. Do not
bear bolt threads on wood.
2. Drill holes straight and true from one side only.
3. Do not bear bolt heads on wood; use washers under heads on wood
bearing. Use washers under nuts. 1
4. Anchor bottom plates of load bearing stud walls to foundation with 1 /2
inch diameter by 10 inch long galvanized anchor bolts at 48 inches on
center maximum and at 6 inches from plate ends, unless otherwise
indicated.
1
1
1
111
TOC BUILDING ADDITION ROUGH CARPENTRY: 06100
SEP 00 PAGE 15
1 F. Lag Bolts and Wood Screws:
1 1. Prebore holes same diameter as root of threads, enlarging holes to
shank diameter for length of unthreaded shank. Do not overdrill.
2. Soap threads of lag bolts prior to installing.
1 3. Do not drive lag bolts, lag screws or wood screws.
' G. Bugle screws:
1. For attaching wood or gypsum sheathing to steel studs, use bugle
' screws spaced at 8 inches on center at edges and in panel field,
unless otherwise indicated.
1 H. Adhesive:
1. Apply adhesive to top of structural member prior to installing sheathing
1 in accordance with manufactures written instructions.
3.5 AIR INFILTRATION BARRIER (BUILDING WRAP)
1 A. Tyvek Air Infiltration Barrier:
1 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2. Run continuously over openings.
3. Secure with staples spaced at 30 inches on center in both directions.
4. Remove Tyvek Barrier from openings by making diagonal cuts in
paper, extending flaps into opening and securing flaps to interior face
of wall opening.
5. Seal tears with Tyvek on Tyvek with duct tape.
3.6 WATERPROOF COMPOSITE UNDERLAYMENT
A. Install waterproof composite underlayment at eaves, ridges, and valleys in
' accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
1. Weather lap plies and end joints as recommended.
2. Stagger end joints of each consecutive ply.
B. Extend eave rotection membrane minimum 2 feet up sloe beyond interior
p P P Y
1 face of wall.
1
1
ROUGH CARPENTRY: 06100 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 16 SEP 00
3.7 CANT STRIPS 1
A. Provide pressure treated cant strips at perimeter of built -up roofing where
1
roof intersects vertical surfaces, and as shown or required by roofing
manufacturer. Shim as required to make level.
3.8 CORRECTION OF DEFECTIVE WORK
A. Remove split and warped framing prior to installation of finish materials. 1
B Adjust framing to comply with location and deflection requirements of
National Design Specifications for Wood Construction.
C. Remove and replace sheathing and underlayment panels with edges split or
damaged by fasteners.
3.9 CLEANING
1
A. Daily Cleaning:
1. Remove excess wood pieces sawdust, and loose fasteners from site.
2. Clean, without damaging, exposed surfaces affected by Work of this
Section.
3. Dispose of refuse in a legal manner.
END OF
1
O SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION WOOD I JOISTS: 06174
SEP 00 PAGE 1
1 PART 1 GENERAL
I 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Wood chord and plywood web "I" joists for floor and roof framing.
I bracing and anchorage.
B. Bridging, g e. 9
' 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
I A. Section 01340: Design -Build Requirements
B. Section 05210: Structural Steel
I C. Section 06100: Rough Carpentry
1 D. Section 06180: Glue Laminated Construction
E. Structural Drawings: Notes
I 1.3 SUBMITTALS
1 A. Product Data: Provide joist configurations, bearing and anchor details, and
bridging and bracing. Include installation instructions.
1 B. Shop Drawings: Indicate sizes and spacing of joists, loads and joist cambers,
and framed openings, stamped by a Professional Structural Engineer
I licensed in the State of Oregon .
C. Submit design calculations, stamped by a Professional Structural Engineer
1 licensed in the State of Oregon.
D. Manufacturer's certification that joists have been installed in accordance with
1 manufacturer's design and installation requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
Manufacturer /Fabricator: Company specializing A. P Y P 9 in manufacture of the
I products specified in this Section with minimum three years documented
experience; fabricating plant approved by I.C.B.O. certified testing agency.
1
1
1
WOOD I JOISTS: 06174 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
B. Design joists and associated components under direct supervision of a
Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and
licensed in the State of Oregon. 1
C. Joist manufacturer to inspect all joists after they have been erected, and
sheathing, bridging, and blocking has been installed. Manufacturer to submit
certificate to Architect that the inspection was made and that the joists are in
acceptable condition and meet with the manufacturer's design and installation
requirements.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code requirements for loads, seismic, and other
governing criteria. 1
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Protect structural components from warping or other distortion by stacking in
vertical position, braced to resist movement.
1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS 1
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated in Drawings and Shop
Drawings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 1
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Wood chord and plywood web joists (TJI): Wood "I" joists with structural wood
flanges and structural plywood web, by Trus Joist Corporation, Willamette
Industries, or approved. 1
B. Joist Bridging: Type, size and spacing as recommended by joist
manufacturer, or as indicated. 1
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard.
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION WOOD I JOISTS: 06174
SEP 00 PAGE 3
1 B. Wood Blocking: As specified in Section 06100.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Wood chord and plywood web joists (TJI): Design and manufactured to
1 standards set forth in NER -200 Report.
B. Brace members for support during transit.
PART 3 EXECUTION
1 3.1 EXAMINATION
1 A. Verify that supports are ready to receive units.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate placement of support items.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install joists in accordance with manufacturer's instructions with all
1 accessories required for a complete system.
B. Set structural members level and plumb, in correct positions.
C. Install blocking at all bearing points.
1 D. Make provisions for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to
maintain structure plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection
and installation of permanent bridging and bracing, and sheathing material
has been applied. Design and temporary bracing and shoring is entirely the
responsibility of the Contractor.
' E. Coordinate placement of sheathing with work of this Section.
3.4 TOLERANCES
A. Framing Members: 1/2 inch maximum from true position.
1
1
1
WOOD I JOISTS: 06174 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 4 SEP 00
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Joist manufacturer to inspect joists after they have been erected, and '
sheathing, bridging, blocking, and the like are in place.
B. Joist manufacturer to submit certificate to Architect certifying that the '
inspection was made and that joists are in acceptable condition and meet the
manufacturer's design and installation requirements.
END OF SECTION
r
1
i
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
I TOC BUILDING ADDITION GLUED - LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION: 06180
SEP 00 PAGE 1
1 PART1 GENERAL
I 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Glue- laminated beams.
I
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01340: Design -Build Requirements
1 B. Section 05500: Metal Fabrications
C. Section 06100: Rough Carpentry
I D. Section 06174: Wood I Joists
1 E. Structural Drawings: Structural Notes
1.3 SUBMITTALS
I A. Product data: Materials list of items P
ro osed to be provided under this
P P
I Section.
B. Shop Drawings showing details of units and their interface with other
I components of structure.
1. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures.
1 C. Certificates: Upon completion of this portion of Work, and as condition of its
acceptance, deliver to Architect an AITC "Certificate of Conformance"
1 covering all glue - laminated structural members.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
I A. Use skilled workers trained and experienced in necessary crafts and familiar
with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of work of
1 this Section.
I B. Comply with applicable codes and regulations of governmental agencies
having jurisdiction, and the following:
1
1
GLUED - LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION: 06180 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
1. Voluntary Product Standard PA 56 -73, "Structural Glue- Laminated
Timber ".
2. "Inspection Manual 200" of American Institute of Timber Construction.
1
C. Mark each member with "Quality Mark" of American Institute of Timber
Construction, and provide specified AITC "Certificate of Conformance ".
1
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver units to job site with adequate wrapping to prevent staining and other
damage from moisture.
B. Maintain wrapping in proper condition until erection has started.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 1
2.1 GLUE - LAMINATED BEAMS
1
A. Provide glue - laminated beams of types and dimensions indicated,
"Architectural" appearance grade using exterior glue, meeting requirements
1
of combination 24F -V4 DF /DF at simple span beams for dry condition of
service, and complying with ANSI /AITC A190.1 and AITC 117, with each unit
bearing AITC stamp of quality inspection.
1
1. Seal surfaces with penetrating sealer.
2. Provide "Industrial" appearance grade where concealed.
2.2 HARDWARE 1
A. Provide connection steel and hardware for joining timber members to each
other and to their supports, setting plates, and items field- welded to structural
steel.
1. Provide one coat of rust - inhibitive shop - applied primer on connection
steel and hardware.
2.3 OTHER MATERIALS
1
A. Provide other materials required for a complete and proper installation.
1
1
11
TOC BUILDING ADDITION GLUED - LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION: 06180
SEP 00 PAGE 3
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
1. Correct conditions detrimental to proper completion of Work.
1 2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install work of this Section in accordance with:
' 1. Shop Drawings.
2. Manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
' B. Procedures:
1 1. Do not impose temporary construction loads which cause stress
beyond design limits.
2. Erect bracing as required to maintain system level, straight, and
' plumb.
3. Assure adequate lateral support until other structural members have
been completely installed.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
I TOC BUILDING ADDITION EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK: 06401
SEP 00 PAGE 1
1 PART 1 GENERAL
I 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Exterior standing and running trim.
I
B. Exterior ornamental work.
1 C. Exterior frames and jambs.
D. Shop priming of exterior woodwork.
E. Shop finishing for exterior woodwork.
1 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
I A. Section 06100: Rough Carpentry, for exposed framing and blocking, shims,
and nailers for installing exterior woodwork.
B. Section 06402: Interior Architectural Woodwork.
C. Section 08210: Wood Doors.
I
D. Section 09900: Painting, for field finishing of installed exterior architectural
I woodwork.
1.3 REFERENCES
1 A. ASTM D2898 Methods for Accelerated Weathering on Fire- Retardant-
Treated Wood for Fire Testing.
I B. ASTM E84 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials.
I 1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Exterior architectural woodwork includes wood blocking, shims, and nailers
for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction prior
to woodwork installation.
1
1
EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK: 06401 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product and process specified and ,
incorporated into items of architectural woodwork during fabrication, finishing,
and installation.
B. Wood - preservative- treatment data from chemical treatment manufacturer.
1. Include certification of chemical solution and affirm that it complies with '
indicated treatment standard.
C. Fire - retardant - treatment data for material treated to reduce combustibility.
1. Include certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with
requirements.
D. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item on dimensioned plans and '
elevations, and large -scale details, including attachment devices, and other
components.
1. Show locations and sizes of blocking nd nailers, including concealed
9 9
blocking and reinforcing specified in other Sections.
E. Samples:
1. Lumber for transparent finish (exterior wood stain), 50 sq. in. for each '
species, with one -half of exposed surface finished with coating
specified in Section 09900.
2. Lumber and panel products for shop - applied opaque finish, 8 by 10
inches of panels and 50 sq. in. for lumber, for each finish system and
color, with one -half of exposed surface finished. '
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing architectural
woodwork similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of
successful in- service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to
produce required units without delaying the Work.
B. Installer Qualifications: A firm that can demonstrate successful experience in ,
installing architectural woodwork items similar in type and quality to those
required for this Project.
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK: 06401
SEP 00 PAGE 3
1
C. Single- Source Responsibility for Fabrication and Installation: Engage a
1 qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for fabricating
and installing woodwork specified in this Section.
1 D. Quality Standard: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the following
standard:
1 1. AWI Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" of
the Architectural Woodwork Institute.
1 E. Surface- Burning Characteristics: Not exceeding values indicated below,
when subjected to accelerated weathering test ASTM D 2898, Method A, and
then tested per ASTM E 84, by UL, Warnock Hersey, or another testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1 1. Flame Spread: 25.
2. Smoke Developed: 450.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
U A. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent
damage, soilage, and deterioration.
' 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Obtain and comply with woodwork manufacturer's
' and Installer's coordinated advice for optimum temperature and humidity
conditions for woodwork during its storage.
' B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation of exterior woodwork only
when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit work to be
performed, and at least one coat of specified finish to be applied, without
1 exposure to rain, snow, or dampness.
C. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to be fitted to other
construction, check actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field
measurements before fabrication.
1. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings.
' 2. Verify locations of concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements
that support woodwork by accurate field measurements before being
1 enclosed. Record measurements on final shop drawings.
1
EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK: 06401 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 4 SEP 00
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, reinforcements, and ,
other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that exterior
architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS 1
A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality
standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade indicated and, where
the following products are part of exterior woodwork, with requirements of the
referenced product standards that apply to product characteristics indicated: '
2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Blocking, Shims, and Nailers: Softwood or hardwood lumber, including Fire-
retardant - treated softwood lumber kiln, dried to less than 15 percent moisture
content. '
B. Screws: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use,
nonferrous metal or hot -dip galvanized, unless otherwise indicated. Comply
with ASME B18.6.1 for applicable requirements.
1. For metal framing supports, provide screws as recommended by 1
metal- framing manufacturer.
C. Nails: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply
with FS FF -N -105 for applicable requirements.
1. Hot -dip galvanized nails.
2. Stainless -steel nails.
D. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate
for secure anchorage.
1. Provide nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized
p g anized anchors and inserts,
unless otherwise indicated.
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK: 06401
SEP 00 PAGE 5
1 2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality
standard for wood moisture content in relation to relative humidity conditions
existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas.
' B. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.
,p
1 C. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware
application, before shipment to Project site to maximum extent possible.
1 1. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and
installation.
2. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for
scribing, trimming, and fitting.
D. Shop -cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware,
electrical work, and similar items.
1. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing -in
diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings.
2. Smooth edges of cutouts and seal edges with a water - resistant coating
suitable for exterior applications.
' 2.4 EXTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR OPAQUE FINISH
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 300.
1 B. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members, kerf backs of other wide, flat
members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work.
1 C. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of
installation require field assembly.
' D. Wood Species: Any wood species listed in referenced woodworking
standard.
2.5 EXTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR OPAQUE FINISH
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 900.
1
1
1
EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK: 06401 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 6 SEP 00
B. Wood Species: Any wood species listed in referenced woodworking
standard.
2.6 SHOP PRIMING
A. Woodwork for Opaque Finish: Shop prime woodwork for paint finish with one 1
coat of wood primer specified in Section 09900.
B. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for 1
sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and
similar preparations for finishing architectural woodwork, as applicable to
each unit of work.
1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer compatible with finish
1
coats to concealed surfaces of woodwork, including back.
a. Apply 2 coats to items installed over concrete or masonry.
2.7 SHOP FINISHING
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 1500, unless otherwise
indicated.
B. General: Entire finish of exterior architectural woodwork is specified in this 1
Section. To greatest extent possible, finish architectural woodwork at
fabrication shop. Defer only final touchup and cleaning until after installation.
1
C. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for
sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and
similar preparations for finishing of architectural woodwork, as applicable to
each unit of work.
1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer compatible with finish
coats to concealed surfaces of woodwork, including back.
a. Apply 2 coats to items installed over concrete or masonry.
D. Opaque Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below for finish system,
color, and sheen, with sheen measured on 60- degree gloss meter per
ASTM D 523.
1. AWI Finish System OP-4: Conversion varnish. 1
2. Color: Match Architect's sample.
3. Sheen: Satin 30 -50 gloss units.
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK: 06401
SEP 00 PAGE 7
1 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation
1 areas before installation.
' B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop- fabricated work for
completion and complete work as required, including back priming and
removal of packing.
1 3.2 INSTALLATION
' A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for
same grade specified for type of woodwork involved.
' B. Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as
required with concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches
for plumb and level.
' C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work and refinish cut surfaces or
9
repair damaged finish at cuts.
D. Fire- Retardant - Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install fire-retardant-
treated wood to comply with recommendations of chemical treatment
manufacturer, including those for adhesives used to install woodwork.
' E. Preservative- Treated Lumber: Where cut or drilled in field, treat cut ends with
preservative solution used in original treatment by brushing, spraying,
dipping, or soaking.
' F. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to
substrates.
' 1. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk,
concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete
' installation.
2. Use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled
flush with woodwork.
1
1
EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK: 06401 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE8 SEP00
G. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, 1
using full - length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to
greatest extent possible.
1
1. Do not use pieces less than 36 inches long, except where necessary.
2. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members.
3. Install standing and running trim with no more than 1/8 inch in 96
inches variation from a straight line.
H. Complete finishing work specified in this Section to extent not completed at
shop or before installation of woodwork.
1. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed.
2. Apply specified finish coats to exposed surfaces where only
sealer /prime coats were applied in shop.
I. Refer to Section 09900 for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork.
1
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate
functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork.
1. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces.
111
1. Touch up shop - applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
3.4 PROTECTION 1
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to
fabricator and Installer that ensures that woodwork is without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
1
END OF SECTION
1
•
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK: 06402
SEP 00 PAGE 1
1 PART1 GENERAL
1 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
1 A. Standing and running trim.
B. Plastic laminate clad cabinets.
1 C. Plastic laminate countertops.
1 D. Flush wood paneling.
E. Interior ornamental work.
F. Stairwork and rails
G. Interior door frames and jambs.
H. Shelving.
I hin of woodwork
Shop finishing rk o
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
1 A. Section 06100: Rough Carpentry , for furring, blocking, shims, and support
framing for cabinets.
B. Section 08210: Flush Wood Doors.
C. Section 09002: Materials and Finishes Schedule.
D. Section 09250: Gypsum Board, for wall substrate.
1 E. Division 15: Mechanical, for plumbing work incorporated in casework.
F. Division 16: Electrical, for electrical work incorporated in casework.
1.3 REFERENCES
1 A. ASTM A167 Specification for Stainless and Heat - Resisting Chromium -
Nickel Steel Place, Sheet, and Strip.
1
1
1
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK: 06402 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
B. ASTM C1036 Specification for Flat Glass.
C. ASTM C1048 Specification for Heat - Treated Flat Glass -Kind HS, Kind FT 1
Coated and Uncoated Glass.
D. ASTM E84 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of building 1
Materials.
1.4 SUBMITTALS 1
A. Product Data: For each type of product and process specified including
installation instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: 1
1. Show location of each item with dimensioned plans and elevations,
indicating materials, component profiles, assembly methods, joint
details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location, and
schedule of finishes.
2. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing and
electrical work incorporated in cabinets.
3. Show direction grain of wood faced items for transparent finish.
C. Samples:
1. Wood Veneer Faced Panel Products: Two 8 by 10 inch size samples
with transparent finish for each species of wood specified.
2. Plastic Laminate Clad Panel Products: Two 8 by 10 inch size samples
for each color, texture and pattern of plastic laminate and melamine
material specified.
3. Solid surfacing materials: Two 6 by 6 inch samples.
4. Submit one sample of each hardware item in specified finish.
a. Approved samples may be used in the final installation.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality Standard:
1. Comply with "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" latest edition
of the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) for grades of casework,
construction, finishes, and other requirements specified in this Section.
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK: 06402
SEP 00 PAGE 3
1 B. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications:
1. Firm experienced in producing casework for projects of similar size,
quality and complexity.
2. Engage a firm qualified to assume single- source responsibility for
1 fabricating, finishing, and installing Work of this Section.
C. Surface Burning Characteristics: Not exceeding the following values indicated
when tested per ASTM E 84.
U 1. Flame Spread: 75. CLASS B
2. Smoke Developed: 450.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Wood frames for fire door assemblies shall be labeled for fire resistance and
1 smoke control ( "S" label) in accordance with UBC Standard 7 -2.
1. Meet appropriate Factory Mutual, Underwriters Laboratories, or
1 Warnock Hersey requirements and have acceptance label
permanently attached to each fire door assembly.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect units from moisture damage.
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Do not deliver or install casework until building is enclosed, and heating and
ventilating system is operating.
B. Maintain 50 degrees F temperature in areas that casework is installed.
1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Prior to fabrication, verify that field measurements are as indicated in Shop
1 Drawings.
1.10 COORDINATION
r
A. Coordinate the Work with plumbing and electrical rough -in, and other finish
1 work.
1
1
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK: 06402 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 4 SEP 00
B. Coordinate with other trades for installation of concealed in -wall backing for
support of cabinets.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality
standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade indicated.
B. Softwood Lumber: PS 20; average moisture content of 6 percent; Cherry.
C. Hardwood Lumber: AHA A135.4.
D. Particleboard: PS 1; composed of wood chips, 45 pcf density, made with
P P tY
water resistant adhesive; of grade to suit application; sanded faces.
1. Duraflake; Willamette Industries, Inc., or approved.
E. Softwood Plywood: PS 1; core materials of veneer; Douglas Fir or Hemlock r
species.
F. Hardwood Plywood and Face Veneers: HPVA HP -1; Grade A face veneer. 1
G. Hardboard: ANSI A135.4; pressed wood fiber with resin binder, tempered
grade, smooth two sides, 1/4 inch thick unless otherwise indicated.
H. Fiberboard (MDF): Medium - density fiberboard made without formaldehyde
and complying with ANSI A208.2.
1. Medite II; Medite Corp.
I. Rough Carriages for stairs: As specified in Section 06100 for structural
framing lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. 1
2.2 PLASTIC LAMINATES
A. Plastic Laminate (PL): High pressure decorative laminate (HPDL), General
Purpose type, NEMA LD3, types as indicated; manufacturer, color, pattern,
and surface texture as indicated for each designation in Section 09002:
Materials and Finishes Schedule.
1
r
TOC BUILDING ADDITION INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK: 06402
SEP 00 PAGE 5
1 B. Thermoset Decorative Overlay: MDL Melamine Overlay as manufactured by
one of the following, colors as selected from manufacturer's standard:
1. RMP; Roseburg Melamine Products.
2. KorTron; Willamette Industries.
C. Backing Sheet: NEMA LD3, BK -20 backing grade, undecorated plastic
9 99 P
laminate.
D. Joint Sealant: Clean translucent mildew - resistant silicone by Dow, General
Electric, or approved.
2.3 STAINLESS STEEL
A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A167; 18 gauge, Type 302 or 304, No. 4 satin
polished surface finish.
' 2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesive: Aliphatic resin, Resorcinol, or approved.
B. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application.
C. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Select type, size and finish to
suit application.
D. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.
2.5 HARDWARE
A. Drawer Slides: Load capacity of drawers (loaded with paper) is defined as
drawer depth x height x width (in inches) x .017 lbs. cu /in. plus 30 pounds.
1. Pencil Drawers: Accuride 2006, Steel ball bearings, 3/4 extension,
load capacity up to 45 lbs. per pair.
2. Light to Medium Duty Drawers: Accuride 3832A, Steel ball bearings,
1 full extension, load capacity up to 100 lbs. per pair; for drawers that
are deeper than they are wide.
3. Light to Medium Duty Drawers: Accuride 7432, Steel ball bearings, full
extension, load capacity up to 100 lbs. per pair; for drawers 24 inches
wide or less.
1
1
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK: 06402 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 6 SEP 00
4. Medium to Heavy Duty Drawers: Accuride 4034, Steel ball bearings,
full extension with 1 inch overtravel, progressive movement, load
capacity 150 lbs. per pair; for drawers 24 inches wide or less. 1
5. Heavy Duty or Lateral File Drawers: Accuride 3640, Steel ball
bearings, full extension with 1 inch overtravel, progressive movement,
load capacity up to 200 lbs. per pair; for drawers 42 inches wide or
less.
B. Cabinet Shelf Supports, Adjustable: Knape & Vogt No. 346 for drilled holes; 1
Nickel - plated finish.
C. Wall Shelf Supports, Adjustable: Knape & Vogt Heavy duty No. 87 standards
with No. 187 brackets; Anochrome finish.
D. Cabinet Hinges:
1. Concealed Hinge: Self closing, 165 degree opening, nickel - plated. 1
Provide minimum 3 hinges for doors over 48 inches high.
Grass America, Inc. No. 3903.
Blum Module 91. 1
Equivalent by Hefele, Hettich, or approved.
2. Continuous Hinge: Stanley No. 314, 2 -1/2 inch heavy -duty brass
hinge, US14 finish.
3. Butt Hinges: 2 -3/4 inch, 5 knuckle steel hinges.
E. Glass Door Hinges: Provide 3 per door leaf.
1. Blum B95410, with B84415 cover cap. 1
F. Cabinet Catches: Heavy -duty magnetic catch, Epco 1000LS, or approved.
1. Standard Cabinet Doors: Provide one per door.
2. Closet Doors: Provide two per leaf.
G. Drawer and Door Locks: c s. 5 -pin tumbler, dead bolt with metal strike:
1. Doors: National N8123 -26D. 1
2. Drawers: National N8149 -26D, or Corbin No. CB738.
3. Glass Sliding Doors: BHMA E07121.
H. Drawer Pulls: 4 inch x 5/16 inch diameter wire pull, brushed stainless steel
US32D.
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK: 06402
SEP00 PAGE7
1 I Silencers: Clear soft vinyl round bumpers, 2 per door.
J. Latch Hook: Ives; elbow catch 12, cast aluminum.
K. Clothes Rods: Knape & Vogt No. 770 -1 with No. 735 support flanges.
L. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01630.
1 2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL
' A. Fabricate interior woodwork complying with requirements of referenced AWI
Quality Standard and Custom grade, unless otherwise indicated.
B. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, and hardware application in shop
to greatest extent possible before delivery to Project site.
1. Dissemble only as required for shipping and to permit passage through
building openings.
D. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance
for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting.
E. Locate openings accurately for hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures and
electrical work, and similar items, using templates or roughing -in diagrams.
1. Seal edges with a water - resisting coating.
2.7 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 300 for standing and running
trim.
1. Quality Standard: Custom.
B. Wood Species: Cherry, plain sawn.
C. Groove backs of flat trim members, and kerf backs of wide, flat members.
Terminate grooves or kerfs before reaching exposed ends of members.
1
1
:1
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK: 06402 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 8 SEP 00
2.8 PLASTIC LAMINATE CLAD CABINETS
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 for laminate clad cabinets.
1
1. Quality Standard: Custom.
1
B. Laminate for Exposed Surfaces: High pressure decorative laminate (HPDL),
general purpose type, complying with the following:
C. Horizontal Surfaces other than Countertops (HGS): 0.048 inch.
Vertical Surfaces (VGP): 0.028 inch.
Postformed Surfaces (HGP): 0.039 inch.
Edges: 0.028 inch.
D. Laminates for Semiexposed Surfaces: Thermoset Overlay.
E. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide products indicated for each designation in Section 09002: Materials
and Finishes Schedule.
F. Apply plastic laminate cladding in full uninterrupted sheets consistent pp y p g p s c s stent with
manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed
fasteners. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut -outs.
G. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic laminate finished
surfaces.
H. Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops with steel brackets at 16
inches on center.
I. Edge Trim: Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same
finish and pattern, plastic trim. Use one piece for full length only.
2.9 COUNTERTOPS
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for
countertops. ,
1. Quality Standard: Custom.
B. Type of Top: High pressure decorative laminate (HPDL) complying with the
following: 1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK: 06402
SEP 00 PAGE 9
1 1. Grade: General Purpose (HGS), 0.048 inch thickness.
2. Colors, patterns, and finishes: Subject to compliance with
requirements, provide products indicated for each designation in
Section 09002: Materials and Finishes Schedule.
3. Grain Direction: Parallel to cabinet fronts.
4. Edges: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces.
5. Core Material: 45 pcf density particleboard.
2.10 FLUSH WOOD PANELING FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 500 requirements for flush wood
paneling.
1. Quality Standard: Custom.
B. Wood Species: Cherry, plain sliced.
1. Matching of Veneer Leaves: Book match.
2. Vertical Matching of Veneer Leaves: End match.
3 3. Veneer Matching Within Panel Face: Running match.
4. Panel Matching Method: Sequence match panels within each separate
I area.
5. Vertical Panel Matching Method: Continuous match.
6. Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide panels of wood veneer and
fire retardant core that has the following surface burning
characteristics when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84:
a. Flame Spread: 75 or Tess.
b. Smoke Developed: 450 or less.
2.11 SHELVING
1 A. Closet and Utility Shelving: Comply with AWI Section 600 [WIC Section 14]
requirements.
1. Quality Grade: Custom.
2. Plywood veneer with solid lumber edges.
1 2.12 STAIRWORK AND RAILS
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 800 requirements for stair work
and rails.
1
1
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK: 06402 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 10 SEP 00
1. Quality Standard: Custom. 1
B. Wood Species for Transparent Finish: Maple; hard cherry handrails. 1
C. Finishes for Stair Parts:
1. Treads: Transparent.
2. Stringers: Transparent.
3. Handrails: Transparent.
2.13 INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 900 requirements for frames and
jambs.
1. Quality Standard: Custom.
B. Wood Species for Transparent Finish: Cherry, plain sawn.
C. Fire -Rated Door Frames: Provide fire -rated wood frames for wood doors that 1
are constructed and labeled in accordance with door and frame assemblies
tested per ASTM E 152.
2.14 SHOP FINISHING OF ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
A. General: 1
1. Comply with AWI Section 1500 requirements for factory finishing.
2. The entire finish for architectural woodwork is specified in this Section
regardless of whether shop or field applied.
3. To the greatest extent possible, finish architectural woodwork in the
fabrication shop.
4. Touch up, clean, and polish after installation at Project site.
5. Apply one coat of sealer or primer compatible with finish coats to
concealed surfaces of architectural woodwork including backs of trim
and cabinets.
B. Transparent Finish:
1. Quality Standard: Premium.
2. AWI Finish System: TR-4 Conversion Varnish.
3. Staining: Match approved sample for color. 1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK: 06402
SEP 00 PAGE 11
4. Apply a vinyl washcoat to woodwork made from closed -grain wood
before staining and finishing.
5. Do not apply filler to open grained woods.[Apply pastewood filler to
open grain woods after staining (if any). Wipe off excess. Tint filler to
match stained wood. Apply vinyl washcoat sealer after staining and
before filling].
6. Sheen: Satin 30 -50 gloss units.
PART 3 EXECUTION
1 3.1 PREPARATION
A. Condition architectural woodwork to prevailing humidity conditions in
installation areas before installing.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade specified for type of
architectural woodwork involved, and as specified in this Section.
B. Install architectural woodwork plumb, level, and straight.
C. Shim as required with concealed shims.
1. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet for plumb and level.
D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work. Refinish cut surfaces, and
repair damaged finish at cuts.
E. Anchor woodwork to concealed in -wall blocking or directly to substrates as
required for proper support and attachment.
F. Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations and fill flush with
adjacent surfaces matching final finish.
G. Complete finish work not completed in shop. Apply specified finish coats,
1 including stains and paste fillers, to exposed surfaces where only sealer or
primer coats were applied in shop.
H. Standing and Running Trim:
1. Install with minimum of joints possible.
1
1
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK: 06402 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 12 SEP 00
2. Do not use pieces less than 36 inches long, except where necessary. 11
3. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members.
4. Wood Base: Fill gaps between top of base and wall with plastic wood
filler, sand smooth, and finish same as wood base.
I. Cabinets:
1. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet
units, and countertops.
2. Carefully scribe cabinets abutting other components, with maximum
gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose.
3. Secure cabinet and counter bases to floor using steel angles.
J. Countertops: 1
1. Secure tops to base units.
2. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16
inches o.c.
3. Seal space between backsplash and wall with specified sealant.
K. Paneling:
1. Anchor paneling to substrate with concealed panel hangar clips, or by 1
blind nailing on backup strips, or similar trim and framing.
2. Install paneling not to exceed 1/16 inch in 8 feet vertical sup or bow, or
1/8 inch in 8 feet horizontal variation from true plane.
L. Stairwork and Rails:
1. Cut carriage to fit treads and risers and anchor to support framing.
2. Glue treads to risers, and glue and nail treads and risers to carriages.
3. Glue and dowel or pin balusters to treads and railings, and railings to
newel posts.
4. Support wall railings on metal brackets and secure to wall framing.
5. Install treads and risers not to exceed 1/8 inch from indicated position,
and 1/16 inch out of position in respect to adjacent treads and risers.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings. 1
B. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly. 1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK: 06402
SEP 00 PAGE 13
C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semiexposed surfaces.
1 D. Touch up shop applied finishes and restore damaged or soiled areas.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Provide protection and maintain conditions to ensure that casework is without
damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING: 07140
SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fluid applied rubberized asphalt membrane waterproofing.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
ELA EC NS O
A. Section 03300: Cast -In -Place Concrete.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C 836 Specification for High Solids Content, Cold Liquid - Applied
Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane for Use with Separate
Wearing Course.
B. ASTM D 412 Test Methods for Ruber Properties in Tension.
C. ASTM D 903 Test Method for Peel or Stripping Strength of Adhesive
Bonds.
D. ASTM D 1970 Specification for Self- Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous
Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for
Ice Dam Protection.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications, data and installation instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Manufacturer's recommended details of flashing and
treatment of penetrations through waterproofing; indicate special joint or
termination conditions and conditions of interfaced with other materials.
C. Applicator Qualifications: Submit written documentation of applicator's
qualifications including evidence that applicator is licensed or approved by
the manufacturer and listing five successfully completed projects similar in
1 scope and complexity to work of this Section with current phone numbers of
Architect and Owner contacts for verification.
1 1. Submit documentation of designated project foreman's training
certification by manufacturer.
1
1
1
FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING: 07140 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP . 00
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1
A. Perform Work in accordance with NRCA Waterproofing Manual. 1
B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum five years documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
1. Applicator shall designate a single individual as project foreman who
shall be on site at all times during installation and who shall have
certification of training by waterproofing system manufacturer.
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 degrees F for 24 hours before and
during application until membrane has cured.
1.7 WARRANTY 1
A. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for waterproofing failure to resist
penetration of water.
B. For warranty repair work, include removal and replacement of materials
concealing waterproofing.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. W.R. Grace & Co.- Conn.; "Procor 75" fluid applied waterproofing membrane.
B. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01630. 1
2.2 MEMBRANE MATERIALS
A. Waterproofing two-part, ng Membrane. ASTM C 836; Cold, fluid applied, two part, self -
curing, solvent and bitumen free, synthetic rubber based monolithic flexible
membrane. 1
1. Cured Film Thickness: ASTM D 3767 Method A; 0.060 inch.
2. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644; 100 percent.
3. Flexibility, 180 degrees bend over 1 inch mandrel at 32 degrees C:
ASTM D 1970; unaffected.
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING: 07140
SEP 00 PAGE 3
4. Elongation: ASTM D 412; 500 percent minimum.
5. Peel Adhesion to Cornet: ASTM D 903 Modified; 5 lb/in.
B. Flashing and Reinforcing: Manufacturer's standard for systems specified.
C. Surface Conditioner: As required or recommended by membrane
manufacturer, manufacturer's standard product for application.
1 PART 3 EXECUTION
1 3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify that substrate surfaces are free of frozen matter, dampness, loose
particles, cracks, pits, projections, penetrations, or foreign matter detrimental
to adhesion or application of waterproofing system.
C. Verify that substrate surfaces are smooth, free of honeycomb or pitting, and
not detrimental to full contact bond of waterproofing materials.
D. Verify items which penetrate surfaces to receive waterproofing are securely
installed.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive waterproofing.
B. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive waterproofing in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
C. Do not apply waterproofing to surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer or
PP Y P 9 P
applicator.
D. Seal cracks and joints with sealant materials using depth to width ratio as
recommended by sealant manufacturer.
3.3 MEMBRANE APPLICATION
A. Detailing: Detail in accordance with manufacturers standard guideline
details. Complete detailing before installing the membrane over field of the
substrate.
1
FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING: 07140 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 4 SEP 00
B. If required, apply surface conditioner in accordance with manufacturer's 1
instructions. Allow sufficient time for surface conditioner to thoroughly dry
prior to membrane application. 1
C. Membrane Application: Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,
and as follows:
1. Apply the rubberized asphalt membrane at a rate of approximately 25
square feet per gallon to provide a continuous, monolithic coat of ,r
0.060 inch thickness.
D. Terminate membranes in accordance with membrane manufacturer's 1
instructions.
E. Seal watertight items projecting through waterproofing surface in accordance `I
with manufacturer's instructions.
3.4 DRAINAGE COMPOSITE APPLICATION 1
A. Protect membrane from damage by adhering drainage composite over
waterproofing surface in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Scribe
and cut boards around projections and interruptions.
B. Continue drainage composite over foundation wall footings to footing
1
foundation drain for discharge of water in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
3.5 WATERPROOFING SCHEDULE
A. Interior face of cast in place concrete walls.
1
END OF SECTION 1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION BENTONITE WATERPROOFING 07170
SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Bentonite waterproofing system.
1.2 RELATED WORK
1 A. Section 03300: Cast -In -Place Concrete, for substrate.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to show
compliance with specified requirements.
3. Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation,
anchorage, and interface of work of this Section with work of adjacent
trades.
4. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use skilled workmen trained and experienced in necessary crafts and familiar
with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of Work of
this Section.
B. Applicator:
1. Currently approved in writing by manufacturer of waterproofing system.
2. Minimum five years of documented experience under present name
and completed 10 successful projects of similar size and scope.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1 A. Deliver materials to job site in manufacturer's unopened containers with
labels intact and legible at time of use.
B. Maintain products in a dry condition during delivery, storage, handling,
installation, and concealment.
1
BENTONITE WATERPROOFING 07170 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Provide five year manufacturer's warranty for waterproofing failure to resist
penetration of water.
B. For warranty repair work, include removal and replacement of materials
concealing waterproofing.
PART2 PRODUCTS 1
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Manufacturer: CETCO (Colloid Celloid Environmental Technologies
Company); Volclay Waterproofing Division.
B. Product: "Voltex" bentonite geotextile waterproofing.
C. Waterstop: Waterstop RX.
P P
D. Protection Drain Board: Aquadrain 15X by Cetco. 1
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be a
performed.
1. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of
Work.
2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 1
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate as required with other trades assure des to assu a proper and adequate
provision in work of those trades for interface with Work of this Section.
B. Install bentonite waterproofing where shown on Drawings, and in accordance
with manufacturer's recommendations, as approved by Architect.
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION BENTONITE WATERPROOFING 07170
SEP 00 PAGE 3
1 C. Protection:
1. Protect panels from moisture with temporary plastic sheets.
2. Install protection board (drainage composite) against vertical surfaces
prior to backfilling.
3. Backfill as soon as possible after installation has been approved,
working in accordance with Work of other Sections.
3.3 SCHEDULE
A. Install bentonite waterproofing at the following areas:
1. Concrete walls at occupied spaces below grade.
2. Elevator pits.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
11
1
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION PEDESTRIAN TRAFFIC COATINGS: 07181
SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fluid applied membrane coating for installation on plywood sheathing at
exterior decks.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06100: Rough Carpentry.
B. Section 07900: Joint Sealers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include product specifications, characteristics, limitations, and
identify dissolving solvents, and potential destructive compounds.
B. Samples: Two fully cured samples 8 inches by 8 inches in size illustrating
color and surface texture.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special environmental
conditions required to install the product and potential incompatibilities with
adjacent materials.
D. Maintenance Data: Include procedures for stain removal, repairing surface,
cleaning, and list common causes of damage to the membrane and
instructions for temporary patching until permanent patching can be
accomplished.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the
Products specified in this section with minimum five years of successful,
documented experience.
B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the Work of this
Section, with workers trained and experienced and familiar with specified
requirements and methods for proper performance of Work of this Section.
1
.1
PEDESTRIAN TRAFFIC COATINGS: 07181 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery products to job site in the manufacturer's original containers, and f
maintain with labels intact and legible.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1
A. Comply with local regulations regulating use of products containing VOC's.
1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Do not install materials when temperature is below 50 degrees F or above 90 1
degrees F.
B. Maintain this temperature range, 24 hours before, during, and 72 hours after
application.
C. Restrict traffic from area where materials are being installed or are curing. 9
1.8 WARRANTY 1
A. Provide five year warranty.
1. Include coverage for delamination of system from substrate, and
degradation of waterproofing ability.
2. Include responsibility for cracks in substrate up to 1/16 inch wide. 1
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. "Kelmar FWC II T.E. System ", Exposure 6, waterproof traffic coating by
Master Builders Technologies.
B. "Peda- Guard" pedestrian traffic-bearing system by The Neogard Corporation.
9 y y g
C. "Scotch -Clad" P -2 pedestrian traffic coating system by 3 -M Construction 1
Markets.
D. "Sono Guard" Pedestrian system coating by SonoBorn 1
E. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01630.
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION PEDESTRIAN TRAFFIC COATINGS: 07181
SEP 00 PAGE 3
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Traffic Coating: ASTM C957; Liquid urethane elastomer coating, either one
component or two- component mixture applied in one or more coats with color
of top coat selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
Provide manufacturer's standard aggregate B. Aggregate: 99 ate of the size and 9
gradation recommended for the application indicated.
C. Flashing Sheets, and Accessories: Types as recommended by the traffic
coating manufacturer; supplied for locations indicated and for locations
recommended by manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Installer must veri ty that surfaces condition of substrate is ready to receive
traffic coating, and that conditions under which the Work is to be performed is
satisfactory. Notify Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed
with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to Installer.
B. Do not begin Work until concrete substrate has cured 28 days minimum, and
measured moisture content is not greater than recommended by the traffic
coating manufacturer.
3.2 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate surface of dust, debris, and other substances detrimental to
traffic coating Work. Clean surfaces as recommended by coating
manufacturer for adhesion of coating, and for removal of laitance,
contaminants and curing compounds
B. Patch concrete substrate with filler to produce surface conductive to bond.
C. Prime and seal substrate as recommended by traffic coating manufacturer.
Apply thinned coating of membrane liquid if not otherwise recommended.
D. Protect adjacent surfaces.
1
PEDESTRIAN TRAFFIC COATINGS: 07181 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 4 SEP 00
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Apply system materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, 1
including joint treatment, flashing, and surfacing.
B. Start installation of traffic coating only in presence of manufacturers technical 1
representative where terms of warranty requires inspection and acceptance
of installation as it proceeds.
C. Apply total thickness of traffic coating in number of coats recommended by
manufacturer, using special top coating to achieve wear resistance and
weather resistance as required, and to provide color and texture required.
D. Extend primer and coats up intersecting and perimeter vertical surfaces as
indicated, or otherwise recommended by manufacturer.
E. Apply sealant to junction of horizontal and intersection surfaces to achieve 1
watertight seal.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ;1
A. Test deck area for Teaks immediately after nominal cure for the complete
coating. Flood area to a nominal depth of 2 inches, for 24 hours, and
examine the lower surface of coating deck for evidence of leakage. Repair
Work at leaks, if any, and repeat test until no leakage is observed.
3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK 1
A. Protect surfaces from construction traffic and other deterioration until
substantial completion.
1
END OF SECTION 1
1
1
1
I TOC BUILDING ADDITION WATER- REPELLENT: 07190
SEP 00 PAGE 1
i PART 1 GENERAL
J 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Water - repellent at exterior face of exposed cast -in -place concrete walls.
LA
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
II A. Section 03300: Cast -In -Place Concrete.
1 1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM E 96 -95 Standard Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of
1 Materials.
B. ASTM E 514 -90 Standard Test Method for Water Penetration and Leakage
1 through Masonry.
C. State of Oregon's VOC "Area Source " Rules.
1 1.4 SUBMITTALS
I A. Product Data:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer's Specifications and other Data needed to show
compliance with the specified requirements.
3. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures.
1 1.5 MOCK -UP
I A. At a location on site approved by Architect, apply repellent to 25 sq. ft.
minimum.
f B. Approved mock -up may be used as part of finished work.
C. Approved Mock -up to be used as standard for Work of this Section.
1
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1 A. Use skilled workers trained and experienced in necessary crafts and familiar
with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of Work of
this Section.
1
1
WATER- REPELLENT: 07190 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
B. Comply with ASTM C -156, E -96 AND E -514. 1
C. Applicator shall be currently approved by manufacturer, and have 1
successfully completed minimum 3 projects of similar size, quality and
complexity under present name.
D. Manufacturer's Technical Representative to make minimum of three site
visits, before, during, and after application of materials, and document visits
in writing.
E. Provide materials that are VOC compliant in accordance with the State of
Oregon Regulations.
F. Verify that proposed water repellent product is acceptable to manufacturer of
simulated stone for application on simulated stone.
1.7 Pre - Application Meeting 1
A. Schedule meeting minimum one week prior to start of application.
B. Present:
1. Contractor
2. Applicator
3. Manufacturer's Technical Representative.
4. Architect
C. Agenda:
1. Schedule
2. Site Conditions
3. Rate of application determined by water take up test.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 1
A. Delivery and storage:
1. Deliver the materials to the job site in the manufacturer's unopened
containers with all labels intact and legible at time of use. Maintain
packaged materials with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of
use.
2. Protect from damage or contamination. 1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION WATER- REPELLENT: 07190
SEP 00 PAGE 3
1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Temperature for ambient air and expose surface between 50 and 100
degrees F during application and for 24 hours thereafter.
B. Apply only when surfaces are dry and free of frost or ice. Do not apply during
inclement weather.
1.10 WARRANTY
1 A. Manufacturer's warranty to cover:
1. Repellent will not allow water penetration and will allow water vapor
out of substrate for a period of 5 years after substantial completion.
PART2 PRODUCTS
1 2.1 MANUFACTURER AND TYPE
A. Huls America: Crem - Trete, BSM 40 VOC.
B. ProSoCo, Inc; Weather Seal H40, or approved.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed.
B. Verify that pointing and patching of masonry surfaces has been completed.
C. Verify that concrete and masonry surfaces have cured 7 days minimum
before starting application.
D. Verify that surfaces are dry, clean and free of dirt, organic coatings, oils, or
stains.
E. Correct conditions detrimental to timely proper er com and ro completion of the Work.
P
F. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
1
1
1
WATER- REPELLENT: 07190 TOC BUILDING ADDITION 1
PAGE 4 SEP 00
3.2 PREPARATION 1
A. Fill holes and cracks in concrete if required. 1
B. Remove loose particles from substrates to receive water repellent.
C. Mask off exposed surfaces adjacent to substrates to receive water repellent.
D. Test materials to received repellent to establish application rate.
3.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate
provision in work of those trades for interface with Work of this Section. 1
B. Protect work of others from damage including over - spraying.
3.4 APPLICATION
A. Install work of this Section in accordance with requirements of governmental
authorities having jurisdiction, and manufacturer's and referenced standard's
recommended installation procedures.
B. Apply uniformly at rate recommended by Manufacturer for warranty period
Y tY p
specified for substrate receiving water repellent.
1. Keep a wet edge at all times until complete surface 9 p to su ace plane has been
sprayed.
3.5
TESTING
A. After water repellent has dried, test surface with water sprayed from a hose;
retreat surfaces where water - absorption is detected.
B. Final surface shall be uniform without evidence of patches or spots.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION BUILDING INSULATION: 07210
SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Board insulation interior face of exterior concrete walls.
B. Blanket insulation and vapor retarder at exterior enclosure.
C. Acoustical insulation.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06100: Rough Carpentry, for exterior wall framing.
B. Section 09250: Gypsum Board, for acoustical sealant.
1 C. Section 09510: Acoustical Ceilings.
D. Section 09820: Acoustical Insulation
1.3 REFERENCES
1 A. ASTM C 578 Specification for Preformed, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal
Insulation.
B. ASTM C 665 Specification for Mineral -Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for
Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing.
C. ASTM C 764 Specification for Mineral Fiber Loose -Fill Thermal Insulation.
D. ASTM C 1015 Practice for Installation of Celluloisic and Mineral Fiber
Loose -Fill Thermal Insulation.
E. ASTM D 4397 Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction,
Industrial, and Agricultural Applications.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide with materials of this Section a continuity of thermal and vapor barrier
1 at building enclosure elements.
1
1
1
BUILDING INSULATION: 07210 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of insulation and separate vapor retarder 1
specified.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1
A. Use workers who are trained and experienced in necessary crafts and who
are familiar with requirements and methods needed for proper performance
of Work of this Section.
B. Surface Burning Characteristics of Insulation Blankets: When tested in
accordance with ASTM E 84.
1. Flame Spread: No greater than 25. 1
2. Smoke Developed: No greater than 50.
1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Install only when substrates to receive products of this Section are dry.
1.8 CERTIFICATION
A. Upon completion of Work of this Section, complete and post as certificate of
insulation compliance in accordance with requirements of governmental
agencies having jurisdiction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 1
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation:
1. Dow Chemical Company, or approved. 1
B. Glass -Fiber Insulation:
1. CertainTeed Corporation.
2. Owens - Corning Fiberglas Corporation.
3. Schuller International, Inc.
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION BUILDING INSULATION: 07210
SEP 00 PAGE 3
1 2.2 BOARD INSULATION
A. Polystyrene Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type IV, 1.60 lb/cu. ft. minimum
density, extruded cellular type, as follows:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Styrofoam Brand SM or SB.
b. Foamular 150 (15 psi) by Owens Corning
c. Amofoam, CM by Tenneco
2. Thickness: As called for on drawing.
3. Board Size: 24 x 96 inches
4. Compressive strength: Minimum 25 psi.
5. Water absorption: ASTM C 2842, 0.3 percent by volume maximum.
1 2.3 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Faced Blanket Insulation:
1. ASTM C665, Type III, Class B where covered. Class A, with a
1 membrane flame spread of 25 or less where exposed.
2. Type: Glass- fiber.
3. Vapor Retarder: Foil, with 1.0 maximum permeability.
4. Provide min. 1 inch wide flange along edges for attachment to framing
5. Thickness: As required to achieve insulation -only R value of 21.
B. Unfaced Blanket Insulation:
1. ASTM C665, Type I.
2. Type: Glass- fiber.
3. Thickness: As required to achieve insulation -only R value of 21.
2.4 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils thick, with maximum
performance rating of 0.13 perm.
1 B. Vapor- Retarder Tape: Pressure sensitive tape of type recommended by
manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
' A. Wire: Galvanized steel, hexagonal wire mesh, 18 gage minimum.
1
1
BUILDING INSULATION: 07210 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 4 SEP 00
B. Fasteners and Adhesives: As recommended by insulation manufacturer. 1
PART 3 EXECUTION 1
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be
performed.
1. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of
Work.
2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove, or protect against, projections in construction framing which may
damage or prevent proper installation of insulating materials. 1
B. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate
provision in Work of this Section.
C. Protect work of others from damage.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install Work of this Section in accordance with: 1
1. Construction documents
2. Manufacturer's and referenced standard's recommended installation
procedures.
B. Install insulation in thickness indicated to envelope entire building enclosure.
C. Install vapor retarder at perimeter of entire enclosure to permit no passage of
air; fit tightly around penetrations.
1. Install insulation with vapor retarding facing at interior side of 1
assembly, or with unfaced insulation, install separate sheet vapor
retarder.
2. Seal with tape at joints and ruptures to form a continuous barrier. 1
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION BUILDING INSULATION: 07210
SEP 00 PAGE 5
D. Secure insulation to metal framing using adhesives or wire mesh to prevent
sagging.
E. Use blanket widths and lengths that completely fill cavities formed by framing
members.
1. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation.
9 Y
2. Place insulation between pipes in wall and exterior side of assembly.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage, both from
weather exposure or construction operations.
B. Repair damaged insulation and vapor retarders.
C. Remove from site refuse created by this work, and dispose of in a legal
manner.
1 END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION WOOD SIDING: 07468
SEP 00 PAGE 1
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Horizontal shiplap wood siding.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06100: Rough Carpentry
B. Section 06200: Finish Carpentry
C. Section 07900: Joint Sealers
D. Section 09900: Painting
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use skilled workers who are trained and experienced in necessary crafts and
familiar with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of
Work of this Section.
1.4 REFERENCED QUALITY STANDARDS
A. Unless otherwise modified herein, Material Quality Grades shall be as
defined by following Standards.
1. Hardwood Plywood and Softwood Lumber:
a. Quality Standards of American Woodwork Institute (AWI).
2. Softwood Plywood:
a. Grading Rules of American Plywood Association (APA).
B. Standards can be obtained from Associations.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver products to job site until Project is conditioned and prepared to
handle and store products without damage or discoloration.
1
1
WOOD SIDING: 07468 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE2 SEP00
B. Store off ground, under cover and protected from damage. 1
1.7 TEMPERATURE 1
A. Maintain 50 degrees F minimum in interior spaces where materials are
located.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 EXTERIOR WALL SIDING AND SOFFIT PANELING
A. Siding and Soffits: i
1. Material: Lumber.
2. Species: Western Red Cedar.
3. AWI Grade: 1
4. Face Pattern: Horizontal shiplap. 1
5. Face Texture: Resawn with fine band saw, match existing.
6. Nominal Size: 1 x 6 inches, match existing
7. Maximum Moisture Content at Time of Installation: 16 percent. 1
2.2 NAILS
A. Manufacturing standard: Fed. Spec. FF- N -105B.
B. Material: Steel.
C. Finish: i
1. Hot -dip galvanized .
D. Type: Casing with Blunt or Medium - diamond Points.
E. Size and Quantity: As required to secure Members in position.
2.3 PREFINISHING
A. Exterior Wall Siding and Soffit Paneling:
1. Machine -apply 1 coat of Stain as specified in Section 09900. Machines i
must be equipped with Brushes and Rollers to force Stain into Wood.
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION WOOD SIDING: 07468
SEP 00 PAGE 3
2. Apply to exposed surfaces and concealed back and edge surfaces of
each member.
3. Air -dry Stain without artificial heat.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Verify that Structure and Surfaces to receive Siding and Paneling are straight,
plumb, true, solid, rigid, dry, and otherwise properly prepared.
B. Prior to starting work, notify General Contractor about defects requiring
correction.
1 C. Do not start work until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by work of this section.
1 3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install straight, plumb, level, parallel, true, and secure as appropriate.
B. Fit neatly at joints against trim.
C. Accurately scribe to adjacent surface irregularities.
1 D. Locate joints over solid bearing.
E. Remove sharp external corners.
_ F. Fit accurately and neatly around any projections through siding or paneling.
1 3.4 PAINTING & FINISHING
A. Touch -up, or completely refinish if determined necessary by Architect,
machine - stained and dip- stained surfaces which have become damaged,
soiled, or discolored.
1
1
WOOD SIDING: 07468 TOC BUILDING ADDITION 1
PAGE 4 SEP 00
3.5 PRODUCT CLEANING AND REPAIRING 1
A. Including work of other trades, clean, repair and touch -up, or replace when
directed, products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by work
of this section.
B. Leave surfaces ready for finishing as specified in Section 09900.
C. Remove debris from project site. 1
END OF SECTION 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION CAP -SHEET BITUMINOUS ROOFING: 07521
SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Cap sheet built -up bituminous roofing.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06100: Rough Carpentry for decking, blocking and cants.
B. Section 07600: Flashing and Sheet Metal.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Underwriter's Laboratories tested and listed for a Class B rating when
installed on combustible decks for roof slopes and application shown.
B. NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual.
C. Factory Mutual:
1. 1 -90 membrane roofing wind design.
2. 1 -28S wind uplift pressure on roofs.
3. 1 -29 above deck roof components.
4. 4470 Class 1 roof covers.
D. ASHRA (American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning
Engineers, Inc.) for insulation K- values in calculating insulation thicknesses;
insulation specified by R- value.
E. RIC -TIMA Bulletin #281 -2 for insulation of aged R- values.
F. Insulation Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide insulation materials
identical to those with fire performance characteristics, as listed for each
material or assembly of which insulation is a part, have been determined by
testing, per methods indicated below, or UL or other testing and inspecting
1 agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Surface Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.
2. Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.
3. Combustibility Characteristics: ASTM E 136.
1
1
CAP -SHEET BITUMINOUS ROOFING: 07521 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
G. ASTM C 208 Specification for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board. 1
H. ASTM C 728 Specification for Perline Thermal Insulation Board. 1
I. ASTM D 41 Specification for Asphalt Primer used in Roofing, Damproofing,
and Waterproofing. 1
J. ASTM D 312 Specification for Asphalt used in Roofing.
K. ASTM D 1622 Test Method for Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics.
L. ASTM D 2178 Specification for Asphalt Glass Felt Used in Roofing and
Waterproofing.
M. ASTM D 2822 Specification for Asphalt Roof cement.
N. ASTM D 3617 Practice for Sampling and Analysis of New Built -Up Roof 1
Membranes.
O. ASTM D 3909 Specification for Asphalt Roll Roofing (Glass Felt) Surfaced 1
with Mineral Granules.
P. ASTM D 4586 Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos Free. 1
1.4 SUBMITTALS I
A. Shop Drawings: Details referenced to a roof plan per manufacture
recommendations.
B. Manufacturer's published specifications for proposed materials and systems.
C. Evidence of U.L. approvals. 11
D. Copy of Warranty. 1
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Products be furnished by or approved by membrane Manufacturer for
entire roof assembly.
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION CAP -SHEET BITUMINOUS ROOFING: 07521
SEP 00 PAGE 3
2. Applicator be approved by and certified in writing by membrane
Manufacturer prior to date of these Contract Documents.
3. Applicator have been in continuous business under same name for
past three years.
4. Applicator have completed at least three successful installations of
specified materials and systems on projects of similar size and scope.
5. Provide evidence in writing if requested by Owner.
B. Field Quality Control:
1. Technical representative of membrane manufacturer periodically
observe Work in progress.
2. Representative, as a minimum, be present to observe deck
preparation, general installation procedures and final completion.
3. Work not proceed until such observations have been made and
conditions have been approved in writing to Architect.
4. Installer provide personnel trained in application of materials and
systems a and maintain supervision as specified elsewhere.
5. Notify Owner's Representative at least 24 hours prior to any roofing
1 Work.
1.6 PRE - ROOFING CONFERENCE
A. Hold roofing pre - construction conference at project site minimum one week
prior to beginning roofing.
B. Attendance is mandatory for:
1 1. Roofing Subcontractor
2. Roofing foreman
3. Contractor's superintendent
4. Roofing manufacturer's representative
5. Architect
1 6. Mechanical Subcontractor
7. Sheet Metal Subcontractor responsible for items penetrating roof.
1 C. Agenda:
1. Review in detail Architect's specifications, roof plans and roof and
flashing details.
2. Review manufacturer's Specification and Identify deviations or
differences from Architect's Specifications and resolve.
1
1
CAP -SHEET BITUMINOUS ROOFING: 07521 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 4 SEP 00
3. Review requirements and resolve conflicts between FM or UL 1
specifications and Architect's /manufacturer's Specifications.
4. Review drawings for roof slope, deck type, drainage, membrane 1
attachment, expansion joints, flashing and details, etc., and resolve
any conflicts between what is considered good roofing practice and
Specifications.
5. Review proposed roofing system and recommended work practices
for it's installation.
6. Designate areas on site be available for use as stagging or storage 1
areas.
7. Review procedures to be followed to provide proper protection of roof
system during and after installation of roof membrane.
1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Roof to be UL Class B.
B. Wind resistance to meet Factory Mutual (FM): 1
1. Class 1 -90. 1
2. Comply with FM Document 4470.
3. FM 1 -28S
4. FM 1 -29 1
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery:
1. Deliver insulation to job site in it's manufacturer's undamaged original 1
container, with labels intact and legible with manufacturer's name,
product name and permanent identifying numbers.
2. Maintain packaging, seals and labels intact until time of use.
B. Tankers and Kettles: 1
1. Equipped with accurate, fully readable thermometers.
2. Asphalt not be heated to or above it's Flash Point (FP).
1
3. Avoid heating at or above Finished Blowing Temperature (FBT).
4. Application temperatures must not be more than 25 degrees F (14
degrees C) below Equiviscous Temperature (EVT) nor more than 25
degrees F (14 degrees C) above EVT.
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION CAP -SHEET BITUMINOUS ROOFING: 07521
SEP 00 PAGE 5
C. Storage of Materials:
A 1. Stand roll goods on end, and store on a clean floor to keep ends of
rolls free from foreign matter.
2. Store roofing materials, including insulation, in a dry place, on raised
platforms, and cover with waterproof tarpaulins, inside or in closed
vans, protected from sun and weather.
3. Store cartons and drums of asphalt on raised level platforms, and
protect them from weather with waterproof tarpaulins.
4. Store solvents, emulsions, and coatings in a cool, dry area.
5. Keep lids tightly sealed on emulsions, cut back adhesives, and
flashing cements.
6. Do not overload roof by concentrating stored materials in one location.
1 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Roofing materials not be applied unless proper asphalt application
temperatures (EVT) can be maintained nor materials be applied when water
in any form (i.e., rain, dew, ice, frost, snow, etc.) is present on deck.
' B. Do not start roofing if rain is imminent, or ambient temperature is below 45
degrees F.
1.10 PROTECTION
A. If rain occurs during roof membrane application, cease operations and protect
deck, insulation, penetrations and membrane from water damage and
intrusion.
B. Remove and replace material that has been subject to moisture.
C. Protect opened roofs and flashings and prevent entrance of moisture of rain
water into structure until materials have been applied and roof is in a
1 watertight condition.
D. Do not open up more roof surface than can be covered and protected in
1 event of sudden rainfall.
E. Have necessary waterproof sheeting available in case of emergency.
1
1
1
CAP -SHEET BITUMINOUS ROOFING: 07521 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 6 SEP 00
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Contractor Warranty: 1
1. Three years from date of Final Acceptance.
2. Warrant roofing, roof insulation and flashing against defects of
workmanship.
3. Maintain reroofed areas in watertight condition during this period.
B. Manufacturer's Warranty:
1. Ten year, no dollar limit warranty signed by a corporate officer.
2. Warranty to include entire assembly, including insulation.
3. Warranty to be written to allow for minor roofing repairs by Owner and
will contain no disclaimer for ponded water conditions.
4. Warranty to be transferable.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER AND TYPE 1
A. Roofing systems:
1. Malarky Roofing Roofin M4- CU- BIA -H.
2. Johns Manville 4GIC -VI, with ASTM D2178 Type VI felts.
3. US Intec/ Permaglas M- B4UP -C, or approved.
B. Base flashing: 1
1. Malarky Roofing 917 SBS Polyglass.
2. JM SBS Dynaflex
3. U.S. Intec /Permaglas SBS Brai Flex 170 or approved.
C. Roof insulation (base layer):
1. As recommended by Roof Membrane Manufacturer.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Roof insulation (base layer): 1
1. Material: Polyisocyanurate foam. 1
1
1
I TOC BUILDING ADDITION CAP -SHEET BITUMINOUS ROOFING: 07521
SEP 00 PAGE 7
1 2. Manufacturing standard: Federal Specification HH -I- 1972/2 with max.
flame spread of 25.
I 3. Nominal density per ASTM D 1622: 2 Ibs per cu. ft.
4. Min. aged, insulation -only thermal resistance value: R =16.5.
1 B. Roof insulation protection board (top layer):
I 1. Material: Asphalt- impregnated, fungi- resistant, cellulose fiber per
ASTM C 208, Type II.
2. Optional material: Expanded perlite per Federal Specification HH -I-
I 529.
3. Thickness: '/2 inch minimum.
1 C. Crickets:
1. Material: Perlite; comply with ASTM C 728.
J 2. Size: 2 feet x 4 feet, with taper of 1 /2 inch per foot.
3. Slope: As indicated on Drawings.
I D. Cants /Edge Strips:
1. Wood fiber: To be pressure treated per AWPB LP -2. Meet ASTM C
1 208.
2. Perlite: Comply with ASTM C 728.
I 3. Face size: 3 5/8 face (4 by 4 inches nominal).
E. Membrane Roofing:
1 1. General: Roof areas be covered, shingle fashion, with 3 -ply
progressive composition built -up roofing, consisting of asphalt and
I fiberglass felts in alternate layers, covered with mineral surfaced cap
sheet.
2. Ply Felts: Asphalt coated fiberglass felt complying with ASTM D 2178
I Type VI.
3. Interply and Flood Coat Bitumen Asphalt, Type 111, ASTM D 312.
4. Asphalt Primer: Meet ASTM D 41.
1 5. Roofing Cement. Meet ASTM D 2822, Asphaltic.
6. Mineral Cap Sheet: Meet ASTM D 3909.
a. Granule color: White
I
1
1
1
CAP -SHEET BITUMINOUS ROOFING: 07521 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 8 SEP 00
F. Base Flashing:
1. Material: SBS with fiberglass /polyester reinforcing and ceramic granule 1
surface.
2. Bituminous Cement: Meet ASTM D 4586.
G. Roof 0o Walk (Traffic) Pads:
1. Material: Monolithic, inorganic preformed pads, consisting of modified 1
asphalt, fibers, and fillers with ceramic gravel surface both sides.
2. Thickness: 3/8 inch.
H. Fasteners for Insulation Units and Separation Board:
1. Plastic disc type with corrosion resistant fluorocarbon coated screws of
sufficient length to provide one inch minimum penetration.
2. Fasteners be non - backout type and have heads that lock into discs. 1
2.3 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide miscellaneous materials proper
required for a complete and ro
q P P P
installation.
1
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION 1
A. Examine areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be
performed.
1. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of 1
Work.
2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
B. Verification of Conditions:
1. Layout: Verify layout of Work before beginning installation. ,
2. Existing Conditions: Examine substrate before beginning installation.
Examine surfaces for inadequate anchorage, drainage, foreign
material, moisture and unevenness which would prevent execution
and quality for application of built -up roofing system as specified.
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION CAP -SHEET BITUMINOUS ROOFING: 07521
SEP 00 PAGE 9
1 3. Verify that work of other trades which penetrates roof deck has been
completed.
4. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in
writing with copy to Architect.
3.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work of this Section with work of other trades and Sections to
assure proper and adequate provision in work of others for interface with
work or this Section.
1 1. Verify placement of drain pan linings, etc., coordinate roof
penetrations, equipment bases and other conditions as required.
1 2. Roof drains and or scuppers that are not proper level to drain finished
roof be reset by contractors responsible for installation before
proceeding.
1 3. Scupper to be maximum two inches above level of inlet of drain.
3.3 PROTECTION OF PROPERTY
A. Protect finished surfaces of building from damage by installation of roofing
system.
Protect completed roofing and flashings from damage by subsequent
P 9 9 9 Y uent q
roofing installation and construction traffic.
B. Protective Coverings:
1 1. Install protective coverings at paving and building walls adjacent to
hoist and kettles prior to starting Work.
2. Lap protective coverings at least 6 inches, secure against wind, and
vent to prevent collection of moisture on covered surfaces.
3. Keep protective coverings in place for duration of roofing work.
C. Special Protection:
1 1. Provide approved special protection or avoid heavy traffic on
completed work when ambient temperature is above 80 degrees F.
1
1
1
1
CAP -SHEET BITUMINOUS ROOFING: 07521 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 10 SEP 00
D. Drippage of Bitumen: 1
1. Seal joints in and at edges of deck as necessary to prevent drippage 1
of bitumen into building or down exterior walls.
E. Damaged Work and Materials: 1
1. Restore work and materials damaged during handling of bitumen and
installation of materials to original condition or replace with new 111
materials.
3.4 INSTALLATION 1
A. Install Work of this Section in accordance with procedures to, and achieve
results as required by:
1. Reviewed Shop Drawings
2. Roofing materials manufacturer's, installation instructions
3. Regulations of governmental agencies having jurisdiction
4. Referenced standards 1
5. Specifications
6. As agreed to in pre - roofing meeting.
7. Meet UL Class B.
B. Surface Preparation: Dry and broom clean before beginning Work.
C. Insulation:
1. Install nailing edge strips. 1
2. Neatly cut and fit insulation at roof edges and penetrations through
roofing.
3. For each layer, set long sides with continuous joints, and stagger
adjacent short side joints. Max. opening at joints: 1/8 inch.
4. Stagger joint locations between base layer and top (protection board) 1
layer. Set top layer in hot bitumen uniformly applied at rate of 30 lbs.
min. per 100 sq. ft.
5. Taper top layer at roof drains. 1
D. Install cant strips at vertical intersections with roof deck.
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION CAP -SHEET BITUMINOUS ROOFING: 07521
SEP 00 PAGE 11
1 E. Membrane Roofing:
1. Do not undertake application of more roof insulation and built -up
roofing each day than can be completed within same day. At end of
each day's work, protect installed roofing and insulation by closing off
r edge of system with water cut -off, consisting of 2 plies of felts and
mopping of steep asphalt extending onto deck and top edge of
membrane at least 4 and 6 inches.
2. Remove water cut -off completely and clean prior to resuming roofing
application.
3. Bitumen Temperature
a. Do not apply insulation and roofing unless correct asphalt
application temperatures can be maintained. Install asphalt
with Equiviscous Temperature (EVT) at point of application.
Reduce tanker temperatures to 325 degrees F overnight or
during periods when work is not possible. Provide equipment
used for heating asphalt with accurate and clearly visible
rmometer.
b. Never heat asphalt to or above Flash Point (FP).
1 c. Do not heat asphalt above Finished Blowing Temperature (FBT)
for longer than 4 hours.
d. Apply asphalt at a temperature range within 25 degrees above,
or below, Equiviscous Temperature (EVT).
4. Starting at low edge, apply on 12 inches wide, then over that one 24
inches wide, then over both a full width piece in steep asphalt at a rate
of 23 Ibs per square. Then solid mop 1 ply mineral cap sheet.
5. Apply following felts full width, overlapping preceding felt by 24 -2/3
I
6. inches, so that at least 3 plies of felt cover base felt.
Install each felt so that it be firmly and uniformly set, without voids,
into hot asphalt.
7. Broom plies of roofing thoroughly into place in hot bitumen full width of
felt. Use clean brooms.
a. Squeegees not permitted.
1 b. Mechanical felt layer may be used.
F. Select and operate materials handling equipment so as not to damage
1 existing construction or applied roofing materials.
' 1. Only soft rubber and inflatable tires permissible.
2. Foot traffic on recently applied roofing not allowed. •
1
1
CAP -SHEET BITUMINOUS ROOFING: 07521 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 12 SEP 00
G. Cut out and repair fishmouths, wrinkles, tears, buckles or other damage in
any ply or felt by installation of additional layer of felt set into hot bitumen. 1
1. Mop full width under each felt layer.
2. Dry laps not permitted.
H. Extend built -up roofing 2 inches above cant strips and float dry to wall.
I. Install SBS Modified Bitumen base flashing at intersections formed by
vertical surfaces, and wherever curbed roof openings, wall, parapets, or other
structure joint or penetrate roof.
1. Install in accordance with roofing manufacturer's specifications. '
J. Roof Walk Pads: Install in locations indicated with a 6 inch gap between
pads, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1
1. Provide starting from roof access hatch or door and reaching to roof
mounted equipment requiring periodic servicing of monitoring, '
including around perimeter of such equipment, or shown on Drawings.
K. Roof drains and lead pans: Install in locations indicated on plans in 1
accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
L. Apply granules at laps to cover and protect exposed asphalt. ,
M. Roofers to carry a granule bag during application of top ply sheet and
flashing.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Manufacturer's representative make and
document periodic inspections including prior to start of installation, during 1
installation, and upon completion of installation to ascertain that entire
systems has been installed according to manufacturer's specifications and
approved details. ,
B. Two of above site visits: By materials manufacturer's field engineer. 1
3.6 CLEANING
A. Upon completion, clean bitumen and asphalt out of roof drains and scuppers
and from exposed sheet metal and masonry surfaces, gutters, etc.
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION CAP -SHEET BITUMINOUS ROOFING: 07521
SEP 00 PAGE 13
3.7 TEST CUTS
A. Where directed and prior to application of cap, and in accordance with ASTM
D 3617, cut out 3x48 inch Samples perpendicular to Roofing direction.
B. Samples Required: 1 per each 2000 sq. ft. of Roofing at each Roof Deck.
C. Submit Samples to Architect for analysis.
D. Should Sample fail to conform to specified requirements, apply additional
felts and bitumen, or when directed replace entire assembly, at no additional
cost to Owner.
E. Repair roofing where samples were taken by filling in cut -out area and then
covering area with "feathered in" patch consisting of assembly matching
original Specifications.
3.8 WARRANTY REINSPECTION
A. Before expiration of warranty, reinspect work and make necessary repairs at
no additional cost to Owner.
1 3.9 CLEANING, ADJUSTMENT AND PROTECTION
A. Clean, without damaging, exposed surfaces affected by work of this Section
and repair as necessary; remove from site refuse created by this work, and
dispose of in a legal manner.
1
1 END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION SHEET METAL ROOFING: 07610
AUG 00 PAGE 1
1 PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Preformed, standing seam metal roof.
1
B. Roof insulation.
1 C. Associated integral flashings.
1 D. Underlayment.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06100: Rough Carpentry
B. Section 07210: Building Insulation
1.3 REFERENCES
1 A. ASTM A 792 Specification -
ication for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum -Zinc Alloy-
Y
Coated by the Hot -Dip Process.
B. ASTM D 226 Specification for Asphalt- Saturated Organic Felt Used in
Roofing and Waterproofing.
C. ASTM D 1622 Test Method for Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular
1 Plastics.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data on metal types, finishes, and characteristics,
including installation instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details,
fastening methods, flashings, terminations, and installation details.
C. Samples: Submit two samples in size illustrating metal roofing mounted on
plywood backing illustrating typical standing seam, material, and finish.
1
1
1
SHEET METAL ROOFING: 07610 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 AUG 00
1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Requirements: Provide an attachment schedule signed by a 1
professional engineer licensed in the State of Oregon and supporting
calculations for UL Class 80 wind uplift rating.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE '
A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA standard details and '
requirements.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS 1
A. Fabricator and Installer: Company specializing in sheet metal roof
installations with minimum five years documented experience and approved
by manufacturer in writing.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack preformed and prefinished material to prevent twisting, bending, or '
abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage.
B. Prevent contact with materials which may cause discoloration or staining. 1
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty:
1. Provide twenty year warranty. 1
2. Include coverage for:
a. Structural failure
b. Degradation of metal finish
c. Perforation
d. Rupture 1
e. Leak due to corrosion
3. Warranty to cover entire system, including:
a. Framing '
b. Flashings
c. Counterflashings
d. Gutters
e. Accessories.
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION SHEET METAL ROOFING: 07610
AUG 00 PAGE 3
1
B. Contractor's Warranty: Provide two year warranty. Include coverage for
1 water tightness and integrity of seals.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
' 2.1 FABRICATIONS
' A. 18 inch wide roof panel..
B. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01630.
2.2 SHEET MATERIALS
A. Sheet Steel: ASTM A 792, Grade 40; 24 gage core steel; Zincalume
protective coating, 0.2 mil thick corrosion - resistant primer, and 0.8 mil thick
finish coat of PVDF by Kynar or approved.
1. Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturers standard colors.
2.3 INSULATION
A. Insulation Board: HH -1- 1972/2, Polyisocyanurate rigid foam 4 inch thickness,
1 with maximum flame spread of 25, and nominal density of 2 pounds per cubic
feet per ASTM D 1622.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
' A. Fasteners: Stainless steel with soft neoprene washers.
B. Underlay: Self- adhering rubberize asphalt, 40 mil.
1. W.R. Grace, ice and water shield or approved.
C. Sealant: One -part polyurethane type, low modulus, Type II, Class A, as
manufactured by:
1. Tremco
2. Sonneborn
3. Mameco
D. Bedding Compound: Butyl type, 1 x 1/8 inch, as manufactured by Tremco,
Chemco, or approved.
1
1
1
SHEET METAL ROOFING: 07610 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 4 AUG 00
E. Concealed Clips: 18 gage Zincalume steel, 40 ksi yield strength, 3 -1/2 inch
P 9 9 � Y
long triple fastener type.
F. Isolated insulation: 9
Rigid, unfaced glass fiber insulation 2.25 PCF.
9
G. Anchors: Per manufacture's recommendations and as required to meet or 1
exceed 90 mph Wind Exposure C rating.
2.5 SHOP FABRICATION 1
A. Provide manufacture's roof panels with 1 -3/4 inch high, standing seam, and
nominal panel width of 18 inches.
B. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion
or defects.
C. Form panels in full length of sloped roof length, where possible. 1
D. Fabricate each metal flashing section in 10 foot runs minimum.
1. Tolerance 1/4 in. in 40 ft.
PART 3 EXECUTION 1
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Inspect roof deck to verify deck is dry, free of snow or ice, clean and smooth,
free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped.
1
B. Verify field dimensions are as indicated in shop drawings.
C. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are
solidly set, reglets are in place, and nailing strips located.
D. Verify roofing terminations and base P
flashings are in place, sealed, and
secure.
1
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Apply underlay in single layer laid perpendicular to slope; weather lap edges es 9 1
4 inches and nail in place. Minimize nail uali
4 tY .
1
1
I TOC BUILDING ADDITION SHEET METAL ROOFING: 07610
AUG 00 PAGE 5
1 B. Install insulation and metal roofing in accordance with reviewed shop
drawings.
i C. Space and anchor clips in accordance with manufacture's recommendations.
r A. Use bedding compound for joints between metal and bitumen or metal and
felts.
II B. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners:
I 1. Connect units with specified joints and sealants.
2. Fasten to surfaces at 6 inches o.c. minimum, with approved fasteners.
I G. Insulate dissimilar metal and incompatible surfaces with No. 30 felt, or as
approved.
1 H. Seal metal joints watertight.
3.3 STANDING ROOFING
A. Lay sheets with Ion dimension perpendicular to eaves. Apply
Y 9 P ans pans
at eaves.
1
B. Fully engage interlocking seams.
1 C. Lap joints minimum 6 inches in direction of drainage.
I 3.4 CLEANING AND REPAIRING
A. Touch -up damaged paint.
I B. Sweep clean panels, flashing and gutters on daily basis during installation
process, to prevent damage from rusting of debris.
I C. Remove debris from project site and dispose of in a legal manner.
1
END OF SECTION
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM: 07620
SEP 00 PAGE 1
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Flashing and sheet metal as required to prevent penetration of water through
1 exterior shell of building.
' 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 07468: Wood Siding
1 B. Section 07521: Cap Sheet Bituminous Roofing.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A 167 Specification for Stainless and Heat - Resisting
1 Chromium - Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
B. ASTM A 755 Specification for Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-
1 Dip Process and Prepainted by the Coil- Coating Process
for Exterior Exposed Building Products.
1 C. ASTM B 32 Specification for Solder Metal.
D. ASTM B 749 Specification for Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet, and
Plate Products.
E. ASTM D 4586 Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos Free.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind Toads,
structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather
1 without failing.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
1
A. Product Data: For each flashing material and fabricated product, submit the
following:
1. Manufacturer's material and finish data.
2. Installation instructions, and general recommendations.
1
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM: 07620 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
B. Shop Drawings of each item showing layout, profiles, methods of joining, and
anchorage details.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed r
work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project
and with a record of successful in- service performance.
B. Fabrication Standard: Comply with applicable recommendations of current
edition of "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" published by Sheet Metal and
Air - Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA).
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS '
A. Coordinate Work of this Section with interfacing and adjoining Work for
proper sequencing of the Work. '
B. Field Measurements: Field verify dimensions prior to fabrication.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Warrant Work of this Section to be weatherproof for 2 years following date of 1
Substantial Completion.
1. Warranty to cover repair of water Teaks and resulting damage to 1
building materials as may occur under normal usage within warranty
period at no additional cost to Owner.
2. Include in warranty replacement of damaged materials that cannot be
adequately repaired, as determined by the Architect.
PART2 PRODUCTS 1
2.1 METALS '
A. Coil- Coated Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 755, G 90, commercial quality
zinc - coated steel sheet, coil coated with high - performance fluoropolymer
coating; not less than 24 gage, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper- bearing lead sheet. 1
1
1
1 TOC BUILDING ADDITION SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM: 07620
SEP 00 PAGE 3
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES
' A. Reglets: Type and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of
separate regiet and counterflashing pieces and compatible with flashing
indicated.
' 1. Manufacturer: Fry Re let Corporation, or approved.
rY 9 P � PP
1 B. Burning Rod for Lead: Same composition as lead sheet.
' C. Fasteners: Noncorrosive metal.
1. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened.
2. Washers: Neoprene cadmium plated.
3. Rivets: Stainless steel, 1/8 inch minimum diameter.
4. Screws: Self- tapping, cadmium plated, pan head No. 7 by 1 inch min.
' D. Asphalt Mastic: SSPC -Paint 12, solvent -type asphalt mastic, nominally free
of sulfur and containing no asbestos fibers, compounded for 15 -mil dry film
' thickness per coat.
E. Elastomeric Sealant: Silcione type by Dow Corning, GE, or approved.
F. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal s cli straps, anchoring devices, n
p, s p, g e ces, a d
similar accessory units as required for installation of Work, matching or
compatible with material being installed; noncorrosive; size and thickness
required for performance.
i G. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I, asbestos free, asphalt based.
2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with details shown and as required to fit substrates and that result in
' waterproof and weather - resistant performance when installed.
1. Field verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before
fabricating sheet metal.
' B. Form exposed sheet metal Work in longest lengths practicable, without
P 9 9 P ,
excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks, and true to line and levels
indicated.
1. Hem exposed edges, folded back 1/2 inch.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM: 07620 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 4 SEP 00
2. Angle bottom edges of vertical surfaces to form drip. 1
C. Seams: '
1. Standing Seams: 3/4 inch 4 -ply loose- locked.
2. Lap Seams: 3 inch finish width.
3. Solder -Lap Seams: 1 inch finish width; sweat full with solder.
4. S -Lock Seams: Form 1 -1/4 inch wide 'S' shaped seam on one edge of
flashing sheet for concealed fastening.
5. Cover Plate Seams: Not allowed, unless specifically approved by
Architect for application. ,
D. Form, fabricate and install sheet metal to provide for expansion and
contraction in the finished Work. ,
1. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed
within 24 inches of corner or intersection. '
E. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to
accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. ,
F. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible.
1. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of sheet metal exposed to
public view. ,
G. Cleats and Other Attachment Devices: Fabricate of same material and
thickness as sheet metal component being anchored. 1
2.4 SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. General: Fabricate sheet metal items in thickness or weight needed to
comply with performance requirements, but not less than the following for
each application and metal. '
B. Gutters with Girth up to 15 Inches: Coil- Coated Galvanized Steel: 24 gage
(0.0239 inch thick). '
C. Downspouts: Coil- Coated Galvanized Steel: 24 gage (0.0239 inch thick).
D. Conductor Heads: Coil- Coated Galvanized Steel: 22 gage (0.0299 inch thick).
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM: 07620
SEP 00 PAGE 5
1 E. Splash Pans: Stainless Steel: 26 gage (0.0187 inch thick).
F. Roof -Drain Flashing: Lead: 4.0 lb/sq. ft., hard tempered.
G. Scuppers: Coil- Coated Galvanized Steel: 22 gage (0.0299 inch thick).
r Flange: L
1. Scuppe n age. ead soldered to interior face of scupper.
H. Built -in Gutters: Stainless Steel: 26 gage (0.0187 inch thick).
' I. Exposed Trim, Gravel Stops, and Fascia: Coil- Coated Galvanized Steel: 24
gage (0.0239 inch thick).
1 J. Copings: Coil- Coated Galvanized Steel: 22 gage (0.0299 inch thick).
K. Base Flashing: Coil- Coated Galvanized Steel: 24 gage (0.0239 inch thick).
L. Counterflashing: Coil- Coated Galvanized Steel: 24 gage (0.0239 inch thick).
1 M. Valley Flashing: Stainless Steel: 26 gage (0.0187 inch thick).
N. Drip Edges: Coil- Coated Galvanized Steel: 24 gage (0.0239 inch thick).
O. Eave Flashing: Coil- Coated Galvanized Steel: 24 gage (0.0239 inch thick).
1 P. Equipment Support Flashing: Coil- Coated Galvanized Steel: 22 gage (0.0299
inch thick).
1 Q. Roof - Penetration Flashing: Lead: 4.0 lb/sq. ft., hard tempered.
■ R. Roof Expansion -Joint Cover: Coil- Coated Galvanized Steel: 22 gage (0.0299
inch thick).
1 S. Roof -to -Wall Expansion -Joint Cover: Coil- Coated Galvanized Steel: 20 gage
(0.0336 inch thick).
1 2.5 FINISH
A. Coil- Coated Galvanized Steel Sheet Finish:
1. Fluoropolymer 2 -Coat Coating System complying with AAMA 605.2.
1
1
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM: 07620 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 6 SEP 00
2. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full 1
range of choices for color and gloss.
3. Resin Manufacturers: 1
a. Ausimont USA, Inc. (Hylar 5000).
b. Elf Atochem North America, Inc. (Kynar 500).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION 1
A. Examine substrates and conditions under which Work of this Section will be
installed.
1. Verify that substrates are ready to receive Work of this Section.
2. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install Work of this Section in accordance with: 1
1. Construction documents
2. Reviewed Shop Drawings
3. Manufacturer's installation instructions
4. SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual," unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Install Work securely in place by methods indicated.
1. Provide for thermal expansion.
2. Conceal fasteners where possible.
3. Install without excessive oil canning.
4. Install with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
5. Set units true to lines and levels indicated. 1
6. Install Work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently
watertight and weatherproof.
C. Install sheet metal to rovide for thermal and building expansion.
P 9 P
1. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed 1
within 24 inches of corner or intersection.
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM: 07620
SEP00 PAGE7
D. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign
matter. Pretin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1 -1/2 inches,
except where pretinned surface would show in finished Work.
1. Do not solder Coil- coated galvanized steel sheet.
1 2. Pretinning is not required for Lead.
3. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and
flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and
spatter from exposed surfaces.
' E. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to
accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards.
1 1. Fill joint with sealant, minimum 1/4 inch diameter bead, and form metal
to completely conceal sealant.
2. Use joint adhesive for nonmoving joints specified not to be soldered.
' F. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat -lock seams. Tin
edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.
G. Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating
' concealed surfaces of contact with asphalt mastic.
' 1. Apply minimum 7 -1/2 mil dry film thickness to each contacting face.
H. Install reglets to receive counterflashing where shown or indicated.
I. Counterflashings:
' 1. Lap -seam vertical joints a minimum of 2 inches and bed with sealant.
2. Miter, lap -seam, and close corner joints with solder.
3. Overlap base flashing 4 inches minimum.
4. Install bottom edge spring -tight against base flashing.
5. Provide where roof intersects vertical surfaces, and where shown.
J. Cleats:
1. Space cleats 2 feet on center, unless continuous cleats or other
spacings are indicated.
2. Secure spaced cleats to substrates with 2 fasteners to prevent cleat
rotation.
1
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM: 07620 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 8 SEP 00
3. Secure continuous cleats to substrate with fasteners spaced at 12
inches on center maximum.
4. Cover fastener heads with cleat tabs folded back over fastener head.
1
K. Copings:
1. Fabricate with standing seams spaced approximately 10 feet apart. 1
2. Miter corners.
3. Lock exterior edges over continuous cleats.
4. Lock interior edges over spaced cleats.
5. Slope coping top toward roof.
L. Scuppers: 1
1. Lap field joints at conductor heads, and solder.
2. Install sealant around exposed flanges on roof side.
M. Equipment Support Flashing:
1. Coordinate equipment support flashing installation with roofing and
equipment installation.
2. Weld or seal flashing to equipment support member.
1
N. Roof - Penetration Flashing:
1. Turn lead flashing down inside vent piping, being careful not to block
vent piping with flashing.
2. Seal and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof, other than lead
flashing on vent piping.
3. Counterflash with preformed cover as detailed.
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION ,
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause
corrosion of metal or deterioration of finishes.
1. Neutralize excess flux as work progresses with 5 percent to 10 percent
washing soda solution, and thoroughly rinse.
1
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure sheet metal
flashing and trim Work during construction is without damage at the time of
1
Substantial Completion.
1
END OF SECTION
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION FIRESTOPPING: 07840
SEP 00 PAGE 1
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Through - penetration fire stops as defined by Uniform Building Code and UL
1 at fire- resistant rated partitions, smoke partitions, floors, vertical shaft and
chase enclosures, curtain walls and partitions above ceilings.
1 1. Penetrations such as for pipe, duct and conduit that require sealing in
accordance with NFPA 70, NFPA 101 and UBC.
' 2. Construction gaps such as occur between edges of floor slabs and
exterior wall construction, and between tops of partitions and structure
or fire -rated ceiling above.
3. Smoke - stopping at smoke partitions.
4. Make a complete and proper installation as necessary to maintain
required fire rating, insuring a barrier against spread of flame, smoke
1 and gases.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
' A. Section 07900: Joint Sealers.
B. Section 09250: Gypsum Board
C. Division 15: Mechanical
D. Division 16: Electrical
1 1.3 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 70: National Electrical Code
B. NFPA 101: Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures.
C. State of Oregon 1996 Edition Structural Specialty Code based on 1994 UBC,
Section 714 Through- Penetration Fire Stops.
D. UBC Standard 7 -5: Fire Tests of Through-penetration Fire Sto s Method for
Stops
Test of Through- Penetration Fire Stops. .
E. ASTM E 84 -95: Standard Test Method for surface burning characteristics of
Building Materials.
1
FIRESTOPPING: 07840 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
F. ASTM E 119 -95a: Standard Test Method for Fire Test of Building 1
Construction and Materials.
G. ASTM E 136 -94a: Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a
Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 degrees C.
H. ASTM E 814 -94b UL 1479 through penetrations, UL 2079 fire rated : joints
( 9 P � joints):
Standard Test Method for Fire Test of Through- Penetration Fire Stops.
I. ASTM E 1399: Monument criteria for construction joints.
1.4 SUBMITTALS ,
A. Product Data: '
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions and other data '
needed to show compliance with specified requirements.
3. Where more than one type of product is proposed, confirm
compatibility with adjacent substrates.
1
4. Include description of materials, prefabricated devices, reinforcement
and anchorage.
5. Include UL Systems appropriate for situations encountered on this
Project.
6. UL, CABO and ICBO Drawings, Certificates, Test Reports: Indicating
fire- stopping material conforms to specified requirements.
7. Indicate clearly locations proposed for use of each complying system,
identifying products used. '
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use skilled workers trained and experienced in crafts and familiar with
requirements and methods needed for proper performance of Work of this
Section. '
B. Manufacturer's technical representative to perform random inspection to
verify compliance to codes and document in writing. i
1.6 PRE - INSTALLATION MEETING
A. Schedule a pre - installation meeting to coordinate firestopping materials and
methods prior to installation. '
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION FIRESTOPPING: 07840
SEP 00 PAGE 3
1 B. Attendees:
' 1. Building official inspecting work
2. Contractor
3. Installer
1 4. Manufacturer's technical representative
5. Trades creating penetrations
' 6. Architect
C. Agenda:
' 1. Review firestopping submittal.
2. Review job site conditions.
' 3. Outline schedule for installation.
4. Outline reviewing process by building official.
1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Manufacturer's standard firestopping systems, with accessory materials,
' having fire- resistance ratings to be established by testing identical
assemblies per ASTM E -814 using UL 1479, or by similar testing procedures
of inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
' B. Fire - Resistant Ratings: As required to maintain integrity of time rated
9 4 9 tY
' constructions being penetrated.
C. Fire Resistance and Hose Stream Tests: Rate firestopping materials "F" and
' "T" in accordance with UBC Standard 43 -6 (based on ASTM E 814 or UL
1479).
1. Rating periods: Same as floor or wall assembly penetrated.
D. Combustibility: Non - combustible, ASTM E 136, unless tested and listed by
UL or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
E. Comply with ASTM E 84 and E 119.
' 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to job site in manufacturer's original container, with labels
intact and legible.
I
FIRESTOPPING: 07840 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 4 SEP 00
B. Maintain packaged materials with seals unbroken and labels intact until time 1
of use.
C. Store above ground, under cover and protected from damage.
D. Do not retain at job site material which has exceeded shelf life as
1
recommended by manufacturer.
1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 1
A. Do not install products when temperatures are below 40 degrees F.
1
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers:
111
1. Hilti
2. Firestop Systems, Inc.
1
3. Rectorseal
4. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI)
5. 3M Fire Protection
6. United States Gypsum Company, for safing.
B. Primary Firestopping Materials: Provide materials that are asbestos free. 1
1. Sealants
2. Collars
3. Mortars
4. Foam
5. Wrap Strips
6. Pillows
7. Silicone foam block
1
8. Safing
C. General Requirements:
1
1. Firestopping materials shall be capable of maintaining an effective
barrier against flame, smoke and gases, and suitable for firestopping
of penetrations made by steel, glass, plastic, and insulated pipe.
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION FIRESTOPPING: 07840
SEP 00 PAGE 5
1 2. Fire rating classification shall not require removal of insulation on
insulated pipe.
1 3. Firestop rating shall not be less than rating of penetrated assembly.
4. Use only firestop products that have been UL 1479 or ASTM E 814
tested for specific fire rated construction conditions conforming to
' construction assembly type, penetrating item type, annular space
requirements, and fire- rating involved for each separate instance.
' 5. Firestop systems do not re- establish structural integrity of load bearing
partitions /assemblies, or support live loads and traffic.
6. Installer shall consult Architect prior to penetrating any load bearing
' assembly.
7. For firestop applications that exist for which no UL tested system is
available through any manufacturer, a manufacturer's engineering
judgment derived from similar UL system designs or other tests shall
be submitted to local authorities having jurisdiction for their review and
approval prior to installation.
1 8. Firestopping not to be water soluble where subject to moisture.
9. High traffic openings (i.e. cable tray openings) firestop with system
allowing for repeated removal and reuse of firestop material such as
1 pillows or putty.
D. Safing: ASTM C 612, Type IA and IB; nominal density of 4 ob /cu.ft.; passing
' ASTM E. 136 for combustion characteristics; thermal resistivity of 4 deg F x h
x sq. ft. /BTU x in. at 75 deg F.
1 1. Thermafiber by United States Gypsum, or approved.
1 E. Other Materials:
1. Provide other materials, including damming material, not specifically
- I described but required for a complete and proper installation.
2. Primer, sealant, and cleaners as required by manufacturer.
3. Provide as required for a complete and proper installation.
' 2.2 RATING OF BUILDING ASSEMBLIES
1 A. Rating of various building floor /ceiling and wall assemblies are:
1. Elevator Equipment Walls, Shaft Walls: One hour.
B. Mechanical:
1 1. Insulated and uninsulated copper water pipes.
FIRESTOPPING: 07840 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 6 SEP 00
2. Plastic or galvanized waste and vent pipes. ,
3. Roof drain systems.
4. Black iron gas pipes.
5. Plastic, steel or copper sprinkler pipes.
6. Hydraulic lines.
7. Insulated or uninsulated galvanized sheet metal ducts.
C. Electrical:
1. Panels and boxes.
2. Conduit.
3. Non - metallic cable.
4. Low voltage wire.
5. Raceways.
D. Other: '
1. Other blank openings in floor /ceiling and wall assemblies.
PART 3 EXECUTION '
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will
ill be
performed.
1. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of work.
2. Start of work will indicate acceptance of substrate.
B. Examine areas to receive firestopping prior to submitting specified data. ,
1. Base data submitted on findings of Contractor's examination.
3.2 COORDINATION 1
A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate ,
provision in Work of other trades for interface with Work of this Section.
3.3 INSTALLATION
1
A. Install Work of this Section in accordance with Drawings, reviewed Shop
Drawings, requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and
manufacturer's and referenced standard's recommended installation
procedures. '
B. Clean surfaces in contact with firestop materials of dirt, grease, oil, or other
substance that may affect proper installation or fire resistance. 1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION FIRESTOPPING: 07840
SEP00 PAGE7
C. Provide masking and temporary covering to prevent soiling of adjacent
surfaces by firestopping materials.
t D. Completely fill void space and seal with firestopping materials, regardless of
void's geometric configuration, to prevent air and water penetration.
1 1. Tool joint.
E. Floors and partitions sealed with masonry or concrete:
1. Carefully fill and inspect for cracks or other imperfections.
F. Floors: For filling voids in floors having openings of 4 inches or more in length
or width, exclusive of all penetrating items, provide firestopping materials
which support same load as floor is designed to support, unless area is
protected by a permanent barrier preventing loading or traffic on firestopped
area.
1. Protect firestopping materials from damage on surfaces subject to
traffic.
G. Pipe Insulation:
1 1. Insulate pipes penetrating fire rated floors and walls with material
which provides same performance as firestopping material.
1 2. Extend this material at least 6 inches beyond both faces of opening.
Maintain perm rating insulation's vapor barrier.
I H. Where rated walls are constructed with horizontally continuous air space,
double weyth masonry, or double stud frame construction, provide vertical, 12
inch wide fiber dams for full thickness and height of air cavity at 15 foot
intervals maximum.
I. Consult with mechanical engineer prior to installation of any firestops around
1 duct work that might hamper performance of fire dampers.
J. Examine firestopped areas to ensure proper installation prior to closing or
1 covering.
K. Inspection:
1. Area to remain accessible until inspection by governing authority.
1
1
1
FIRESTOPPING: 07840 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
I
PAGE 8 SEP 00
3.4 CLEANING, ADJUSTMENT AND PROTECTION
I
A. Clean, without damaging, exposed surfaces affected by work of this Section.
B. Repair damaged material as necessary. I
C. Remove refuse and debris created by this work, and dispose of in a legal 1
manner.
1
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION JOINT SEALERS: 07900
SEP 00 PAGE 1
1 PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Sealant materials for joints as required to provide a positive barrier against
1 passage of moisture and air.
' 1.2 RELATED SECTION
A. Section 07480: Wood Siding.
1 B. Section 07840: Firestopping.
1 C. Section 08400: Entrances & Storefronts
D. Section 08800: Glazing.
' E. Section 09250: Gypsum Board.
1.3 REFERENCES
' A. ASTM C 920 Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
B. ASTM C 1193 Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1 A. Product Data: For each sealant product indicated.
B. Samples: Manufacturer's color charts showing full range of colors available
1 for each product exposed to view.
1. Upon request of Architect, submit physical samples of each sealant,
1 backing material, primer, and bond breaker proposed for use.
C. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures.
1
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1 A. Use workers trained and experienced in necessary crafts and familiar with
requirements and methods needed for proper performance of Work of this
Section.
1
1
JOINT SEALERS: 07900 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
B. Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single 1
manufacturer.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to job site in their manufacturer's original containers, with 1
labels intact and legible, and maintain intact until time of use.
B. Do not retain material which has exceeded shelf life recommended by
manufacturer.
1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 1
A. Do not install sealants when joint substrates are wet, or ambient and
substrate temperature conditions are outside limits recommended by
manufacturer.
1.8 INSTALLER'S WARRANTY
A. Warrant, for 2 years from date of Substantial Completion, that Work of this 1
Section will remain weathertight, and that Contractor will repair and /or replace
without additional cost to Owner water leaks and resulting damage to building
materials that occur under normal usage within period of warranty. 1
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Stain Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified, provide 1
products that are nonstaining to porous substrates and have undergone
testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint
substrates indicated for Project.
B. Color: Colors for each sealant installation will be selected by Architect from
manufacturer's standard colors.
1. In exposed installation, color to approximate color of adjacent 1
surfaces, unless otherwise approved by Architect.
2. In concealed installation use standard gray or black sealant.
1
1
1
I TOC BUILDING ADDITION JOINT SEALERS: 07900
SEP 00 PAGE 3
1 2.2 SILICONE SEALANT
I A. Single- Component; neutral moisture curing, ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS,
Class 25.
I B. Manufacturer and Type:
I 1. Low Modulus: For joint movement range 100 percent in extension and
50 percent in compression.
a. Dow Corning 790.
I b. Pecora 890, or approved.
2. Medium Modulus: For joint movement range 50 percent in extension
and 50 percent in compression.
I a. Dow Corning 795.
b. Pecora 864 or approved.
1 2.3 POLYURETHANE SEALANT
A. Two component, non -sag, ASTM C 920, Type M, Class 25, Grade NS,
1 Shore A hardness 20-40;
B. For joint movement range 50 percent in extension and 50 percent in
1 compression.
I C. Manufacturer and Type:
1. Low Modulus:
I a. Sonneborn Sonolastic 150, or approved.
2. Medium Modulus:
a. Mameco Vulkem 922.
I b. Pecora Dynatrol II.
c. Sonneborn Sonolastic NP2.
d. Tremco 511, or approved.
1 2.4 TRAFFIC -GRADE POLYURETHANE SEALANT
1 A. Two component, self - leveling, ASTM C 920, Type M, Class 25, Grade P,
Shore A hardness 25 -50, Use T.
B. For joint movement range 25 percent in extension and 25 percent in
compression.
1
1
JOINT SEALERS: 07900 TOC BUILDING ADDITION I
PAGE 4 SEP 00
C. Manufacturer and Type: 1
1. Mameco Vulkem 245/255.
1
2. Pecora NR -200.
3. Sonneborn Sonolastic SL.
4. Tremco THC -900, or approved.
1
2.5 SILICONE
I
A. Single- component, silicone rubber, architectural grade.
B. Manufacturer & Type: I
1. Dow Corning 786.
I
2. Tremco Proglaze, or approved.
2.6 FOAM AIR - INFILTRATION SEALANT 1
A. Manufacturer & Type:
1. Grace Polycel One. I
2. Kwik Foam by DAP, or approved.
2.7 PREFORMED FOAM SEALANT
A. Preformed, precompressed, impregnated, open -cell foam sealant of high- 1
density urethane foam, permanently elastic, mildew resistant, nonmigratory,
nonstaining, with pressure sensitive adhesive backing, and compatible with I
joint substrates and other joint sealants.
B. For joint movement range 25 percent in extension and 25 percent in
I
compression.
C. Manufacturer & Type:
1
1. Emseal Joint Systems, Ltd., Emseal 25V.
2. Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc., Polyseal.
1
2.8 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A. Single Component.
1
•
TOC BUILDING ADDITION JO INT SEALERS: 07900
900
SEP 00 PAGE 5
B. Manufacture & Type:
1. Tremco Acoustical Sealant, or approved.
2.9 SILICONIZED ACRYLIC LATEX
A. Single component, mildew resistant.
1. Tremco, Temflex 834, or approved.
2.10 BACKUP MATERIALS
A. Use backup materials which are non - absorbent, non - staining, non out gasing
1 and recommended by manufacturer for installation.
B. Backer rod:
1. Nonabsorptive, polyolefin, compressible rod.
' 2. Product Manufacturer: SOF Rod; Applied Extrusion Technologies, Inc.,
or approved.
1 C. Bond Breaker Tape: Polyethylene.
2.11 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Use primers which have been tested for durability on surfaces to be
sealed, and are specifically recommended by sealant manufacturer for
adhesion of sealant t joint substrates, as determined from preconstruction
joint - sealant- substrate tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to sealant
and backing material manufacturers, formulated to promote optimum
adhesion of sealant with joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint
' sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints..
1
1
1
1
JOINT SEALERS: 07900 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 6 SEP 00 1
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION 1
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants and other conditions under
which Work of this Section will be performed.
1. Correct conditions detrimental to proper completion of Work. 1
2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3. Start of work indicates acceptance of substrate.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface clean joints immediately before installing sealant complying with Ij
manufacturer's instructions, and the following:
1. Remove foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with 1
adhesion of sealant, including dust, oil, grease, rust, lacquer, laitance,
loose mortar, ice and frost. 1
B. Concrete and Masonry:
1. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast
cleaning, or mechanical abrading; remove loose particles from
cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil -free 1
compressed air.
2. Where surfaces have been treated, remove surface treatment by
sandblasting or wire brushing.
3. Remove laitance and mortar from masonry joint cavities
4. Remove laitance and form - release agents from concrete.
C. Metal surfaces:
1. Scrape steel surfaces with metal or wire brush to remove mill scale 1
and rust.
2. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaner which leaves no
residue to remove oil and grease, and protective coatings, wiping
surfaces with clean rags.
D. Prime joints substrates where recommended by sealant manufacturer, based
on preconstruction joint - sealant- substrate tests or prior experience.
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION
JOINT SEALERS: 07900
SEP 00 PAGE 7
E. Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining
p q P ado Wing
surfaces that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such
contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install joint sealers in accordance with recommendations of ASTM C 1193,
and manufacturer's recommended installation procedures, as applicable to
materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
B. Sealant Backings:
1. Install material to uniform depth below sealant.
1 2. Using tool, smoothly and uniformly place backup material to depth of
approximately V2 joint width (1/4 inch to 1 /2 inch), compressing backup
material 25 percent to 50 percent and securing a positive fit.
1 3. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
4. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
1 C. Bond Breaker: Install bond breaker tape behind sealants where backer rod is
not used.
1 D. Primers: Use primer approved by manufacturer for substrates being sealed,
in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
1 E. Mask joints where appearance of primer or sealant on adjacent surfaces
would be objectionable.
1. Provide dams where necessa ry to contain sealant.
2. Remove masking tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint
seal.
F. Install sealant by proven techniques at the same time backings are installed.
' 1. Thoroughly fill joints y � is to recommended depth with sealant in direct
contact with joint substrates.
2. Product uniform, cross sectional shapes and depths relative to joint
widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
3. Prevent three -sided adhesion of sealant to substrates.
G. Tool joints to profile shown in Drawings, or as indicated below if such profiles
1 are not shown in Drawings.
1
1
JOINT SEALERS: 07900 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
1
PAGE 8 SEP 00 1
1. Provide uniformly smooth joints with slightly concave surface, flush at
edges with adjacent surface, according to ASTM C 1193, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Do not use tooling agent unless specifically recommended in writing by
sealant manufacturer. -�
3. Leave sealant surface neat and smooth.
H. Install preformed foam sealants according to manufacturer's instructions,
taking care not to pull or stretch material.
3.4 CLEANING, ADJUSTMENT AND PROTECTION 1
A. Clean adjacent exposed surfaces free from sealant as installation
progresses, using cleaning agent recommended by manufacturer of sealant .1
used.
1. Repair damaged surfaces. 1
3.5 SEALANT SCHEDULE
A. Building Exterior: Wood Siding, Door and Window Frames, and other
openings and joints in exterior walls: Polyurethane sealant. 1
B. Building Interior Door and Window Frames and other openings in interior
walls: Polyurethane sealant.
C. Building Exterior Pavement Joints: Traffic -Grade self - leveling Polyurethane
sealant. j
D. Around electrical boxes, between framing and openings at other locations
where insulation in exterior walls is interrupted:
3
[1]. Foam air - infiltration sealant.
E. At wet area Fixture Joints:
1. Silicone Rubber with mildew resistance.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION METAL DOORS AND FRAMES: 08100
1 SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Steel doors.
B. Welded steel frames.
1.2. RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 08212: Flush Wood Doors
B. Section 08710: Door Hardware
C. Section 08800: Glazing
D. Section 09900: Painting
1 1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A 153 Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware.
B. ASTM A 366 Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold - Rolled,
1 Commercial Quality.
C. ASTM A 569 Specification for Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum Percent),
1 Hot - Rolled Sheet and Strip Commercial Quality.
D. ASTM A 620 Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Drawing Quality,
Special Killed, Cold - Rolled.
E. ASTM A 653 Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc -Iron Alloy- Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip
process.
F. ASTM C 578 Specification for Preformed, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal
Insulation.
1
1
1
1
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES: 08100 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00 1
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data for each type of door and frame specified including details of
construction, materials, dimensions, hardware preparation, core, label
compliance, sound ratings, profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings showing fabrication and installation of each type of door and
frame, elevations of door designs, details of openings, dimensions, and �
anchorage.
C. Door and Frame Schedule: Use same reference numbers for details and 1
openings as those in Contract Drawings.
1. Indicate coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and 1
glazing requirements.
D. Submit evidence that doors, and door and frame assemblies, have been 1
tested and approved by governing jurisdiction for the following labeled
construction: 1
1. Fire protection rating label for doors and frames.
2. Smoke control "S" label for door and frame assemblies.
3. Temperature rate rise label for doors.
E. Certification: Submit certification that Work of this Section complies with 1
specified SDI standards.
F. Oversize Construction Certification: For fire rated door assemblies that 1
exceed limitations of labeled assemblies, submit certification that each door
and frame assembly has been constructed to conform to design, materials,
and construction equivalent to requirements for labeled construction.
1. Submit evidence that certification for oversize construction has been
approved by the governing jurisdiction.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use skilled workers trained and experienced in necessary crafts and familiar
with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of Work of 1
this Section.
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES: 08100
SEP 00 PAGE 3
B.
Unless specifically otherwise approved by Architect, provide doors and
welded frames from a single manufacturer.
C. Comply with latest edition of following standards of Steel Door Institute:
1. SDI 100, Recommended Specifications Standard Steel Doors and
Frames.
2. SDI 105, Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames.
3. SDI 109, Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
4. SDI 112, Zinc - Coated Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
5. SDI 117, Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and
Frames.
6. SDI 118, Basic Fire Door Requirements.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire door and frame assemblies shall be labeled for fire resistance, and for
smoke control with "S" label where indicated, as required by current Building
Code when tested in accordance with UBC Standard 7 -2.
1. Meet appropriate Factory Mutual, Underwriters Laboratories, or
Warnock Hersey requirements, and attach acceptance label
permanently to each fire door and frame assembly.
B. For stair doors and in exit enclosures, where required by Building Code,
provide doors that have a temperature -rise rating of 450 deg F maximum in
30 minutes of fire exposure in accordance with UBC Standard 7 -2.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect doors and frames from damage.
B. Store frames upright in protected dry area, above ground or floor, with at
P rY 9 ,
least 1/4 inch between individual units.
C. Brace bottom ends of frame jambs against displacement.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate
provision in work of those trades for interface with Work of this Section.
1
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES: 08100
TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 4 SEP 00
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Hot - Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: ASTM A 569, commercial quality carbon
steel, pickled and oiled.
B. Cold - Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366, commercial quality carbon steel, or 1
ASTM A 620, drawing quality, special killed.
C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Zinc - coated carbon steel, hot -dip galvanized 1
according to ASTM A653, G60 coating designation.
D. Supports and Anchors: Fabricate from minimum 18 gage steel sheet, 0.0516 1
inch thick galvanized steel where used with galvanized steel frames.
E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard suited for use; hot -dip J
galvanize complying with ASTM A 153 where built into exterior walls.
2.2 METAL DOORS 1
A. Exterior Doors: SDI 100, Level 2, Heavy Duty, [Model 1, Full Flush Design]
[Model 2, Seamless Design.]
1. Material: 18 gage uncoated steel, galvanized to minimum 0.0516 inch
thickness.
2. Core: ASTM C 578, Polystyrene urethane foam with minimum U -value
rating of 0.41.
a. Bond core to both face skins.
B. Thickness: 1 -3/4 inches.
C. Size: As indicated in Door Schedule.
D. Fire and Smoke Control Rating: As indicated in Door Schedule.
e. Relite frames.
1
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION METAL DOORS AND FRAMES: 08100
SEP 00 PAGE 5
2.3 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A. Provide steel frames for doors, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other
openings according to SDI 100, of types and sizes indicated in Schedules
1 and Drawings.
B. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded corners.
C. Interior Frames: Minimum 16 gage cold - rolled steel sheet.
1. Fabricate frames for interior openings 48 inches and wider from 14
gage cold - rolled steel sheet.
D. Exterior Frames: Minimum 14 gage galvanized steel sheet.
E. Door Silencers: Except on frames to receive weatherstripping or gasketing,
drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of single leaf door openings,
and 2 silencers on heads of double leaf door openings.
F. Fire, Smoke Control, and Temperature rate of rise rating: As indicated in
Door Schedule.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free
from defects, warp, or buckle in compliance with SDI 100 requirements.
1. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels from only cold - rolled
steel sheet.
2. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers,
and molding from either cold or hot - rolled steel sheet.
B. Bevel lock and hinge side edges of doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches.
C. Clearances: Fabricate with following clearances, except for fire doors provide
clearances according to NFPA 80.
1. Between doors and frames: 1/8 inch.
2. Between door bottoms and thresholds: 1/,4 inch.
3. Between door bottoms and floor: 3/4 inch.
4. Between meeting edges of non -fire rated pairs of doors: 3/32 inch
1
.1,
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES: 08100 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
1
PAGE 6 SEP 00
D. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117.
E. Fabricate galvanized steel doors and frames according to SDI 112.
1. Close top and bottom of doors flush.
2. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.
F. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive hardware
according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by
hardware supplier.
1. Comply with requirements of SDI 107.
2. Provide space, cutouts, reinforcing for concealed overhead door
closers and provisions for fastening in top rail of doors or head of \I
frames, as applicable.
G. Reinforce doors and frames to receive hardware according to final door
hardware schedule.
H. Exposed Fasteners: Provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed 1
screws and bolts.
I. Glazing Stops: Minimum 18 gage steel.
1. Provide nonremovable stops on outside of exterior doors and on
secure side of interior doors for glass and louvers.
2. Provide screw applied, removable, glazing beads on inside of glass
and louvers.
3. Provide square profile, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Install with countersunk oval head screws.
2.5 FINISHES
A. Preparation: Clean surfaces and apply pretreatment of conversion coating of
type suited to organic coating applied over it.
B. Factory Priming for Field- Painted Finish:
1. Apply manufacturer's standard rust inhibitive shop primer immediately
after surface and pretreatment that is compatible with finish paint
systems specified in Section 09900 and suited to substrate.
1
ill'
I TOC BUILDING ADDITION METAL DOORS AND FRAMES: 08100
SEP00 PAGE7
s of paint as specified in Section 09900.
C. Field apply finish coats p p
1 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install steel doors and frames according to:
1. Construction documents.
2. Reviewed shop drawings.
I 3. Requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
4. Manufacturer's and referenced standard's recommended installation
procedures.
II B. Placing p Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI 105, and the following:
1 . 1. Where possible, place frames prior to construction of enclosing walls.
2. Set frames accurately into position, aligned and braced securely until
permanent anchors are set.
a. Frames in final position to be plus or minus 1/16 inch maximum
from squared and plumbed alignment.
I 3. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and
spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
4. At in -place construction, set frames and secure to adjacent
I construction with machine screws and suitable anchorage devices.
Provide "Z" fillers at each screw location.
5. Provide sealant between frame and adjacent wall material.
i 6. Install fire rated frames according to NFPA 80.
C. Installing Doors:
I 1. Set doors flush with frame face and plumb to hold in any position
I 2. Fit doors in frames within specified clearances.
3. Install smoke control doors complying with NFPA 105, and UBC
Standard 7 -2.
1 3.2 CLEANING, ADJUSTMENT AND PROTECTION
A. During warranty period, check and adjust operating finish hardware items for
smooth and quiet operation.
1
1
1
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES: 08100 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 8 SEP 00 1
B. Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted and damaged areas of prime
coat, and apply touch up of compatible, air -drying primer.
C. Clean, without damaging, exposed surfaces of Work of this Section and
repair as required. 1
D. Remove from site refuse created by this work, and dispose of in a legal
manner. 1
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
r
1
1
1
•
1
r
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION FLUSH WOOD DOORS: 08212
SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART1 GENERAL
1 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Flush wood doors.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 08100: Metal Doors and Frames.
B. Section 08710: Door Hardware.
C. Section 08800: Glazing.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1 A. Product Data:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer's Specifications and or Data needed to show compliance
with specified requirements.
B Shop Drawings showing elevations of door designs.
C. Samples:
1. Approximately 8 x 8 inches in size, of each door face material.
2. Approved samples will set minimum standard by which work will be
evaluated.
D. Door Schedule: Use same reference numbers for details and openings as
those in Contract Drawings.
1. Indicate coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and
glazing requirements.
E. Submit evidence that doors, and door and frame assemblies, have been
tested and approved by governing jurisdiction for the following labeled
construction:
1. Fire protection rating label for doors and frames.
1 2. Smoke control "S" label for door and frame assemblies.
1
FLUSH WOOD DOORS: 08212 00 S 08 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00 1
3. Temperature rise label for doors.
p
F. Oversize Construction Certification: For fire rated door assemblies that 1
exceed limitations of labeled assemblies, submit certification that each door
and frame assembly has been constructed to conform to design, materials,
and construction equivalent to requirements for labeled construction.
1. Submit evidence that certification for oversize construction has been
approved by the governing jurisdiction.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use skilled workers trained and experienced in necessary crafts and familiar
with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of Work of 1
this Section.
B. Comply with: 1
1. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) "Architectural Woodwork
Quality Standards ", grades specified.
2. National Wood Window and Door Association "Industry Standard"
1.5. 1 -A. 1
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire door and frame assemblies shall be labeled for fire resistance, and for
smoke control with "S" label where indicated, as required by current Building
Code when tested in accordance with UBC Standard 7 -2.
1. Meet appropriate Factory Mutual, Underwriters Laboratories, or
Warnock Hersey requirements, and attach acceptance label
permanently to each fire door and frame assembly.
B. For stair doors and in exit enclosures, where required by Building Code,
provide doors that have a temperature -rise rating deg of 450 de F maximum in
30 minutes of fire exposure specified in UBC Standard 7 -2.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: 1
1. Deliver doors to site after plaster and concrete are dry, and after
building has reached average prevailing humidity of 30 to 60 percent. 1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION FLUSH WOOD DOORS: 08212
SEP 00 PAGE 3
2. Before wrapping each door in its own individual protective covering,
seal all 4 edges.
3. Deliver prefinished doors in Manufacturer's original protective covering
clearly marked with Manufacturer's name, brand name, size,
I
4. thickness, and identifying symbol.
Immediately open, but don't remove, wrap at jobsite to ventilate.
B. Storage:
1. Protect from damage; storage area to be dry, not wet or damp.
1 2. Stack flat on 2 x 4 lumber, laid 12 inches from ends and across center.
3. Under bottom door and over top of stack, provide plywood or
corrugated cardboard to protect door surfaces.
4. Store 7 days minimum at building temperature and humidity before
installing. Building to have no great variations in temperature or
humidity during this period.
C. Handling:
1. Do not drag doors across one another; lift doors and carry them into
position. Handle with clean gloves.
1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
1 A. Maintain 50 degrees F or above where wood doors are installed.
B. Maintain 30 percent minimum to 60 percent maximum humidity where wood
doors are installed.
C. Maintain 30 foot - candles min. measured 3 feet above floor during installation.
1.8
WARRANTY
ARRA TY
A. Interior solid core doors to have lifetime warranty.
1. Replace, rehang and refinish without any additional cost to Owner any
delaminated doors or any doors exceeding tolerance limits.
1
1
1
1
FLUSH WO DOORS: 08212
OD DOO S TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 4 SEP 00 1
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Materials
A. Manufacturers:
1. Algoma.
2. BJ Doors j
3. Eggers
4. Western Oregon Door
5. Weyerhaeuser, or approved. 1
B. Type: Flush face.
C. Construction: 5 or 7 P I Y .
D. Sizes and Relites: See Door Schedule.
E. Thickness:
1. 1 -3/4 inches for swinging
F. Core: 1
1. Fire - resistant rated doors: Manufacturer's standard non - combustible
type without asbestos.
2. Swinging and sliding doors: Particle board type with 1 -3/8 inch
minimum width hardwood stiles matching face veneer color. 1
G. Face veneer for doors with transparent finish:
1. Species: Plain Sliced Cherry.
ry .
2. Veneer: Plain Slicing.
3. Veneer Matching: Book.
4. NWWDA Grade: Premium.
5. Finish: AWI Conversion Varnish TR-4. •
H. Edge Bands:
1. Fire - resistant rated doors: As required.
2. Side stiles at other doors: 1 /2 inch thick minimum hardwood matching
face veneer color.
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION FLUSH WOOD DOORS: 08212
SEP 00 PAGE 5
I. Fire, Smoke Control, and Temperature Rise Rating: See Door Schedule.
J. Glass: As specified in Section 08800.
1. Glass in Fire Rated Doors: Use materials and assemblies qualified by
tests in accordance with UBC Standard 7 -2 for doors.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Provide materials required for a complete and proper installation.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Bond edge banding to core with adhesive.
B. Machine and hand sand exposed surfaces.
2.4 FABRICATION TOLERANCES
A. Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference between 2 diagonal
measurements.
B. Maximum warp: 1/4 inch space measured from horizontal, vertical, or
diagonal straight edge to point of maximum bow, cup, or twist.
1 C. Maximum stile, rail and core telegraphing show - through at door face: 1/100
inch in any 3 inch span.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be
performed.
1. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of
Work.
2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
1
1
1
FLUSH WOOD DOORS: 08212 O S 0 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 6 SEP 00
3.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate as required with or trades to assure proper and adequate
provision in work of those trades for interface with Work of this Section.
B. Protect work of others from damage.
3.3 INSTALLATION 1
A. Install work of this Section in accordance with:
1. Construction Documents. 1
2. Reviewed Shop Drawings
3. Requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
4. Manufacturer's and referenced standard's recommended installation
procedures.
B. Install wood doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and 1
referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
1. Install fire -rated doors in corresponding fire -rated frames according to 1
NFPA 80 and UBC Standard 7 -2.
2. Install smoke control doors with frames that have been constructed
and tested as an assembly in accordance with UBC Standard 7 -2 and
approved for "S" label.
C. Fitting and machining:
1. Tolerances: 1
a. Bottom: 1/4 inch clearance maximum.
b. Top: 1/8 inch clearance maximum.
c. Lock edge and hinge edge: Bevel 1/8 inch in 2 inches
•
maximum.
2. Machine doors for hardware in accordance with recommendations of
hardware Manufacturers.
D. Receive and retain custody of hardware furnished for Work of this Section
under Section 08710 and, except as otherwise directed, install hardware in �.
accordance with recommendations of hardware manufacturer.
E. Replace or rehang doors which are hingebound and do not swing or operate
freely or are not flush with frame face when closed.
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION FLUSH WOOD DOORS: 08212
SEP00 PAGE7
1
Door left in any position of it' s swing shall hold.
3.4 COMPLIANCE
A. Owner reserves right to request and pay for inspection by a representative of
reference organization to determine that Work of this Section has been
performed in accordance with specified standards.
1 B. In event inspection determines Work of this Section does not comply with
specified requirements, immediately remove non - complying items and
replace with items complying with specified requirements, at no additional
cost to Owner, and reimburse Owner for cost of inspection.
3.5 CLEANING, ADJUSTMENT AND PROTECTION
A. During warranty period, check, adjust and service moving parts to operate
smoothly and quietly.
1. Adjust as necessary weatherstripping, gaskets, and door bottoms for
correct clearance.
B. Clean, without damaging, exposed surfaces affected by work of this Section,
and repair as necessary; remove from jobsite refuse and debris created by
this work, and dispose of in a legal manner.
1
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION ACCESS DOORS: 08313
SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Access doors.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06100: Rough Carpentry, for framing.
B. Section 09250: Gypsum Board, for wall and ceiling finish.
C. Section 09900 Painting.
D. Division 15: Access panels for valves and dampers.
E. Division 16: Access panels for electrical equipment.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to show
1 compliance with specified requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage,
and interface of the work of this Section with work of adjacent trades.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Access Doors:
1. Milcor Limited partnership.
2. Karp Company.
3. Larsen's Manufacturing.
1 4. Substitutions: Submit according to requirements of Section 01630.
1
1
1
ACCESS DOORS: 08313 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
2.2 ACCESS DOOR
A. Standard flush door for drywall; Milcor used as model to set standard for
other manufacturers, and does not show preference.
1. Style: DW by Milcor.
PART 3 EXECUTION 1
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Surfaces:
1. Review location of access doors.
2. Verify clearance for door swing and door access to required
equipment.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation. 1
1. Measure rough opening and shim or adjust opening size as required. 1
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjusting Defective Work.
1. Repair scratched door surfaces to match factory prime finish.
B. Final Cleaning.
1. Clean door and frame surface prior to field painting.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION
ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS: 08400
SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Aluminum entrances and storefronts.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 08800: Glazing.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM B 221 Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy
Extruded Bar, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes.
B. ASTM B 633 Specification for Electrodiposited Coatings of Zinc on
Iron and Steel.
C. ASTM E 283 Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior
J Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified
Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.
D. ASTM E 331 Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows,
Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure
Difference.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
J 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer's Specifications and other Data needed to show
compliance with specified requirements.
B. Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show dimensions, fabrication,
installation, anchorage, and interface of Work of this Section with Work of
•
adjacent trades.
C. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures.
1
1
.I
ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS: 08400
TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
D. Samples:
j
1. Sample of each exposed component.
2. Samples of finish, showing color, texture and sheen of each exposed
component.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use skilled Workers who are trained and experienced in crafts and familiar
with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of Work of
this Section. 'I
B. Installer shall be approved by manufacturer.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Frames and glazing to be designed to withstand wind Toads according to 1
provisions of Chapter 16 of State of Oregon Structural Specialty Code.
B. Air Infiltration: ASTM E 283 not to exceed .06 CFM of fixed area. 11
C. Water Infiltration: ASTM E 331, no water penetration at test pressure of 12
PSF.
D. Maximum Deflection: 1/175 of span.
E. Allowable Stress Factor of Safety: 1.65.
F. Provide doors complying with requirements of Americans with Disabilities Act
and State Building Code regarding accessibility for disabled.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to jobsite in manufacturer's original containers, with labels
intact and legible.
1. Maintain package materials with seals unbroken and labels intact until
time of use.
B. Store above ground, under cover and protected from damage.
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS: 08400
SEP 00 PAGE 3
1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Field verify dimensions prior to fabrication; if varies significantly from Contract
Documents, obtain architect's approval before proceeding.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Provide warranty agreeing to replace Work of this Section which fails due to
defective materials or installation to be weathertight within 2 years after Date
of Substantial Completion.
B. Failure due to defective materials or Workmanship is deemed to include, but
not to be limited to:
1. Failures in operation of operating component or components.
2. Leakage or air infiltration in excess of specified standard.
I 3.
4. Deterioration of finish to an extent visible to unaided eye.
Defects which contribute to unsightly appearance, potential safety
hazard, or potential untimely failure of Work of this Section or Work as
a whole.
PART2 PRODUCTS
1 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1 A. Storefronts and Window Wall:
1. Kawneer Company.
2. United States Aluminum Corp.
3. Cascade Aluminum.
4. Substitutions: Submit according to requirements of Section 01630.
2.2 COMPONENTS
1 A. Storefront Framing Components.
1. Center and off set as detailed.
2. Framing system: Kawneer Trifab II, 451T.
3. Nominal size: 2 inches by 4 -1/2 inches.
4. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B -221, 6063 -T5 aluminum alloy.
5. Fasteners: Aluminum, stainless steel, and zinc plated steel, ASTM B-
633.
6. Finish: Dark bronze anodized.
1
ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS: 08400
TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 4 SEP 00
B. Doors:
1. Acceptable door systems: Kawneer Medium Style 190. 1
2. Door height: See Door Schedule.
3. Minimum bottom rail height: 10 inches.
4. Single acting
5. Finish: Match storefront.
6. Style: Medium 1
C. Sealants:
1. Glazing Sealants: Manufacturer's standard.
2. Framing Sealants: Polyurethane.
D. Flashing:
9
1. Material: 0.050 inch thick minimum aluminum, with smooth texture.
2. Finish: To match storefront.
2.3 OTHER MATERIALS ,1
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete
P Y q P
and proper installation.
2.4 FABRICATION 1
A. Fabricate in accordance with
1. Construction Documents.
2. Reviewed Shop Drawings
3. Requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
4. Manufacturer's and referenced standard's recommendations.
B. Provide hairline fit at joints, with smooth continuity of line and accurate
relation of planes and angles.
1. Securely fasten.
•
C. Perform fitting of finish hardware to doors and frames at factory, but do not
drill or tap for surface mounted items until time of installation at site.
1. Use concealed fasteners to maximum extent practicable.
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS: 08400
SEP 00 PAGE 5
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS
1 A. Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be
performed.
1. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of
Work.
2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate
provision in Work of those trades for interface with Work of this Section.
B. As necessary, protect work of others from damage.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install Work of this Section in accordance with the following:
1. Construction Documents.
2. Reviewed Shop Drawings.
3. Requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
4. Manufacturer's and referenced standard's recommendations.
B. Provide protection against electrolysis occurring between different adjacent
metals as required.
C. Set door thresholds in full bed of sealant.
D. Remove protective coating completely from exposed surfaces as soon as
progress of Work shall permit with safety.
E. When glazing is performed under this Section, provide types of glass required
and glaze in accordance with storefront/doors /windows manufactures
standards.
3.4 CLEANING, ADJUSTMENT AND PROTECTION
A. During warranty period, adjust and service moving parts of doors to operate
smoothly and quietly.
1
ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS 08400 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 6 SEP 00 1
B. Clean, without damaging, exposed surfaces affected by work of this Section
and repair as required; remove from site refuse created by this work, and
dispose of in a legal manner.
3.5 HARDWARE SCHEDULE 1
A. Hardware finish: Match dark bronze. 1
B. Types:
1. Top offset pivot Kawneer 1
2. Intermediate pivot Kawneer M -19
3. Offset floor closer Rixson 27
4. Overhead door holder Rixson 1
5. Threshold Kawneer
1
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION DOOR HARDWARE: 08710
SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Door finish hardware.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 08100: Metal Doors and Frames, to be provided templates.
B. Section 08212: Flush Wood Doors, to be provided templates.
C. Section 08400: Entrances and Storefronts.
D. Section 08744: Automatic Door Hardware.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Submit Finish Hardware Schedule.
a. Approval of this list by Architect to not relieve Contractor of
responsibility to provide complete finish hardware items
required for Work even though such required items may not
have been shown on approved list.
2. Cut sheets for each type of hardware.
B. Templates: Supply required for progress of Work
1. Deliver templates or physical Samples of approved finish hardware
items applicable to interfacing with other work.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide services of an AHC or DAHC member of Door Hardware Institute to:
1. Be available for consultation with Architect/Owner at no additional cost
to Owner during progress of construction.
B. Hardware consultant may be an employee of supplier.
1
1
1
DOOR HARDWARE: 08710 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Hardware to comply with applicable local and /or State fire and current 1
building codes.
B. Hardware installed at doors with U.L. fire- resistant rating to meet required 1
rating.
C. Doors installed for smoke protection to receive hardware as recommended by
NFPA.
D. Provide hardware according to requirements of UBC Standard 7 -2 for fire
door assemblies labeled for fire resistance and smoke control ("5" label).
E. Electric equipment to have U.L. approved listing for complete assembly.
9 . P Y
F. Comply with requirements of ANSI A117.1. and The Americans with 1
Disabilities Act (ADA) and State Building Code regarding access for disabled.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Individually package each unit of finish hardware, complete with proper
fastenings and appurtenances, clearly marked on outside to indicate contents
and specific locations in Work.
B. Provide an experienced employee designated to receive, take charge of, and
distribute hardware at building site, and provide locked area for storage of
hardware. 1
C. Protect from damage.
1. Store above ground and under cover.
D. Stockpile items sufficiently in advance to assure proper gnd adequate 1
provision in Work of those trades for interface with Work of this Section.
1.7 KEYING INFORMATION 1
A. If required provide keying and bitting information to owner at no cost. 1
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION DOOR HARDWARE: 08710
SEP 00 PAGE 3
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Warrant operation of closers for 10 years.
B. Warrant operation of exit devices for 3 years.
1.9 CERTIFICATION
A. Prior to Substantial Completion Date, provide written certificate that hardware
is complete and conforms to Specifications and approved submittals.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Fasteners:
1. Furnish necessary ish ecessary flat head screws, bolts, and other fasteners of
suitable size and type to anchor hardware in position for long life under
hard use.
2. Where necessary, furnish fasteners with expansion shields, sex bolts,
and other anchors as required. Material to which hardware is to be
applied and as recommended by hardware manufacturer.
a. Toggle bolts are not permitted.
1 3. Provide fasteners which harmonize with hardware as to finish and
material.
4. Conceal if possible when door is in closed position; exposed fasteners
to have Phillips head.
a. Through - Bolting Not permitted.
B. Locks and Latches: Verify:
1. Operation
2. Hand of doors
3. Function for each opening.
1 C. Closers: Verify for each door:
J 1.
2. Hand of door '
Degree of opening
3. Frequency of use
4. Head condition.
1
1
im
DOOR HARDWARE: 08710 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 4 SEP 00
a. Provide closers which do not limit door swing.
9
b. Furnish drop plates for narrow top rails.
c. Furnish manufacturer's standard one piece cast arm at parallel i1
arm location.
d. Furnish closers at fire- resistant rated doors, exterior doors and
elsewhere as shown.
D. Where butts are required to swing 180 degrees, furnish butts of sufficient
throw to clear trim.
1. Furnish 1 -1/2 pair of butts, minimum, per leaf unless specifically
scheduled otherwise.
E. Furnish silencers for door frames at rate of three for each single door and two 1
for each door or pair of doors; except gasketed doors and doors with light
seals or sound seals. Furnish gaskets for rated doors to corridors or other
exitways. 1
F. Furnish door stops in number and type to protect finishes wherever doors or
hardware thereon could strike adjacent surfaces and materials. '1
G. Hardware Locations:
1. Mount hardware at recommended location of manufacturer or per
requirements of ANSI A117.1
2.2 KEYING
A. Factory or locally key following: I
1. Masterkey 1
2. Grand - masterkey cylinders
B. Furnish 3 nickel silver keys for each lock as follows: 1
1. 6 masterkeys for each set
2. 3 grand - masterkeys. 1
I
i
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION DOOR HARDWARE: 08710
SEP 00 PAGE 5
C. Construction keying:
r
1. Furnish a construction key system with 10 keys for locks and cylinders:
I
2. 7 for Contractor and 3 for Owner.
Use only construction keys during construction.
3. Upon Substantial Completion of Work, void construction key system
and, in presence of Architect and Owner, demonstrate specified keying
system is operating properly.
1 D. Identification and delivery:
1. Stamp permanent keys, "DO NOT DUPLICATE ".
2. Identify permanent keys with tags, and send direct to Owner by
registered mail or receipted personal delivery.
E. Key storage cabinet
1. Manufacturer: MMF, Telkee, Yale, or approved.
2. Type: Surface mounted for wall, with key control tags.
3. Capacity: For required permanent keys plus 25 percent.
4. Location: As selected by Architect.
2.3 SECURITY CABINET
1 B. Key Storage Cabinet (Knox Box)
1. Manufacturer: Knox Company
1. Type: Recessed, 3200 Series
2. Dimensions: 7 inches high by 7 inches wide by 3 1/4 inches deep.
3. Color: Dark Bronze.
2.4 TOOLS AND MANUALS
A. Deliver to Owner one complete set of adjustment tools and one set of
maintenance manuals and installation instructions for locksets, closers, and
panic devices.
1
1
1
1
•
DOOR HARDWARE: 8710
0 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 6 SEP 00 g
2.5 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS
A. Single Source: •
1. Except as specifically otherwise approved in advance by Architect,
furnish for each items (such as "Door butt type 1 ") only product of a
single manufacturer.
B. Locks and Latches:
1. Latchbolt to be anti - friction type with curved strike lip. 1
a. Provide extended lip where necessary to protect door frame trim
from damage.
b. Match hardware finish.
2. Fabricate with 3 3/4 inches backset from door edge where surface
applied gasketing at door frame stops and 2 3/4 inches elsewhere.
3. Lever handle unless otherwise noted.
C. Hinges are to be mortise. At out - swinging doors with locks, hinges to have
non - removable pins.
D. Door Closers: 1
1. Mount on room side, and not corridor or lobby side of doors bordering
circulation system. 1
2. Fasteners to be concealed.
E. Stops:
1. Do not use floor stops unless specifically approved by Architect.
2. If wall stops cannot be installed so as to be in contact with lock/latch
half of door leaf, provide concealed overhead holder.
F. Flush Bolts:
1. For floor locations, provide dust -proof strikes. 1
G. Kickplates:
1. Provide metal kickplates as specified in Door Hardware Groups. I
2. Anchor kickplates with oval -head full- thread screws, spaced uniformly
at a maximum of 5 inches on center at kickplate perimeter.
1
1
I
TOC BUILDING ADDITION DOOR HARDWARE: 08710
I SEP 00 PAGE 7
I H. Provide finishes shown on Door Hardware Groups. (Note to specifier - edit
manufacture for each project and acceptance substitute for each item)
I I. Manufacturer and Acceptable Substitutes:
Acceptable
Item: Manufacturer: Substitute:
1 1. Hinges: Stanley (S) Hager, Lawrence, McKinney
2. Locks /Latches: Schlage (SC) None
3. Cylinders: Schlage (SC) None
1 4. Exit Devices: Von Duprin (VD) None
5. Surface Closers: LCN (L) None
6. Push /Pulls /Kickplates Trimco (TR) Tice
7. Stops /Catches: Glynn Johnson (GJ) H.B. Ives
8. Weatherstripping /
I Gasketing: National Guard (NG)
National Guard (NG) Pemko
9. Thresholds: Pemko
10. Silencers: Glynn Johnson (GJ) H.B. Ives
I PART 3 EXECUTION
i 3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed.
1 1. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of Work.
2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
II B. Protect work of others from damage.
1 3.2 COORDINATION
I A. Coordinate as necessary with other trades to assure proper and adequate
provision in Work of those trades for interface with Work of this Section.
I 3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install Work of this Section in accordance with:
1. Hardware groups specified.
2. Approved Schedule.
1 3. Applicable requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
1
1
DOOR HARDWARE: 08710 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 8 SEP 00
4. Templates .
5. Manufacturer's and referenced standard's recommended installation
procedures.
B. Mount hardware as noted in 08710, 2.1 -G.1.
C. Accurately locate, fit and install square, plumb and true.
1. Provide hairline fit at joints
2. Securely fasten.
D Cut and fit any threshold or floor plates to door frame P rofile and with mitered
corner joints; weld multiple pieces together. Set in full bead of sealant.
1. At carpet, install closer floor plates flush with structural substrate under
r P e
carpet.
2. Secure to substrate with positive anchoring devices.
E. After fitting mortised hardware to surfaces to be painted, remove and store
hardware in original package in a secure place until painting is completed, and
then install permanently.
3.4 CLEANING, ADJUSTMENT AND PROTECTION 1
A. Clean, without damaging, exposed surfaces affected by work of this Section and
repair as necessary.
B. Remove from site refuse created by this Work, and dispose of in legal manner.
C. Remove protective coating completely from exposed surfaces as soon as
progress of Work permits with safety.
D. Properly wrap hardware subjected to hand usage during construction for
protection; hardware finish damaged through carelessness to be replaced at
Contractor at Contractor's expense.
E. Upon completion of Work, and as a condition of its acceptance, provide
inspection, and adjustment.
1. At time of Substantial Completion, during and at end of warranty period,
test, adjust and where necessary lubricate moving parts including
keyways for free, smooth and quiet operation.
a. Lubricate locks with fine powdered graphite only. 1
1
1
I TOC BUILDING ADDITION DOOR HARDWARE: 08710
SEP 00 PAGE 9
I
2. After ventilation system has been balanced, manufacturer's
I representative to adjust closers as necessary to meet ADA and State
Code regarding time required for closing operation and force required to
open and provide a written report to Contractor and Architect pertaining
S to overall operation and installation of hardware.
3.5 DOOR HARDWARE GROUPS
1 HW1
I S 3ea. Hinges F179 4.5 x 4.5 652
SC lea. Lockset AL80pd x Neptune 626
GJ lea. Wall Stop 50C 626
I GJ 3ea. Silencers 64 Gray
HW2
1 S 3ea. Hinges F179 4.5 x 4.5 NRP 652
SC lea. Lockset AL80pd x Neptune 626
I GJ
lea. Wall Stop 50C 626
GJ 3ea. Silencers 64 Gray
1 HW3
S 3ea. Hinges FBB191 4.5 x 4.5 NRP 630
1 VD lea. Exit Device 98NL 626
SC lea. Cylinder 20 -021 626
L lea. Closer 4111 689
GJ lea. Wall Stop 50C 626
TR lea. Kickplate K0050 10" x 2" LDW x B4E 630
NG lea. Threshold 896 Alum.
1 NG 1 set Weatherstrip 5050C Char
I HW4
S 3ea. Hinges FBB179 4.5 x 4.5 NRP 652
I VD lea. Exit Device 98L x 17 626
SC lea. Cylinder 20 -021 626
L lea. Closer 4111 Spring Cush 689
I TR lea. Kickplate K0050 10" x 2" LDW x B4E 630
NG 1 set Sound Gasket 2525C Char
1
1
1
DOOR HARDWARE: 08710 TOC BUILDING
II
G ADDITION
PAGE 10 SEP 00
HW5
S 3ea. Hinges F179 4.5 x 4.5 652 1
SC lea. Passage AL10s x Neptune 626
GJ lea. Wall Stop 50C 626 I
GJ 3ea. Silencers 64 Gray
HW6 1
S 3ea. Hinges F179 4.5 x 4.5 652
SC lea. Lockset AL50pd x Neptune 626
GJ lea. Wall Stop 60C 626
GJ 3ea. Silencers 64 Gray
HW7 1
S 3ea. Hinges FBB179 4.5 x 4.5 652 1
SC lea. Passage AL10s x Neptune 626
L lea. Closer 4111 689
GJ lea. Wall Stop 50C 626 I.
TR lea. Kickplate K0050 10" x 2" LDW x B4E 630
GJ 3ea. Silencers 64 Gray
1
HW8
S 3ea. Hinges F179 4.5 x 4.5 NRP 652 I
SC lea. Lockset AL80pd x Neptune 626
GJ lea. Overhead Stop 450S 630
GJ 3ea. Silencers 64 • Gray
ill
HW9
S 3ea. Hinges FBB179 4.5 x 4.5 652
TR lea. Push Plate 1001 -3 630
TR lea. Pull Plate 1010 -3 630
L lea. Closer 4111 689
GJ lea. Wall Stop 50C 626 1
TR lea. Kickplate K0050 10" x 2" LDW x B4E 630
GJ 3ea. Silencers 64 Gray
1
1
I
I TOC BUILDING ADDITION DOOR HARDWARE: 08710
SEP 00 PAGE 11
I HW10
1 S 1set Bifold BFC50 -
Assembly
1 I 2ea. Wire Pull 38 x (2) 504 washers 626
HW11
1 S 3ea. Hinges FBB191 4.5 x 4.5 NRP 630
SC lea. Lockset D94pd x Sparta 626
1 L lea. Closer 4111 689
GJ lea. Wall Stop 50C 626
TR lea. Kickplate K0050 10" x 2" LDW x B4E 630
I NG lea. Threshold 896 Alum.
NG 1 set Weatherstrip 5050C Char
i END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION
GLAZING: 08800
SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Section includes glazing for following applications:
1. Exterior Windows
2. Interior windows
3. Glazing in doors
4. Glazed entrances
1 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 08110: Steel Doors and Frames
B. Section 08210: Wood Doors
C. Section 08400: Entrances & Storefronts
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C 864 Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal
Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers.
B. ASTM C 920 Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
C. ASTM C 1036 Specification for Flat Glass.
D. ASTM C 1048 Specification for Heat - Treated Flat Glass -Kind HS, Kind
FT Coated and Uncoated Glass.
E. ASTM C 1330 Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing
9 9
F. ASTM E 774 Specification for Sealed Insulating Glass units.
G. ASTM E 1300 Practice for Determining Minimum Thickness of
Annealed Glass Required to Resist a Specified Load.
1 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide glazing materials capable of withstanding normal thermal
and wind loads without failure.
1
1
GLAZING: 08800 TOC BUILDING ADDITION ,
PAGE 2 SEP 00
B. Glass Design:
1. Glass thicknesses are minimums for detailing only.
2. Confirm glass thicknesses and provide glass lites with minimum
thicknesses complying with ASTM E 1300 according to design wind
loads applicable to Project according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design
Loads for Buildings and Other Structures." �.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each lass product and glazing material indicated.
9 P 9 9
B. Samples: With each product data submitted, include: 1
1. Glass: 12 x 12 inch samples of each type.
2. Sealants and Gaskets: 12 inches long of each type installed between
samples of material to be glazed, fully cured.
C. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated in Drawings, listing glass 1
types and thicknesses for each size opening and location.
D. Warranties: Two copies of each warranty specified, upon completion of Work
of this Section.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE !�
A. Installer Qualifications: Use skilled workers trained and experienced in 1
necessary crafts familiar with specified requirements and methods of
installation for proper performance of Work of this Section.
B. Source Limitations: Provide glass materials from one rims glass
P rY 9
manufacturer for each type of glass specified.
1. Insulating Glass: Obtain components for each type of unit from same
source as used in other applications for same components.
2. Provide glazing accessories from one source for each product and
installation method indicated.
C. Comply with applicable recommendations contained in Glass Association of
North America (GANA), unless more stringent requirements are indicated:
1. Glazing Manual. 1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION GLAZING: 0
G 08800
SEP 00 PAGE 3
2. Laminated Glass Design Guide.
D. Insulating Glass Certification: Permanently mark on each unit with
appropriate certification label of Insulating Glass Certification Council.
E. Tempered Glass: Comply with U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commission
Standard 16 CFR 1201 and ANSI Z97.1.
1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with safety glazing requirements of State Building Code, UBC
Section 2406.
B. Comply with wind loading requirements of State Building Code.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver with original la I
labels showing Manufacturer, each piece of glass.
Maintain labels on glass until cleaning for Substantial Completion.
B. Protect from damage and handle glazing materials according to
R manufacturer's instructions.
1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
1 A. Do not glaze when air temperature is below 40 degrees F, or when dust could
impair glazing compound adhesion.
B. Do not glaze when glazing channels are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or
other causes.
' 1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Field verify dimensions prior to fabrication; if vary significantly from Contract
Documents, obtain Architect's approval before proceeding.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Provide written warranty against failure of glazing products
due to defective materials or installation, including water leakage or air
infiltration in excess of specified standard, for a period of 2 years after date of
Substantial Completion.
1
1
GLAZING: 08800 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 4 SEP 00
B. Provide following special warranties:
1. Insulating Glass: 10 year labor and materials to warrant units against
failure of hermetic seal.
2. Coated Glass: 10 year labor and materials to replace unit deterioration
including peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in
metallic coating. 1
3. Laminated Glass: 5 year labor and materials to replace unit
deterioration including defects in edge separation, delamination
obstruction vision through glass, and blemishes*exceeding those
allowed in referenced standard.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 1
2.1 GLASS 1
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
indicated in Glass Product Schedule at end of Part 3.
B. Acceptable Manufacturer's of Primary Glass Products:
1. Guardian Industries.
2. LOF Libby- Owens -Ford Co.
3. PPG Industries, Inc. 1
4. Viracon
5. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section
01630. 1
C. Float Glass: ASTM C -1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3
(glazing select), class as indicated in Glass Product Schedule. 1
D. Tempered Glass: ASTM C -1048, Type I, (transparent glass, flat) Quality q3
(glazing select), class, kind, and condition as indicated in Glass Product
Schedule.
E. Processed Float Glass: Provide processed glass complying with
requirements indicated in Glass Product Schedule, and following:
1. Provide Kind HS (heat- strengthened) processed float glass where
needed to resist thermal stresses produced by differential shading of
lites.
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION GLAZING:
08800
SEP 00 PAGE 5
2. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) processed float glass where safety
glass required by Building Code.
3. Pyrolytic Coated (Low E) Float Glass: Glass with solar reflective
metallic oxide coating applied by pyrolytic deposition process.
F. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, interlayer of clear polyvinyl butyral sheet,
kind as indicated in Glass Product Schedule.
G. Insulating Glass: ASTM E 774, Class A units, complying with requirements in
Glass Product Schedule, and following:
1. Seal: Dual Seal, isobutyl primary with polysulfide secondary.
2. Provide Kind HS (heat- strengthened) float glass where needed to
1 resist thermal stresses produced by differential shading of lites.
3. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass where safety glass is
indicated, or required by Building Code.
2.2 GLAZING SEALANTS
1 A. Elastomeric Glazing Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920, Type S, Class 25,
Grade NS.
1. Manufacturers and Types:
a. Dow Corning 795.
b. General Electric Silpruf and Silglaze N.
1 c. Pecora 864.
d. Rhone - Poulenc Rmodorisil 5C and 6B.
e. Sonneborn Sonolastic Omniseal.
f. Tremco Spectrum 2.
2.3 GLAZING TAPE
1 A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl based elastomeric tape
9 P tY e P
complying with ASTM C 1241 and AAMA 800.
B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tape: Closed cell, PVC foam tape, factory coated
with adhesive on both surfaces, complying with AAMA 800, for applications
where tape acts as a primary seal or is used in combination with a full bead of
sealant.
C. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O.
D. Manufacturers: Norton Sealants, Tremco, or approved.
1
1
GLAZING: 08800 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 6 SEP 00
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide other materials complying with referenced standard and
requirements of glass manufacturers, and as required for applications
indicated.
B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket
manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks: 1
1. Material: ASTM C864; EPDM or neoprene rubber, unless otherwise
required for compatibility with glazing compound and sealant. 1
2. Shore A Durometer Hardness: 80 -90
3. Width and Length: 1/8 inch wider than glass unit to be supported and
1/16 to 1/8 inch narrower than glazing pocket, with length to support
glass unit without excessive pressure on glass edge.
D. Spacers and Edge Blocks: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of 1
Shore A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain
glass lites in place, and to limit glass lateral movement. 1
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze
openings as indicated for Project.
1. Provide edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and
bite complying with referenced standards and requirements of product
manufacturers.
2. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges.
PART 3 EXECUTION
1
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed.
1. Verify manufacturing and installation tolerances for size, squareness,
and offsets at corners.
2. Verify presence and functioning of weep system. 1
1
i
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION GLAZING: 08800
1 SEP 00 PAGE 7
3. Verify minimum required face or edge clearances.
B. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of Work.
1 1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.2 COORDINATION
' A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate
provision in work of those trades for interface with Work of this Section.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install work of this Section in accordance with:
1. Construction documents.
2. Requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
3. Manufacturer's and referenced standard's recommended installation
procedures.
B. Clean glazing channels, stops, and rabbets to receive glazing materials,
making free from obstructions and deleterious substances.
1. Remove protective coatings which might cause failure in adhesion or
1 interfere with bond of sealants.
2. Comply with manufacturers' instructions for final wiping of surfaces
immediately prior to application of primer and glazing sealants or
tapes.
3. Prime surfaces to receive glazing sealants in accordance with
manufacturers' recommendations.
C. Locate setting blocks at sills one quarter of width of glass in from each end of
1 glass, unless otherwise recommended by glass manufacturer.
1. Use blocks of proper size to support glass in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Provide edge blocking where needed to prevent glass from moving
sideways.
�. 3. Provide spacers for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches, to
separate glass from stops; except where continuous glazing gaskets
or felts are provided.
1
1
GLAZING: 08800
T
1
OC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 8 SEP 00
a. 1
Locate spacers no more than 24 inches apart, and no closer
than 12 inches to a corner.
b. Place spacers opposite one another. •
c. Make bite of spacer on glass 1/8 inch minimum.
d. Use spacer thickness equal to sealant width, except for glazing
tape use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness
of tape.
D. Inspect each piece of glass immediately prior to start of installation.
1. Do not install items which are improperly sized, have damaged edges,
1
or are scratched, abraded, or damaged in any other manner.
2. Set glass so distortion waves, if present, run in horizontal direction.
3. Set glass in a manner which produces greatest possible degree of 111
uniformity in appearance
E. Glaze steelwork with closed cell tape bedding and silicone sealant.
F. Do not use 2 different glazing materials in same joint system. 1
G. Miter -cut and seal joints of glazing gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations to provide watertight and airtight seal at corners and other
locations where joints are required.
H. Compress glazing tape or gaskets at least 25 percent of material thickness, 1
with minimum finished thickness of 3/32 inch.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION 1
A. Remove excessive glazing compound from glazing and adjacent surfaces
without damaging glass or adjacent surfaces.
B. Replace broken, cracked, scratched, or otherwise damaged glass.
C. Protect glass from breakage after installation by installing streamers or
ribbons, suitably attached to framing and held free from glass. 1
1. Do not apply warning markings, streamers, ribbons, or other items
directly to glass. 1
D. Do not store materials close enough to glass to create a heat trap and cause
breakage. 1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION GLAZING: 08800
SEP 00 PAGE 9
1 E. Protect glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and masonry
surfaces from build up of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.
F. Remove identifying labels and clean glass and glazing surfaces on both sides
just prior to Substantial Completion.
3.5 GLASS PRODUCT SCHEDULE
A. Glass Type GL -1: Insulating glass units complying with following
1 requirements:
1. Thickness of Each Lite: 1 inch.
2. Interspace Content: Air.
3. Coated Clear Indoor Lite: Condition C (other coated glass), Class 1
(clear) float glass.
4. Uncoated Clear Outdoor Lite: Class 1 (clear) float glass.
5. Low - Emissivity Coating: Pyrolytic on third surface.
B. Glass type GL -2: Single pane glass units complying with following
requirements:
1. Thickness of Lite: 1/4 inch.
2. Class 1 (clear) float glass.
1
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION TRANSLUCENT A
S NDWICH PANEL SYSTEM: 08950
SEP 00 PAGE 1
PAR 1
T GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Design Build Translucent sandwich panel system as shown on drawing and
specified herein.
' 1. Aluminum framing and flashings
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
' A. Section 01340: Design Build Requirements.
B. Section 07510: Built -up Bituminous Roofing
C. Section 07600: Flashing and Sheet Metal
D. Section 07900: Joint Sealers
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Translucent panel system must be listed by International Conference of
Building Officials as a sandwich panel construction.
B. Materials and products shall be manufactured by a company continuously
and regularly employed in manufacture of translucent panel systems for a
period of at least 10 consecutive years and which can show evidence of
specified materials being satisfactorily used on minimum of 6 projects of
similar size and scope.
i 1. Minimum of 3 projects to have been in successful use for 5 years or
longer.
C. Installer: Approved by manufacture which has been in business of erecting
insulated translucent sandwich panel systems for 5 years, including 2 years
installing specified manufacturer's product, and satisfactory complete 3
projects of similar size and scope.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Design Drawings: Detail system components, connections to building,
1 interface with other materials and methods of construction.
1
1
TRANSLUCENT SANDWICH PANEL SYSTEM: 08950 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
1. Design drawings to be stamped and signed by engineers i
g g p g y e ginee s licensed in
State projected is located.
B. Structural calculations: Stamped and signed by design engineer registered in
State of Oregon, showing structural adequacy of translucent panel system
and connections to building structure.
C. Current certified Test Reports by independent testing organization to show
compliance with following:
1. Flame Spread and Smoke Development (ASTM E -84) 1
2. Burn Extent (ASTM D -635)
3. Color Difference (ASTM D- 2244), on white without protective
coatings.
1
4. Impact Strength (Falling Ball method)
5. Bond Strength (ASTM C -297 and ASTM D -1002)
6. Accelerated Aging (ASTM D -1037)
7. Thermal Resistance "U" Value (NFRC 100 -91)
8. Class A Burning Brand (ASTM E -108)
9. ICBO Listing as a Sandwich Panel
D. Current U.L. listing documenting interior face sheets are manufactured by
translucent panel fabricator.
E. Certified proof of regular, independent quality control monitoring under a
building code review and listing program.
F. Maintenance manuals for panel systems with a sequence of items, materials 1
and methods used for proper cleaning and maintenance.
1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING 1
A. Store translucent panels on long edge, above ground, blocked and tied off
and under cover to prevent warping.
B. Allow air to circulate freely around and under material to prevent excessive
condensation in panels.
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS 1
A. Kalwall Corporation. 1
1
1
I TOC BUILDING ADDITION TRANSLUCENT SANDWICH PANEL SYSTEM: 08950
I SEP 00 PAGE 3
2.2 TRANSLUCENT FACING
I A. Translucent Fiberglass Face Sheets:
I 1. Manufactured by translucent panel manufacturer
2. Glass fiber reinforced thermoset resins designed for architectural use.
I B. Flammability of Interior Face Sheet:
1. Flamespread maximum 50, and smoke developed maximum 250, as
1 tested by ASTM E 84.
2. Burn Extent: 1 inch or less, as tested by ASTM D 635.
3. Faces must not deform, deflect or drip when subjected to fire or flame.
I C. Weatherability of Exterior Face Sheet:
1 1. Manufactured with a full- thickness color -fast resin that does not rely on
a coating or film for long term color stability.
I a. Delta E (Color Difference): Tested in accordance with ASTM D
2244, full thickness of white exterior face sheet shall not
change color more than 3.0 units when exposed to 5 years of
I outdoor weathering in south Florida sloping at 7 degrees facing
south.
b. Delta L (Light/Dark Difference): Tested in accordance with
' ASTM D 2244, exterior white face sheet shall not darken more
than 0.2 units when exposed to 150 degrees F for 2 weeks.
1 2. Exterior face shall have a permanent glass erosion barrier to provide
maximum long term resistance to reinforcing fiber exposure and shall
be warranted against same for 25 years.
1 a. Films or coatings are not acceptable.
I 3. Exterior face sheet shall have a self - cleaning thermoset acrylic
urethane surface molecularly bonded under factory- controlled
conditions.
1 a. Surface finish shall be minimum of 1.2 mils thick and be fully
field restorable if worn or damaged.
1 D. Face Sheets:
1 1. Exterior face sheets: 0.070 inch thick, crystal.
1
1
TRANSLUCENT SANDWICH PANEL SYSTEM: 08950 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 4 SEP 00 1
2. Interior face sheets: 0.045 inch thick, crystal.
3. Sheets: Uniform color without splotchy appearance, varying not more
than ±10 percent in thickness.
4. Faces Sheets: Completely free of ridges and wrinkles and other
deformities which prevent proper surface contact in bonding to
aluminum grid core.
a. Clusters of air bubbles or pinholes which collect moisture and
dirt are not acceptable. ,
E. Strength: Provide exterior face sheets shall be uniform in strength and repel a
impact equal to 60 ft. lbs. without fracture or tear in accordance with SPI ,
Shatter Resistance Test.
2.3 LIGHT TRANSMITTANCE
1
A. Two levels: As indicated in drawings. 1
2.4 STRUCTURAL GRID CORE
A. Aluminum I- Beams: Thermally broken, engineered alloy, tempered with
provisions for mechanical interlocking of mullion to perimeter, to prevent high
and low intersections and providing for full surface bonding with face material. 1
B. I- beams: Minimum 7/16 inch wide, with flange surfaces machined to
tolerances of not greater than + 0.002 inch for flat panels. ,
2.5 ADHESIVE
A. Laminate Adhesive: Heat and pressure resin -type engineered for structural
sandwich panel use.
B. Adhesive: Comply with testing requirements specified by International
Conference of Building Officials "Acceptance Criteria for Sandwich Panel
Adhesive ".
1. Tensile strength must be minimum 750 PSI per ASTM C 297 after 2
exposures to 6 cycles each of aging conditions in ASTM D 1037.
2. Shear strength, measured as an average of 5 exposures by ASTM D
1
1002:
a. 540 PSI after 50 percent relative humidity at 73 degrees F.
b. 700 PSI after accelerated aging by ASTM D 1183. 1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION TRANSLUCENT SANDWICH PANEL SYSTEM: 08950
SEP 00 PAGE 5
c. 60 PSI after exposure to 182 degrees F.
d. 715 PSI after full cycle soak.
e. 1400 PSI after 500 hour oxygen bomb.
2.6 PANEL CONSTRUCTION
A. Translucent panels shall be a true structural sandwich panel of flat fiberglass
' sheets bonded with adhesives to a grid core of mechanically interlocking
aluminum I -beams under a controlled process of heat and pressure.
B. Adhesive bonding line shall be straight, cover entire width of I -beam and have
a neat, sharp edge.
1. White spots at intersections of muntins and mullions shall not be larger
1 than 3/64 inch in width nor exceed 4 for each 50 square feet of panel.
C. Translucent panels thickness: 2 -3/4 inch.
D.
Panel U- Value:0.23.
E. Grid patterns: Nominal 12 inches by 24 inches, symmetrical about horizontal
centerline of each flat panel.
2.7 BATTENS AND PERIMETER CLOSURE SYSTEM
A. Extruded aluminum 6063 -T5 and 6063 -T6 alloy closure system, factory
sealed to panels.
B. Pre -apply flexible sealing tape to closure system under factory controlled
conditions.
2.8 FASTENERS
A. Fasteners exposed to weather: 300 series stainless steel.
Fasteners: Stainless steel with weather sealing B. Exterior Cap Faste 9 washers.
C. Anchor bolts to building: Zinc plated steel as engineered.
' D. Exposed fasteners: Finished to match aluminum components.
1
TRANSLUCENT SANDWICH PANEL SYSTEM: 08950 TOC BUILDING UIL NG ADDITION
PAGE 6 SEP 00
2.9 FINISH
A. Exposed aluminum: Architectural paint finish conforming to performance 1
requirements of AAMA 2604.
1. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard color chart.
2.10 ISOLATION TAPE
1
A. 3M Scotchrap -50, 10 mil vinyl corrosion protection tape or approved.
1. Color: Black
PART 3 EXECUTION 1
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Inspect installed work of other trades and verify fy that it is satisfactorily
completed for proper installation of panel systems.
1. Do not proceed with installation until any discrepancies have been
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Isolate dissimilar materials with isolation tape.
B. Protect surrounding work and secure staging with protection as required to 1
prevent damage to adjacent materials.
3.3 INSTALLATION 1
A. Install translucent systems in accordance with reviewed engineered design
drawings.
B. Install translucent systems level, plumb and properly aligned with uniform
joints and reveals.
1. Remove and replace any components that may be defective or are
damaged during installation.
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION TRANSLUCENT SANDWICH PANEL
SYSTEM: 08950
SEP00 PAGE7
1 C. After other trades have completed work on adjacent m
p � t aterial, carefully
Inspect translucent panel installation and make adjustments necessary to
1 insure proper weather -tight performance after other trades have completed
work on adjacent material.
1 D. Leave interior and exterior surfaces of translucent panel systems free of
protective material, identification labels and excess sealant.
1 E. Clean interior and exterior surfaces translucent panel systems prior to
substantial completion in accordance with manufacturer's recommended
methods.
1 END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
MN NM — — r ,— OM MI — WO I — N — S= OM — M
TOC Building ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE: 09000
AUG 00 PAGE 1
Room I Floor Base Wall Ceiling Notes
Number; Name N 1 E S W Finish Height
i
Lower Floor ,
101 Projection Room SV B -2 P -1 P -1 P -1 P -1 ACT -1 9' -0"
102 1 Storage SV B -2 P -1 P -1 P -1 P -1 ACT -1 9' -0"
103 Leadership Development Center C -1/C -2 B -1 P -1 P -1 P -1 P -1 ACT -1 /GYP 9'- 0 "/10' -6" 1,2,3,4,
104 SV B -2 P -1 i P -1 P -1 P -1 ACT -1 9' -0" 6,9,
105 Lounge C -3 B -2 P -1 I P -1 P -1 P -1 ACT -1 9' -0"
106 Hallway C -3 . B -1 P -1,2 P -1,2 P -1,2 i P -1,2 ACT -1 9' -0"
107 I Office C -3 B -2 P -1 WC -1 P -1 i P -1 ACT -1 9' -0" '
107A' Closet C -3 B -2 P -1 I WC -1 P -1 P -1 ACT -1 9' -0"
108 Office C -3 B -2 P -1 P -1 P -1 WC -1 ACT -1 9' -0"
1091Office C -3 B -2 P -1 P -1 P -1 WC -1 ACT -1 9' -0"
1101Office C -3 B -2 P -1 WC -1 P -1 P -1 ACT -1 9' -0"
111; Publications Office C -3 B -2 P -1 WC -1 P -1 P -1 ACT -1 9' -0"
112 Office C -3 B -2 P -1 P -1 P -1 P -1 ACT -1 9' -0"
113 Legal Office C -3 B -2 P -1 WC -1 P -1 P -1 ACT -1 9' -0"
114 I Legal Office C -3 B -2 P -1 P -1 P -1 WC -1 ACT -1 9' -0"
115 Hallway C -3 B -1 P -1 P -1 P -1 P -1 ACT -1 9' -0"
116 Work Stations C -3 B -1 P -1 P -1 P -1 P -1 ACT -1 9' -0"
117 Copy /File C -3 B -2 P -1 P -1 P -1 P -1 ACT -1 9' -0" 6,9
118 Storage SV B -2 P -1 P -1 P -1 P -1 ACT -1 9' -0"
119 Women's Restroom T -1 T -1 P -3/T -2 P -3/T -2 P -3 P -3 GYP 8' -0" 8,13,
120 Men's Restroom T -1 T -1 P -3 P -3/T -2 P -3/T -2 P -3 GYP 8' -0" 8,13,
121 Conference Room C -1 /C -2 B -1 P -1 P -1 P -1 P -1 - Existing
122 Employer's Research Center C -1/C -2 B -1 P -1/F -1 P- 1,2/F -1 WD -1 P- 1,2/F -1 P -1/WD VARIES 10,11,12,15,
123 Elec. Room SC B -2 P -1 P -1 P -1 P -1 P -1 -
124 Mail Room SV B -2 P -1 P -1 P -1 P -1 ACT -1 Existing
125 Hallway C -3,4 B -1 P -1,2 P -1,2 P -1,2 P -1,2 ACT -1/WD Existing
125A Closet C -3 B -2 P -1 P -1 . P -1 P -1 ACT -1 Existing
Main Floor
2001 Entry 1 C -2 i B -1 i P -1 I P -1 I P -1 I P -1 I ACT -1 I 8' -6" 15
K: \Toc \Finish -1 \09000.xIs
TOC Building ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE: 09000
AUG 00 PAGE 2
Room Floor Base Wall C eiling Notes
Numbed Name 1 N E S W Finish Height
201 ' Work Stations C -3 B -1 P -1 P -1 P -1 P -1 ACT -1 8' -6"
202 Office C -3 B -2 WC -1 P -1 P -1 P -1 ACT -1 8' -6"
203 Work Stations C -3 B -1 P -1 P -1 P -1 I P -1 1 ACT -1 8' -6"
204 Office C -3 B -2 1 P -1 1 P -1 P -1 WC-1 ACT -1 8' -6"
205 Work Area/ Storage C -3 B -1 I P -1 P -1 P -1 P -1 ACT -1 8' -6" 6
206 1 Work Stations C -3 B -1 ; P -1 1 P -1 1 P -1 P -1 ACT -1 8' -6"
207 Conference Area C -1/C -2 1 B -1 P -1 P -1 P -1 j P -1 ACT -1 8' -6" 1
208 Men's Restroom T -1 I T -1 P -3 P -3 P -3 P -3 P -3 1 8' -6" 18,13,
209 Women's Restroom T -1 T -1 I P -3 P -3 P -3 P -3 P -3 8' -6" 1 8,13,
210 Office C -3 B -2 1 P -1 WC -1 P -1 P -1 ACT -1 8' -6" i
211 Office C -3 B -2 P -1 P -1 P -1 WC -1 ACT -1 8' -6"
212 Office C -3 B -2 P -1 WC -1 P -1 P -1 ACT -1 8' -6"
21310ffice C -3 B -2 P -1 P -1 P -1 WC -1 ACT -1 8' -6"
2141 President's Office C -1 B -1 WC -1 P -1 P -1 P -1 ACT -1 8' -6"
214A Closet C -3 B -2 P -1 P -1 P -1 P -1 ACT -1 8' -6"
2151 Work Stations C -3 B -1 P -1 P -1 P -1 P -1 ACT -1 8' -6"
21610ffice C -3 B -2 WC -1 P -1 P -1 P -1 ACT -1 8' -6"
217 Office C -3 8-2 P -1 P -1 WC -1 P -1 ACT -1 8' -6"
218 Conference Room C -1/C -2 B -1 P -1 P -1 P -1 P -1 ACT -1 /GYP 8' -8" 1
219 Office C -3 B -2 P -1 P -1 WC -1 P -1 ACT -1 8' -6"
220 Work Stations C -3 B -1 P -1 P -1 I P -1 P -1 ACT -1 8' -6"
221 Elev. Room SC B -2 P -1 P -1 P -1 P -1 P -1 -
222 Work Stations • C -3 B -1 P -1 P -1 P -1 P -1 ACT -1 8' -6"
2231EIev. Lobby C -2 I B -1, B -3 P -1 P -1 P -1 P -1 ACT -1 8' -6" 5
2241 HALL • C -3 1 B -1 P -1 P -1 P -1 P -1 1 ACT -2 8' -6"
224A Closet C -3 1 B -2 1 P -1 P -1 P -1 I P -1 1 ACT -1 8' -6"
2251 HALL C -3/C -2 B -1 P -1 P -1 P -1 P -1 ACT -2 8' -6"
226IOffice C -3 B -2 WC -1 P -1 P -1 P -1 ACT -1 8' -6"
1 1
K: \Toc \Finish- 1 \09000.xls
MI - r - r 1111111 NM - i O• MS i NM • -• I
I - -- MS OM i-- OS OM r N—
TOC Building ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE: 09000
AUG 00 PAGE 3
Room Floor Base Wall Ceiling Notes
Numbed Name N I E 1 S 1 W Finish Height
I
•
j I 1
1
K,1Toc\Finish- 1109000• xls
TOC- OFFICE REMODEL ROOM FINISH
SCHEDULE NOTES: 09001
SEP 00 PAGE 1
ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE LEGEND
ACT Acoustical Ceiling Tile
B Base
C Carpet
F Fabric
G Grout
GWB Gypsum Wall Board
P Paint
PL Plastic Laminate
SV Sheet Vinyl
ST Stone
1 T Tile
WC Wall Covering
WD Wood
1 WP Wall Panel
1 GENERAL NOTES:
' 1. Re -Use salvaged relites for new office relites.
2. All tile grout to be sealed. See specifications.
3. Column bases at Employer's Research Center to be wood. See details.
FINISH SCHEDULE NOTES:
1 1. C -1 to be field carpet and C -2 to be border carpet.
2. Acoustical Ceiling Tile at 10' -6' ceiling height and gypsum board soffit at 9' -0"
1 ceiling height.
3. Coordinate with Operable Partition Manufacturers for structural load and design
requirements.
1 4. See drawings for marker board and tackable wall covering (WC -2) locations.
' G:\resr \specs \toc office remode1\09001.wpd
1
ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE NOTES: 09001 TOC-OFFICE
0 TOC OFFICE REMODEL
PAGE 2 SEP 00
5. Refer to sheet 8.1 for existing wood base transition to new wood base..
6. Overhead and base cabinets to use plastic laminate PL -1, and countertop and
backsplash to use PL -2. 1
7. PL -3 vanity counter top and toilet partitions.
8. Cabinet interior will be almond melamine.
9. Columns to have wood base, see drawings sheet A7.1: by manufacturer. 1
10. Existing metal shelves to be cut to 60" H and wrapped with wood veneer, see
drawings A.7.1. 1
11. Walls to be repaired and re- painted after removing perimeter corridor at lower
level.
12. Use bullnose tile at top row and T1 -B for wall base..
13. Use ST -1 by the columns where indicated on drawings A7.1.
1
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
G: \resr \specs \toc office remode1\09001.wpd 1
1
1
I TOC- OFFICE REMODEL MATERIALS & FINISHES SCHEDULE: 09002
SEP 00 PAGE 1
ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE LEGEND
I
ACT Acoustical Ceiling Tile
I B Base
C Carpet
G Grout
I GWB Gypsum Wall Board
GYP Gypsum
P Paint
I PL Plastic Laminate
ST Stone
SV Sheet Vinyl
T Tile
WC Wall Covering
WD Wood
1 WP Wall Panel
1 ACOUSTIC CEILING TILE:
I ACT -1: Manufacturer: Armstrong
Product: Cortega
Edge profile: Angled Tegular
I Color: White
Item Number: 703
Dimensions: 24x48x5/8"
I ACT -2: Manufacturer: Armstrong
Product: Cortega Second Look I
1 Edge Profile: Angled Tegular
Color: White
Item Number: 2765
1 Dimensions: 24x48x3/4"
1 SHEET VINYL:
I SV: Manufacturer: Mannington
Style: Assurance
Color: 16007 Putty
1
1
MATERIALS AND FINISHES SCHEDULE: TOC-OFFICE
1
SC EDU E. 09002 TOC OFFICE REMODEL
PAGE 2 SEP 00
BASE: 1
B -1 3/4 inch x 4 inch plain Sliced Cherry
B -2 Manufacturer: Flexco
Size: 4" Continuous Coved base
Style: Wallflowers 1
Color: WF -071 Black/Brown
B -3 Wood Base: To match existing 1
FABRIC: 1
F -1: Manufacturer: Carnegie
Style: Panel Fabric
Pattern: 5106 Landscape Down
Color: 34
Width: 66 inches
Content: 100% Polyester
1
TILE:
T -1 Manufacturer: Dal -Tile
Style: French Quarter
Grout: Sanded Color -TBD
Size: T -1A 12 inches x 12 inches
T-1B 6 inches x 12 inches
T -2 Manufacturer: Dal -Tile
Style: matte finish
Color: 0763
Grout: Sanded color -TBD
Size: 6 inches x 6 inches
PLASTIC LAMINATE:
PL -1 Manufacturer: Pionite
Color: Sage Corel AV781 Suede
PL -2 Manufacturer: Laminart
Color: 5029 -T Orion Textured
1
TOC- OFFICE REMODEL MATERIALS AND FINISHES SCHEDULE: 09002
SEP 00 PAGE 3
PL -3 Manufacturer: Pionite
Color: Slate impression AV741 -S Suede
WALL PANEL:
WP -1 Species: Maple, plain sliced
Finish: Transparent, Clear
Wall batten
Species: Cherry, plain sliced
Finish: Transparent, Clear.
1 CARPET:
C -1 Manufacturer: Designweave
Construction: Tip sheared Loop over loop pile
Style: 987 Trovata
Color: 339 Cognac
Fiber: Monsanto LX1 Yarn Dyed Nylon
Weight: 34 oz/sq. yd.
' Pattern Repeat: 18 "W x 36 "L
Backing: Primary: woven polypropylene
' C -2 Manufacturer: Designweave
Construction: Precision cut and loop
Style: Pinnacle 933
1 Color: Pewter 998
Fiber: Monsanto LXI Continuous filament nylon
Weight: 28 oz/sq.yd
1 Backing: Primary: Reinforced woven polypropylene
C -3 Manufacturer: Designweave
Construction: Loop over loop
Style: Chain Reaction 994
Fiber: Monsanto LXI dyed nylon
Weight: 32 oz. / sq. yd.
Pattern Repeat: 18 inches x 18 inches
1 Backing: Primary: Woven Polypropylene
1
1
MATERIALS AND FINISHES SCHEDULE: 09002 TOC- OFFICE REMODEL I
PAGE 4 SEP 00
C -3 ALT Manufacturer: Designweave
DEDUCT Construction: Loop Pile Graphics I
Style: Palladian 996
Color: Match Designer's sample #2326Q
Fiber: Yarn dyed nylon '
Weight: 28 oz/sq.yd
Backing: Primary: woven polypropylene
C-4 Manufacturer: The Andersen Company I
Pattern: Waterhog Tile
Color: 157 Medium Grey
1
Face Molded reinforced needle punch
Yarn: 100% solution - dyed low static polypropylene
Pile Height: 1/4 inches
Face Fiber Weight: 135 oz. /sy.
Total Weight: 80 -85 oz. /sy.
PAINT:
1
P -1 Manufacturer: Miller Paint
Color: 8711 W Misty Mica
1
P -2 Manufacturer: Benjamin Moore Paint
Color 1572
1
P -3 Manufacturer: Miller Paint
Color: 8309 W Bedouin Beige
1
STONE:
1
ST -1 Manufacturer: Oregon Tile & Marble
Style: OTM #606 -H I
Color: Ostrich Grey
WALL COVERING: 1
WC -1 Manufacturer: Wolf Gorden
Style: Vycon Natural Effects V1
Ripple Diamond Accent
Y44307RPDA
1
Canon
Type 2
1
1 TOC- OFFICE REMODEL MATERIALS AND FINISHES SCHEDULE: 09002
SEP 00 PAGE 5
1
WC -2 Manufacturer: Eurotex
1 Style: Tretford Wall Carpet
Color: 555 Wild Rice
1 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
1 Match Existing
1 END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION GYPSUM BOARD: 09250
I SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART1 GENERAL
1 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Gypsum Board.
B. Accessories.
I 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
1 A. Section 06100: Rough Carpentry, for framing.
B. Section 09300: Tile, for finish material on tile backer board.
I
Section 09900: Painting - for primer surfacer to bring level 4 finish walls to
C. Sect g p g
I level 5.
1.3 REFERENCES
1 A. ASTM C 11 Terminology Relating to Gypsum and Related Building
Materials and Systems.
I B. ASTM C 36 Specification for Gypsum Wallboard.
1 C. ASTM C 442 Specification for Gypsum Backing Board and Coreboard.
D. ASTM C 475 Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for
1 Finishing Gypsum Board.
E. ASTM C 557 Specification for Adhesives for Fastening Gypsum Wallboard
' to Wood Framing.
I F. ASTM C 630 Specification for Water- Resistant Gypsum Backing Board.
G. ASTM C 645 Specification for Non -Load Bearing (Axial) Bearing Steel
I Stud, Runners (Track), and Rigid Furr Channels for Screw
Application of Gypsum Board.
I H. ASTM C 754 Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to
Received Screw - Attached Gypsum.
1 I. ASTM C 840 Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.
1
GYPSUM BOARD: 09250
TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00 1
J. ASTM C 919 Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications.
K. ASTM C 931 Specification for Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board. 1
L. ASTM C 954 Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of
Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases to Studs from 0.033
in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness.
M. ASTM C 1002 Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of
Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases.
N. ASTM C 1047 Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and
Gypsum Veneer Base.
O. ASTM C 1178 Specification for Glass Mat Water-Resistant
p ater Resistant Gypsum
Backing Board. 1
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 and GA -505 1
for definitions of terms for gypsum board assemblies.
1.5 SUBMITTALS 1
A. Product Data for each type of product specified, including manufacturer's 1
specifications and other data necessary to show compliance with specified
requirements.
B. Mock -ups:
1. At an area on site where approved by Architect, provide a mock -up 1
gypsum wallboard panel.
a. Provide one mock -up panel for each gypsum wallboard finish
used in Work.
b. Minimum panel width 8 feet wide by full height of partition.
c. Revise as necessary to secure Architect's approval.
d. Approved mock -ups may be incorporated into finished Work.
2. Mock -up panels, when approved by Architect, shall be used as datum
points for comparison with remainder of Work of this Section for 1
purpose of acceptance or rejection.
3. Demolish rejected mock -up panels and remove from job site.
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION GYPSUM BOARD: 09250
' SEP 00 PAGE 3
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use skilled workers trained and experienced in necessary crafts and familiar
with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of Work of
this Section.
B. Installer: Company with not less than 3 years experience installing gypsum
1 board systems in project of similar size, quality and complexity under present
name.
C. Comply with the following standards:
1. Gypsum Association Document GA -216, Application and Finishing of
1 Gypsum Board.
2. ASTM C -840, Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum
Board.
3. Northwest Wall and Ceiling Bureau recommendations for gypsum
wallboard finishes.
1 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. For fire- resistant rated partitions, construct as required to obtain designated
rating.
' B. Line blockouts in walls for recessed toilet accessories, fire extinguisher
cabinets, and the like, with gypsum board as necessary to preserve fire -
resistive rating of partition.
' 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand
name and identification of manufacturer, with labels identifying fire- resistance
rating and water resistance.
B. Store gypsum panels flat in a manner to prevent sagging.
1 C. Do not overload floor decks with concentrated accumulation of materials.
D. Store above ground, under cover and protected from damage.
1
1
1
GYPSUM BOARD: 09250 TOC BUILDING ADDITION I
PAGE 4 SEP 00
1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS I
A. Maintain between 55 degrees F and 75 degrees F for 24 hours before 1
installation, during installation, and for 24 hours after materials have dried.
B. Maintain at least 30 foot. candles of illumination measured 3 feet above floor 1
in Work spaces during joint treatment.
C. Maintain sufficient ventilation for proper joint treatment drying. 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
I
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Metal Products: I
1. Beadex 1
2. United States Gypsum Co.
3. Milcor
1
B. Gypsum Products:
1. Domtar Gypsum. 1
2. Georgia Pacific Corp.
3. James Hardie Gypsum.
I
4. National Gypsum Co.; Gold Bond Building Products Division.
5. United States Gypsum Co.
C. Plastic trim: I
1. AMICO 1
2. Plastic Components, Inc.
3. Vinyl Corp.
D. Special Moldings and Reveals: Fry Reglet Corporation.
111
E. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01630. 1
2.2 GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS
I
A. General: Provide products in 48 inch widths and in such lengths as will result
in a minimum of joints. 1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION
GYPSUM BOARD: 09250
SEP 00 PAGE 5
B. Gypsum Board: ASTM C 36, 5/8 inches thick with tapered edges.
1 1. Fire retardant Type X.
C. Gypsum Backing Board for Multilayer Applications: ASTM C 442, 5/8 inches
thick with square or F & G edges.
1. Fire retardant Type X.
D. Water- Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630, 5/8 inches thick with
1 tapered edges.
1. Fire retardant Type X.
' E. Glass -Mat Water - Resistant Gypsum Tile Backing Board: AS
yp g ASTM C 1178, 5/8
inches thick.
1
1. Fire retardant Type X.
2. Product: "Dens- Shield Tile Backer" by Georgia- Pacific, Corp.
F. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: ASTM C 931, 5/8 inches thick.
1 1. Fire retardant Type X.
2. Manufacturer: United States Gypsum, or approved.
1 2.3 CEMENTITIOUS BACKER BOARD
1 A. ASTM A118.9 1 /2 inch thickness.
B. Products: Provide one of the following:
1. Wonderboard: Custom Building Products.
1 2. DUROCK Cement Board: United States Gypsum Co.
3. UtiI -A- Crete: FinPan.
1 C. Joint Reinforcement: 2 inch wide coated glass fiber tape.
2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES
1 RETAIN "FRAMING AND" IF RC RESILIENT CHANNEL FURRING
SPECIFIED IN THIS SECTION
1
1
Y 1
GYPSUM BOARD: 09250 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 6 SEP 00
A. Comply with ASTM C 1047 for trim accessories formed of metal or plastic,
shapes as indicated in Fig. 1. 1
1. Form metal accessories from zinc - coated steel not lighter than 26
gage. 1
B. Casing beads: Provide channel shape with an exposed wing, and with a
concealed wing not less than 7/8 inches wide, U -bead or LC -bead, to suit
1
condition indicated.
C. Corner beads: Provide angle shapes with wings not less than 7/8 inches
wide and perforated for nailing and joint treatment, or with combination metal
and paper wings bonded together, not less than 1 -1/4 inches wide and
suitable for joint treatment. ,
D. Control Joints: One -piece control joint formed from rolled zinc with V- shaped
slot and removable strip covering slot opening.
2.5 JOINTING SYSTEM
1
A. Provide a jointing system, including reinforcing tape and compound, designed
as a system to be used together as recommended for use by both
manufacturers of gypsum board and joint treatment materials.
1. Joint Treatment Materials: ASTM C 475.
2. Provide glass mesh joint tape for use with Glass -Mat Water- Resistant
1
Gypsum Tile Backing Board.
2.6 SEALANTS
1
A. Acoustic Sealant:
1. Exposed and Concealed Joints:
a. ChemRex, Inc., Contech Brands; PL Acoustical Sealant.
b. Pecora; AC -20 Acoustical and Insulation Sealant.
c. U.S. Gypsum; "Sheetrock" Acoustical Sealant.
2. Concealed Joints:
a. Miracle; 21
b. Pecora; BA 98 Acoustical Sealant.
c. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.
B. Water Resistant Sealant: Clear translucent silicone with mildew inhibiter.
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION GYPSUM BOARD: 09250
SEP00 PAGE7
' 1. Manufacturer:
' a. Dow Corning 786.
b. General Electric.
c. Tremco Proglaze
1 C. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01630.
2.7 FASTENING DEVICES
A. ASTM C 1002 and GA 216:
1. Gypsum Board: Flat -head steel screws, shouldered, designed for use
with power- driven tools, with self- tapping threads and self - drilling
' points.
a. Wood Studs: Not less than 1 -1/4 inch long.
b. Metal Studs: Not less than 1 inch long.
2. Provide steel screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening
gypsum board to steel members that are 21 to 12 gage thick.
' 3. Cementitious Backer Board: Type and size recommended by board
manufacturer.
' 2.8 PANEL ADHESIVES
A. Fastening Adhesive for Wood: ASTM C 557.
B. Fastening Adhesive for Metal: Special adhesive recommended for fastening
gypsum panels to steel framing.
' C. Laminating Adhesive: Special adhesive or joint compound recommended for
laminating gypsum panels
D. Spot Grout: ASTM C 475, setting -type joint compound recommenced for
' spot- grouting hollow metal door frames.
2.9 OTHER MATERIALS
1 A. Provide other materials required for a complete and proper installation.
1
1
1
1
GYPSUM BOARD: 09250 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 8 SEP 00
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
1
A. Examine conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed.
1. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of
Work.
2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
1
A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate
provision in work of those trades for interface with Work of this Section. 1
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install and finish sum board to comply with ASTM
gyp p y STM C 840 and
GA -216.
1
1. Install gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C 754 on non - loading
bearing steel framing complying with ASTM C 645.
2. Install gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C 955 on load bearing
steel framing.
3. Install gypsum board in Tight contact but not forced into place, with not
more than 1/16 inch between panels.
4. Support edges with framing members.
5. At internal and external corners, conceal cut edges of boards by
1
overlapping covered edges of abutting boards.
6. Maintain 3/8 inch minimum distance between fastener and board
edge.
1
a. Drive specified screws with clutch - controlled power
screwdrivers.
b. Dimple board surface 1/32 inch with fastener; do not fracture
face paper.
7. Screw Fastener Schedule:
a. Panel Perimeter Spacing: 8 inches o.c., unless otherwise noted.
b. Panel Intermediate Support Spacing:
1) Walls: 12 inches o.c., typical.
2) Walls with Panels as Tile Substrate: 8 inches o.c.
3). Ceilings: 8 inches o.c.
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION GYPSUM BOARD: 09250
SEP 00 PAGE 9
8. Isolate perimeter of non -load bearing partitions at structural
1 abutments, except at floors.
a. Provide 1/4 to 1 /2 inch wide joints at these locations.
b. Trim edges with U -bead edge trim where edges of gypsum
I board are exposed.
c. Seal joints with acoustical sealant.
I B. Walls:
1. Install gypsum board with tapered edges vertical and to within 1/4 inch
1 of floor.
2. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partition.
3. Multilayer Applications:
I a. Offset face layer joints at least one stud or furring member from
base layer joints.
I b. Fasten both base layer and face layer with screws.
4. Direct Bonding to Substrate: Comply with gypsum board
manufacturer's recommendations.
I a. Temporarily brace or fasten panels until adhesive has set.
C. Acoustical or Sound Partitions:
1 1. At walls with acoustical batt insulation, comply with ASTM C 919 for
application of acoustical sealant.
I a. Apply acoustical sealant around penetrations, such as electrical
boxes, pipes, etc.
b. Where partitions meet ceilings and floors, Apply a continuous
I bead of sealant behind board edges and press back of board
into sealant.
2. Install resilient furring channels for partitions and ceilings, where
I shown or indicated.
I D. Walls as Substrate for Tile:
1. Install glass -mat water - resistant gypsum backer board in accordance
I 2. with manufacturer's installation instructions.
Install cementitious backer board in accordance with ANSI A108.11
and in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
I a. Provide 1/4 inch joints where panels abut other construction or
penetrations.
1
1
1
GYPSUM BOARD: 09250
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 10 SEP 00 1
E. Water- Resistant Gypsum Board:
1. Install on walls in wet areas, such as toilet rooms, janitor's closets, and 1
the like, except where glass -mat water - resistant gypsum tile backer
board is installed for tile applications.
2. Do not install on ceilings unless otherwise indicated.
F. Ceilings:
1. Install gypsum board to ceilings with long dimension of board at right
angles to supporting members. 1
2. Board may be installed with long dimension parallel to supporting
em
m bers that are spaced 16 inches o.c. when attachment members
are provided at end joints.
3. Where water - resistant board is used at ceilings, provide supports at 12
inches o.c.
4. Multilayer Applications:
a. Offset face layer joints at least one stud or furring member from
base layer joints.
b. Fasten both base layer and face layer with screws, and with
adhesive between layers.
G. Exterior gypsum soffit board:
1. Install at exterior soffits where shown or indicated in Drawings. 1
2. Install panels perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered.
3. Provide 1/4 inch open space where panels abut other construction or
structural penetrations.
a. Trim edges with U -bead edge trim where edges of gypsum
board are exposed.
b. Seal joints with acoustical sealant.
3.4 ALLOWABLE INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
111
A. Maximum Ceiling Deflection: Provide thickness of gypsum board and fasten
as required to achieve maximum deflection of 1/360 of span. 1
B. Maximum Deviation from True Plane: 1/8 inch per 10 foot, and 1/16 inch in
any running foot.
1
1. Check plastic trim for conformance to tolerances.
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION GYPSUM BOARD: 09250
SEP 00 PAGE 11
1 3.5. CONTROL JOINTS
A. Provide control joints, unless otherwise noted, where framing changes
direction, at 30 feet maximum in ceilings, and in walls at 50 feet maximum.
3.6 CORNER TREATMENT
1 A. Internal corners: Treat as specified for joints, but fold reinforcing tape
lengthwise through middle and fit neatly into corner.
B. External corners and exposed edges:
1. Install specified corner bead, fitting neatly over corner and securing
with same type fasteners used for installing wallboard.
2. Space fasteners approximately 6 inches o.c. and drive through
wallboard into framing or furring member.
' 3. After corner bead has been secured into position, treat corner with
joint compound and reinforcing tape as specified for joints, feathering
joint compound out from 8 to 10 inches on each side of corner.
3.7 OTHER METAL TRIM
A. Drawings do not show locations and requirements for metal trim.
1. Carefully study Drawings and installation, and provide metal trim
normally recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board approved
for use in this Work.
1 B. Install 3/4 inch wide rolled formed profiles at exterior soffit.
1 3.8 FINISHING
A. General:
1. Verify that gypsum board is fastened as specified to supporting
framework.
1 2. Apply joint treatment and finishing compound by machine or hand tool.
3. Apply joint tape over joints and to flanges of trim accessories except
those with trim accessories not requiring tape.
4. Provide minimum drying time of 24 hours between coats, with
additional drying time in poorly ventilated areas.
1
1
1
GYPSUM BOARD: 09250 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 12 SEP 00
5. Sandpaper between coats as required to eliminate ridges and high
points.
6. Levels of Finish: Comply with recommendations of Northwest Wall and
Ceiling Bureau for gypsum board finishes, as follows:
a. Level 1: Above ceiling and concealed areas, unless a higher
level of finish is required for fire- resistive -rated assemblies and
sound -rated assemblies.
b. Level 2: Where panels form substrate for tile.
c. Level 4: Gypsum board surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Level 1 Finish: One coat application.
1. Embed tape in joint compound with surfaces free of excess joint
compound.
2. Tool marks and ridges are acceptable.
3. Cover fastener heads with one coat of joint compound in fire resistive
assemblies.
1
C. Level 2 Finish: One coat application.
1. Embed tape in joint compound, i
p � p d, w pe off excess and leave a thin coat
of joint compound over tape.
2. Tool marks and ridges are acceptable.
3. Cover fastener heads with one coat of joint compound.
D. Level 4 Finish: Three coat application.
1. Embed tape in joint compound leaving a smooth thin coat of joint
compound over tape.
2. Apply a separate coat of joint compound over the first coat, leaving a
smooth surface free of ridges, tool marks and sanding grooves. 1
3. Apply a final coat of joint compound feathered out over the second
coat, leaving a smooth surface flush with gypsum board and free of all
marks.
a. Feather finishing compound to not Tess than 12 inches wide.
4. Cover fastener heads with a coat of joint compound followed with
separate second and final coats as described above for taped joints.
5. When finishing compounds are dry, sandpaper to obtain a uniformly
smooth surface, taking care to not scuff paper surface of wallboard.
6. Wipe gypsum board surfaces with damp cloth.
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION GYPSUM BOARD: 09250
SEP 00 PAGE 13
1 3.9 WATER RESISTANT SEALANT
A. Apply a continuous bead of water resistant sealant around cutouts at raw
edges and at penetrations of water - resistant gypsum board and glass -mat
water resistant tile backer board.
1 3.10 TING WELDED HOLLOW OF OLLOW METAL FRAMES
A. Grout full heads and jambs with fast setting gypsum compound.
3.11 SURFACE TEXTURE
A. Smooth, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Light Surface Texture:
1. Spray -apply texture compound to produce a fine -spray texture finish in
accordance with approved mock -up.
2. Apply texture compound only after gypsum board joints are taped and
dry, and after painter - applied surface primer specified in Section
1 09900 is applied and dry.
3.12 REPAIRS
A. Repair screw pops by installing new screw approximately 1 -1/2 inches away
from projecting screw and reset projecting screw if face paper is fractured,
remove projecting screw, fill damaged surface and finish flush and smooth.
B. Fill cracks; finish flush and smooth.
3.13 CLEANING UP
1 A. Clean, without damaging, exposed surfaces affected by work of this Section,
and repair as necessary.
B. In addition to other requirements for cleaning, use necessary care to prevent
scattering gypsum board scraps and dust, and to prevent tracking gypsum
1 and joint finishing compound onto floor surfaces.
C. Remove scrap, debris, and surplus material of this Section at completion of
each segment of installation and dispose of in legal manner.
END OF SECTION
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION TILE: 09300
SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Floor and wall tile.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 07900: Joint Sealers
B. Section 09002: Materials & Finishes Schedule.
1 C. Section 09250: Gypsum Board, for glass -mat water - resistant gypsum tile
backer board.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C144 Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
B. ASTM C150 Specification for Portland Cement.
C. ASTM C206 Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime.
D. ASTM C207 Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1 A. Product Data: Submit for each type of product specified, including installation
and maintenance instructions.
B. Samples:
1 1. Submit two samples of each type, color and texture of tile.
2. Submit two samples of grout for color for selection by Architect.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mock -Up:
1. Install 10 square feet of flooring and wall tile with joints grouted.
2. Architect will review for correct joint size, profile, and color.
1
TILE: 09300 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
3. Approved mock -up may be incorporated in the finished Work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 1
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Tile: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated for
each designation in Section 09002: Materials and Finishes Schedule.
B. Mortar and Grout Materials:
1. C -Cure Chemical Company
2. Custom Building Products
3. Flex Tile Ltd.
4. Laticrete International, Inc.
5. Upco Co.
6. Bostik Chemical Group 1
7. USM Corp.
C. Cleaning Materials:
1. American Olean Tile Co. Division
2. National Gypsum Co.
3. Hillyard Chemical Co.
D. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01630.
2.2 TILE ACCESSORIES
A. Gypsum Board Primer: As recommended by Tile Manufacturer.
B. Sealant: Interior Nonacid silicone rubber sealant.
C. Leveling and Patching Compound: Trowelable, nonflammable, P , as
1
recommended by tile manufacturer.
D. Metal Edge Strips: White- zinc -alloy terrazzo strips, 1/8 inch wide at top edge 1
with integral provision for anchorage to mortar bed or substrate, unless
otherwise indicated.
1
1
.1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION TILE: 09300
SEP 00 PAGE 3
2.3 MORTAR MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement Mortar: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type 1; sand,
ASTM C 144; hydrated lime, ASTM C 206, Type S or ASTM C 207, Type S.
B. Dry Set Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A 118.1.
C. Latex - Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A 118.4.
D. Organic Adhesive: ANSI 136.1, Type 1 for prolonged water resistance.
1. Tile Mate 5000 by Upco Co.
E. Mortar Latex Admixture:
1. #3701 by Laticrete
1 2. Hydroment Latex Additive by Upco.
2.4 GROUT MATERIALS
A. Epoxy Floor Grout: ANSI A 118.3.
1 1. U- poxy/WD by Upco Co.
B. Latex Portland Cement Grout: Color as selected, by one of the following:
1. QT by Custom Building Products, with #3701 Admixture by Laticrete.
2. Dry Bond Joint Filler and #3701 Admixture by Laticrete.
3. Hydroment Joint Filler with Hydroment Additive by Upco.
4. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section
1 01630.
PART 3 EXECUTION
1 3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions:
1. Examine substrate surfaces and conditions under which tile work will
be completed.
2. Correct conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work.
3. Verify surface of floor slab is within 1/8 inch in 10' -0" for thin set tile.
1
1
TILE: 09300 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 4 SEP 00
B. Starting Work:
1. Do not proceed with tile work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
2. Start of tile work will indicate acceptance of surfaces and conditions
within each area.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation:
1. Clean existing concrete floor surface as recommended in forward to
ANSI A 108.5 and ANSI A 108.6.
2. Build -up and feather out substrates with leveling compound a 1
minimum of 4 feet from change in floor finishes to achieve alignment of
surface finishes.
3.3 INSTALLATION
3
A. General: J
1. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" guidelines
for TCA installation methods indicated.
2. Instructions: Comply with mortar and grout manufacturer's printed
instructions.
B. Joints:
1. Lay tile in pattern indicated on Drawings with aligned joints.
2. Adjust joints to minimize tile cutting.
3. Provide uniform joints.
4. Install sealant at joints between tile and plumbing fixtures.
C. Floor Tile: 1
1. Install tile with Dry-Set Mortar or Latex Portland Cement Mortar.
2. Comply with ANSI A 108.5, ANSI A 108.10, and TCA F144 -2K at main
level and F113 at lower level.
3. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated, or where exposed
edge of tile meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush
with top of tile
TOC BUILDING ADDITION TILE: 09300
SEP 00 PAGE 5
1
D. Wall Tile:
1. Install tile with Dry-Set Mortar or Latex Portland Cement Mortar.
2. Comply with ANSI A 108.5, ANSI A 108.10, and TCA W243 -2K.
3.4 COMPLETION
1 A. Adjusting Defective Work:
1. Replace cracked, chipped, broken, and unbonded tile.
2. Rake and regrout defective grout joints.
B. Final Cleaning:
1. Clean tile and joints with Tile Cleaner after curing mortar and grout.
2. Rinse with clean water and allow to dry.
C. Grout Sealing: Apply grout sealer to grout joints.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION RESILIENT FLOORING: 09650
SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Sheet flooring.
B. Resilient wall base.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03300: Cast -In -Place Concrete, for substrate affecting Work of this
Section.
B. Section 03540: Cementitious Underlayment, for substrate affecting Work of
this Section.
C. Section 09002: Materials and Finishes Schedule.
D. Section 09680: Carpet.
E. Section 09250: Gypsum Board, for substrate to receive resilient wall base.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product specified.
B. Shop Drawings: Show location of seams and edges.
1. Indicate location of columns, doorways, built -in cabinets, and cutout
locations.
C. Samples: 12 inch x 12 inch for each type, color, and pattern specified.
1. Obtain Architect's approval before ordering.
D. Maintenance Data: For resilient floor coverings to include in maintenance
1 manuals.
1
1
RESILIENT FLOORING: 09650 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with applicable requirements of Resilient Floor Covering Institute:
"Standard Specifications and Recommended Work Procedures of Resilient
Floor Coverings."
B. Installer: Engage installer who is approved by Manufacturer and has
successfully completed 5 projects of similar size, quality and complexity.
C. Coordinate with other trades to assure proper interface with Work of this
Section.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1
A. Comply with regulations of governmental authorities having jurisdiction
concerning use of products with Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs).
B. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Provide products complying with the
following tests:
1. ASTM E 648: Critical Radiant Flux; 0.45 W /sq. cm. or greater.
2. ASTM E 662: Smoke Density; maximum specific optical density of 450
or less.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 1
A. Deliver in unopened packages with Manufacturer's original, legible labels
intact.
B. Maintain packaged materials with seals unbroken and labels intact until time
of use, and manufacturer's run number for matching floor coverings.
C. Store off ground, in dry spaces protected from weather and damage. 1
D. Store rolls upright. Store tiles on flat surfaces.
1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Do not start installation of resilient floorings until permanent HVAC system is 1
in complete operation.
1
1 TOC BUILDING ADDITION RESILIENT FLOORING: 09650
SEP 00 PAGE 3
1 1. Maintain above 70° F with 70 percent maximum relative humidity for
one week before and during installation work, and for one week after
installation.
B. Do not install resilient floor coverings until they are the same temperature as
1 the space where they are to be installed.
C. Install resilient floor coverings after other finishing operations have been
completed.
D. Do not install resilient floor coverings over concrete slabs until concrete has
cured and is sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive, as determined by floor
covering manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture test.
1. Subfloor Moisture Conditions: Moisture emission rate of not more than
3 lb/1000 sq. ft./24 hours when tested by calcium chloride moisture
test in compliance with CRI 104, 6.2.1, with subfloor temperatures not
less than 55 deg. F.
2. Subfloor Alkalinity Conditions: A pH range or 5 to 9 when subfloor is
wetted with potable water and Phydrion paper is applied.
1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Field verify dimensions prior to installation; if differing substantially from
fY P 9 Y
Drawings, or approved Shop Drawings, obtain Architect's approval before
proceeding.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra stock of approximately 10 percent of each type, color, and
pattern of floor covering installed.
1. Furnish one box minimum for each type of vinyl composition tile.
B. Furnish extra stock of not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet of
each type, color, and size of resilient accessory installed.
C. Package each type of material separately, identified, and protected against
deterioration.
D. Deliver to on -site location designated by Owner.
9 Y
1
1
1
RESILIENT FLOORING: 09650 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 4 SEP 00
PART 2 PRODUCTS 1
2.1 SHEET FLOOR COVERINGS
A. Unbacked Sheet Floor Coverings: Products complying with ASTM F 1303,
Type II, as listed in Materials and Finishes Schedule.
2.2 RESILIENT ACCESSORIES
A Rubber Wall Base:
1. Products to comply with material as listed in section 09002: Materials
and Finishes Schedule.
2. Style:
a. Straight with no toe at carpet.
b. Cove, topset with toe at other locations.
3. Minimum Thickness: 1/8 inch. 1
4. Length: Continuous.
B. Stair Skirting: 1'
1. Sheet rubber.
2. 1/8 inch thick continuous rubber, toeless.
3. Color: Match adjacent base.
2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES 1
A. Leveling and Patching Compounds: 1
1. Armstrong Latex Underlayment S -180, or approved.
B. Adhesives: Water - resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor
covering and substrate conditions indicated.
C. Concrete Slab Primer: Non-staining.
taming.
D. Heat - Welding Bead: Solid strand product of floor covering manufacturer for ,
heat - welding seams.
E. Chemical Bonding Compound: Product of floor covering manufacturer for 1
chemically bonding seams.
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION RESILIENT FLOORING: 09650
SEP 00 PAGE 5
F. Cove Strip: 1 inch radius support for integral cove base provided or approved
by floor covering manufacturer.
G. Cove Base Cap Strip: Square metal cap for integral cove base.
P P 4 P 9
H. Rubber Accessory Moldings:
1. Product Description:
a. Reducer strip for resilient flooring.
b. Carpet edge for glue -down applications.
c. Carpet nosing.
d. Tile and carpet joiner.
2. Color and Pattern: As listed in materials and finishes schedule.
I Sealant:
1. Manufacturer: Dow Corning, General Electric, or approved.
2. Type: ASTM C -920, Type S, Class 25, Grade NS; Clear, translucent
silicone with mildew inhibitor.
J. Cleaners: Neutral provided type p ovided or approved by floor covering manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and surface conditions where installation of resilient floor
1 coverings will occur.
1. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for installation
and meet requirements specified.
a. Verify that concrete floor slabs comply with ASTM F 710.
b. Verify that concrete floor slabs are dry and free of curing
compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may
interfere with adhesive bond. Perform moisture tests.
c. Verify that concrete floor slab finish complies with
manufacturers requirements for slabs receiving resilient floor
coverings.
d. Verify that subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, and
foreign deposits.
e. Verify that substrate is smooth, level, and without more than 1/8
inch 10 ft. variation from level or slopes.
1
RESILIENT FLOORING: 09650 TOC BUILDING ADDITION 111
PAGE 6 SEP 00
f. Verify that bottom of wall surfaces to receive base are within 1/4 1
inch from top of floor.
2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
B. Coordinate with Mechanical Subcontractor for cleanout location, to avoid
installation in accent tile. ,
3.2 PREPARATION
1
A. General: Comply with resilient floor covering manufacturer's installation
instructions for preparing substrates to receive resilient floor coverings.
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds to fill cracks, holes and
depressions in substrates, and to align substrates with adjacent surfaces.
1
1. Build -up and feather out leveling compound a minimum of 4 feet from
adjacent floor surfaces to achieve alignment of top of finish flooring
surfaces.
C. Remove coatings and other substances that are incompatible with flooring 1.
adhesives, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer.
1. Do not use solvents.
D. Broom clean and vacuum surfaces to be covered.
E. Priming: Apply concrete slab primer as recommended by resilient flooring
manufacturer, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.3 SHEET VINYL INSTALLATION
A. Comply with sheet vinyl floor covering manufacturer's installation instructions. 1
B. Lay out sheet flooring to maintain uniformity of covering direction.
C. Lay out to achieve a minimum number of seams, and place in inconspicuous
and low - traffic areas, not Tess than 6 inches from parallel joints in flooring
substrates.
D Match edges for color shading and pattern at seams according to 1
manufacturer's instructions.
1
1
1
1 TOC BUILDING ADDITION RESILIENT FLOORING: 09650
SEP00 PAGE7
1 E. Scribe, cut and fit flooring neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, and around
pipes and penetrations.
F. Extend flooring into recesses such as door reveals and toe spaces, closets,
under saddles and recesses, and similar openings.
G. Maintain reference markers, holes, and place s that are in lace or marked
for future cutting by repeating on finish floorings as marked on subfloor.
1. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.
H. Adhere sheet floor covering to floor substrates in accordance with
manufacturer's installation instructions.
1 1. Form integral cove base with sheet floor covering, of height indicated,
at vertical surfaces, where indicated.
2. Support at juncture of horizontal and vertical surfaces with cove strip.
3. Terminate top of coved base with a cap strip, secure with continuous
adhesive on vertical leg.
111 I. Heat - Welded Seams:
1. Rout joints and heat weld with welding bead, permanently fusing
sections into a seamless floor covering.
2. Prepare, weld, and finish seams according to manufacturer's
instructions and ASTM F 1516.
J. Hand roll sheet floor coverings in both directions from center out to embed in
adhesive and eliminate trapped air.
K. Horizontal unprotected edges:
1. Unless otherwise noted, place resilient reducer strips tightly butted to
units and secured with adhesive.
2. Where reducer strip occurs at doorway, center strip under door.
3.4 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION
A. Install resilient products according to manufacturer's installation instructions.
B. Install resilient wall columns, wall projections, t a base to walls, colum s, wa p ojec ons, casework and
cabinet toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures, around entire perimeter of
rooms and areas where base is scheduled.
1
•
1
RESILIENT FLOORING: 09650 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 8 SEP 00
1. Outside Corners: Form from straight pieces of maximum lengths *�
possible, without whitening at bends.
a. Shave back of base at points where bends occur and remove
strips perpendicular to length of base that are only deep enough
to produce a snug fit without removing more than half the wall
base thickness.
2. Inside Corners: Form from straight pieces of maximum lengths
possible, by cutting an inverted V- shaped notch in toe of wall base at
the point where corner is formed.
a. Shave back of base where necessary to produce a snug fit to
substrate.
3. Set toe of base in continuous bead of sealant.
a. Remove excess sealant from exposed surfaces.
3.5 RUBBER STAIR SKIRTING INSTALLATION 1
A. Scribe skirting to fit stair profile and align top with top of base. 1
B. Shape top edge to match top edge of base.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Remove excess adhesive and other residue from exposed surfaces using `11
neutral cleaner recommended by manufacturer of resilient materials.
B. Clean floor surfaces as recommended by floor covering manufacturer. 1
C. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from
construction operations and placement of fixtures. 11
D. Apply protective floor polish, using commercially available product acceptable
to floor covering manufacturer.
1. Protect floor coverings until inspection for Substantial Completion.
E. Clean floor coverings just before scheduled inspection for Substantial
Completion. 1
1. Strip protective floor polish applied after installation if recommended by
floor covering manufacturer.
F. After cleaning, reapply polish to floor surfaces.
END OF SECTION
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION CARPET: 09680
SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Carpet.
B. Carp et accessories.
1 C. Carpet walk -off mat.
1 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03300: Cast -In -Place Concrete, for substrate affecting Work of this
Section.
B. Section 06100: Rough Carpentry.
C. Section 09002: Materials and Finishes Schedule.
D. Section 09650: Resilient Flooring: Resilient rubber base and accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data and manufacturer's specifications for each type of carpet
material, carpet cushion, and installation accessory specified.
1. Include installation methods for each type of substrate, and
maintenance instructions.
B. Shop Drawings showing columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions,
built -in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet. Indicate
the following:
1. Carpet type, color, dye lot, and where dye lot changes occur.
2. Seam locations, types, and methods.
3. Type of subfloor and installation.
1 4. Pattern type, repeat size, location, direction, and starting point.
5. Pile direction.
6. Type, color, and location of inserts and borders.
7. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory
strips, including transition details to other materials.
1
1
1
CARPET: 09680 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
C. Samples for verification, from same material to be used in the work: 1
1. Two 18 x 27 inch samples of each type, color, and pattern specified.
2. 12 -inch samples of each type of exposed edge stripping and
accessory item.
3. 6 -inch samples of each type of carpet cushion.
D. Schedule of carpet using same room number designations indicated in
Drawings.
E. Manufacturer's certifications.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with Department of Commerce Flammability Standard COC FF 1 -70,
ASTM D -1335 and ASTM D -2859.
1. Carpet in Exitways: Comply with requirements of National Bureau of
Standards Radiant Panel Test 75 -950.
2. Surface Flammability: Passes CPSC 16 CFR, Part 1630. 1
B. Comply with ASTM E -84 Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials for the following ratings: 1
1. Flame spread: 25 or less.
2. Smoke density: 450 or less.
C. Provide carpet of each color /pattern from same dye lot.
D. Coordinate Work of this Section to interface with Work of other trades.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with regulations of governmental authorities having jurisdiction
concerning use of materials with Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs).
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING I
A. General: Comply with the Carpet and Rugs Institute's CRI 104, Section 5:
"Storage and Handling." g
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION CARPET: 09680
SEP 00 PAGE 3
1
B. Deliver materials in original unbroken mill- wrapping, with manufacturer's
register number labels intact.
1. Labels to include identification of manufacturer, brand name and lot
number.
2. Maintain packaged materials with seals unbroken until time of use.
C. Store in an area protected from weather and damage in a well - ventilated
area.
1. Lay flat, with continuous blocking off ground; do not store rolls on end.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6: "Site Conditions."
B. Do not install carpet until space is enclosed and weatherproof, nominally dry,
and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are and will be
continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy.
C. Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are
1 sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive, as determined by floor covering
manufacture's recommended bond and moisture test.
1. Subfloor Moisture Conditions: Moisture emission rate of not more than
3 lb/1000 sq. ft./24 hours when tested by calcium chloride moisture
test in compliance with CRI 104, 6.2.1, with subfloor temperatures not
less than 55 degrees F.
2. Subfloor Alkalinity Conditions: A PH range of 5 to 9 when subfloor is
wetted with potable water and Phydrion paper is added.
1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Field verify dimensions prior to installation; If differing significantly from
fY P 9
Drawings, or reviewed Shop Drawings, obtain Architects's approval before
1 proceeding.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Provide the following warranties:
1
1
CARPET: 09680 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 4 SEP 00
1. 5 year warranty that carpet to maintain specified limits of static
electricity generating.
2. 10 year warranty that carpet to not lose more than 10 percent of face
fiber by weight.
3. 10 year warranty that carpet to not delaminate from substrate, curl,
cup, shrink, or deteriorate at edges.
4. Any required restretching during 1 year warranty period be done at no
additional cost to Owner.
1.10 CERTIFICATION
A. Prior to installation, submit carpet manufacturer's affidavit certifying the 1
following:
1. Installer is authorized by manufacturer to perform work.
2. Delivered carpet was manufactured in accordance with Specifications
and approvals.
1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish 3 percent production overrun for each carpet type, color and pattern. 1
1. Full width by 3 ft. long minimum.
PART 2 PRODUCTS ,1
2.1 CARPET
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
indicated in section 09002: Materials and Finishes Schedule.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Concrete Slab Primer: Nonstaining type as recommended by the carpet
Y P
manufacturer.
B. row I
T e able Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Nonflammable, as
recommended by the carpet manufacturer.
C. Adhesives: Water- resistant, mildew- resistant, nonstaining type to suit
products and subfloor conditions indicated and to comply with flammability
requirements for installed carpet as recommended by the carpet 11
manufacturer.
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION CARPET: 09680
SEP00 PAGE5
D. Seaming Cement: Hot -melt adhesive tape recommended by carpet
manufacturer.
E. Accessory Moldings: As specified in Section 09650 for Resilient Accessories.
F. Provide other materials not specifically described but required for a complete
and proper installation subject to approval of Architect.
G. Carpet Leveler:
0 1. Manufacture: Johnsonite
a. Model: LS40D, 3/8" h x 12" I
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine subfloors, area, and conditions where installation of carpet will
occur.
1. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for installation
and meet requirements specified.
a. Verify that concrete floor slabs comply with ASTM F 710.
b. Verify that concrete floor slabs are dry and free of curing
compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may
interfere with adhesive bond. Perform moisture tests.
c. Verify that concrete floor slab finish complies with requirements
specified in Section 03300 for slabs receiving carpet.
d. Verify that subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, and
foreign deposits.
e. Verify that substrate is smooth, level, and without more than 1/8
inch 10 ft. variation from level or slopes.
2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
1 3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with carpet manufacturer's recommendations to prepare
substrates indicated to receive carpet.
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds to fill cracks, holes and
depressions in substrates, and to align substrates with adjacent surfaces.
1
CARPET: 09680 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 6 SEP 00
1. Build -up and feather out leveling compound a minimum of 4 feet from 1
adjacent floor surfaces to achieve alignment of top of finish flooring
surfaces. 1
2. Level subfloor within 1/4 inch in 10 feet, noncumulative, in all
directions.
3. Sand or grind protrusions, bumps and ridges. 1
C. Broom and vacuum clean subfloors to be covered.
D. Priming: Apply concrete slab primer according to manufacturer's directions,
1
where recommended by carpet manufacturer. 1
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: 1
1. Install carpet only after finishing operations, including painting but
excluding operable partitions, have been completed.
2. Install carpet with pile inclination in one direction.
3. Scribe carpet accurately at edge and fit carpet neatly into breaks and
recesses, against bases, around pipes and penetrations, under
saddles and thresholds, and around permanent cabinets and
equipment.
4. Align lines of carpet pile, as woven, using no fill strips less than 6
inches wide, laying carpet pile and seams in same direction unless
specifically directed otherwise by Architect.
5. Roll carpet to expel air bubbles; power stretch taut and secure to
anchors.
6. Bind cut edges where not concealed by protective guards or
overlapping edges.
B. Direct Glue -Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 8: "Direct Glue 1
Down."
C. Seams:
1. Minimize numbers of seams, and locate where shown in Drawings, 1
approved Shop Drawings, or where specifically approved by Architect.
2. Locate seams to minimize number of seams, and to maximum extent
possible, out of way of traffic and in direction of traffic.
3. Fabricate seams by compression method, using a butt joint, and
properly bead and seal.
4. Do not stretch seams.
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION CARPET: 09680
SEP00 PAGE7
5. Match carpet pattern at seams.
6. At doorways, center seams under door in closed position.
D. Surplus material: Allow Owner to inspect and select from scrap carpet
P p
remaining after installation.
1 1. Bundle, wrap in burlap, and deliver to Owner carpet scraps selected.
3.4 CLEANING, ADJUSTMENT AND PROTECTION
A. Clean, without damaging, exposed surfaces affected by work of this Section,
and repair as necessary.
B. Remove from jobsite refuse and debris created by work, and dispose of in a
legal manner.
C. In addition to cleaning requirements stated in Division 1, thoroughly clean
1 carpet and adjacent surfaces immediately prior to Substantial Completion.
D. Provide heavy non - staining paper or plastic walkways as required over
1 carpeting in direction of traffic, maintaining intact in carpeted space until
Substantial Completion.
1
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
N
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION WALL COVERING: 09720
SEP 00 PAGE 1
1 PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Vinyl wall covering.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 09002: Materials and Finishes Schedule.
1 B. Section 09250: Gypsum Board, for substrate.
C. Section 09900: Painting, for wall substrate primers.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM E 84 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product specified including physical
characteristics such as durability, resistance to fading and flame resistance.
B. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of each type of wall covering
specified.
1. Include schedule of wall coverings using same room designation
indicated in Drawings.
C. Samples for verification:
1. Full width sample not less than 36 inches long of each type of wall
covering specified, showing complete pattern repeat.
D. Maintenance data for wall covering to include in operation and maintenance
manuals specified in Section 01770.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use skilled workmen trained and experienced in necessary crafts and are
familiar with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of
Work of this Section.
1
1
WALL COVERING: 09720 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
B. Provide UL listed products with the following surface burning characteristics 1
as determined by testing according to UL 723 or ASTM E 84, with Class A
rating: 1
1. Flame Spread: 25 or less.
2. Smoke Development: 450 or Tess.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not install wall covering until space is enclosed, wet -work in space is
complete, ambient temperature is above 65 degrees F, and relative humidity
is below 40 percent.
1. Maintain temperature and humidity conditions for 72 before, during
and after installation, unless otherwise required by manufacturer.
B. Provide lighting level on surfaces to receive wall covering as recommended 1
by manufacturer.
C. Provide continuous ventilation during installation for not less than the time
recommended by wall covering manufacturer for full drying or curing.
1.7 EXTRA STOCK
1
A. Provide extra stock of 1 percent or one bolt, whichever is more, of material
installed for each type, pattern, and color, taken from the same run as that
used in the Project.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 1
2.1 WALL COVERING 1
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
indicated for each designation in Section 09002: Materials and Finishes 1
Schedule.
2.2 ADHESIVES 1
A. Mildew resistant, nonstaining, for use with specific wall covering application
as recommended by wall covering manufacturer
1. Provide strippable type adhesives. 1
1
1.
TOC BUILDING ADDITION WALL COVERING: 09720
SEP 00 PAGE 3
2.3 METAL MOLDINGS
A. Extruded aluminum, alloy 6063 T5, with satin mechanical finish and Class 2
clear architectural anodic coating conforming to AA M21A31.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Work A. Examine substrates and conditions under which c Wo of this Section will be
performed.
1
1. Correct conditions detrimental to proper completion of Work.
2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
B. Make moisture content tests of substrates and verify that substrate moisture
content does not exceed the following, or as otherwise recommended by wall
covering manufacturer:
1. Plaster and Gypsum Board: 5 percent.
2. Masonry and Concrete: 12 percent.
3. Wood: Maximum 7 percent average, with a range permitted in
individual pieces from 5 to 15 percent.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate surfaces free of rust, scale, grease, oil, and other
contaminants that could impair wall covering's bond.
B. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking,
unsound coatings, cracks and defects.
C. Metal: Prime bare metal with a metal primer recommended by wall covering
manufacturer, unless factory primed.
D. Wood:
1. Set nail heads and fill with waterproof filler, sanding smooth with
adjacent surfaces.
2. Seal knots, pitch, and sap streaks with one coat of 2 Ib. cut white
shellac and one coat of adhesive used for applying fabric, covering
entire surface.
1
1
WALL COVERING: 09720 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 4 SEP 00
1
E. Gypsum Board: Apply a primer recommended by wall covering manufacturer.
F. Plaster: Allow new plaster to cure; treat areas of high alkalinity.
tY .
G. Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding. 1
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with wall covering manufacturer's instructions applicable to products
and applications indicated.
B. Install wall covering panels in roll number sequence. Change run numbers at
partition breaks and corners only. 1
C. Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches from inside and outside
corners.
1
1. No horizontal seams.
D. Trim edges for color uniformity, pattern match and tight closure at seams P g sand
edges.
1. Butt seams.
E. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects.
3.4 CLEANING
A. As work progresses, clean surplus adhesive from fabric surfaces and
adjacent surfaces. 1
B. Use cleaning methods recommended by wall covering manufacturer.
C. Replace strips that cannot be cleaned.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
' TOC BUILDING ADDITION ACOUSTICAL INSULATION: 09820
SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Section 06200: Rough Carpentry.
B. Acoustical insulation where shown on Drawings, as specified herein.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
1 A. Section 07210: Building Insulation, thermal batt insulation.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use skilled Workers trained and experienced in crafts and familiar with
specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of
Work of this Section.
B. Insulation products shall be manufactured by a company with at least 5
1 consecutive years experience in field.
1.4 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS
A. Noncombustible per AST M El 3 6.
B. Maximum UL Flame Spread Rating if and where insulation is exposed: 25.
Meet ASTM E84.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to job site in their manufacturer's original container, with
labels intact and legible. Maintain packaging, seals and labels intact until
time of use.
B. Store off ground, under cover and protected from damage.
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Install at dry surfaces only.
1
1
1
ACOUSTICAL INSULATION: 09820 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
PART2 PRODUCTS 1
2.1 ACOUSTICAL BATTS 1
A. Manufacturer and Type: Owens /Corning Sound Attenuation Batts, U.S.
Gypsum Thermafiber SAB, or approved. 1
B. Material: Unfaced glass or mineral rock fiber.
C. Thickness: Full ull thickness
D. Reference Standards: Meet ASTM C665 Type 1 and ASTM E136.
E. Widths: As required to span cavities. 1
2.2 WIRE
A. 18 gage steel minimum.
2.3 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials required for a complete and proper installation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS 1
A. Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this Section shall be
performed.
1. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of
Work.
2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3. Surface to receive insulation must be dry.
B. Remove, or protect against, projections in construction framing which may
Y
damage or prevent proper installation.
3.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate 1
provision in work of those trades for interface with work of this Section.
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION ACOUSTICAL INSULATION: 09820
SEP 00 PAGE 3
B. As necessary, protect work of others from damage.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install Work of this Section in strict accordance with:
1 1. Construction documents
2. Requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction
3. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures.
4. Install in as long of lengths of single batt as possible.
5. Fit tightly with no gaps.
6. Where partitions do not extend to structure above, install acoustical
insulation across top of ceiling, 48 inches min. ea. side of partition.
3.4 CLEANING, ADJUSTMENT AND PROTECTION
A. Clean, without damaging, exposed surfaces affected by work of this Section.
1. Repair as necessary
2. Remove refuse, and dispose of in legal manner.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
•
1
1
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION PAINTING: 09900
SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Surface preparation and application of paints and coatings.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Sections where factory preparation, priming, or priming and finishing, of
painted or finished surfaces is specified.
1 B. Section 07190: Water - Repellent.
1.3 WORK NOT INCLUDED
A. Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces in concealed
areas and inaccessible areas such as furred spaces, foundation spaces,
utility tunnels, pipe spaces, and duct shafts.
B. Metal surfaces of anodized or painted aluminum, stainless steel, chromium
plate, copper, bronze, and similar finished materials shall not require painting
under this Section, unless otherwise noted.
C. Do not paint moving parts of operating units; mechanical or electrical parts
such as valve operators; linkages; sensing devices; and motor shafts.
D. Do not paint required labels or equipment identification, performance rating,
name, or nomenclature plates.
E. Do not paint gypsum board walls above suspended ceilings.
1 1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. "Paint ", as included herein, means coating, systems materials including
primers, emulsions, epoxy, stained enamels, sealers, fillers, and other
applied materials whether used as primer, intermediate, or finish coats.
B. Gloss /Sheen Parameter Reflectance based off 60 degree angle reading):
9 9 9) :
1 1. Flat: Less than 5 percent
2. Eggshell: 5 -20 percent.
3. Satin: 15 -35 percent.
1
1
PAINTING: 09900 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
4. Semigloss: 30 -65 percent. 1
5. Gloss: More than 65 percent.
1.5 SUBMITTALS 1
A. Product Data: 1
1. Materials list of required coating materials. Identify each material by
manufacturer's catalog number, general classification, and cross -
reference with finish system and application.
2. Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and
instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material.
B. Samples:
1. Stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, of each color and
material to be applied.
a. Provide three Samples of each drawdown, approximately 8 x 10
inches in size, each marked with specified color designation.
b. If requested by Architect, submit samples during construction
representative samples of actual substrate. 1
2. Revise and resubmit Samples as requested until required sheen,
color, and texture is achieved. Approved Samples become standards
of color and finish for accepting or rejecting Work of this Section.
3. Do not commence painting until approved Samples are on file at job
site.
C. Certification by manufacturer that products supplied p is supp ed comply with local
regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). i
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use skilled workers who are trained and experienced in crafts and familiar 1
with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of Work of
this Section. 1
B. Work to be in conformance with recommendations in "Architectural
Specification Manual" by Washington State Council - Painting and
1
Decorating Contractors of America.
C. Mock -up: Full -coat benchmark finish sample of each type of coating and 1
substrate required on Project, where directed by Architect, and where
permanent lighting has been activated.
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION PAINTING: 09900
SEP 00 PAGE 3
1 1. Walls and Ceilings: Provide samples on a minimum of 100 sq. ft.
2. Doors and Frames: One door and frame at exterior steel and interior
locations.
3. Approved mock -ups to be used as datum points for comparison with
remainder of Work of this Section for purpose of acceptance or
rejecting Work of this Section.
4. Approved mock -ups may be used as part of finished Work.
5. Apply primer /surfacer to substrate to give specified level of finish in
accordance with Northwest Wall and Ceiling Bureau's recommended
criteria.
1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
J A. Products to comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic
compounds (VOCs).
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver in manufacturer's original, unopened containers with legible labels
1 intact.
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well - ventilated
area at a minimum temperature of 45 degrees F.
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply water -based paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted
and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 degrees F.
B. Apply solvent- thinned paints only when temperature of surfaces to be
1 painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 degrees F.
C. Do not apply paint in wind, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity
1 exceeds 85 percent; or to damp or wet surfaces.
1. Applications may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and
areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits
specified by paint manufacturer as being suitable during application
and drying periods.
1
1
1
PAINTING: 09900 TOC BUILDING ADDITION 1
PAGE 4 SEP 00
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish and deliver to Owner extra paint materials from same production run 1
as materials applied equaling 5 percent, but not less than one gallon or more
than 5 gallons, of each material, color, and gloss applied.
1. Package paint materials in unopened, factory- sealed containers for
1
storage, clearly labeled describing contents and location where used.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS ,
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of following
manufacturer(s) listed in Paint Schedules:
1. ICI.
2. Kelly Moore.
3. Miller Paint Co.
4. Pratt Lambert.
5. Rodda Paint Co.
6. Sherwin Williams.
B. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01630.
2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility: Provide fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish coat
materials that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated
under service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on
testing and field experience. 1
B. Material Quality: Provide best - quality paint material of manufacturers listed in
Oregon Council - Painting & Decorating Contractors of America "Revised ,
Table of Contents,1997."
C. Undercoats and Thinners: 1
1. Provide undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer as finish
coat.
2. Use only thinners recommended by paint manufacturer, and use only
to recommended limits.
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION PAINTING: 09900
SEP 00 PAGE 5
1 3. Insofar as practicable, use undercoat, finish coat, and thinner material
as parts of a unified system of paint finish, except where material is
factory primed.
4. Where accent colors are scheduled or indicated, provide appropriate
and sufficient undercoats accordingly.
D. Colors: Match colors indicated by reference to manufacturer's color
designations indicated in section 09002: Material and Finishes Schedule.
2.3 PRETREATMENT MATERIALS
A. For galvanized steel:
1. Solvent Type: Toluene, or approved.
2. Metal Conditioner Manufacturer and Type:
a. Keeler and Long 6235.
b. Oakite 33.
c. Porter Prep 99.
d. ZRC Metal Conditioner.
e. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements of
Section 01630.
2.4 APPLICATION EQUIPMENT
A. For application of paint materials, use only such equipment as is
recommended for application of particular paint by manufacturer of that paint,
• and as approved by Architect.
B. Prior to use of application equipment, verify proposed equipment is
compatible with material to be applied, and integrity of finish will not be
jeopardized by use of proposed equipment.
2.6 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials required for a complete and proper installation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
1 3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas and conditions, with Applicator present, under
which painting will be performed for compliance with paint application
requirements.
1
1
PAINTING: 09900 TOC BUILDING ADDITION 1
PAGE 6 SEP 00
1. Do not proceed with application of paint until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected and surfaces are receiving paint are thoroughly
dry. 1
B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to -
ensure compatibility of total system for various substrates.
1. Provide barrier coats over non - compatible primers, or remove primer
and reprime as required to achieve compatibility with finish coatings.
2. Notify Architect in writing of anticipated problems using materials
specified over substrates primed by others.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: 1
1. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined 1
surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items installed that are not to be
painted. If removal is impractical or impossible, provide surface -
applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting.
2. After completion painting operations in each space or area, reinstall
removed items by using workers who are skilled in trades involved.
B. Cleaning Preparation:
and reparation.
1. Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted in strict accordance with 1
paint Manufacturer's recommendations for each substrate condition,
and as specified.
2. Remove oil and grease with clean cloths and cleaning solvent of low
toxicity and flash point in excess of 200 degrees F, prior to start of
mechanical cleaning.
3. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from
cleaning process will not fall onto wet painted surfaces.
C. Preparation of Cementitious Surfaces:
1. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release 1
agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. Use mechanical
methods for surface preparation if hardeners or sealers have used.
2. Use abrasive blast - cleaning methods if recommended by paint
manufacturer.
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION PAINTING: 09900
SEP 00 PAGE 7
1 3. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing
appropriate tests.
a. Correct alkaline conditions, and do not paint surfaces where
moisture content exceeds that permitted by paint manufacturer.
4. Clean concrete floors with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or other
etching cleaner.
a. Flush floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize with
ammonia, rinse, allow to dry, and vacuum before painting.
D. Preparation of Wood Surfaces:
1 1. Clean surfaces until free from dirt, oil, and other foreign substances.
2. Smooth finished surfaces exposed to view with sandpaper.
a. Where required, use varying degrees of coarseness in
sandpaper to produce a uniformly smooth and unmarred wood
surface.
3. Do not proceed with painting of wood surfaces until moisture content
of wood is 12 percent or less as measured by a moisture meter.
E. Preparation of Metal Surfaces:
1. Ungalvanized, Uncoated Surfaces: Clean surfaces until free from dirt,
oil, and grease, and loose mill scale.
a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system
manufacturer and according to requirements of Steel Structures
Painting Council (SSPC) SP 10.
b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal
treatment wash coat before priming.
2. Ungalvanized, Coated Surfaces:
a. Clean surfaces until free from dirt, oil, and grease, and touch up
bare areas and damaged shop applied prime coats. Touch up
with same primer as shop coat.
3. Galvanized surfaces: Remove oil and surface contaminants with
nonpetroleum -based solvents. Use mechanical methods to remove
pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock.
F. Materials Preparation:
1. • Mix and prepare paint materials in accordance with Manufacturers'
instructions.
2. When materials are not in use, store in tightly covered containers.
1
1
PAINTING: 09900 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 8 SEP 00
1
3. Maintain containers used in storage, mixing, and application of paint in
a clean condition, free from foreign materials and residue. 1
4. Stir materials before application, producing a mixture of uniform
density.
a. Do not stir surface film into material; remove surface film and, if
necessary, strain material before using.
3.3 APPLICATION r
A. General:
1. Apply paint materials in accordance with manufacturer's and
referenced standard's recommended installation procedures.
2. Tint undercoats to match color of finish coat, but provide a lighter
shade in each undercoat to distinguish each separate coat.
3. Sand and dust between coats to remove defects visible to unaided eye
from a distance of five feet. 1
4. On removable panels and hinged panels, paint back sides to match
exposed faces.
5. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
6. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touch
up painted.
7. Apply additional coats where undercoats, stains, or other conditions
show through final coat of paint, until paint finish is uniform in color
and appearance.
B. Drying:
1. Allow sufficient drying time between coats, modifying period as 1
recommended by material manufacturer to suit weather conditions.
2. Consider oil -base and oleo- resinous solvent -type paint as dry for
recoating when paint feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under
moderate pressure of thumb, and when application of another coat of
paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of undercoat. 1
C. Brush Applications: -
1. Brush out and work brush coats onto surface in n
an even film.
2. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags,
ropiness, and other surface imperfections to be repaired.
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION PAINTING: 09900
SEP 00 PAGE 9
1 D. Spray Application:
i 1. Where spray application is used, apply each coat to provide hiding
equivalent of brush coats.
2. Do not double back with spray equipment to build up film thickness of
two coats in one pass.
E. For completed Work, match approved Samples as to texture, color, sheen.
1. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not in compliance with specified
1 requirements.
F. Minimum Coating Thickness: Provide total dry film thickness of entire
11 - system specified, but in no case less than recommended by manufacturer.
G. Miscellaneous surfaces and procedures:
1. Exposed mechanical items:
a. Finish electric panels, access doors, conduits, plug mold, pipes,
ducts, grilles, registers, vents, and items of similar nature to
match adjacent wall and ceiling surfaces in finished spaces.
b. Paint visible duct surfaces behind vents, registers, and grilles
flat black.
c. Wash galvanized metal with solvent, prime, and apply 2 coats
of alkyd ename
2. Hardware:
a. Paint prime coated hardware to match adjacent surfaces.
b. Paint metal portions of head seals, jamb seals, and astragal
seals to match color of door frame, unless otherwise directed by
Architect.
3. Wet areas (Toilet Rooms, Showers, Kitchens, Janitors, and like):
a. Add an approved fungicide to paint.
b. For oil base paints, use 1 percent phenylmercuric or 4 percent
tetrachlorophenol.
c. For water emulsion and glue size -sized surfaces, use 4 percent
sodium tetrachloropenate.
1 4. Exposed vents: Apply two coats of heat - resistant paint.
5. Plywood at walls for mounting electric, telephone and data equipment:
Paint gray or blue as directed by Owner.
1
1
1
PAINTING: 09900 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 10 SEP 00
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner reserves right to engage an independent testing agency to sample �
paint material being applied, and test for minimum coating thickness.
B. Samples of material delivered to Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and 1
certified in presence of Contractor.
C. Owner may direct Contractor to stop painting if test results show material 1
being used does not comply with specification requirements.
1. Contractor to pay for testing, and repaint surfaces found to be coated
with noncomplying paints.
a. Contractor may be required to remove noncomplying paint from
painted surfaces if noncomplying paints are incompatible with
specified paints.
3.5 CLEANING 1
A. Remove from site each day, empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded
refuse created by Work of this Section, and dispose of in a legal manner. 1
1. Do not dump waste materials, including thinners, on site.
2. Do not use sanitary or storm drains.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect Work of other trades against damage by painting.
1. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as 1
approved by Architect.
B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs at newly painted finishes.
C. Touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces caused by other
1
trades.
3.7 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE 1
A. Provide minimum dry mil thickness of 3 mils, but in no case Tess than
recommended by paint Manufacturer, or as otherwise noted.
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION PAINTING: 09900
SEP 00 PAGE 11
B. Provide gloss /sheen indicated in this schedule unless otherwise shown in
Color Schedule.
C. Wood - Transparent Finish:
1. First and Second coats: Wood stain.
D. Gypsum Board Soffits:
1. First coat: Latex primer sealer.
2. Second and Third coats: Acrylic enamel.
3. Gloss /Sheen: Eggshell.
E. Exposed Ferrous Metal (Architectural Steel) to include exposed portions of
members partially concealed at interior of building:
1. Shop prime coat: Tnemec 90 -97 3 mils, Tnemec zinc. Field touch -up.
2. Shop intermediate coat: Tnemec Series 161, 4 -6 mils. Field touch -up.
3. Field finish coat: Tnemec Series 74, 3 -5 mils.
F. Other Ferrous Metal:
1. First coat: Rust inhibiting primer.
2. Second and Third coats: Alkyd exterior enamel.
3. Gloss /Sheen: Gloss.
G. Galvanized Metal:
1 1. Pretreatment: Clean and acid etch.
2. First coat: Galvanized iron primer.
3. Second and third coats: Alkyd exterior enamel.
4. Gloss /Sheen: Gloss
3.8 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. Provide minimum dry mil thickness of 3 mils, but in no case less than
1 recommended by paint Manufacturer, or as otherwise noted.
B. Provide gloss /sheen indicated in this schedule unless otherwise shown in
1 Room Finish Schedule on drawings
1
1
1
PAINTING: 09900 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 12 SEP 00
C. Wood - Opaque Finish: ,
1. First coat: Alkyd primer sealer. ,
2. Second and Third coats: Acrylic enamel.
3. Gloss /Sheen: Eggshell.
D. Wood - Transparent Finish:
1. Filler (for open grain wood only). 1
2. First and Second coats: Wood stain.
3. Third coat: Sealer.
4. Fourth and Fifth coats: Varnish.
5. Gloss /Sheen: Satin.
E. Interior Plywood Equipment Mounting Boards: 1
1. First coat: Latex primer.
2. Second and Third coats: latex enamel
3. Gloss /Sheen: Semi - Gloss.
F. Plaster and Gypsum Board:
1. First coat: Latex primer /surfacer. 1
a. Sherwin Williams' PrepRite High Build Interior Latex
Primer /Sealer.
2. Second and Third coats: Acrylic enamel 1
3. Gloss /Sheen: Eggshell.
G. Gypsum Board - Wet Areas (Toilet Rooms, Kitchens, Janitors, and like): r
1. First coat: Latex primer /surface.
a. Sherwin Williams" PrepRite High Build Interior Latex
Primer /Sealer.
2. Second and Third coats: Alkyd enamel.
3. Gloss /Sheen: Semi - Gloss.
H. Gypsum Board to Receive Vinyl Wall Covering: 1
1. One coat of alkyd primer sealer.
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION PAINTING: 09900
SEP 00 PAGE 13
1 I. Ferrous metal:
1 1. First coat: Chrome oxide primer.
2. Second and Third coats: Alkyd enamel.
3. Gloss /Sheen: Semi - Gloss.
J. Galvanized metal:
1. Pretreatment: Clean and acid etch.
2. First coat: Galvanized iron primer.
3. Second and Third coats: Alkyd enamel.
4. Gloss /Sheen: Semi -Gloss
1 END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 TOC BUILDING ADDITION VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS: 10100
SEP 00 PAGE 1
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Markerboards.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06100: Rough Carpentry, for framing, and blocking and support
backing.
B. Section 09001: Room Finish Schedule Notes.
C. Section 09250: Gypsum Board, for wall substrate.
1 1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each item specified including proposed and specified
accessories.
1 1. Include maintenance data on cleaning and stain removal.
+� B. Shop Drawings: Show elevations, dimensions, joint locations, and anchorage
1 details, and interface with other work.
C. Samples: 6 by 8 inch in size illustrating materials, finish, colors, and textures.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1 A. Use skilled workers who are trained and experienced in necessary crafts and
are familiar with requirements and methods needed for proper performance
of Work of this Section.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Tackboards and Tackboard Fabric: Conform to applicable code requirements
for flame /smoke rating as follows:
F accordance with ASTM
1. Fuel Contribution: Class B in accorda a E 8 4.
2. Critical Radiant Flux: Class II in accordance with NFPA 253.
1
1
VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS: 10100 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
1.6 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MARKERBOARDS, (MB):
A. Manufactures: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products 1
from one of the following:
1. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.
2. Greensteel Visual Display Products
3. Nelson Adams Company 1
4. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section
01630.
B. Porcelain Enamel on Sheet Steel: ASTM A 526, 9 alvanized to G90. ASTM A
242, Type I, commercial quality.
1. Outer Face Sheet: 24 gage.
2. Finish: Glass fibered enamel, backed to vitreous surfaces; Porcelain
Enamel Institute Type A.
3. Color: White
C. Core: Particle Board, NPA A208.1 1
D. Foil Backing: Aluminum foil sheet. 1
E. Frame and Chalkrail: Cherry wood.
1. Finish: Conversion Varnish TRY.
F. Accessories: 1
1. Adhesives: Type recommended by manufacturer of markerboard.
2. Map Supports: Formed aluminum sliding hooks to fit map rail.
2.2 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, required for a complete and proper installation.
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS: 10100
SEP 00 PAGE 3
1 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions where Work of this Section will be performed.
B. Verify that internal wall blocking is ready to receive work and positioning
9 Y P 9
dimensions are as indicated in Shop Drawings.
C. Correct conditions detrimental timely tal to t mely and proper completion of the Work.
1 D. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install Work of this Section in accordance with manufacturer's installation
instructions, and as shown.
B. Secure units level and plumb.
1 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean markerboard surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Cover markerboards and tackboards with protective cover, taped to frame.
1 Remove temporary protection mo a to po ary p otection cover at date of Substantial Completion, and
reclean surfaces.
END OF SECTION
1
•
1
1
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS: 10160
SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Provide [floor mounted], [floor mounted overhead braced], [ceiling mounted]
1 metal toilet partitions system, and urinal screens.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06100: Rough Carpentry, for framing, and blocking and support
1 backing.
B. Section 09002: Materials and Finishes Schedule.
C. Section 10810: Toilet Accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Materials list of items P
ro osed to be provided under this Section.
P P
1 2. Manufacturer's Specifications and other Data needed to show
compliance with specified requirements.
B. Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show layout dimensions, fabrication,
installation, anchorage, and interface with Work of this Section with Work of
other adjacent trades.
1. Provide entire toilet room layouts to verify clearances for accessibility
as required by Building Code with Work of this Section.
C. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures.
1 D. Samples: Submit samples to verify specified color and finish.
[D. Samples: Submit Samples of manufacturer's standard color range.]
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use skilled workers trained and experienced in necessary crafts and familiar
with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of Work of
1 this Section.
1
1
METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS: 10160 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with The Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), and State Building 1
Code for accessibility recommendations and requirements for the physically
disabled.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to job site in manufacturer's unopened containers with 1
labels intact and legible. Maintain packaged materials with seals unbroken
and labels intact until time of use. Labels to include manufacturer's
name /brand name, stock number, and color.
B. Provide templates for bolt hole locations. 1
C. Store above ground, under cover, and protected from damage.
1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Field verify dimensions prior to fabrication; if vary significantly from Contract 1,
Documents, obtain Architect's approval before proceeding.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 1
2.1 METAL TOILET PARTITIONS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
from one of the following: '
1. Accurate
2. American Sanitary
3. Global
4. Knickerbocker.
5. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 1
01630.
B. Material: ,
1. Material: Cold rolled, Stretcher - leveled steel with zinc coated per
ASTM A -164.
2. Partitions: 20 gage steel minimum.
3. Pilasters: 20 gage steel minimum. 1
i
1
1 TOC BUILDING ADDITION METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS: 10160
SEP 00 PAGE 3
1 4. Door panels: 22 gage steel minimum.
5. Partition design: Floor mounted, overhead braced.
6. Urinal screen design: Wall -hung.
7. Finish: Baked -on enamel.
8. Color: Selected from manufacturer's standard range.
C. Hardware and fittings:
1 1. Pilaster Base: Stainless steel.
2. Fasteners: Corrosion - resistant.
3. Provide 2 wall brackets minimum for each partition or screen.
4. Each door:
a. One pair of self - lubricating, gravity -type hinges. Provide hinges
that hold in- swinging doors at a uniformly open position when
unlocked, except for doors to accessible compartments.
b. Slide bar latch with combination stop and latch keeper.
c. Pull at outswing doors.
d. Coat hook, rubber ended.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Grind welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Metallic fillers not
1 allowed.
1 B. Conceal reinforcement for hardware and Fittings, including toilet accessories
provided under Work of Section10810: Toilet Accessories.
C. Dimension compartments and doors to comply with The Americans with
Disabilities Act (ADA), and State Building Code for accessibility
recommendations and requirements for the physically disabled.
1 D. Minimum panel thickness: 1 inch for doors and partitions; 1 -1/4 inches for
pilasters.
1 2.3 OTHER MATERIALS
1 A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete
and proper installation.
1
1
1
1
METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS: 10160 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 4 SEP 00
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION 1
A. Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be
performed. 1
1. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of
Work.
2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.2 COORDINATION 1
A. Coordinate with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in
Work of those trades for interface with Work of this Section.
B. Protect work of others from damage. ,
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install Work of this Section in accordance with the following:
9
1. Drawings. 1
2. Approved Shop Drawings.
3. Requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
4. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures.
B. Maximum uniform clearances:
1. For panel at wall and pilaster at wall: 1 inch.
2. Panel at pilaster: 1/2 inch.
3. Door at pilaster: 3/16 inch.
C. Locate wall brackets near top and bottom of panels. 1
D. Align tops and bottoms of doors with adjacent panels.
E. Anchor components firmly into
p y position plumb, level and square.
F. Touchup of scratches and abrasions to be permanently and completely 1
invisible to unaided eye from a distance of 5 feet.
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS: 10160
SEP 00 PAGE 5
1 3.4 CLEANING, ADJUSTMENT AND PROTECTION
1 A. During warranty period, adjust moving parts to operate smoothly and quietly.
B. Clean, without damaging, exposed surfaces affected by work of this Section.
1. Repair damaged surfaces.
1 C. Remove from site refuse created by this work, and dispose of in a legal
manner.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
■ TOC BUILDING ADDITION LOUVERS AND VENTS: 10200
SEP 00 PAGE 1
' PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Louvers and vents.
1
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
1 A. Section 07600: Flashing and Sheet Metal.
' B. Section 07900: Joint Sealers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1 A. Product Data: Manufacturer's Specifications and other Data needed to show
compliance with specified requirements
B. Shop Drawings in sufficient details to show materials, dimensions, fabrication,
installation, anchorage and interface of Work of this Section with work of
1 adjacent trades.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer to have successfully fabricated similar items for a minimum of 3
1 recent years.
B. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate
1 provision work of those trades for interfacing with Work of this Section.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1 A. Deliver products to jobsite in their Manufacturer's original containers, with
labels intact and legible. Maintain package materials with seals unbroken and
1 labels intact until time of use.
B. Store above ground, under cover and protected from damage.
1.6 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Field verify all dimensions prior to fabrication; if vary significantly from
Contract Documents, or Shop Drawings, obtain Architect's approval before
1 proceeding.
1
1
LOUVERS AND VENTS: 10200 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Warrant louvers to be weatherproof for 2 years following Project substantial i
Completion date, and to repair and /or replace without additional cost to
Owner any water leaks and resulting damage to building materials and /or
building contents as may occur under normal usage with warranty period.
PART 2 PRODUCTS '
2.1 LOUVERS
A. Manufacturer: Carnes, or approved.
1. Type: Carnes Model No. FFNA
2. Material:
a. Frame: 16 gage galvanized steel.
b. Blades: 20 gage galvanized steel. '
3. Shape: As shown
4. Size: Width and height as shown; 4 inches deep.
5. Bird screen:
a. Mesh: 1/3 inch square (.054 over .041 wire)
b. Coating: PVC.
6. Factory finish: air -dried enamel.
a. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard.
B. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete 1
and proper installation, as selected by Contractor subject to approval of
Architect. 1
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Except as otherwise shown on:
1. Construction Documents. 1
2. Reviewed Shop Drawings
3. Use materials of size, thickness, and type required to produce
reasonable strength and durability in Work of this Section. 1
B. Fabricate with sharp, accurate edges and angles, and surfaces which are
smooth and true to required lines and levels, grinding exposed welds smooth
and flush, and forming exposed connections with hairline joints.
1
1
1 TOC BUILDING ADDITION LOUVERS AND VENTS: 10200
SEP 00 PAGE 3
1. Punch and shear to leave clean surfaces.
2. Cut abutting members to fit with full bearing contact.
' 3. Miter and cope member intersections within 2 degrees, fit to within
0.02 inches.
4. Fabricate so as to minimize field assembly.
C. Form, fabricate, and install so as to adequately provide for expansion and
Y P
contraction in finished work.
D. Allowable fabrication tolera
o tolerances:
1 1. Maximum deviation of individual members from dimensions shown:
Overall length of members: 1/8 inch.
1 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be
1 performed.
1. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of
1 Work.
2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.2 PROTECTION
A. Protect work of others from damage.
3.3 INSTALLATION
1 A. Install Work of this Section in accordance with the following:
1. Construction Documents.
2. Reviewed Shop Drawings.
3. Requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
1 4. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures.
B. Dissimilar Metal Protection: Apply an asphaltic coating compound, 7 -1/2 mil.
1 dry film thickness minimum, to each contacting face to protect against
electrolytic corrosion.
1
1
1
LOUVERS AND VENTS: 10200 TOC BUILDING ADDITION 1
PAGE 4 SEP 00
C. Make weathertight, installing sheetmetal flashing where required. 1
1. Set flanges and flashings in sealant specified in Section 07900. 1
D. Where HVAC duct meets inside face of louver, provide sheet metal closure
between perimeter of louver and perimeter of duct; paint exterior face of 1
closure panel flat black.
3.4 CLEANING, ADJUSTMENT AND PROTECTION 1
A. Clean exposed louver with water. Acid or abrasive cleaners are not allowed.
B. Clean, without damaging, exposed surfaces affected by work of this Section.
1. Repair damaged surfaces.
C. Remove from site refuse created by this work, and dispose of in a legal
1
manner.
END OF SECTION I
1
1
1
1
-• 1
1
1
1
1
1 TOC BUILDING ADDITION IDENTIFICATION DEVICES: 10401
SEP 00 PAGE 1
1 PART1 GENERAL
1 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Disabled Parking Signs.
B. Bike Parking
1 C. Building Directory
D. Interior Room Identification Signs.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
1 A. Section 02765: Pavement Marking.
1 B. Section 03300: Cast -in -Place Concrete, for post mounted sign footings.
C. Section 09260: Gypsum Board Assemblies, for wall framing and finish.
1 1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate sign styles, lettering font, foreground and
background colors, locations, overall dimensions of each sign.
1 B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include installation template and
attachment devices.
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS
' A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified
in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
1 A. Conform to applicable requirements of American National Standards Institute,
ANSI A117.1, UBC, and ADA, Americans with Disabilities - Accessibility
Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities.
1
1
1
1
IDENTIFICATION DEVICES: 10401 TOC BUILDING ADDITION I
PAGE 2 SEP 00
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCESSIBLE PARKING STALL SIGN
1
A. Design: Sign no. OR20 -6B by Oregon State Highway Division
II
B. Size: Vertical rectangle of standard size of 12 by 18 inches.
9 Y
C. Legend and border shall be white on a blue background. 1
D. Mounting Height: As required by jurisdiction having authority.
1
2.2 VAN ACCESSIBLE SIGN
A. Sign no. OR20 -6D by Oregon State Highway Division.
B. Size: Horizontal rectangle 12 by 3 inches.
1
C. Legend and border shall be white on a blue background.
D. Mounting Height: As required by jurisdiction having authority.
2.3 BICYCLE PARKING AREA SIGN
1
A. Design: As required by jurisdiction having authority.
I
B. Size: Vertical rectangle of standard size of 12 by 18 inches.
C. Legend and border shall be green on a reflectorized white background. 1
D. Mounting Height:: As required by jurisdiction having authority.
1
Note: If bike parking is remote from actual bike parking area, a sign may be
required in lobby describing where it is.
1
2.5 VISUAL AND TACTILE SIGNS
A. Type: Manufacturer's standard tactile si na a series, employing
Y 9 9 �
Manufacturer's graphic blast process.
1
B. Materials: Manufacturer's standard ES plastic high - pressure laminate. 1/8
inch thick, fire- retardant, self - extinguishing. 1
1
1
1 TOC BUILDING ADDITION IDENTIFICATION DEVICES: 10401
SEP 00 PAGE 3
1. Color: Black with white core.
' C. Style: Signs shall be of the four -in -one construction style having the following
characteristics:
1. Tactile Characters/Symbols: Raised 1/32 inch from sign plate face.
Y 9 P
2. Grade 2 Braille.
3. 1 inch wide, 1/32 inch raised perimeter border, with 1/8 inch radius at
outside sign edges.
' 4. Provide letters, numbers, symbols, and Braille contrasting with their
background. Dark symbols on Tight background.
' D. Lettering Style: Helvetica Medium, uppercase.
E. Lettering Size: 1 inch high.
F. Layout: Center lettering on sign face with Braille message below.
G. Size: Vary sign size with regard to message. Provide a 1 inch wide border
on all sides of message area.
H. Mounting:
1 1. Attach to wall surface with Manufacturer's standard general purpose
adhesive.
2. Height: Mount top of signs at 66 inches above finished floor.
a. Verify height with local jurisdiction.
3. Location:
a. Single -Swing Doors: Sign edge 6 inch from strike jamb.
' b. Double -Swing Doors: Sign edge 6 inch from right -hand jamb.
c. No Door: As directed by Architect.
1 I. Signs:
1. Text to include room number and name of room for which door is
provided.
2. Mount on "room entry" side of door.
3. Allow for 15 room signs.
1
1
IDENTIFICATION DEVICES: 10401 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 4 SEP 00
2.6 ROOM IDENTIFICATION SIGN
A. Toilet Room Identification Signage: Self adhering black plastic sign with white 1
international symbol for male and female, of same size, type, and color as
room sign.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION 1
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work. 1
B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing surfaces.
3.2 INSTALLATION 1
A. Install in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions and in compliance with 1
ANSI A117.1 and ADA.
B. Install signs after doors and wall surfaces are finished, in locations indicated. 1
C. Center parking signs on parking space.
D. Clean signs.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1 TOC BUILDING ADDITION FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES:10520
SEP 00 PAGE 1
1 PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fire extinguisher cabinets and portable fire extinguishers.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06100: Rough Carpentry, for wall framing, and blocking and support
backing.
B. Section 09250: Gypsum Board, for wall substrate.
' 1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1 1. Manufacturer's Specifications and other Data needed to show
compliance with specified requirements.
1 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Provide extinguishers, cabinets and accessories from a single Manufacturer.
B. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate
1 provision in work of those trades for interfacing with Work of this Section.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire extinguishers: Provide label showing type, rating and classification.
1 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to jobsite in Manufacturer's original containers with original
labels intact and legible.
1 1. Maintain packaged materials with seals unbroken and labels intact
until time of installation.
1 B. Store above ground, under cover and protected from damage.
1
1
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES:10520 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS 1
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the
following:
1. J.L. Industries.
2. Larsen Manufacturing.
B. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01630.
1
2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET
A. Type: Non -Fire rated '
1. J.L. Industries Fully recessed: Ambassador No. 1815F12
1
2. Larsen Manufacturing Co. Fully recessed: Architectural Series No.
2409-R1.
B. Location: Refer to designated as Drawings (Fire extinguisher cabinets are desi
9 ( 9 9
"FEC "), or comply with requirements of NFPA 10.
C. Mounting: Fully- recessed, with flat steel trim.
D. Material: Steel cabinet with steel door. 1
1. Door style: Full glass.
2. Door glazing: 1/4 inch clear acrylic.
E. Minimum inside cabinet dimensions: 9 -1/2 inches wide by 24 inches high by 5
inches deep.
F. Exterior and interior cabinet and door finish: Manufacturer's white, unless
1
otherwise noted.
2.3 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
1
A. Model: 1
1. J.L. Industries Cosmic 5E.
2. Larsen Manufacturing Co.: MP -5. 1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES:10520
SEP 00 PAGE 3
1 B. Multi- purpose dry chemical: U.L. rating: 2A -10BC
1 C. Capacity: 5 lbs.
1. Verify size to fit cabinet.
I D. Color: Red
I E. Location: One per cabinet (where shown on Drawings).
I 2.4 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete
1 and proper installation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
1 3.1 EXAMINATION
1 A. Verify required framing /blocking for support and fastening has been placed in
walls.
I B. For fire rated walls with non -fire rated cabinets, verify recess is lined with
gypsum board to maintain rating.
3.2 INSTALLATION
I A. Install Work of this Section in accordance with the following:
1. Drawings.
I 2. Approved Shop Drawings.
3. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures.
I B. Mount at height to comply with requirements of The Americans with
Disabilities Act and local governmental authorities having jurisdiction
regarding accessibility disabled.
I C. Conceal fasteners whenever P ossible.
D. Apply sealant between cabinet flange and wall surface.
1
1
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES:10520 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 4 SEP 00
E. Fill and service each fire extinguisher prior to Date of Substantial Completion; 1
attach certificate of service, including date.
F. Protect Work of other Sections from damage.
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
1
A. Clean, without damaging, exposed surfaces (including cabinet interior) I
affected by Work of this Section.
1. Repair damaged surfaces.
1
B. Touch -up scratches and abrasions so as to be permanently and completely
invisible to unaided eye from a distance of 5 feet.
1
C. Remove from jobsite refuse and debris created by this work, and dispose of
in a legal manner.
1
D. Protect Work of this Section.
r
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION OPERABLE PARTITIONS: 10650
SEP 00 PAGE 1
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Operable wall system.
t 1.2 RELATED SECTION
A. Section 06100: Rough Carpentry
B. Section 09250: Gypsum Board
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1 A. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
1. Manufacturer's Specifications and other Data needed to show
compliance with specified requirements.
2. Samples of manufacturer's standard colors available in specified
1 materials.
B. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures.
1.4 UALITY ASSURANCE
URANCE
A. Use skilled workers trained and experienced in necessary crafts who are
familiar with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of
1 Work of this Section.
PART2 PRODUCTS
1 2.1 OPERABLE WALLS
A. Manufacturer: Modernfold Inc., having the following attributes:
1. Acoustiseal 900 series model: Manual operated flat panels paired.
1 2. Paired angle turn #17 bracket mount track, frame supported by ball
bearing trolley assemblies.
3. 25 mm Manual floor seal, flexible sweep ptrips top. Standard fixed
jambs.
4. Partition construction metal frame, nominal 2.75 inches thick.
1
1
1
OPERABLE PARTITIONS: 10650 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
5. Outer covering fabric:
a. Manufacturer: Maharam.
b. Pattern: 900706004 Sequoia.
c. Color: 004 Aquamarine.
d. Width: 66 inches.
e. Contents: 100 percent Polyester.
6. Acoustically rated STC 40 per ASTM E90 -75 lab test procedure.
B. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01630. 1
2.2 OTHER MATERIALS
1
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete
and proper installation. 1
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be 1
performed.
1. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of work. 1
2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION 1
A. Coordinate as necessary with other trades to assure proper and adequate
provision in work of those trades for interface with Work of this Section.
B. Install Work of this Section in accordance with the following:
1. Drawings.
2. Approved Shop Drawings.
3. Requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
4. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures.
C. Anchor components firmly into position plumb, level, and true.
1
END OF SECTION
1
1
1 TOC BUILDING ADDITION TOILET ACCESSORIES: 10810
SEP 00 PAGE 1
1 PART 1 GENERAL
I 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Toilet room accessories.
I 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
I A. Section 06100: Rough Carpentry, for framing, and blocking and support
backing.
1 B. Section 09250: Gypsum Board.
I C. Section 09300: Tile.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1 A. Product Data: For each product specified describing size, finish, details of
function, and attachment methods.
I 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
1 A. Conform to applicable code for installing work in conformance with ADA
Guidelines.
I 1.5 COORDINATION
I A. Coordinate Work of this Section with placement of internal wall reinforcement,
and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments.
1 PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
I A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated in the
Schedule of toilet accessories at the end of Part 3, as manufactured by one
1 of the following:
1. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
1 2. American Specialties, Inc.
3. Bradley Corporation.
i 4. Gamco.
1
TOILET ACCESSORIES: 10810 TOC BUILDING ADDITION 1
PAGE 2 SEP 00
5. McKinney /Parker. 1
2.2 MATERIALS 1
A. Sheet Steel: ASTM A 366.
B. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A 167, Type 304. 1
C. Tubing: ASTM A 269, stainless steel. 1
D. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel.
E. Expansion Shields: As recommended by manufacturer for suitable for
application. 1
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Weld and grind smooth joints of fabricated components. 1
B. Form exposed surfaces from single sheet of stock, free of joints. 1
C. form surfaces flat without distortion. Maintain flat surfaces without scratches
or dents. 1
D. Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings.
E. Provide steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for
p p p or
installation.
I
2.4 FACTORY FINISHING
A. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin luster finish. 1
2.5 KEYING I
A. Provide tumbler locks for all lockable access doors and panels.
B. Key lock alike per each room or per entire project, in accordance with I
Owner's instructions.
C. Master key all accessories.
1
1
1
1
1 TOC BUILDING ADDITION TOILET ACCESSORIES: 10810
SEP 00 PAGE 3
1 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive Work of this Section.
B. Verify that dimensions are as indicated in Drawings.
C. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of Work.
D. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
1 A. Provide templates and rough -in measurements as required.
B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation.
3.3 INSTALLATION
' A. Install fixtures, accessories and items in accordance with ADA Guidelines
and manufacturer's installation instructions.
' B. Install each item in its proper location, lumb and level, securely and rigidly
P Y 9 Y
anchored to substrate.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TOILET ACCESSORIES: 10810 TOC BUILDING ADDITION I
PAGE 4 SEP 00
3.4 SCHEDULE
A. Toilet Accessories: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. products are listed as
standard:
1. TPD /SCD Toilet Paper Dispenser B-4388 1
2. PTD /R Paper Towel Dispenser/Waste B -3944 I
Receptacle
3. SCD Seat Cover Dispenser B -221
4. SNR Sanitary Napkin Receptacle B -270 I
5. SD Soap Dispenser, Deck Mount: B -822 ,
6. GB Grab Bars B -5806 I
Series
7. MR Mirrors B -290
Series
1
8. Surface mounted stainless steel mop and B -223
broom holder x 24
1
B. Diaper Changing Station:
1. Manufacturer: Safe -Strap Co., Inc.
2. Model No. 4300, Ivory. I
3. Surface mounted.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION LOUVER BLINDS: 12491
SEP 00 PAGE 1
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Metal horizontal louver blind system.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06100: Rough Carpentry, for framing and concealed in -wall blocking
and supports.
B. Section 09002: Materials and Finishes Schedule.
C. Section 09250: Gypsum Board, for wall finish substrate.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data:
1 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to show
compliance with specified requirements.
1 3. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures.
1 B. Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation anchorage,
and interface of Work of this Section with work of adjacent trades.
1. Show opening sizes, tolerances required, method of attachment,
clearances, and operation.
' C. Samples: Two samples of each product specified illustrating slat materials
and finish, color, cord and rod type and color.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use skilled workmen who are trained and experienced in necessary crafts
1 and who are familiar with requirements and methods needed for proper
performance of Work of this Section.
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide ten additional slats and wands for each size assembly.
1
1
LOUVER BLINDS: 12491 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide horizontal metal louver 1
blinds meeting requirements specified in Section 09002: Materials and
Finishes Schedule. '
B. Louver Material: Aluminum at all exterior windows and side lights (not at
interior relights).
1
C. Controls:
1. Tilt Operation: Manual with wand. 111
2. Cord -Lock Operation: Cord lock.
3. Cord Equalizers: Self- aligning to maintain horizontal louver blind
position.
4. Valance: Match color of louvers.
5. Mounting:
1
a. Windows: Wall extension brackets.
b. Swing Doors: Top of door, with hold -down brackets at bottom of
door.
6. Colors: Refer to Section 09002: Materials and Finishes Schedule.
2.2 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials as required for a complete and proper installation. '
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Horizontal Louver Blinds:
1. Lifting and Tilting Mechanisms: Noncorrosive, self - lubricating
1
materials.
2. Installation Fasteners: Not less than 2 fasteners per bracket, fabricated
from materials noncorrosive to blind materials.
3. Hold -Down Brackets: Manufacturer's standard.
B. Fabricate blinds to fit openings with uniform edge clearance of 1/2 inch.
1
1
1 TOC BUILDING ADDITION LOUVER BLINDS: 12491
SEP 00 PAGE 3
1 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be
1 performed.
1 1. Correct conditions detrimental to proper completion of Work.
2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
' B. Verify that concealed in -wall blocking is in place for proper anchorage of
horizontal support brackets to walls and ceilings.
' 3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate
1 provision in work of those trades for interface with Work of this Section.
B. Install Work of this Section in accordance with:
1. Construction Documents.
2. Reviewed Shop Drawings.
3. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures.
' 3.3 CLEANING
A. Clean and protect Work from damage.
1
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 TOC BUILDING ADDITION HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATORS: 14242
SEP 00 PAGE 1
1
PART1 GENERAL
I 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
1 A. Holeless, Hydraulic passenger elevator system.
I B. Related work required for a complete elevator installation as required by
contract documents.
I 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01770: Closeout Procedures, Operation and Maintenance Manual
1 requirements.
B. Section 05500: Pit Ladder.
I C. Section 09680: Carpet.
1 D. Section 14295: Elevator Maintenance
1.3 REFERENCES
I
A. ASTM A167 - Specification for stainless and heat resisting chromium - nickel
I plate, sheet and strip.
B. ASTM A366 - Specification for steel, carbon, cold rolled, commercial quality.
1 C. ASTM A 569 - Specification for steel, carbon, hot - rolled sheet and strip
commercial quality.
I D. ASTM B209 - Specification for aluminuni and aluminum -alloy sheet and
plate.
I E. ASTM B221 - Specification for aluminum and aluminum -alloy extruded bars,
rods, wire, shapes, and tubes.
I
ASTM E84 - Test method for surface burning characteristics of building
g g
I materials.
1
1
1
HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATORS: 14242 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 2 SEP 00
1.4 WORK NOT INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION
A. Legal Hoistway and Pit:
9 Y
1. Legal Code approved hoistway. Sump pump in elevator pit as required 1
by State of Oregon memo -dated August 16, 1995.
2. Grouting around hoistway entrances and sills.
3. Pit ladder.
4. Structural supports for jack unit, buffer and guide rail loads.
5. Pit: 4' -0" deep.
6. Sleeves for hydraulic oil line and electrical wiring duct between
hoistway wall to elevator machine room.
a. Coordinate with Elevator Contractor. 1
7. Sleeves for hall push button stations at each floor.
a. Coordinate with Elevator Contractor.
B. Legal Machine Room:
1. Legal Code approved elevator machine room. 1
C. Electrical Service, Conductors and Devices:
1. Lighting and convenience in elevator pit and machine room.
2. Three -phase mainline power feeders with dedicated grounding
conductor.
3. Fused lockable disconnect switch or lockable circuit breaker.
4. Power feeders rated at 20A -120 VAC dedicated circuit to elevator
controller for car lighting and exhaust fan.
5. Dedicated telephone line to elevator controller.
6. Products -of- combustion, sensors (NFPA No. 72, Chapter 5 -3) in each 1
elevator lobby and machine room.
7. Temporary power and illumination.
8. Electrical shunt trip device if water sprinklers heads are installed in
elevator machine room or hoistway.
a. Heat detectors within 24" of each water sprinkler head, or water
flow sensor device to active shunt trip device.
b. Auxiliary set of contacts installation circuit breaker (use when
emergency battery lowering feature is specified). 1
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATORS: 14242
SEP 00 PAGE 3
1
1.5 DEFINITIONS
1 A. Terms used are defined in latest edition of Safety Code for Elevator and
Escalators, ASME A17.1, 1993, including all Addenda's.
B. Reference to a device or a part of equipment applies to number of devices or
1 parts required to complete installation.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Elevator Contractor to furnish Owner with proprietary equipment and
adjusting information as required for maintenance.
1 1. If proprietary equipment requires readjusting or re- programming from
manufacturer, Elevator Contractor to pay for costs including freight for
1 a period of five (5) years from date of elevator final acceptance by
Owner.
B. Elevator Contractor to provide and install software improvement up- grades
for a period of five (5) years from date of elevator final acceptance by Owner.
1 1. Costs of the software up- grades paid by elevator contractor that
installed elevator equipment.
1 C. Elevator Contractor will provide Elevator Maintenance Contractor, elevator
replacement of spare parts within 72 hours from date of parts order by
1 Elevator Maintenance Contractor or Owner.
D. Document Verification: Elevator bidders review contract documents for
1 compatibility with their products prior to bidding.
1. Review structural, architectural, electrical, mechanical drawings, and
specifications. Attach specific, written exceptions and /or clarifications
1 per contract requirements. Bidder's compliance with all provisions of
contract document is assumed and required in absence of written
exceptions. Owner will not pay for changes to structural, mechanical,
electrical or other systems required to accommodate bidders
equipment if not identified, before contract award.
1 E. Compliance with Regulatory Agencies: Comply with most - stringent applicable
provisions of following Codes and /or Authorities, including revisions and
1 changes in effect on date of contract award.
1
1
HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATORS: 14242 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 4 SEP 00
1. Safety Code for Elevator and Escalators ASME 17.1 -1993 including all 1
Addenda's and Part XXIV.
2. Oregon Elevator Specialty Code - Oregon Amendments to ASME 1
A17.1., Elevator Safety Code for New Installations.
3. Inspector's Manual for Hydraulic Elevator, ASME A17.2.2 -1994,
including all Addenda's. ,
4. National Electrical Code, No. ANSI /NFPA 70.
5. Requirements of Building Code and any other Codes, Ordinances and
Laws applicable within governing jurisdiction.
6. The Americans Disability Act- (ADA).
1.7 ACCEPTABLE ELEVATOR MANUFACTURERS / INSTALLERS 1
A. KONE Inc. 1
B. Otis Elevator Company
C. Thyssen -Sound
D. Schindler 1
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Labor /Materials and Maintenance to correct defects, unless due to ordinary
wear and tear, or improper use or by Purchaser, within one (1) year from
date of substantial completion.
B. Elevator Preventative Maintenance
1. Carry out work in strict compliance with laws, codes, rules and
regulations set forth with regard to equipment by municipal, state or
federal authorities having jurisdiction in effect on date of this contract.
1.9 SUBMITTALS
A. Within thirty (30) days after award of contract, and before beginning
equipment fabrication submit shop drawings and required material for review. 1
1. Allow thirty (30) days for response to submittals.
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATORS: 14242
SEP 00 PAGE 5
B. Shop Drawings:
s: 9
1 1. Scaled or Fully Dimensioned Layouts: Plan of pit, hoistway and
machine room indicating equipment arrangement, elevation section of
hoistway, details of car enclosure, hoistway entrances, hoistway doors,
all fixtures and hydraulic cylinder.
2. Design Information: Indicate Seismic equipment lists, reactions and
design information on layouts.
3. Power Confirmation Sheets: Include motor horse power, code letter,
starting current, full load running current, and demand factor for
applicable motors.
4. Finish Material: Submit 3" x 12" samples or 12" lengths of actual
finished materials for Architect's review of color, pattern and texture
1 only. Compliance with other requirements is exclusive responsibility of
Elevator Contractor. Include signal units, pushbuttons, lights, graphics,
Braille plates and mounting provisions.
1 5. Fixtures: Cuts, Samples and Shop Drawings.
C. Acknowledge and /or respond to drawing mark -up within seven (7) days of
return; promptly incorporate required changes due to inaccurate data or
incomplete definition so that delivery and installation schedules are not
affected. Revision response is not justification for delivery or installation
delay.
1 1.10 PERMITS, TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A. Obtain and pay for permits, licenses and inspection fees necessary to
complete elevator installation.
B. Perform tests required by State of [Oregon] [Washington] Elevator Inspector
1 and
ASME 17.1 -1993 Safety Code for Elevator and Escalators, with procedures
described in ASME A17.2.2 -1994 Inspector's Manual for Hydraulic Elevator.
C. Supply personnel equipment rsonnel and a ui ment for tests and final reviews indicated in Part
3 at no added cost.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Type of Equipment: Hydraulic Passenger Elevator
1
1
HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATORS: 14242 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 6 SEP 00
B. Rated Capacity: 2100 LBS.
C. Rated Speed: 125 F.P.M. 1
D. Oil: Environmentally friendly.
i
E. Total Travel: 11'-9-3/4".
F. Floors Served: 1 -2
G. Number of Stops / Openings: 2 -All in Line [No. Front] [No Rear]
H. Size of Door Opening:
1. 2100# Single -slide Door 3' -0" x 7' -0" or 8' -0 ".
I. Inside Clear Car Size: 1
Front Opening:
1. 2100# 5' -8" wide x 4' -3" deep 1
Front & Rear Opening:
1. 2100# 5' -8" wide x 4'- 3 -3/4" deep
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Steel:
1. Sheet Steel (Furniture Steel for Exposed Work):
Stretcher - leveled, cold - rolled, commercial - quality carbon steel,
complying with ASTM A366, matte finish. 1
2. Sheet Steel (for Unexposed Work): Hot - rolled, commercial - quality
carbon steel, pickled and oiled, complying with ASTM A569.
3. Structural Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A6, ASTM A36, and
ASTM A108.
B. Stainless Steel: Type 302 or 304 complying with ASTM A167, with standard 1
tempers and hardness required for fabrication, strength and durability.
1. No. 4: Bright directional polish (satin finish). Graining directions as 1
shown, or if not shown, in vertical dimension.
1
1
1
1 TOC BUILDING ADDITION HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATORS: 14242
SEP 00 PAGE 7
I 2. Apply mechanical finish on fabricated work in locations shown or
specified.
1 3. Protect with adhesive paper covering.
I C. Aluminum: Extrusions per ASTM B221; sheet and plate per ASTM B209.
D. Fire Retardant - Treated Particleboard Panels: Minimum 3/4" for
backup or
I natural finished wood, and plastic laminate veneered panels, edged and
faced as shown.
I 1. Provide with suitable anti -warp backing; meet ASTM E84 Class "1"
rating with flamespread rating of 25 or less.
I E. Paint: Clean exposed metal of oil, grease, scale and other foreign matter and
factory paint one shop coat of Manufacturer's standard rust - resistant primer.
1 1. Provide one finish coat of industrial enamel paint.
2. Galvanized metal need not to be painted.
I F. Baked Enamel:
1 1. Prime coat.
2. Apply baked enamel in selected solid color.
I 2.3 PERFORMANCE
A. Speed: +/- 10% of contract speed in down direction under any Toad
1 conditions, rated speed with rated load in up direction.
B. Capacity: Stop level at all landings, in both directions, under all loading
1 conditions.
C. Stopping Accuracy: +/- 1/4" under all loading condition or direction of travel.
I D. Door Opening Time: (Select Appropriate Options)
1 1. 2100# 2.6 seconds for Single Slide
I E. Floor -to -Floor Performance Time: Seconds from start of doors closing until
doors are 3/4 open and car level and stopped at next successive floor under
any loading condition or direction of travel.
1
1
1
HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATORS: 14242 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 8 SEP 00
1. 17.5 seconds (based on 12' travel)
F. Pressure: Design and factory test fluid system components for 500 p.s.i. 1
1. Do not exceed operating pressures of 400 p.s.i.
2.4 OPERATION
A. Simplex Collective Operation: Using a microprocessor -based controller, 1
operation to be automatic by means of the car and hall buttons. If all calls in
the system have been answered, the car to park at the last landing served. 1
B. Door Operation: Open doors automatically when car arrives at a floor to
permit transfer of passengers. 1
1. Automatically close doors after a timed interval.
C. Automatic Stopping Accuracy:
1. Two -way automatic with reveling feature stop car within 1/4"
regardless of load or direction of travel.
2. Landing level will be maintained within leveling zone irrespective of
hoistway doors being open or closed.
D. Independent Service: 1
1. Provide controls of operation of elevator from car buttons only.
2. Close doors by constant pressure on desired destination floor button.
3. Open doors automatically upon arrival at selected floor.
E. Low -Oil Control: In event oil level is insufficient for travel to top floor, provide 1
controls to return elevator to main level and park with car doors open.
F. Hydraulic Control System: '
1. Hydraulic control system designed suitable for operation under
required pressure and to be mounted in storage tank. 111
2. Control valve will be a unit type with UP, DOWN and check valve
included.
3. Functions to be fully adjustable for maximum smoothness and to meet
contract conditions.
4. Manual lowering valve will be provided to lower elevator at slow speed. •
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATORS: 14242
SEP 00 PAGE 9
5. Hydraulic valve to have capability of providing a smooth, comfortable
acceleration, retardation and final stop.
1 G. Firefighters Service:
1. Per Code, to operate and recall elevator to designated floor during fire
or other emergency condition.
2. Provide sensor signal wiring from hoistway or machine room
connection point to controller terminals.
3. Operate visual /audible signal until return is complete or automatic
I operation restored.
H. Emergency Car Lighting and Alarm:
1. Car - mounted, battery unit with solid -state charger to operate alarm bell
and lighting, per Code.
2. Battery to be rechargeable with 5 -year minimum life expectancy.
3. Provide test button in service cabinet of car station which causes
illumination of standby lighting bulbs.
4. Emergency lighting fixture to be part of car operating station.
2.5 MACHINE ROOM EQUIPMENT
A. Hydraulic Pump Unit:
1. Assembled unit consisting of positive - displacement pump, induction
motor, master -type control valves combining safety features, holding,
direction, bypass, stopping and manual - lowering functions, shut -off
valve, oil reservoir with protected -vent opening, oil gauge and outlet
strainer, drip pan and connections all mounted on isolating pads.
2. Enclose with removable sheet steel panels Tined with sound absorbing
material.
3. Thermal unit or comparable means to maintain oil at operating
temperature. Not for extreme use (180 starts /hour).
B. Controller:
1. Manufacturer's Standard.
2. Solid state electronic starting.
1
1
HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATORS: 14242 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 10 SEP 00
C. Muffler: 1
1. Blowout -proof muffler installed in discharge oil line near pump unit.
1
2. Design to dampen and absorb pulsation and noise in flow of hydraulic
fluid.
D. Piping and Oil:
1. Piping, connections and oil for system. 1
2. Isolation couplings between pump unit and oil line.
3. Isolation brackets attached to wall or floor.
4. Isolation around piping in hoistway /machine room wall.
E. Shutoff Valve and Safety Valve:
1. Location:
a. In pit area.
b. Machine Room 1
2. Seal on Safety Valve after adjusting for correct setting.
F. Noise and Vibration Control: 1
1. Mechanically isolate elevator equipment from structure; electrically
isolate controller and motor.
2. Limit noise level relating to elevator equipment and its operation to no
more than 60 decibels in elevator car under any condition including
door operation and exhaust fan on highest speed.
2.6 HOISTWAY EQUIPMENT
A. Guide Rails:
1. Planed steel T- sections or Omega suitable for elevator travel, car
weight and reactions with brackets for attachment to building structure,
required by ASME A17.1., PART XXIV. 1
B. Buffers: Spring type with blocking and supports.
C. Cylinder: As defined by Rule 302.3 Cylinders-ASME Al .1 1-
Y Y 1-1993 Code.
Seamless steel pipe.
1
1
1
I TOC BUILDING ADDITION HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATORS: 14242
SEP 00 PAGE 11
1 D. Plunger:
1 1. As defined by Rule 302.2 Plungers -ASME A17.1 -1993 Code.
2. Plunger to be constructed of selected steel tubing or pipe of proper
diameter machined true and smooth with a fine polished finish.
I 3. Stop ring to be electrically welded to end of plunger to prevent plunger
from leaving cylinder.
I 4. Isolate plunger from car bolster assembly.
5. Plunger couplings to be internal type, shop assembled.
6. Outside diameter of plunger to not vary more than 0.01 inch
1 throughout its entire length, including coupling area.
E. Jack Support: Provide steel channels to support jack and transmit Toads to
I building structure.
F. Terminal Stopping Devices: Provide upper and lower normal terminal
1 stopping devices.
G. Electrical Wiring and Wiring Connections:
I 1. Conductors and Connections.
I a. Copper throughout with individual wires coded and connections
on identified studs or terminal blocks.
b. Use no splices or similar connections in wiring except at
I c. terminal blocks, control cabinets or junction boxes.
Provide ten percent (10 %) spare conductors throughout.
d. Provide spare wires from car and hoistway connection points to
I elevator controller in machine room.
e. Tag spares so they can be identified at both ends.
2. Conduit, Etc.:
I a. Painted or galvanized steel conduit and duct.
b. Conduit size: h/2 minimum.
1 c. Do not use flexible conduit exceeding 36" in length.
d. Flexible heavy duty service cord may be used between fixed car
wiring and car door switches for door protective devices.
I 3. Traveling Cables:
a. Flame and moisture - resistant outer cover.
I b. Prevent traveling cables from rubbing or chafing against
hoistway or elevator equipment within hoistway.
c. Provide ten percent (10 %) spare wires and four (4) spare pairs
I of shielded communication wire for each elevator.
1
HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATORS: 14242 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 12 SEP 00
d. Provide approved traveling cable wires for in -car emergency
communications systems.
H. Emergency Battery Lowering Feature
9 Y rY 9
I. Entrance Equipment: 1
1. Door Hangers:
a. Two sheaves per door rotating on precision ball bearings,
including upthrust adjustment.
b. Provide door rollers so that no metal -to -metal contact exists.
c. Hangers bolted to top of hoistway doors.
2. Door Tracks:
a. Bar or formed, cold drawn steel with smooth hanger contact 1
surface.
b. Provide removable tracks or track surface for replacement.
3. Interlocks:
a. Approved positive interlock for each hoistway entrance.
b. Interlock to prevent operation of elevator unless all doors are in
closed and locked position.
c. Provide fire rated wires from interlock to hoistway electrical
riser.
4. Emergency Access:
a. Access to hoistway doors provided by mechanical lunar key.
b. Provide door lunar key holes with Safety Plug Locks at all
floors.
5. Closures: Heavy -duty spirator.
J. Pit Stop Switch
1. An emergency stop switch to be located in pit as to be 1
accessible from hoistway access door, per Code.
K. Floor Numbers: 1
1. Paint 4" high floor numbers within hoistway per ASME A17.1 -1993
Code.
2.7 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES
A. Complete entrances bearing U.L. rating fire labels:
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATORS: 14242
SEP 00 PAGE 13
1 B. Frames:
1 1. Hollow metal, bolted, fabricated from not less than No. 14 gauge
material to form one -piece unit.
2. Permanently attach handicapped floor designations 2" high, raised
0.030 ", with lettering, style and color selected by Owner, 60" above
floor.
1 3. Stick -on plates are unacceptable.
4. Frame finish: Paint - enamel.
C. Door Panels:
1. No. 16 gauge steel, 1 1/4" thick fabricated with vertical internal channel
reinforcements spaced at not more than 6" on centers and welded to
face sheets.
2. Minimum of two (2) gibs per door panel, one at leading and one at
trailing edge with gibs in sill groove their entire length of travel.
3. Door panel finish: Baked enamel.
D. Sight Guards:
1. Furnish on leading edge of doors to conceal hoistway beyond doors.
2. Finish to match door panels.
1 E. Sills:
1. Extruded aluminum sills with non -slip wearing surfaces and grooves
for door guides.
2. Support sills on steel channels or angles, furnished and installed by
Elevator Contractor.
1 3. Sill length will be approximately hoistway width.
F. Fascia, and Hanger Covers:
1. No. 14 gauge furniture steel with manufacturer's standard painted
finish.
1 2. Make hanger covers same width as fascia. Factory paint to Owner's
color choice.
G. Toe Guard:
1. Toe Guard: No. 16 gauge steel.
1
HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATORS: 14242 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 14 SEP 00
H. Struts:
1. Strut angles or channels to be of sufficient size to support pport entrance
and to be securely fastened to building structure or guide rails.
2. Provide door open bumpers on vertical struts.
I. Headers: 1
1. Sufficient size and thickness to provide support for door frames and
hangers.
2. Securely fastened to strut angles or channels and to include tracks for
applied hangers.
2.8 CAR EQUIPMENT
A. Car Frame: 1
1. Fabricated from formed or structure steel members, to provide
adequate bracing to support platform and car enclosure. 1
B. Buffer Striking Plates:
1. Plates mounted on underside of car -frame platform assembly must
fully compress spring buffers mounted in pit before plunger reaches its
down limit of travel with rated load.
C. Platform: 1
1. Construct of steel, or wood, which is fireproofed on underside.
D. Guide Shoes: Slide guides, to be mounted on top and bottom of car and be
held in contact with guide rail by adjustable devices.
E. Car Sill:
1. Extruded aluminum with grooves for door gibs. 1
2. Full width of platform.
F. Toe Guard: 1
1. Provide at front openings of elevator. 1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATORS: 14242
SEP 00 PAGE 15
1 2. Paint one coat of black enamel.
G. Car Doors, Hangers and Tracks:
1. Provide as specified for hoistway entrance doors, hangers and tracks.
H. Header:
1 1. Construct of steel; shape to provide stiffening flanges.
I. Car Door Electrical Contact:
1. Arrange so that elevator cannot operate unless doors are closed within
1 tolerance allowed by ASME A17.1 -1993 Code.
J. Car Door Clutch:
1. Heavy -duty clutch, linkage arm, drive blocks and pickup rollers or
cams to provide positive, smooth quiet door operation.
K. Door Operator and Operation:
1. Provide heavy -duty, DC master door operators.
2. Door operator to be capable of opening doors at no less than 2 -1/2
f.p.s., and accomplishing reversal in no more than 2 -1/2 " of door
1 movement.
3. Open doors automatically when car arrives at a floor to permit egress
of passengers.
1 4. Close doors automatically after a timed interval.
L. Door Control Device:
1. Car Door Protective Device:
a. A 3D proximity -type car door protective device to be provided.
1 b. Detection zone moves with car door so that if a person or object
enters zone after doors have started to close, doors to stop,
then reverse to re -open.
c. Doors to re -close after a scheduled time.
2. Nudging Action:
a. If safety device is obstructed for a, predetermined adjustable
time (10 -30 seconds), sound buzzer and attempt to close doors
with a maximum of 2.5 foot pounds kinetic energy.
b. Stop and hold doors during closing if detector zone is entered.
•
•
1
1
HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATORS: 14242 TOC BUILDING ADDITION ■
PAGE 16 SEP 00
c. Allow door to close after obstruction is removed. 1
M. Elevator Car Station: (center opening Class A buildings only) 1
1. Provide one car control stations with faceplate, consisting of a metal
box containing operating fixtures, mounted behind car enclosure front
return panel.
a. Auxiliary car station not to include service cabinet, or
emergency communication device.
b. Other items required for main car station to be included in
auxiliary car station.
2. Suitably identify square floor buttons, alarm button, door open button
and emergency stop switch by engraved and painted letters or
symbols per Local Handicapped Standards and ADA requirements.
a. Provide flush inset, back fastened handicapped markings.
b. Locate operating controls no higher than 54" above car floor;
35 ", for stop switch and alarm button. 1
3. Provide 1/8" raised floor pushbuttons which illuminate to indicate LED
call registration. Include 5/8" designation of floors served in face of
button. 1
4. Provide illuminated alarm button at bottom of station to ring bell
located on elevator, and sound distress signal.
5. Provide keyed stop switch in panel faceplate with markings to show
"Run" and "Stop" positions.
6. Provide door open button to stop and reopen closing doors.
a. Make button operable while car is stopped at landing,
regardless of special operational features, except Firefighter's
Service.
7. Provide one Firefighter's Service key switch with engraved
instructions, light jewel, buzzer and call cancel button.
8. Provide lockable service panel in main car station with recessed, flush
cover plate matching return panel. Include following controls, with
purpose and operating positions identified by engraved letters painted
black: 1
a. Car light switch and emergency light test switch. Emergency
light test switch will disconnect electrical power supply to car
lighting electrical circuit.
b. Two - position fan switch.
c. Independent service switch to permit selection of independent
or automatic operation.
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATORS: 14242
SEP 00 PAGE 17
d. Start button for closing doors and starting elevator when
operating on independent service. Floor pushbuttons may be
1 used for this function.
e. Duplex 120 V.A.C. electrical convenience outlet. Provide GFCI
protection.
9. Provide black paint filled engraving with size and style approved by
Owner as follows:
a. Elevator number on car station.
b. Elevator capacity in pounds on car station.
10. Faceplate Material and Finish: No. 4 satin finish stainless steel.
1 N. Car Top Control Station:
1. Operating fixture to be provided containing continuous pressure UP,
DOWN and common buttons, emergency stop switch, inspection and
run switch, work light and 110 V.A.C. duplex outlet. Provide guard on
1 work light.
O. Car Top Emergency Exit:
1. Provide per ASME A17.1 -1993 Code.
1 P. Communication Systems:
1. Hands free emergency communication that complies with The
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
a. Provide all necessary wiring between elevator car and elevator
machine room.
2. Provide Intercom system between 1st floor hall station and elevator
car.
a. On -Off activation is required only at 1st floor station.
b. Lobby intercom including On, Off switch.
c. Entire fixture to be part of first floor hall push button station.
1 d. In car to lobby communication is voice activated.
e. Provide necessary wiring between elevator car and 1st floor
station.
1 f. Provide barrel type car selection for one car separate or both
cars.
1
1
1
1
HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATORS: 14242 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 18 SEP 00
2.9 CAR ENCLOSURES
A. Car Enclosure: Provide manufacturer's pre- engineered car enclosure similar 1
to following:
1. Shell: Reinforced 16 gauge furniture steel. 1
2. Top: Reinforced 14 gauged furniture steel with hinged car top exit
panel.
3. Provide cab finishes as per drawing. Front return panels and integral
entrance columns: finish to be #4 stainless steel.
4. Transom: 14 gauge steel. Transom to extend entire width of cab.
Finish same as front return panels.
5. Car Door Panels: Same construction as hoistway door panels. Finish
to be #4 stainless steel. 1
6. Walls: Refer to cab drawings.
7. Flooring: By Others.
8. Base: Refer to cab drawings.
9. Handrails: Refer to cab drawings.
10. Ventilation: Two -speed exhaust fan mounted on car top and withdraw
air through an opening in car top.
11. Lighting: Refer to cab drawings.
12. Ceiling: Match Otis Elevator Company style DC -23 -faced with mirror
bronze.
13. Pads and Buttons:
a. Fire retardant removable pad to cover walls and front return with
cutouts for access to both car control stations and service
cabinet.
b. Pad buttons to be stainless steel finish, through bolted to cab
walls.
c. Height of pad to be 8' -0" from cab floor.
2.10 LANDING CONTROL STATIONS
A. Pushbuttons: 1
1. Flush mounted fixtures at each landings.
2. Include pushbutton for direction of travel which illuminate LEDs to
indicate call registration.
3. Engrave safety message, "In Case of Fire..." (per Code Appendix H) in
pushbutton faceplate and fill black.
4. Center of buttons to be 42" from finish floor.
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATORS: 14242
SEP 00 PAGE 19
5. Provide Up and DOWN markings to left of each button together with
P 9
required Braille markings.
6. Marking plates: Built into cover plates. (Stick -on plates are not
acceptable.)
7. In -car intercom: Part of main floor hall station.
' 8. Firefighter's Service Phase 1 key switch with engraved instruction at
main floor hall station.
B. Faceplate Finish:
1. #4 stainless steel.
2.11 SIGNALS
A. Car Direction Indicator:
1 1. Provide car traveling lanterns in both front car entrance columns.
2. Illuminate appropriate direction arrow and sound electronic tone as
1 doors open to indicate intended car direction.
a. Tone to sound once for UP direction, twice for DOWN direction.
B. Car and Hall Position Indicator:
1. Include as part of each car station.
2. 2" high digital -type indications representing floor served.
3. Floor arriving audible signal.
4. Signal to be no less than 20 decibels with a frequency no higher than
1500 Hz.
5. 4" high digital indicator located above first floor entrance.
6. Cover plate: #4 stainless steel.
C. Faceplate Finish:
1 1. #4 stainless steel.
1 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SITE CONDITION INSPECTION
A. Prior to beginning installation of equipment, examine hoistway and machine
room areas.
1
1
1
HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATORS: 14242 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 20 SEP 00
B. Verify that no irregularities exist which affect execution of work specified. 1
C. Do not proceed with installation until work in place conforms to project 1
requirements.
3.2 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1
A. Deliver materials in Manufacturer's original, unopened protective packaging.
B. Store material in original protective packaging.
1. Prevent soiling, physical damage and wetting.
C. Protect equipment and exposed finished during transportation, erection and
construction against damage and stains.
D. Guarding and protecting hoistway during construction per OSHA regulations. 1
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Provide material and equipment hoisting.
B. Install equipment item in accordance with: 1
1. Reviewed Shop Drawings.
2. Manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Referenced codes.
4. Specifications. 1
C. Install machine room equipment with clearances in accordance with
referenced Codes and specifications. 1
D. Install elevator equipment to facilitate easy removal for maintenance and
repair. 1
E. Install elevator equipment to allow safe and ready access for maintenance.
F. Clean following tems of oil, grease, scale
9 , g and other foreign matter, and apply
one coat of field- applied machinery enamel:
1. Exposed equipment and metal work installed as part of this work which
does not have architectural finish.
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATORS: 14242
SEP 00 PAGE 21
2. Machine room equipment.
3. Neatly touch up damaged factory painted surfaces with original paint
1 and color.
a. Protect machine finish surfaces against corrosion.
1 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Work at jobsite will be checked during course of installation.
1. Accomplish corrective work required prior to performing further
1 installation.
B. Have State of Oregon Elevator Inspector acceptance inspection performed
1 and complete corrective work.
C. Complete scope of work included in Contract Documents.
I 3.5 ADJUSTMENTS
A. Align guide rails vertically with tolerance of 1/16 ".
1. Secure joints without gaps and file any irregularities to a smooth
surface.
B. Balance car to equalize pressure of guide shoe [rollers] [slides] on rails.
C. Lubricate equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Adjust motors, pumps, valves, controllers, leveling switches, limit switches,
stopping switches, door operators, interlocks and safety devices, etc., to
1 achieve required performance levels.
E. Fabricate and assemble various parts in factory to minimize field assembly.
1 1. Assemble arts which require close field fit in factory and mark for field
P q rY
1 erection.
3.6 CLEANUP
1 A. Keep work areas orderly and free from debris during progress of project.
Remove packaging materials on a daily basis as equipment is installed.
1
1
1
HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATORS: 14242 TOC BUILDING ADDITION 111
PAGE 22 SEP 00
B. Remove loose materials and fillings resulting from work and remove from
building on a daily basis.
C. Clean machine room equipment and floor of dirt, oil and grease.
. g e
1. Paint new equipment, including guide rails, pit equipment, struts and 1
other metal work with one coat of Elevator Manufacture's standard
enamel color or color as selected by Owner.
2. Painting does not relate to finish products from factory, such as cab,
entrances, sills, doors, etc.
D. Clean hoistway, car, car enclosure, entrances, operating and signal fixtures
and trim of dirt, oil, grease and fingermarks.
3.7 ACCEPTANCE INSPECTION AND TESTS
A. Furnish labor, materials and equipment necessary for tests.
1
B. Notify Architect and seven (7) days in advance when ready for final elevator
review.
C. Final acceptance of installation will be made only after field quality control •
reviews have been completed, identified deficiencies have been corrected,
submittals and certificates have been received and following items have been
completed to satisfaction of Owner: 1
1. Workmanship and equipment comply with specification.
2. Contract speed, capacity and floor -to -floor performance comply with
specification.
3. Performance of following are satisfactory:
a. Starting, accelerating, running. 1
b. Decelerating, stopping accuracy.
c. Door operation and closing force.
d. Equipment noise levels.
e. Overall ride quality.
f. Firefighter's Service testing, including testing all Smoke
Detectors.
g. Seismic testing.
h. Shunt trip testing.
4. Test results:
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATORS: 14242
SEP 00 PAGE 23
1 a. In test conditions, obtain specified speed, performance times,
floor accuracy without releveling and ride quality to satisfaction
of Owner.
b. Conduct full - capacity one -hour running test, stopping at each
floor for ten (10) seconds in up and down directions.
1 c. Doors are to complete a full open and close cycle with standard
door open dwell time operating.
D. Performance Warranty: Should tests reveal defects, poor workmanship,
variance or noncompliance with requirements of specified Codes and /or
ordinances, or variance or noncompliance with requirements of Contract
Documents, complete corrective work to satisfaction of State of Oregon
Elevator Inspector and Owner, at no cost to Owner:
1 1. Replace equipment that does not comply with Code or Contract
Document requirements.
2. Perform work and furnish labor, materials and equipment necessary to
meet specified operation and performance.
3. Perform and assume costs for retesting required by State of Oregon
1 Elevator Inspector and Owner to verify specified operation,
performance levels and Contract Document requirements.
a. If a second follow -up inspection or survey is required after final
1 inspection or survey has been completed by State of Oregon
Elevator Inspector, Elevator Contractor to pay for costs for State
' of Oregon Elevator Inspector to provide such follow -up
inspection.
3.8 OWNER'S INFORMATION
A. Three (3) sets of bound written information necessary for proper maintenance
' and adjustments of equipment within ten (10) days following final acceptance.
1. Straight -line wiring diagram of as- installed elevator circuits, with index
of location and function of components.
1 a. Mount installation wiring diagrams on panels, racked, or
similarly protected, in elevator machine room.
b. Diagrams are Owner's property.
1 2. Maintenance, repair and adjusting instructions.
3. Lubrication instructions, including recommended grade of lubricants.
4. Parts catalogs for replaceable parts including order forms and
1 instructions.
1 END OF SECTION
1
1
1 MARSHALL WELLS - STRUCTURAL BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS: 15010
SEP 00 PAGE 1
1 PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Work Included: Work included in 15010 applies to Division 15 work to
provide materials, labor, tools, permits and incidentals to provide and make
ready for Owner's use and fire protection systems for proposed project.
B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
1. Contents of Section applies to Division 15 specifications.
2. Requirements of Section are a minimum for Division 15 Sections,
unless otherwise stated in each Section, in which case that Section's
requirements take precedence.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1 A. Following is a list of abbreviations generally used in Division 15:
AGA American Gas Association.
r ADA Americans with Disabilities Act.
AHJ Authority Having Jurisdiction.
AWWA American Water Works Associations.
CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute.
ETL Electric Testing Laboratories.
' IMC International Mechanical Code.
NFPA National Fire Protection Association.
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
NEC National Electric Code.
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration.
UBC Uniform Building Code.
' UFC Uniform Fire Code.
UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
UMC Uniform Mechanical Code.
UPC Uniform Plumbing Code.
B. Provide: To furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
C. Furnish: Supply and deliver to the project site, ready for unpacking, assembly
and installation.
1
1
1
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS: 15010 MARSHALL WELLS - STRUCTURAL 1
PAGE 2 SEP 00
D. Install: Includes unloading, unpacking, assembling, erecting, installation, 1
applying, finishing, protecting, cleaning and similar operations at the project
site as required to complete items of work furnished by others. 1
1.3 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS TO DIVISION 1
A. Record Drawings: 1
1. Show changes and deviations from the Drawings. Include written ,
Addendum and change order items.
2. Make changes to the Drawings in a neat, clean, and legible manner.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Where Contract Documents are at variance with applicable codes governing 1
work, code and local jurisdiction requirements take precedence, and include
cost necessary for code compliance or local jurisdiction compliance in bid
price. Machinery and equipment to comply with Occupational Safety and
111
Health Act of 1970, as currently revised, as interpreted for equipment
manufacturer requirements.
B. Mechanical Drawings: Drawings are intended to be diagrammatic and are
based on one manufacturer's equipment. They are not intended to show
every item in its exact dimensions, or details of equipment or proposed
systems layout. Verify actual dimensions of systems (i.e., ducts and piping)
and equipment proposed to assure that systems and equipment will fit in
available space.
C. Requirements: As a minimum requirement, work in accordance with following 1
rules and regulations and applicable laws:
1. NFPA. 1
2. OSHA.
3. Codes as published by ICBO:
a. UBC. 1
b. UFC.
c. UMC.
d. UPC.
e. Related supplements and standards.
4. International Mechanical Code.
5. State of Oregon and local jurisdictional requirements.
•
1
1
MARSHALL WELLS - STRUCTURAL BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS: 15010
SEP 00 PAGE 3
D. Permits and Inspections:
1. Unless otherwise distinctly hereinafter specified, apply and pay for
necessary permits, plans check, and inspections required by public
AHJ.
' 2. Refer to General and Supplementary Conditions for payment of water
and sewer service connection fees.
3. Obtain certificates of inspection from AHJs and deliver to Owner
' before final acceptance.
4. Each trade to consult local building department, utility companies prior
to commencement of work to ascertain existence and location of
' existing underground utilities. Protect existing service against damage
and interruption of use, and reroute as may be necessary to
accomplish new work. Materials and installation for rerouting as
' specified for new work.
' E. Regulatory Requirements:
1. UL and AGA Compliance: Provide units which are UL or ETL and
AGA listed.
' 2. ASME Compliance: Provide units which are ASME listed when water
heaters and boilers which exceed 200,000 BTUH, hot water storage
tanks which exceed 120 gallons, and hot water expansion tanks which
are connected to ASME rated equipment or required by code or local
jurisdiction.
1 3. Provide safety controls required by National Boiler Code (CSD -1) for
boilers and water heaters exceeding 400,000 BTUH.
1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. For proper execution of work cooperate with other trades as needed.
B. To avoid installation conflicts, thoroughly examine complete set of Contract
Documents. Resolve conflicts with Architect prior to fabrication and
installation.
C. Prior to installation of equipment requiring electrical connections, examine
manufacturer's shop drawings, wiring diagrams, product data, and installation
instructions. Verify that electrical characteristics indicated in Contract
Documents are consistent with electrical characteristics of actual equipment
being installed. When inconsistencies occur request clarification from
Architect.
1
1
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS: 15010 MARSHALL WELLS - STRUCTURAL 1
PAGE 4 SEP 00
1.6 EXISTING SOILS CONDITIONS ,
A. Understand existing soils conditions before submitting bid on work. No
additional allowance will be granted due to lack of information for existing
conditions of subsurface soils.
B. Submission of a bid will be considered acknowledgment of
review /understanding of project geotechnical soils report.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ASBESTOS
A. Do not use products containing asbestos. 1
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Base contract upon furnishing materials as specified.
Materials /equipment/fixtures used for construction, new, and latest products
as listed in printed catalog data and be UL or AGA approved or acceptable by
state, county, and city authorities. Equipment supplier is responsible for
obtaining state, county, and city acceptance on equipment not UL approved
or not listed for installation.
B. Articles, fixtures, and equipment of a kind to be standard product of one ,
manufacturer.
C. Names and manufacturer's names denote character and quality of equipment 1
desired and are not to be construed as limiting competition.
PART 3 EXECUTION
1
3.1 REVIEW BY ENGINEER 1
A. Notify Architect/Engineer, in writing, at following stages of construction so that ,
Architect/Engineer may, at their option, visit site for review and construction
observation:
1. Plumbing: 1
a. Underground piping installation prior to backfilling.
b. When main systems, or portions of, are being tested and ready 1
for inspection by AHJ.
1
1
1 MARSHALL WELLS - STRUCTURAL BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS: 15010
SEP 00 PAGE 5
3.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1 A. Deliver, store and handle materials and equipment in a manner to prevent
damage and deterioration. Store in original container which identifies
I manufacturer's name, brand and model number. Do not store indoor
equipment outdoors unless provided with a waterproof protective cover.
I B. Replacement: In event of damage, immediately make repairs and
replacements necessary.
I END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
i
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 MARSHALL WELLS - STRUCTURAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS: 15050
SEP 00 PAGE 1
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Work Included:
1. Materials, installation and testing of pipe, tubing and fittings, and
valves.
' 2. Refer to Specification Sections for each system medium (i.e.,
plumbing, hydronics, gas, and the like), for pipe application.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Listing: Provide a listing of products and materials proposed for use
1 on this project for products covered in this Section under Part 2 Products.
B. Piping Materials List: Provide a typewritten list which schedules the piping
materials to be used for each system as a function of applicable nominal pipe
size ranges. Arrange schedule in outline form for each specific piping
' system, e.g., "Chilled Water System," "Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping System,"
and the like. Include ASTM, ANSI or other numbers and other data as
necessary to demonstrate compliance with requirements.
1 C. Test Procedure: Submit a typewritten checklist type of testing procedure
indicating testing medium (i.e., water, air, nitrogen, and the like), pipe service,
' pipe and fitting type and classification, test pressure, pass /fail criteria and any
other pertinent data.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
1 2.1 PRODUCT STANDARDS
' A. References to product Specifications for materials are listed according to
accepted base standards. All materials to meet latest approved versions of
these standards.
' B. See Section 15010, Basic Mechanical Requirements and Section 15400,
Plumbing where piping materials are ,approved for use.
1
1
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS: 15050 MARSHALL WELLS - STRUCTURAL 1
PAGE 2 SEP 00
2.2 PIPING - GENERAL 1
A. Provide pipe, tube and fittings of the type, fitting requirements, grade, class,
size and weight indicated or required for each service, as indicated in other
Division 15 Specifications. Where type, grade, or class is not indicated,
provide proper selection as determined by installer for installation
requirements, and comply with governing regulations and industry standards.
2.3 COPPER TUBE 1
A. Temper: Annealed (hard drawn).
B. Water Service: ASTM B88, Type as indicated for each service.
C. Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV): ASTM B306. 1
2.4 CAST IRON PIPE
A. ASTM A74, hub-and-spigot,
STM 4, hub -and spigot, service weight.
B. CISPI 301 hubless, including coupling assembly. 1
2.5 PVC AND ABS /DWV 1
A. Pipe and fittings conform to ASTM D2661 for dimensions and tolerances for
pipe, fitting sockets and laying lengths. Label products with the UPC shield. 1
Solvent cement complies with ASTM D2235.
2.6 NON - PRESSURE "DWV" AND SEWER PIPING 1
A. Installation of concrete, vitrified clay, ABS or PVC sewer and building drain
"DWV" piping conforms to the regulations and standards contained in the
state plumbing code. Compliance with these regulations and standards is
mandatory. 1
2.7 FITTINGS FOR COPPER TUBE
A. Wrought copper /bronze solder joint fittings complying with ANSI B16.22- 1
1995.
1
1
1
' MARSHALL WELLS - STRUCTURAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS: 15050
SEP 00 PAGE 3
B. DWV Service:
1. Cast Copper Solder Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.23.
2. Wrought Copper Solder Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.29.
3. Copper Tube Unions: Standard product recommended by
' manufacturer for use in service indicated.
C. Wrought copper /bronze grooved joint fittings complying with ANSI 616.22-
1 1995.
2.8 FITTINGS FOR CAST IRON PIPE
A. Hubless Cast Iron Drainage Pipe Fittings: Stainless steel clamp assemblies.
Manufacturers: Tyler or Cremco.
' B. Cast Iron Hub-and-Spigot Drainage Pipe g pe Fittings. Match drainage pipe units,
ASTM A74. Fitting joints: Positive seal compression type gaskets, ASTM
C564.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING MATERIALS /PRODUCTS
A. Copper- Brazed: Make brazed joints for copper tubing and fittings with code
approved brazing filler alloys meeting ASTM and AWS standards and listings.
Filler alloys of BCuP classification (e.g., "Phos -O" or "Fos- Copper ") may not
be used to make joints between copper tubing and cast brass or bronze
fittings. Filler alloys containing cadmium are not approved for use in potable
water piping. Installations conform to accepted published procedures, i.e.,
UPC IS 3 -75 standard and CDA Publications. Use of steel wool for cleaning
1 tube and fittings is prohibited.
2.10 DUCTILE IRON PIPE
A. Class 50 or 51 i e conforming to
p p g ANSI /AWWA C151/A21.51, cement lined.
' " Tyton" or mechanical joints or fittings conforming to ANSI/AVVWA
C11 0/A21.10 and C111/A21.11. Pipe and fittings rated for 350 PSI.
' B. Class 52 pipe conforming to ANSI /AWWA C151/A2151, cement lined.
"Tyton" or mechanical joint pipe and fittings conforming to ANSI /AWWA
C110/A21.10 and C111/A21.11. Pipe and fittings rated for 350 PSI.
1
1
1
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS: 15050 MARSHALL WELLS - STRUCTURAL 1
PAGE 4 SEP 00
PART 3 EXECUTION 1
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Pressure Piping Routing:
1. Route piping, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally I
(sloped to drain). Avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Orient
horizontal routes parallel with walls and beam lines. 1
2. Install piping as shown or described by diagrams, details and notations
on Drawings or, if not indicated, install piping to provide the shortest
route which does not obstruct usable space or block access for
111
servicing the building and its equipment.
B. Preparation: 1
1. Cast Iron Soil Pipe: Conform with state plumbing code and standards,
CISPI recommendations and applicable adopted code amendments.
2. Hubless Cast Iron Joints: Comply with CISPI HSN utilizing calibrated
torque wrenches for tightening bands to manufacturer's recommended
settings.
3. Copper Tubing:
a. Remove burrs from and clean outer surface of tube ends and 1
inner surface of fittings.
b. Copper - Soldered: Make soldered joints for copper tubing and
fittings with code approved solder alloys meeting ASTM and 1
ANSI standards and listings. Solder- paste -flux combination
fillers are not approved. Installations to conform to accepted
published procedures; i.e., UPC IS 375, IS 21 -80 standards and
I
CDA Publications. Use of steel wool for cleaning tube and
fittings is prohibited. Apply flux as recommended by
manufacturer. Solder all domestic hot and cold water and
condensate pipe within building above grade with 95 percent tin
and 5 percent antimony, Allstate Silver Bearing Solder 430 or
I
other approved solder alloys which do not contain lead or
cadmium.
1
1
1
1
MARSHALL WELLS - STRUCTURAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS: 15050
SEP 00 PAGE 5
c. Copper- Brazed: Make brazed joints for copper tubing and
fittings with code approved brazing filler alloys meeting ASTM
and AWS standards and listings. Filler alloys of BCuP
classification (e.g., "Phos -0" or "Fos- Copper ") may not be used
to make joints between copper tubing and cast brass or bronze
' fittings. Filler alloys containing cadmium are not approved for
use in potable water piping. Installations to conform to
accepted published procedures, i.e., UPC IS 3 -75 standards
' and CDA Publications. Use of steel wool for cleaning tube and
fittings is prohibited. Braze all other copper pressure piping
underground including water service. Remove bonnets and
nonmetallic seats on all valves and cool body with damp cloth
while soldering or brazing. Remove excess flux from completed
joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and code
1 standards.
d. Pressurized Service:
1) Unless otherwise indicated, wrought copper /bronze
solder joint fittings complying with ANSI B16.22 -1995.
2) Copper Tube Unions: Standard products as
1 recommended by manufacturer for use in the service.
Rated at 150 percent design operating pressure.
3.2 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS
A. Pipe Sleeves:
1. Lay out work in advance of pouring concrete and furnish and set
sleeves necessary to complete work.
' 2. Floor Sleeves (except DWV piping at slab on grade): Provide sleeves
on pipes passing through concrete or masonry construction. Extend
sleeve 1 -inch above finished floor. Caulk all pipes passing through
' floor with nonshrinking grout or approved caulking compound. Provide
"Link -Seal" sleeve sealing system for slab on grade. Caulk/seal all
' piping and ductwork passing through fire rated building assembly with
UL rated assemblies. Provide fire -rated assemblies per local AHJ
requirements.
' B. Conform with applicable codes and industry standards.
1 END OF SECTION
1
1 MARSHALL WELLS - STRUCTURAL FIRE PROTECTION: 15300
SEP 00 PAGE 1
1 PART1 GENERAL
' 1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide the following: Private fire service main from 5 -feet outside of building
' and piping to the inlet connection inside the building as required for
foundation.
' B. Refer to Plumbing and Civil Drawings for additional information relating to the
fire sprinkler system.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications: Company specializing in sprinkler systems of similar type and
scope with 3 -years experience.
B. Codes: Provide system per the requirements of the following, except as
1 specifically modified herein. Apply edition as enforced by AHJ unless
otherwise stated. Comply with state amendments.
1. UBC as adopted by AHJ.
2. UFC as adopted by AHJ.
3. UBC Standard No. 9 -1, Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
4. NFPA 13, (1996 Edition) Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler
Systems.
5. UFC and UFC, Appendix III -C, "Testing Automatic Sprinkler and
Standpipe Systems."
6. NFPA 24, 1995 Edition, Standard for the Installation of Private Fire
Service Mains and Their Appurtenances.
7. NFPA 25, 1998 Edition, Standard for Inspection, Testing, and
Maintenance of Water -Based Fire Protection Systems.
1 8. Listed Components: Prcvide components UL listed and FM approved,
except as modified herein.
1
1
1
1
1
1
FIRE PROTECTION: 15300 MARSHALL WELLS - STRUCTURAL 1
PAGE 2 SEP 00
1.3 SUBMITTALS 1
A. Submit the following for review. Include in operations and maintenance
manual.
1. Shop drawings and component manufacturer's data sheets (as one
complete standalone package) to AHJ, Owner's insurance underwriter,
and Engineer. Provide proof of approval by AHJ of installed sprinkler
system to Engineer on completion of work. Coordinate sprinkler
system design with all other building systems.
2. Project Record Documents indicating record conditions (one paper
sepia, two prints). 1
3. Test Reports: Underground and above ground piping hydrostatic test,
water supply flow test; Code - required acceptance tests; and
manufacturer's operation and maintenance data. Include written
maintenance data on components of system, servicing requirements,
and Record Drawings.
4. Operations and Maintenance Manual: Provide three sets of O &M 111
manuals that include Record Drawings, hydraulic calculations,
manufacturer's data sheets and operation and maintenance
instructions, servicing requirements, test reports and certificates, and
NFPA 25.
1.4 GUARANTY 1
A. Guaranty all systems against defective equipment, materials and
workmanship for a period of 1 -year after Owner's acceptance.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS 1
A. General: Provide per AHJ requirements, and as a minimum per below.
B. Materials:
a s. Domestic Manufacture.
1. Buried Piping: Ductile iron Class 52, AWWA C151 with flanged or 1
mechanical joint fittings; or PVC, SDR -18, AWWA C900.
1
1
1
1
I MARSHALL WELLS - STRUCTURAL FIRE PROTECTION: 15300
SEP 00 PAGE 3
1 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
I A. Coordinate the work of this Section with other trades and building systems.
I Provide adequate space for installation.
B. General: Provide sprinkler riser underground service piping from 5 -feet
outside of building to riser room.
3.2 SYSTEM TESTS
1 A. Test entire system per code and AHJ. Provide, arrange, and pay for all
testing required by code or AHJ in order to obtain complete and final
I acceptance. Witness tests by AHJ and Engineer. Notify AHJ and Engineer 2
weeks prior to test.
I END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
' MARSHALL WELLS - STRUCTURAL PLUMBING: 15400
SEP 00 PAGE 1
' PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Piping System Work Includes but Not Limited to:
' 1. Underground building drain piping including mains, branches, traps,
connections to fixtures and drains, and connections to stacks,
' terminating at connection to sanitary sewers 3 -feet outside foundation
wall.
2. Storm building drain piping from conductor piping and area drains
' terminating at connection to storm sewers 3 -feet outside foundation
wall.
3. Domestic cold water piping below grade.
4. Plumbing Fixtures: See Schedule on Drawings for types.
5. Furnishing and installing of all sleeves, inserts and anchorage required
' for the installation, which are embedded in work of other trades.
Sleeve, wrap and seal all piping in concrete.
' 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of plumbing system
products, of types, materials, and sizes required.
B. Regulatory Requirements:
' 1. Codes: Comply with UPC pertaining to plumbing materials,
construction and installation of products. Comply with local and state
regulations.
2. ANSI Compliance: Comply with applicable American National Institute
standards pertaining to products and installation.
3. PDI Compliance: Comply with applicable Plumbing and Drainage
Institute standards pertaining to products and installation.
' 4. Federal Standards: Comply with applicable Federal Specification
WW -P -541 Series sections pertaining to plumbing fixtures.
5. NAHB Label: Provide fiberglass bathtub units and shower stalls which
have been tested and labeled by NAHB Research Foundation.
6. ADA Compliance: Construct and install barrier -free plumbing fixtures
in accordance with "The Americans with Disabilities" Act.
7. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electric motors and electrical
components required as part of plumbing equipment, which have been
listed and labeled by UL and which comply with NEMA standards.
1
PLUMBING: 15400 MARSHALL WELLS - STRUCTURAL
PAGE 2 SEP 00
8. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation and 1
electrical connections of ancillary electrical components of plumbing
equipment. 1
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data in accordance with Division 1, Section "Shop Drawings, Product
Data and Samples." Manufacturer's specifications, installation and startup
instructions, capacity and ratings, with selection indicated. Provide pump
performance curves with selection points indicated. Provide specialties and
accessories required for a complete and operable installation.
B. Shop Drawings: Assembly type shop drawings indicating dimensions,
weights, required clearances, and methods of assembly of all components
and anchorages. 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS 1
2.1 SOIL, WASTE, VENT AND DRAINAGE PIPING
1
A. Underground Piping to 3 -feet Outside Building Line: "No -Hub" cast iron soil
pipe and fittings with stainless steel couplings and neoprene gaskets. 1
2.2 CLEANOUTS
A. General: Locate cleanouts as shown on Drawings and as required by local
code. Cleanouts same size as pipe except that greater than 4- inches will not
be required. Plastic components not allowed, except unless specifically 1
noted.
B. Manufacturers: J. R. Smith, Zurn, Wade, or approved. J. R. Smith model
numbers used as a basis of selection.
C. Types: 1
1. Tile Floor Cleanouts: J. R. Smith 4023 -U with round heavy duty nickel
bronze top, taper thread, ABS plug and vandalproof screws.
2. Carpeted Floor Cleanout: J. R. Smith 4023 -U -Y with carpet cleanout
marker with round heavy duty nickel bronze top, taper thread, ABS
plug, carpet clamping device and vandalproof screws.
3. Concrete Floor Cleanout (General): J. R. Smith 4023 with round
heavy duty nickel bronze top, taper thread and ABS plug. 1
1
1
1 MARSHALL WELLS - STRUCTURAL PLUMBING: 15400
SEP 00 PAGE 3
1 4. Concrete Floor Cleanout (Heavy Load): Same as for "General"
locations, Item 3 above, except J. R. Smith 4100.
5. Wall Cleanout: J. R. Smith 4472 -U, countersunk bronze taper thread
plug, stainless steel shallow cover and vandalproof screws.
6. Outside Area Walks and Drives: J. R. Smith 4023 -U with round heavy
' duty nickel bronze top, taper thread, ABS plug and top secured with
vandalproof screws. Install in 18 -inch by 18 -inch by 6 -inch deep
concrete pad flush with grade.
2.3 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
A. Above Ground: Type "L" copper tubing. Wrought copper or cast bronze
sweat fittings.
1. Piping 3 -Inch and Above: Brazed or grooved.
2. Piping 2 -1/2 -Inch and Smaller: Soldered (95/5 solder) joints.
3. Approved Fillers:
a. Pressure Range 81 to 150 PSI and Temperatures 151F to
200F: 95/5 tin - antimony or silver- bearing solders, i.e., Allstate
430, Harris Stay Brite 5 or 8.
b. Use appropriate flux per manufacturer's recommendations. Use
of corrosive fluxes is prohibited.
B. Below Ground:
' 1. Type "K" copper tubing with brazed joints.
2. Approved Fillers: "Phos-O", "Silfos 5 ", "Aircosil 15 ", "Braze 450(DE)."
Use appropriate flux per manufacturer's recommendations.
' 2.4 PRIMER PIPING
1 A. Above Ground: Type "L" hard -drawn copper tubing with wrought sweat
fittings and soldered joints.
B. Below Ground: Type "L" soft annealed copper tubing with wrought sweat
fittings and brazed joints.
1 2.5 TRAP PRIMERS
A. Trap seal primer valve with integral automatic anti - syphon protection. Code
approval required. Wade, Zurn, J. R. Smith, P.P.P., or approved.
1
1
1
PLUMBING: 15400 MARSHALL WELLS - STRUCTURAL 1
PAGE 4 SEP 00
2.6 FLOOR DRAINS '
A. Cast iron body, double drainage flange with weep holes, nickel bronze or
heavy C.P. strainer /grate /funnel finishes, flashing clamp device, adjustable or
insert type strainer. Comply with ANSI A112.21.1. Smith, Wade, Josam,
Zurn, or approved. See Schedule on Drawings. '
PART 3 EXECUTION '
3.1 PROTECTION
A. Protect fixtures and equipment from damage. Replace damaged items with 111
new.
B. Keep all pipe openings closed by means of plugs or caps to prevent the
9 Y P 9 P P
entrance of foreign matter. Protect all piping, ductwork, fixtures, equipment
and apparatus against dirty water, chemical or mechanical damage both
before and after installation. Restore to its original condition or replace all
fixtures, equipment or apparatus damaged prior to final acceptance of the
work.
C. Cover equipment and materials stored on the job site or otherwise suitably
protect at the direction of, and to the satisfaction of Architect. If coverings
become torn, replace until the equipment is connected and operating.
3.2 PIPING SYSTEMS INSTALLATION '
A. Piping: '
1. General: Lay underground building drains beginning at low point of
systems, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken
continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install
required gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations
for use of lubricants, cements, and other special installation
requirements. Clean interior of piping of dirt and other superfluous
materials as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull
past each joint as it is completed. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted
piping at end of day or whenever work stops.
2. Install piping pitched to drain at minimum slope of 1/4 -inch per foot (2
percent). Where this slope is impractical, slope at 1/4 -inch per foot for
pipes below 4 -inch size, and 1/8 -inch per foot (1 percent) for piping fl-
inch and larger, with the approval of the local code authority. '
1
1
MARSHALL WELLS - STRUCTURAL PLUMBING: 15400
SEP 00 PAGE 5
3. Rough -in Piping: Provide temporary caps or plugs at all piping shown
on Drawings to be roughed -in for future connections by others.
4. Sanitary Waste and Storm Drain Piping: Slope at uniform grade of
1/4 -inch per foot unless noted otherwise. Make changes in size with
reducing and wye fittings. Run exposed piping parallel or
' perpendicular to building structure.
B. Cleanouts: Install in above ground piping and building drain piping as
indicated, as required by code; at each change in direction of piping greater
than 135 degrees; at minimum intervals of 100 -feet; and at base of each
vertical soil or waste stack. Install floor and wall cleanout covers for
1 concealed piping, select type to match adjacent building finish.
C. Excavation and Backfill:
1. General: Perform all necessary excavation and backfill required for
rY 4
installation of mechanical work. Repair all piping or other work
' damaged by Contractor's operations.
2. Water: Keep all excavations free of standing water. Reexcavate and
' fill back excavations damaged or softened by water or frost to original
level with sand, crushed rock or other approved material at no
expense to Owner.
t 3. Tests: During progress of work for compacted fill, Owner reserves
right to request compaction tests made under direction of a testing
laboratory.
4. Trench Excavation: Excavate trenches to necessary depth and width,
removing rocks, unstable soil (muck, peat, and the like), roots and
stumps. Excavation material is classified as "base fill" and "native."
Base fill excavation material consisting of placed crushed rock may be
used as backfill above "Pipe Zone." Remove and dispose off site
native excavation material at no expense to Owner. Adequate width of
1 trench for proper installation of piping or conduit.
5. Support Foundations:
' a. Foundations: Excavate trenches located in unstable ground
areas below elevation required for installation of piping to a
depth which is determined by Architect as appropriate for
conditions encountered. Place and compact approved
foundation material in excavation up to "Bedding Zone."
Dewatering, placement, compaction and disposal of excavated
' materials to conform to requirements contained in other
sections of Specifications or drawings.
1
1
1
PLUMBING: 15400 MARSHALL WELLS - STRUCTURAL 1
PAGE 6 SEP 00
b. Over - Excavations: Where trench excavation exceeds required 1
depths, provide, place and compact suitable bedding material to
proper grade or elevation at no additional cost to Owner.
c. Foundation Material: Where native material has been removed,
place and compact necessary foundation material to form a
base for replacement of required thickness of bedding material.
1
Class A Class B
Material Passing: Min. Max. Min. Max.
3/4 -inch Square Opening 27 47 0 1 1
d. Bedding Material: Full bed all site piping on sand, pea gravel or
3/4 -inch minus crushed rock. Place a minimum 4 -inch deep
layer of sand or crushed rock on leveled trench bottom for this
purpose. Remove all bedding to necessary depth for piping
bells and couplings to maintain contact of pipe on bedding for
its entire length. Provide additional bedding in excessively wet,
unstable, or solid rock trench bottom conditions as required to
provide a firm foundation.
6. Backfilling:
a. Following installation and successful completion of required
tests, backfill piping in lifts.
1) In "Pipe Zone ", place backfill material and compact in lifts
not to exceed 6- inches in depth to a height of 12- inches
above top of pipe. Place backfill material to obtain
1
contact with entire periphery of pipe, without disturbing or
displacing pipe.
2) Place and compact backfill above "Pipe Zone" in layers
1
not to exceed 12 -inch in depth.
b. Backfill Material:
1) Backfill Material in "Pipe Zone ": 3/4 -inch minus crushed
rock, sand or pea gravel.
2) Crushed rock, fill sand or other backfill material approved
elsewhere in Specifications may be used above "Pipe
Zone."
7. Compaction of Trench Backfill:
a. Where compaction of trench backfill material is required, use
one of following methods or combination thereof:
1) Mechanical tamper,
2) Vibratory compacter, or
3) Other approved methods appropriate to conditions
encountered.
1
1
1
1
1 MARSHALL WELLS - STRUCTURAL PLUMBING: 15400
SEP00 PAGE7
1 b. Architect to have right to change methods and limits to better
accommodate field conditions. Compaction sufficient to attain
t 95 percent of maximum density at optimum moisture content
unless noted otherwise on Drawings or elsewhere in
Specifications. Water "puddling" or "washing" is prohibited.
1 D. Testing:
1. General:
a. Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pumps,
compressors, tanks, and gauges, as required. Test piping
systems before insulation (if any) is installed and remove or
disengage control devices before testing. Where necessary,
test sections of each piping system independently, but do not
use piping valves to isolate sections where test pressures
exceed local valve operating pressure rating. Fill each section
with water, compressed air, or nitrogen and pressurize for the
indicated pressure and time.
b. Notify Architect and local Plumbing Inspector 2 days before
1 tests.
c. Drainage, Waste and Vent Piping: Test in accordance with
governing plumbing code or as follows: Test drainage and
' venting systems, with necessary openings plugged, to permit
system to be filled with water and subjected to a water pressure
of a minimum of 5 PSI head. System to hold water without a
' water level drop greater than 1/2 pipe diameter of largest
nominal pipe size within a 24 hour period. Test system in
sections if minimum head cannot be maintained in each section.
' The 5 PSI head to be the minimum pressure at the highest joint.
d. Water Piping: Eliminate air from system. Fill and test at 125
PSIG or minimum 1 -1/2 times static pressure at connection to
1 serving utility main for a period of 2 hours with no loss in
pressure.
e. Send all test results to Architect for review and approval.
2. Testing of Pressurized Systems:
a. Test each pressurized piping system at 150 percent of
' operating pressure indicated, but not less than 125 PSIG test
pressure.
b. Observe each test section for leakage at end of test period.
Test fails if leakage is observed or if pressure drop exceeds 2
percent of test pressure.
1
1
1
PLUMBING: 15400 MARSHALL WELLS - STRUCTURAL 1
PAGE 8 SEP 00
c. Test hot and cold domestic water piping systems upon ,
completion of rough -in and before connection to fixtures at a
hydrostatic pressure of 125 PSIG.
3. Repair:
a. Repair piping system sections which fail the required piping test
by disassembly and reinstallation, using new materials to the
extent required to overcome leakage. Do not use chemicals,
stop -leak compounds, mastics, or other temporary repair
methods.
b. Drain or purge test water, air, or nitrogen from piping system
after testing and repair work have been completed.
3.3 FLOOR DRAINS AND FLOOR SINKS
A. General: Install drains in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions
and in locations indicated.
B. Coordinate with piping as necessary to interface drains with drainage piping
systems.
C. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained, or as r
indicated. Set tops of floor drains flush with finished floor. Set floor sinks as
required by local codes. '
D. Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between drain
and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where
penetrated.
E. Position drains so that they are accessible and easy to maintain. '
F. Coordinate drain flashing, flanges and strainer types and depths with floor
substrate and topping configuration.
G. Primers: Prime all drains. Refer to Drawings and coordinate location with
Architect. Coordinate with local AHJ for exact requirements. 1
END OF SECTION '
1
1
1
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS & METHODS: 15050 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 1 SEP 00
I SECTION 15000: MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
1 PART1 GENERAL
I 1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Requirements Included:
I 1. All materials, labor and equipment re required to install complete
q P
mechanical work.
1 2. Cooperate with other trades.
I 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes,
I standards and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are
shown or specified.
I 1. State of Oregon Structural Specialty Code.
2. State of Oregon Mechanical Specialty Code.
3. State of Oregon Plumbing Specialty Code.
B. Seismic Requirements: Provide seismic restraints in accordance with the
following Seismic Hazard Levels (SHL) as recommended in the "Seismic
U Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems," First Ed., 1991,
SMACNA.
1 1. SHL "B ": All Seismic Zone "3" (UBC Volume II, Chapter 16, Fig. No. 2)
and all Occupancy Categories "I" and "II" (UBC Volume II, Chapter 16,
I Table No. 16 -K) in Seismic Zone "2B."
2. SHL "C ": All Occupancy Categories "Ill" to "V" in Seismic Zone "2B."
II C. Field Measurements: Take prior to preparation of shop drawings and
fabrication, where possible.
ID. Permits, Licenses, Fees, and Taxes: Obtain and pay for all permits, licenses,
fees and taxes applicable to this project as required by law.
1
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS & METHODS:
S 15050
SEP 00 PAGE 2
111
E. Field Wiring: It is the intent of these specifications that all systems shall be
complete and operable. Refer to all drawings and specifications, especially
the electrical drawings, to determine voltage, phase, circuit ampacity and
number of connections provided. Provide all necessary field wiring and
devices from the point of connection indicated on the electrical drawings.
Bring to the attention of the Architect in writing all conflicts, incompatibilities,
and /or discrepancies prior to bid. Provide all field wiring diagrams with each
equipment submittal requiring same.
1
F. Drawings: Drawings are diagrammatic and show the general design,
arrangement, and extent of the systems. Do not scale drawings for roughing-
1
in measurements, nor use as shop drawings. Make field measurements and
prepare shop drawings as required. Coordinate work with shop drawings of
other specification divisions.
G. Concealed Plastic Piping: No concealed plastic piping inside the building
except where allowed by code.
H. Insulation Thickness and Thermal Performance: Comply with Chapter 13
provisions of the State of Oregon Structural Specialty Code and Fire and Life
Safety Regulations. Composite (insulation, jacket or facing and adhesives)
fire and smoke hazard ratings shall not to exceed a flame spread of 25 or
smoke development of 50. Component ratings of accessories (adhesives,
mastics, cements, tapes, finishing cloth for fittings) shall be same as
requirements above and permanently treated. No water soluble treatments. 1
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Installation Submittals: Submit all equipment submittals bound together in
groups.
B. Wiring Diagrams: Submit complete diagrams showing field
9 9 p g g e d installed wiring
and devices.
C. Submittal Review: Comply with the contract documents where deviations,
discrepancies, and conflicts between the submittals and the contract
documents are discovered prior to or after the review process.
D. Project Record (As- Installed) Drawings:
1. Obtain and pay for reproducible drawings from Architect.
2. Keep Drawings clean, undamaged and up to date.
1
3. Accurately depict locations and changes of piping and ductwork and
eradicate extraneous information.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS & METHODS: 15050 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 3 SEP 00
1 4. Make Drawings available when requested by Architect for his review.
5. Submit as part of project close -out documents.
' E. Maintenance Manuals: Submit five (5) ets of Operating ) P 9 and Maintenance
Instructions.
1.4 STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: Deliver to project site with manufacturer's labels intact and legible.
B. Handling: Avoid damage.
C. Storage: Inside protected from weather, dirt and construction dust. Where
necessary to store outside, elevate well above grade and enclose with
durable, waterproof wrapping.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. General: Provide products which are compatible with other portions of the
' work and provide products with the proper or correct power and fuel- burning
characteristics, and similar adaptations for the project.
' B. Arrangement: Arrange ductwork and piping parallel with primary lines of the
building construction, and with a minimum of 7' overhead clearance in
unfinished equipment rooms where possible. Conceal all piping and
ductwork where possible unless indicated otherwise. Locate operating and
control equipment properly to provide easy access, and arrange entire
mechanical work with adequate access for operation and maintenance. Give
1 right -of -way to piping which must slope for drainage. Set all equipment level
or as recommended by manufacturer.
1 C. Coordination: Where several elements of the work must be sequenced and
positioned with precision in order to fit into the available space, prepare shop
' drawings showing the actual physical dimensions (at accurate scale) required
for the installation and submit prior to purchase /fabrication /installation of any
of the elements involved in the coordination.
1 1.6 STANDARDS
' A. General: Provide all new materials and equipment, identical to apparatus or
equipment in successful operation for a minimum of two years. Provide
materials of comparable quality omitted here but necessary to complete the
1 work. Maximum allowable variation from stated minus 5% to plus
10% as approved in each case.
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS & METHODS: 15050
SEP 00 PAGE 4
B. Governing Standards:
g Sta r ads. The following are typical standards generally
referenced in these specifications and identified by their acronym. Federal
Specifications (FS), American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) American
National Standards Institute (ANSI), Manufacturers Standardization Society
of the Valve and Fitting Industry, Standard Practice (MSS SP -69), Cast Iron
Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI) numbers are given.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS 1
A. Black Steel Pipe:
1. Applications: 1
a. Natural gas.
b. Heating water piping. 1
2. Pipe: Systems 10" or smaller, operating below 400 psi, schedule 40,
standard black steel pipe ASTM A -120 or A -53.
B. Copper Pipe and Tube:
1. Applications: 1
a. Domestic hot and cold water.
b. Priming lines.
c. Heating water piping.
2. Pipe: ASTM B88.
a. Above Ground Domestic Heating Water: Type L hard temper
copper with soldered joints.
b. Underground Domestic Water and Priming Lines: Type L soft
annealed with no joints or type K hard tempered copper with
silver soldered joints.
3. Fittings: Wrought copper solder -joint fittings, ANSI B16.22.
C. Plastic Pipe - Drainage:
1. Application: Three story or less structures and where allowed by Code
only, sanitary waste (below floor slab only), plumbing vent and rain
drain (below floor slab only).
2. Pipe: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic drain, waste and vent pipe and
fittings (DWV), ASTM D2665.
1
1
1
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS & METHODS: 15050 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 5 SEP 00
3. Fittings: Provide fittings of the type indicated, matching piping
9 9 tYP 9 P P 9
manufacture. Where not otherwise indicated, provide fittings produced
1 and recommended for the service indicated by the piping
manufacturer.
D. Cast Iron Soil Pipe:
1. Application: 2" and larger.
a. Sanitary waste
b. Plumbing vent
1 c. Rain drain
2. Pipe: Hubless cast iron soil pipe, CISPI 301 -90 /ASTM A888.
1 3. Fittings:
a. Hubless Cast Iron Fittings: CISPI 30 -901 or cast iron hub and
spigot fittings, ASTM A -74.
b. Couplings Underground: Clamp -All Hi -Torq 125, Husky
SD4000, Mission Heavy Weight, or approved substitute.
' c. Couplings Above Ground: Standard couplings meeting CISPI
Designation 310 except rain drain couplings in systems greater
than 20 feet water column, utilize couplings approved for
underground locations.
d. Couplings to Steel or Plastic Pipe in Concealed Locations:
Fernco "LowFlex" or approved substitute.
1 4. Manufacturers: Cast iron pipe and fittings — AB &I, Charlotte Pipe,
Tyler Pipe.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING MATERIALS /PRODUCTS
A. Insulating (Dielectric) Fittings: Provide standard products recommended by
the manufacturer for use in the service indicated, and which effectively isolate
ferrous from non - ferrous piping (electrical conductance), prevent galvanic
action, and reduce corrosion. Victaulic "Clear Flow" or approved.
B. Soldering Brazing and Brazin Materials: Provide soldering materials as determined
by the installer to comply with installation requirements.
1. Tin - Antimony Solder: ASTM B32, Grade 95TA.
' 2. Lead Free Solder: ASTM B -32, Grade HB. Harris "Bridgit."
3. Silver Solder: ASTM B 32, Grade 96.5TS.
' C. Sleeve Seal: Rubber -link pipe wall and casing closure. Thunderline Link -
Seal. For fire rated wall, floor or ceiling penetrations, 3 -M "CP -25" caulk, "No.
303" putty and /or "PSS 7904" sealing system.
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS & ME THODS. 15050 I
SEP 00 PAGE 6
1
D. Valves: Provide factory fabricated valves of the type, body material and
pressure class indicated and service indicated. Where possible, provide
valves from a single manufacturer.
1. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and I
equipment, including valves in branch lines where necessary to isolate
sections of piping. 1
2. Locate valves in accessible spaces (or behind access panels) and so
that separate support can be provided when necessary.
3. Install valves with stems pointed up, in the vertical position where
possible, but in no case with stems pointed downward from a
horizontal plane.
4. Valve Access: Provide access panels to all valves installed behind
walls, in furring or otherwise inaccessible.
E. Supports and Anchors: Provide pipe and equipment hanger, support, 1
anchors and related items for complete anchor, hanger and support systems.
Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments to support piping and
I
equipment properly from the building structure. Use no wire or perforated
metal to support piping, and no supports from other piping or equipment. For
exposed continuous pipe runs, install hangers and supports of the same type
and style as installed for adjacent similar piping.
2.3 PIPING INSULATION 1
A. Insulating Manufacturers: Manville, Knauf, Armstrong, Owens - Corning,
Pittsburgh Corning, Pabco, IMCOA or CertainTeed. Manville products listed 1
unless indicated otherwise.
B. Adhesive Manufacturers: Benjamin Foster, 3M, Insul - Coustic, Borden, 1
Kingco or Armstrong.
C. Interior Piping Systems 40 to 850 degrees F: Glass fiber preformed pipe 1
insulation with a minimum K -value of 0.23 at 75 degrees F, a minimum
density of 3.5 pounds per cubic foot within all- service vapor barrier jacket,
vinyl or pre -sized finish and pressure sensitive seal. Manville "Micro -Lok."
D. Insulation Compounds and Materials: Provide rivets, bands, adhesives,
cements, sealers, etc. as recommended by the manufacturers for the
insulation and conditions specified.
E. PVC Protective Jacketing and Fitting Covers: CEEL -CO "Ceel -Tite 100 I
Series" with precut fitting fiberglass insulation.
1
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS & METHODS: 15050 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 7 SEP 00
F. Jacket Lap Sealing Adhesives: Foster "DRION 85 -75" contact cement.
2.4 PLUMBING MATERIALS
A. Fixture Color: White unless indicated otherwise.
B. Utility Connections: Make utility and equipment connections and install
distribution piping as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. Verify
size, location, depth, elevation and arrangement of connection points before
1 bidding or starting work.
C. Cleanouts:
1. Manufacturer: J.R. Smith, Josam, Zurn, Wade. Smith numbers used
as a basis of selection.
1 2. Types:
a. Tile Floor Cleanouts: Smith 4053 -U with square heavy -duty
nickel bronze top, taper thread, bronze plug, and vandalproof
' screws.
b. Carpeted Floor Cleanout: Smith 4023 -U -X with round heavy-
duty nickel bronze top, taper thread, bronze plug, carpet
clamping device and vandalproof screws.
c. Concrete Floor Cleanout: Smith 4023 with round heavy -duty
' nickel bronze top, stainless steel shallow cover and vandalproof
screws.
d. Wall Cleanouts: Smith 4472 -U, bronze ferrule with raised head
bronze plug, stainless steel shallow cover and vandalproof
screws.
e. Outside Area Walks and Drives: Smith 4253 -U -G with
galvanized cast iron body, top secured with vandalproof screws,
taper thread and bronze plug. Install in 18" x 18" x 6" deep
concrete pad flush with grade.
D. Air Chambers and Shock Arrester: Precharged bellows or sealed piston type
manufactured to meet PDI WH -201 and ASSE 1010 Standards. Size in
•
1 accordance with PDI procedures. Josam, J.R. Smith, PPP, Wade, Zurn.
1 E. Priming Valves: Smith 2699, Wade W8800T, Zurn Z1022 or equivalent
Precision Plumbing. Locate in closets, under counters or in walls behind
access panels as specified in Section 15050. Use copper previously
1 specified.
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS & METHODS: 15050
SEP 00 PAGE 8 1
F. Gas Pressure Regulators: Size and capacity as required for connected load.
Style and model as approved by Northwest Natural Gas Co. Maxitrol,
Rockwell, Fisher, Reliance, or approved.
G. Electric Hot Water Heaters: UL approved and complying with the State
Energy Code requirements with adjustable automatic thermostatically
controlled electric insertion elements constructed to withstand 400 degrees F
without failure. Heavy glass -lined steel tank with magnesium anode, not less 1
than 1 -1/2" of non - organic insulation and factory enameled jacket. Install with
ASME Code pressure- temperature relief valve and hose bib drain. Capacity
as shown on Drawings. Provide with drain pan. Bradford White or equal. 1
H. Domestic Hot Water Heat Cable: Self- regulating tracing cable with braided
tin copper outer jacket and all necessary accessories including pipe straps,
power termination kit, end seal caps, thermostats, etc. Raychem HWAT,
Thermon HSX -BC, Nelson LT or approved substitute. Provide with Paragon
EC71, 7 -day programmable electronic time clock to start and stop the heat
cable.
2.5 PLUMBING FIXTURES
A. Stops: Furnish stop valves for all fixtures. Screwdriver style, in wall, angle or
straight through pattern to fit installation. Kohler, Speedway, Chicago,
Eastman, Brasskraft, or approved.
B. Elevator Sump Pump: Submersible, 5 gpm at 20 ft. head, 1 /4 horsepower
sump pump with integral mercury float switch. Myers SP25A1 or equivalent
Paco, Hydronix, Zoeller, or approved. 1
C. 1.5 Gallon Flush Water Closet, Flush Valve, Vitreous China, "WC-1": Water
closet bowl shall be designed for 1.5 gallons flushing action. 1
1. Install each listed water closet with the following:
a. Flush Valve: Quiet acting, chrome plated, with metal oscillating
handle approved by ADA, screwdriver stop with cover, and
vacuum breaker, as recommended by closet manufacturer.
Sloan, Zurn and Delany.
b. Seat: Solid white molded plastic seat; open front Tess cover for
elongated bowl with check and self- sustaining hinge. Olsonite 1
10CC -SS, Beneke 523- SS /CH -B, Bemis 1955 SS /C or Church
5334.171 (295 -SS).
1
1
1
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS & METHODS: 15050 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 9 SEP 00
1 2. Wall Hung "WC -1 ": Install with cantilevered design chair carrier for
single or battery installation. Zurn, Jay R. Smith, Ancon, and Wade.
1 Set water closet "WC -2 " for the handicapped at height required by
code. American Standard 2257.103, or Kohler K -4330.
D. Urinal, Flush Valve, Vitreous China, "UR -1 ":
' 1. Install each listed urinal with the following: Code approved flush valve,
quiet acting, chrome plated with metal oscillating handle, screwdriver
stop and vacuum breaker as recommended by manufacturer. Sloan,
Delany or Zurn.
2. Wall Hung, Siphon Jet: Install with plate type chair carrier with bearing
plate. Zurn, Jay R. Smith, Wade, Ancon. American Standard
6540.017, Kohler K- 5016 -T, or Eljer 161 -1150.
■ 3. Set "UR -1" urinal at height required by code for the handicapped.
1 E. Lavatory, Vitreous China, "LV -1 ":
1. Faucet: Delta 516WF HGM HDF, Grohe 33.024 w/07.542, Moen 8425
1 or Symmons S90- 2G -FR -W ] 0.5 gpm, with aerator, handle for the
handicapped and without pop -up waste hand.
2. Counter Mounted, Self- rimming, Oval "LV -1 ": American Standard
0476.028, Kohler K -2195, or Eljer 051 -3514.
'
•
F. Stainless Steel Sink:
1. Type 304, 18 gauge, self- rimming stainless steel sink installed with
stainless steel crumb cup strainer outlet, and flange tail piece. Elkay
numbers are listed; Just, or approved substitute. For faucets, Chicago
numbers are listed; equal Zurn, Delta Commercial approved. Delta
numbers listed; equal Moen, Symmons approved.
2. Single Compartment "S-1": Install with Delta 100 faucet with 2.5 gpm
aerator. Elkay LR- 3122- 6 -1/2" deep ADA accessible.
1 3. Install with 1/2 HP garbage disposal in lieu of strainer outlet. ISE
333SS, Waste King SS -2600, Kitchenaid KWC -200C or approved
substitute.
G. Drains:
1 1. Zurn, Jay R. Smith, Wade and Ancon. Numbers scheduled on
drawings represent minimum acceptable standard for locations
1 involved.
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS & METHODS:
ODS. 15050
SEP 00 PAGE 10 1
2. Install 4 pound sheet lead flashing, extending not less than 10" from
and clamped to all drains not completely cast -in -place in a
homogeneous material.
H. Hose Bibs: 1
1. Outside "HB -1 ": Non - freeze type with vacuum breaker, bronze wall
casing and wall clamp. Zurn Z- 1310 -6, Wade W -8620, Woodford 65 1
series, Smith 5609 -PB, or Ancon HY420.
2.6 STARTERS AND SWITCHES 1
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: General Electric, ITE, Allen Bradley, Arrow -Hart,
Cutler- Hammer. ,
B. General: Provide each motor with starter or switch as approved and
recommended by manufacturer of motor or equipment of which motor is a
part.
C. Starter Characteristics: Type I general purpose enclosure with padlock ears 1
and supports for mounting as indicated. Starter type and size as
recommended by motor manufacturer.
1
D. Manual Switches: Provide on motors 1/3 horsepower and smaller except
where automatic control or interlock is indicated. Include pilot light. Provide
1
overload protection where not protected by panelboard circuit breaker or
fused disconnect switch.
E. Magnetic Starters: Provide for 1/2 horsepower and larger motors, and for
smaller motors on automatic control or with interlock switch. Include pilot
lights, reset, trip -free relay on each phase, and devices for coordination with
control system (including 120 volt transformer for control circuit where service
exceeds 120 volts). Provide automatic ambient temperature compensation
for starter heaters.
2.7 AIR HANDLING
1
A. Roof Mounted Exhaust Fan: Curb mounted on roof; vertical shaft, belt driven,
open 81 wheel as shown on Drawings with pressure lubricated ball bearings;
ball bearing fan duty motor; vibration isolated; bird screen; weatherproof
housing for mounting on square base; capacity as indicated on Drawings.
Anti - backdraft damper in curb. Provide switch with pilot light for each fan so 1
indicated. Cap color as selected by Architect. Jenn Fan, Greenheck,
Carnes, Acme, Penn LC, or approved.
1
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS & METHODS: 15050 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 11 SEP 00
1 B. Ceiling Cabinet Exhaust Fan: Direct drive, forward curved centrifugal wheel,
sleeve bearings, motor and wheel isolated from unit on vibration isolators;
provide grille on inlet and duct connection with backdraft dampers on
discharge. Size and capacity as indicated on Drawings. Penn Zypher, Jenn-
Air J- Series, Greenheck SP, Breidert SV, Cook Gemini or approved.
1 2.8 ROOF MOUNTED HVAC EQUIPMENT
A. Packaged Roof Mounted Gas Heating - Electric Cooling Unit:
1. Manufacturers: Carrier, Lennox, Trane, or approved.
2. Supply Fan Section: Commercial class air condition duty, direct or belt
1 driven centrifugal air supply fan.
3. Heating Section: AGA and serving utility approved gas burner with
glass lined aluminized steel heat exchanger. Include automatic gas
1 valve, bonnet switch, high limit, main and pilot gas cocks, automatic
electric and electronic ignition system, draft diverter and vent.
4. Cooling Section: Include hermetic compressor, capacity matched
vertical discharge, air cooled condenser, direct expansion cooling coil,
complete refrigeration circuit, including high and low pressure cutouts,
short cycling protection, refrigerant filter dryer, etc.
5. Casing: Enclose complete assembly in weatherproof formed steel
enameled cabinet with 1" thick, non - organic casing insulation; 1"
disposable air filters of standard sizes, extended housing for
downward supply and return air ducts connections; 1/2" galvanized
mesh bird screen over rain hood inlet. Mount unit on leveled factory
furnished steel support curb with ductwork, electrical connections
brought up through the roof within the curb.
6. Controls: Minimum accessories shall include all necessary internal
circuiting and fused disconnects for the following:
a. Single field electrical power connection.
b. Programmable 7 -day, night set back, electronic thermostat and
1 economizer /controller.
c. Automatic outside and return air damper controlled to maintain
' a set mixed air temperature with the outside air damper closing
on fan shutdown and going to a minimum position above 60
deg. F (automatic minimum outside air intake damper to close
1 on fan shutdown) and the thermostat shall operate the heating
and cooling as required to maintain space temperatures.
d. Provide clear plastic guards with separate mounting base over
1 thermostats indicated.
2.9 NON - DUCTED, SPLIT SYSTEM COOLING UNIT
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS & METHODS: 1
S 15050
SEP 00 PAGE 12 1
A. Indoor Section: Non - ducted, compact fan coil unit designed for wall, ceiling
or recessed ceiling mounting as indicated.
1
B. Outdoor Section: Capacity matched with indoor section, steel cabinet with
hermetically sealed compressor, accumulator, crankcase heater, high and
low pressure switches, restart delay relay, and propeller fans,
C. Refrigerant Line Set: Precharge and preinsulated refrigerant line set with 1
quick connectors on each end.
D. Acceptable Manufacturers: Sanyo, Mitsubishi, or approved.
1
2.10 SHEET METAL
A. Quality Assurance: Comply with requirements of Chapter 10 of the Oregon
State Mechanical Fire and Life Safety Code. Galvanized steel sheet metal
except where otherwise indicated. Metal gauges, joints and reinforcement in
accordance with ASHRAE and SMACNA tables and recommendations.
B. Acoustical Duct Lining: Line ducts with 1" thick, Manville "Lina - Coustic," 1
Gustin Bacon "Ultra- Liner," or Owens Corning "Aeroflex" meeting NFPA 90A
requirements for maximum flame spread and smoke developed.
Mechanically attach lining to sheet metal duct with Manville Grip Nails or
Gramweld welding pins. Provide fire retardant type adhesive similar to
Manville No. 44 adhesive, Benjamin Foster 81 -99, Insul - Coustic 22 or 3M 1
equivalent.
C. Exposed to View Round Supply Air Ductwork: Round and flat oval spiral
seam galvanized sheet metal outer shell duct with 1" thick fiberglass
insulation sandwiched between it and a perforated galvanized sheet metal
inner liner. Provide factory manufactured fittings matching ductwork. United
Sheet Metal, Rolock, Semco Air System, Robert Lloyd Sheet Metal, Arrow,
Dees, Arjae Sheet Metal.
D. Duct Sealing Tapes: Provide one of the following UL listed ductwork sealing 1
tape systems.
1. Aluminum bonded to aluminized mylar reinforced with fiberglass mesh 1
backing an elastomeric pressure sensitive adhesive specifically
formulated for adhesion to galvanized metal. Hardcast AFG -1402 or
accepted substitute.
2. Two part sealing system with woven fiber, mineral gypsum
impregnated tape and non - flammable adhesive. Hardcast DT tape 1
and FTA -20 adhesive.
1
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS & METHODS: 15050 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 13 SEP 00
' 3. For , joints and seams exposed to the weather in lieu of soldering,
9
Hardcast DT tape with RTA -50 adhesive is approved.
4. At contractor's option, "Ductmate System" by Ductmate Industries,
Inc., is approved for making transverse rectangular and round duct
joints. Ward Duct Connectors, Inc., Lockformer TDC or approved.
D. Manual Volume Dampers:
1. Construct of material two gauges heavier than duct in which installed;
single plate up to 12" wide; multiple over 12" wide. Hem both edges
1/2" and flange sides 1/2 ". Use Young, Duro -Dyne or approved
damper accessories.
a. No. 605 bearing set with No. 403 regulator for dampers up to
24" long.
b. For dampers over 24" long use No. 660 3/8" rod, No. 656 end
bearing and No. 403 regulator.
' c. Where damper regulators are not readily accessible, use No.
660 or No. 661 rod extensions and No. 301 and No. 315
I concealed damper regulators as required.
2. Location of all volume dampers is not necessarily shown on Drawings;
minimum required is one in each supply, return or exhaust main and
one in each branch.
E. Fire Dampers: Constructed and installed in accordance with NFPA No. 90A
I and Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., labeled. Provide fire dampers with rating
equal to surrounding construction where penetrations are made through fire
resistant rated construction as per applicable codes. Locate fusible links for
easy service or replacement. Provide access panels of proper fire rating as
required. Fire dampers shall be sized to maintain free area through fire
damper same as unobstructed run of duct. Air Balance Inc., American
Warming, Dowco, Krueger, Pacific Air Products, Profco, Ruskin, Safe Air,
United Sheet Metal, Greenheck or approved.
r 2.11 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS
A. Description: Provide grilles, registers and diffusers as shown on the
Drawings.
B. Finishes:
1. Steel: Flat white enamel prime coat, factory applied on ceiling
' diffusers. Others are to have a baked enamel finish, color as selected
by Architect.
2. Aluminum: Anodized clear finish unless indicated otherwise.
r
TOC BUILDING ADDITION BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS & METHODS: 15050
SEP 00 PAGE 14
C. Manufacturers: Air Devices, Carnes, Krueger, Titus, Metalaire. Titus model
numbers are listed. Where other manufacturer's products are listed, only that
product or an approved substitute for that item shall be provided.
D. Perforated Face Diffusers: Perforated snap -in or concealed hinged face plate
with internal deflection blades at diffuser neck in steel or extruded aluminum
frame and margin to suit the ceiling construction. Provide with opposed blade 1
volume damper. Panel size shall be 24" x 24" where lift out tile ceiling system
is indicated. Air Devices "PN," Carnes "SPGC," Krueger Series 6200,
Metalaire 7600/7500 series or Titus "PCS." 1
E. Ceiling Matched Return and /or Exhaust Register: To match adjacent ceiling
outlets. Use in spaces containing ceiling diffusers and /or Tee -bar ceilings.
Provide with damper except where dampered plenums are indicated. Match
manufacturer of supply.
F. Sidewall Air Outlets: Four -way adjustable air conditioning type with opposed
blade volume damper. Titus 300. 1
G. Sidewall or Ceiling Return or Exhaust Register: Face bars parallel to long
dimension on ceiling type and horizontal on wall type; bars set at 35 degrees
to 45 degrees, spaced on 0.66" to 0.75" centers; key operated opposed blade
volume damper. Titus 350.
H. Sidewall or Ceiling Return, Exhaust or Relief Grille: Face bars parallel to long
dimension on ceiling type and horizontal on wall type; bars set at 35 degrees
to 45 degrees, spaced on 0.66" to 0.75" centers. Titus 23 -RL. 1
I. Plaster Frames: Provide plaster frames for all diffusers, grilles or registers
installed in plaster walls or ceiling. Where register face is aluminum, the
plaster frame shall be aluminum. Frame to match manufacturer of register or
be of compatible size of listed manufacturer. Carnes Model 1000, Krueger
8PF, Titus 115.
J. Reinforcement: Installing contractor to reinforce all return or exhaust grilles
or registers with either dimension greater than 36" on rear of face both ways
with 1" x 1" x 1/8" angle spaced 12" on center.
2.12 DUCTWORK INSULATION
A. Above Grade Interior Ductwork: Insulate with 1 -1/2 ", one pound density ,
glass fiber blanket with "FSK" (Foil -Skrim -Kraft) jacket. Wire and duct
adhesive as required on fittings. Manville "Microlite" or approved substitute.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS & METHODS: 15050 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 15 SEP 00
B. Above Grade Exterior Ductwork: Insulate with 2 ", three pound density glass
1 fiber board, Manville "1000 Series Spin -Glas" or approved substitute, with
0.016" thick weatherproof aluminum outer jacket.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
1 3.1 LAYOUT AND COORDINATION
A. Site Examination: Before starting work, carefully examine site and all
contract Drawings. Become thoroughly familiar with conditions governing
work on this project.
1 B. Utility Locations: The location of all utilities, wires, conduits, pipes, ducts, or
other service facilities are shown in a general way only on the Drawings and
are taken from existing public records.
C. Discrepancies: Any error, conflict or discrepancy in Plans, Specifications
and /or existing conditions shall be reported immediately. Do not proceed with
any questionable items of work until clarification of same has been made.
Should rearrangement or re- routing of ducts or piping be necessary, provide
1 for approval the simplest layout possible for that particular portion of the work.
' 3.2 EQUIPMENT REMOVAL
A. All removed mechanical equipment is the property of the Contractor unless
' indicated otherwise. Disconnect and remove all such equipment from the
project property. Cap all piping in walls, below floors, and /or above ceilings in
finished rooms.
1 B. Disable electrical circuits by disconnection of both ends and make safe with
wire nuts or other approved methods. Remove wire and conduit to concealed
1 locations.
C. Where equipment is to be reused, reconnect piping, wiring and /or controls to
allow this equipment to function as it had prior to this renovation unless
indicated otherwise.
3.3 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT WIRING
A. Provide all mechanical equipment motors, automatic temperature, limit, float
1 and similar control devices required, with wiring 'complete from power source
indicated on Electrical Drawings.
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS & METHODS: 15050
SEP 00 PAGE 16
B. Provide properly rated motor overload and undervoltage protection and all
manual or automatic motor operating devices for all mechanical equipment.
C. Equipment and systems shown on the Drawings and /or specified, are based
upon requirements of specific manufacturers which are intended as
somewhat typical of several makes which may be accepted. Provide all field
wiring and /or devices necessary for a complete and operable system
including controls for the actual selected equipment/system. '
D. Provide all starters for mechanical motors.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Locating and Positioning Equipment: Observe all Codes and Regulations ,
and good common practice in locating and installing mechanical equipment
and material so that completed installation presents the least possible
hazard. Maintain adequate clearances for repair and service to all
equipment. Installation of any equipment with less than minimum clearances
shall not be accepted. '
B. Anchorage: Anchor and /or brace all mechanical equipment, piping and
ductwork to resist displacement due to seismic action, include snubbers on
equipment mounted on spring isolators.
C. Access Panels: Provide access panels with proper backing reinforcement for
all equipment, fire and smoke dampers, dielectric unions and valves requiring
service and installed above ceilings, behind walls, or in furring, complete with
correct frame for type of building construction involved. Exact size, number 1
and location of access panels are not necessarily shown on Drawings.
D. Adjusting: Adjust and calibrate all automatic mechanical equipment, mixing
1
valves, flush valves, float devices, etc. Adjust flow rates at each piece of
equipment or fixture.
E. Mechanical System Identification:
1. Piping System: Indicate each pipe system by its generic name r
(abbreviated) as shown /scheduled /specified; except vent and drainage
piping. Include arrows to show direction of flow and "Electric Traced"
signs to identify heat cable wrapped piping.
2. Equipment: Provide engraved plastic - laminate signs at locations of
major equipment units, primary control devices, emergency equipment 1
dangerous elements of the mechanical work and similar places.
Comply with recognized industry standards for color and design.
1
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS & METHODS: 15050 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 17 SEP 00
3. Operation Tags: Where needed for proper and adequate information
1 P 9 P P q
on operation and maintenance of mechanical systems, provide tags of
plasticized card stock.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect all work and materials against loss or damage. Close all pipe
openings with caps or plugs. At final completion, thoroughly clean and
deliver all work and equipment in an unblemished new condition. Keep all
motors and bearings in watertight and dust proof covers during entire course
1 of installation.
3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING
1 A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1 for the cutting and patching of
other work to accommodate the installation of mechanical work. Do all
' necessary cutting and patching of existing building and yard surfaces
required for completion of the mechanical work. Patch to match finish and
color of adjacent surfaces. Coordinate work in remodel and new areas to
1 avoid cutting of new finished surfaces.
3.7 UTILITY SERVICE
1 A. Plumbing Utility Connections: Complete installation. Contact local serving
utilities to determine conditions involved and make or arrange to have
1 connection made at the proper time and pay all costs involved.
3.8 PIPE INSTALLATION
A. General: Install pipe, tube and fittings in accordance with recognized industry
1 practices for each indicated service without piping failure. Install each run
with a minimum of joints and couplings, but with adequate and accessible
1 unions and flanges for disassembly, maintenance and /or replacement of
valves and equipment. Reduce sizes (where indicated) by use of reducing
fittings. Align piping accurately at connections. Under no conditions shall
beams, girders, footings or columns be cut for mechanical items. Casting of
pipes into concrete is prohibited unless so shown on Drawings.
1
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS & METHODS: 15050
SEP 00 PAGE 18
1
B. Piping Runs: Locate piping runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically
and horizontally (pitched to drain) and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible.
Orient horizontal runs parallel with walls and column lines. If not otherwise
indicated, run piping in the shortest route which does not obstruct usable
space or block access for servicing the building and its equipment. Hold
piping close to walls, overhead construction, columns and other structural
and permanent - enclosure elements of the building. Wherever possible in
finished and occupied spaces, conceal piping from view. Do not encase 1
horizontal runs in solid partitions.
3.9 PIPING JOINTS 1
A. General: Provide joints of the type indicated in each piping system, and
where piping and joint as manufactured form a system, utilize only that 1
manufacturer's material.
B. Cast Iron "No- Hub ": All joints in accordance with the Cast Iron Soil Pipe 1
Institute pamphlet No. 100 "Installation Suggestions for 'No -Hub' Pipe and
Fittings." 1
C. Ferrous Threaded Piping: Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI 82.1; cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded ends to remove
burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint compound or pipe joint
tape (Teflon) where recommended by pipe /fitting manufacturer, on male
threads at each joint and tighten joint to leave no more than 3 threads
exposed.
D. Solder Copper Tube and Fitting Joints: In accordance with recognized 1
industry practice. Cut tube ends squarely, ream to full inside diameter, and
clean outside of tube ends and inside of fittings. Apply solder flux to joint
areas of both tubes and fittings. Insert tube full depth into fitting, and solder
in a manner which will draw solder full depth and circumference of joint.
Wipe excess solder from joint before it hardens. "T- Drill" field formed tees
may be utilized where the main is at least two pipe sizes larger than the
branch.
E. Braze Copper Tube and Fitting Joints: Where indicated, in accordance with 1
ANSI B31. Pass a slow stream of dry nitrogen gas through the tubing at all
times while brazing to eliminate formation of copper oxide. 1
F. Plastic Pipe/Tube Joints: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations, and with applicable industry standards: 1
1. Making Solvent- Cemented Joints: ASTM D -2865 and ASTM F-402.
1
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS & METHODS: 15050 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 19 SEP 00
G. Insulating (Dielectric) Fittings: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for
1 installing unions or fittings. Install in a manner which will prevent galvanic
action and stop corrosion where the "joining of ferrous and non - ferrous
piping" is indicated.
H. Changes in Direction: Use fittings for all changes in direction. Run lines
1 parallel with building surfaces.
I. Line Grades:
1. Drainage Lines: Run at maximum possible grade and in no case
less than 1/4" per foot within building.
2. Vents: Pitch for drainage 1/4" per 10'.
3. Water: Pitch to low points and install hose bib drains. 3' minimum
depth of ground cover for all lines outside building unless otherwise
1 noted.
J. Unions and Flanges: At all equipment to permit dismantling and elsewhere
as consistent with good installation practice.
' K. Expansion: Provide loops, swing joints, anchors, runouts and spring pieces
to prevent damage to piping or equipment.
3.10 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING EQUIPMENT
E. Air Chambers and Shock Arrestors: Install at the end of mains, on water
closet and urinal headers, ahead of quick closing and solenoid operated
valves, etc.
3.11 PIPING INSULATION
A. Domestic Water Piping: Insulate with glass fiber pipe covering, 1" thick for
1 cold water piping and for one" and smaller hot water piping; 1 -1/2" for 1 -1/4"
and larger hot water piping. Insulate hot water return piping same as cold
water piping.
B. Pipe Fittings: Insulate and finish all fittings including valve bodies, bonnets,
unions, flanges and expansion joints with precut fiberglass insulation and
1 preformed PVC covers sealed to adjacent insulation jacket for continuous
vapor barrier covering over all fittings.
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS & METHODS:
ODS. 15050
SEP 00 PAGE 20 1
C. Piping Insulation Lap Seams and Butt Joints: Install insulation jacket in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendation. Where jacket joint and lap
seams have not adhered, remove affected section of insulation and reinstall
or when accepted by the Architect, apply lap sealing adhesive in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions. '
3.12 ROOF MOUNTED EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. All roof mounted mechanical equipment shall be supported and seismically 1
anchored on levelled, flashed and counterflashed curbs anchored to resist
seismic forces and suitable for the roof construction. Minimum curb height 1
shall be 12" above the roof unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings.
Flashing into the roof is specified in another Section.
B. Make all i in electrical and duct penetrations p p g, p t ations for each equipment within
the curb unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. Piping and electrical
conduit routed above and across the roof shall be supported on flashed and
counterflashed curbs with pipe guides anchored to the curbs in "pitch
pockets." Submit shop drawings on other arrangements for approval. ,
C. Acoustical Protection: Install two layers of 5/8" weatherproof sheet rock with
staggered joints on the perimeter angle and cross members provided with the
vibration isolator bases. Apply sheet rock around all ductwork above the roof
and caulk all joints and seams. Provide additional acoustical materials as
recommended by acoustical engineer. 1
3.13 AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. General: Install and arrange as shown on Drawings. Comply with the
manufacturer's recommendations for installation connection and start-up.
B. Lubrication: All moving and rotating parts shall be lubricated in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations prior to start-up.
C. Equipment Access Panels: Locate free of all
a obstructions such as ceiling
bars, electrical conduit, lights, ductwork, etc.
D. Filters: Install specified filters or approved temporary construction filters in
supply units and systems prior to start-up or use for drying and /or temporary
heat. Replace prior to acceptance of project.
3.14 INSTALLATION OF GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS '
A. Size and air handling characteristics shall be as shown on the Drawings.
1
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS & METHODS: 15050 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 21 SEP 00
B. Locate, arrange, and install grilles, registers and diffusers as shown on the
Drawings. Locate registers in tee -bar ceilings with diffusers centered on the
1 tile unless indicated otherwise.
3.15 DUCTWORK INSTALLATION
' A. Support: Install ductwork with 1" wide 16 gauge cradle hangers not more
than 8' c /c; attach to available building construction as per good practices for
1 materials involved.
' B. Fan and Air Handling Unit Flexible Connections: Install neoprene
impregnated fiberglass connections in ductwork at all rotating equipment.
Ventglass, Duro -Dyne or approved.
1 C. Elbows and Fittings: Construct elbows with throat radius equal to duct width
in plane of turn or make them square and provide double wall, air foil turning
1 vanes.
D. Fittings: Make transitions and take -offs as shown on Drawings. Provide
' volume dampers and splitter dampers as indicated on Drawings and as
specified.
E. Acoustical Duct Lining: Acoustically line all outside air ducts and plenums, all
fan unit intake and discharge plenums, all ductwork indicated as Tined on the
Drawings, all sheet metal ductwork specified as insulated, where exposed to
view or subject to damage in areas such as mechanical rooms, and at the
Contractor's option, all insulated ductwork specified
1 F. Manual Volume Dampers: Location of all volume dampers are not
necessarily shown on the Drawings. Provide a minimum of one volume
damper in each supply, return or exhaust branch. Install dampers in
fiberglass ductwork (where fiberglass ductwork is allowed) with galvanized
sheet metal sleeves of sheet metal gauges required for metal duct systems of
the same dimensions.
3.16 DUCTWORK INSULATION
1 A. Ductwork: Insulate all ductwork per code.
1 B. Internally Lined Ductwork: No exterior insulation required where ducts are
internally lined. Carefully lap the ends of the exterior insulation a minimum of
6" past the interior insulation unless otherwise shown. Seal the end of vapor
1 barrier jacket to the duct with mastic where the vapor barrier is required.
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS & METHODS: 15050
SEP 00 PAGE 22
C. Fittings: Wire and duct adhesive as required. To prevent q o p event sagging on all
rectangular or square ducts over 24" wide, install Gramweld or equal welding
pins on the bottom. Maximum spacing 18" on center in both directions.
D. Installation: Applied with butt joints, all seams sealed with vapor seal mastic
or taped with 2" wide vapor -proof pressure sensitive tape. Seal all
penetrations with vapor barrier adhesive.
3.17 MECHANICAL PAINTING 1
A. Minimum Requirements: All mechanical equipment, piping, insulation, etc.,
exposed in finished areas, storage rooms and other locations except
mechanical equipment rooms will be painted.
3.18 PLUMBING FIXTURE INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION
A. All exposed fixture connections and piping shall be polished chrome plated.
1
Where chair carriers or special carrier design are not indicated, provide 3/16"
thick by 6" wide steel to waste or vent piping and to available building
construction.
1
B. All fixtures in contact with finished walls shall be caulked with waterproof,
white, non - hardening sealant which will not crack, shrink or change color with
age.
C. All fixtures and component parts shall conform to governing codes. '
3.19 CLEANING
A. Remove construction protection, tags and labels and thoroughly clean all
plumbing equipment and trim and scour all fixtures just prior to building
acceptance.
B. General: Clean all dirt and construction dust and debris from all mechanical
piping systems and leave in a new condition. Touch up paint where
necessary.
C. Domestic Water System: Flush with clean water to eliminate grease, cuttings
and foreign matter; run water until clear and free of oil. Chlorinate domestic
water as per procedure outlined by Board of Health. 1
D. Waste and Storm Drainage System:
1. Remove construction f
debns from cleanouts, drains, strainers, baskets,
traps, etc., and leave same accessible and operable.
1
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS & METHODS: 15050 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 23 SEP 00
' 2. Clear the interior of sewer piping of dirt and other superfluous material
as the work progresses. Flush lines between manholes to remove
1 collected debris. Place plugs in the end of uncompleted conduit at the
end of the day or whenever work stops.
' 3. Before final acceptance of completed sewer system, flush and clean
the entire system with water. Trap and remove solid material obtained
from flushing and cleaning from the new system. Do not allow debris
' to enter the existing sewer system.
E. Gas Piping: Blow clear of debris with nitrogen or oil free air. Clean all low
1 point strainers and pockets.
3.20 MECHANICAL WORK CLOSEOUT
1 A. Refer to the Division 1 sections for general closeout requirements. Calibrate
all equipment requiring same.
' 3.21 TEST
A. General:
1. Minimum duration of two hours or longer, as directed for all tests.
1 Furnish report of test observation signed by qualified inspector. Make
all tests before applying insulation, backfilling, or otherwise concealing
piping or connecting fixtures or equipment. Where part of the system
must be tested to avoid concealment before the entire system is
complete, test that portion separately, same as for entire system.
' 2. Provide all necessary temporary equipment for testing, including pump
and gauges. Remove control devices before testing and do not use
piping system valves to isolate sections where test pressure exceeds
' valve pressure rating. Fill each section with water and pressurize for
the indicated pressure and time.
3. Observe each test section for leakage at end of test period. Test fails
1 if leakage is observed or if pressure drop exceeds 5% of test pressure.
B. Repair:
1. Repair piping systems sections which fail the required piping test by
disassembly and re- installation, using new materials to the extent
required to overcome leakage. Do not use chemical stop -leak
compounds, solder, mastics, or other temporary repair methods.
2. Drain test water from piping systems after testing and repair work has
been completed.
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS & METHODS: 15050
SEP 00 PAGE 24
C. Sewer: Furnish all facilities and ersonnel for
p o conducting the test. Test in
accord with the requirements of the State Plumbing Inspector and local 111 authorities.
D. Drainage and Vent Piping: Hydrostatic test by fillip to highest
9 P� 9� Y Y 9 point, but not 9 P
less then 10' water column on major horizontal portion.
E. Water Piping: Hydrostatic pressure of 100 psig without loss for four hours. ,
F. Natural Gas Piping: One half hour minimum air at 60 psig for 2 psig gas, and
15 minutes at 10 psig for 7" water gauge natural gas or as approved and 1
certified by serving utility.
G. Refrigerant Evacuating and Charging ,
1. Evacuating:
a. Evacuate the refrigerant system at least 3 times, using a
vacuum pump. Do not, under any circumstances, use the
system compressor to evacuate the system.
b. Connect the vacuum pump to the system through 5/8" OD or
larger line connected to a flange adapter installed between the
suction service valve and the compressor suction port. Connect
a second line to the charging valve in the liquid line to allow
evacuation from both high and low sides simultaneously. This
second line shall be the same size as the liquid line. During ,
evacuation, do not operate hermetic or semi - hermetic motors
because of the danger of insulation breakdown in very deep
vacuum. 1
c. Each evacuation shall be to at least 500 microns (1/2 mm of
mercury) absolute pressure. Measure the vacuum with an
electronic vacuum gauge, or other suitable vacuum indicator 1
which can be read accurately below 500 microns. Prove the
first vacuum by holding it at least one hour with no increase in
pressure (taking all changes in ambient temperature into
account).
d. Break each evacuation with the refrigerant to be used in the
system charged through a dryer.
2. Charging:
a. After the third evacuation, add the proper amount of refrigerant,
check the oil level in the compressor, and add or remove oil as
necessary to bring the level in the compressor to the middle of
the sight glass. 1
I BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS & METHODS: 15050 TOC BUILDING ADDITION
PAGE 25 SEP 00
I b. Use only oil recommended by the manufacturer of the
compressor and delivered to the job site in sealed containers
1 with all labels intact and legible at the time of use.
c. Charge all refrigerant into the system through a dryer and using
only refrigerant delivered to the job site in factory- charged
I cylinders.
d. Do not start motors until lubrication has been checked and the
I proper oil and /or grease has been added where required. Do
not relieve any refrigerant to the atmosphere.
I G. Controls: All existing and new HVAC units to be controlled through Kruter
Controls. Provide building panel to communicate with owners system via
modem. Provide on /off control and status of each HVAC unit tied to network.
Provide discharge air temperature and space set point to network as well.
Contractor design to be submitted for service prior to installation. Contractor
is responsible for a complete system and training of personnel after
1 installation.
3.22 BALANCING
1 A. Balancing of the Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning systems shall be
by a firm established in the State of Oregon providing this service and shall
1 have the Architect's approval.
I B. Provide the following minimum data:
1. HVAC unit nameplate data, CFM, entering and leaving air on both
I heating and cooling, electrical power consumption data, etc.
2. Grille, register and diffuser CFM.
1 END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION DIVISION 16: ELECTRICAL
SEP 00 PAGE 1
1 PART1 GENERAL
DESIGN CRITERIA AND REQUIREMENTS: SECTION 16000
A. Provide engineering design services to furnish the following.
' 1. Permit drawings that are sealed by a professional electrical engineer.
2. Electrical load calculations.
3. Service and distribution equipment sizing and selection.
' 4. Conductor and conduit sizing.
5. Fault calculations for selection of adequate equipment AIC ratings.
6. Lighting foot - candle calculations.
' 7. Lighting energy budget calculations per the Oregon Energy Code if
changes to schedule or plans are made.
8. Fire alarm system design for new and existing building.
' B. Design Criteria — General
1. Coordinate the electrical design -build with other discipline design -build
1 contractors.
' C. Design Criteria — Lighting
1. Energy Code. Provide lighting that complies with the Oregon Non -
Residential Energy Code.
' 2. Lighting Levels. Provide light levels recommended in Illuminating
Engineering Society Lighting Handbook 8 addition as can be attained
within the Oregon Energy Code.
' 3. Emergency Lighting. Provide emergency lighting and marking of the
means of egress in accordance. Provide with battery backup.
4. Provide lighting of parking lot, interior courtyard, and exterior walkways
' and sidewalk.
5. Provide exterior building lighting.
6. Provide exterior lighting at exterior doors.
1 7. Provide lighting as indicated on A1.0 and A5.1.
' D. Design Criteria — Service and Distribution
1. Existing Service: Evaluate and determine the adequacy of the existing
service to serve the new addition based on actual design equipment
' load information. The recorded peak demand for the existing building
over the last 12 months war 62 Kw (172 amps). The service size is
600 amps. Provide new larger service if determined to not be
adequate based on.
2. Coordinate design with PGE.
3. Outlets. Provide outlets where indicated on architectural floor plans.
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION DIVISION 16: ELECTRICAL
SEP 00 PAGE 1
' 4. Circuiting. Maximum of three Offices or Work Stations served by one
20 amp branch circuit.
1 5. Provide branch circuits with a separate green - colored equipment
ground conductor.
' 6. Dedicated Receptacle Circuits. Provide dedicated 20 amp branch
circuits for the following:
a. Corridor cleaning outlets.
' b. Microwaves.
c. Coffee Pots.
d. Refrigerators.
' e. Copiers.
f. Laser Printers.
g. Vending Machines
' E. Fire Alarm and Detection System
1 1. Provide new fire alarm system and smoke detector for full building
coverage and along the means of egress paths in both the new building
addition and the existing building as required by TVFR and Tigard
' Building Officials. Provide a system complying with NFPA 72, fire alarm
codes and ADA. Provide manual pull stations, ADA visual alarms, and
' audible alarm coverage.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: SECTION 16010
1 A. All design, work, equipment under this division shall comply with the
applicable provisions of the following codes and standards:
1. Life Safety Code - NFPA 101
2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Publications
' 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
4. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
5. National Electrical Code (NFPA 70)
1 6. National Electrical Manufacture's Association (NFMA)
7. International Power Cable Engineer's Association (IPCEA)
' 8. Oregon Electrical Specialty Code.
B. All materials shall be new, free from defects and shall be either UL labeled,
UL listed or bear the seal of a nationally recognized electrical testing
laboratory.
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION DIVISION 16: ELECTRICAL
SEP 00 PAGE 1
' C. Submit electrical and fire alarm system drawings to authorities having
jurisdiction for their reviews and approvals.
D. Obtain construction permits.
' E. Provide electrical demolition as needed.
F. Provide shop drawings (six copies) for the following equipment for approval.
1 1. Lighting Fixtures
2. Switchboard (if required)
3. Panelboards
4. Motor controls
5. Wiring Devices
1 6. Fire Alarm and Detection System
G. Provide as -built drawings to indicated installed conditions.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS: SECTION 16100
A. Raceways and fittings:
' 1. Install all wiring in appropriate raceway system of rigid galvanized
steel, electrical metallic tubing, flexible steel conduit, and liquid -tight
flexible conduit as conditions and code dictate. Join EMT conduit with
compression type fittings. Join rigid galvanized steel conduit with
threaded couplings.
2. Install an insulated copper equipment grounding conductor through out
' the entire conduit system.
3. Install rigid steel conduit system in inmate areas where accessible.
Secure the rigid steel conduits system to the structure every four feet
1 with U shape clamp and tamper resistant screws.
B. Outlet Boxes
Provide one piece galvanized stamped steel outlet boxes for gang size
required. Do not provide sectional boxes. Provide 4 inch square and 1.5
' inch deep boxes except where larger boxes are required by codes. Provide
single cast boxes with tamper resistant cover screws where rigid steel
conduit is installed.
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION DIVISION 16: ELECTRICAL
SEP 00 PAGE 1
1 WIRES AND CONDUCTORS: SECTION 16120
A. Provide 600 volt copper conductors type THHN or THWN insulation.
Minimum conductor size #12. Provide THWN copper conductors with
' compression lug termination's for feeders and sub - feeders. Color code
cables in accordance with the National Electrical Code.
WIRING DEVICES: SECTION 16140
A. Provide 20 amp, 125 volt, grounding type, commercial grade duplex
t receptacles. Provide 20 amp, 125 volt silent type, commercial grade
switches. Provide ground fault interrupting receptacles at wet locations.
Provide wiring device coverplates matching existing. Provide 1500 watt
1 rated lighting dimmers. Provide dual technology (passive infrared /ultrasonic)
occupancy sensors where required by Oregon Non - Residential Energy Code.
1 MOTOR AND MOTOR CONTROLLERS: SECTION 16150
1 A. Provide motor controllers and control wiring not integral with the equipment or
provided by others. Provide heavy duty, quick -make, quick -break disconnect
switches for motors. Coordinate installation of motor disconnects and power
wiring connections with the mechanical design build contractor.
LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS: SECTION 16180
1 A. Provide panelboards with full size circuit breakers. Load center panelboards
are not acceptable. Provide quick- break, quick -make circuit breakers of
' thermal and magnetic type. Provide main breakers where required. Furnish
all panelboards with typewritten load directories on inside of door.
1 LIGHTING: SECTION 16500
A. Provide fixtures of type indicated on the architectural reflected ceiling plans.
1 Provide commercial grade lighting fixtures.
' 1. Ballast: Provide high power factor, electronic ballast for fluorescent T -8
lamps. Fluorescent ballast shall be automatic reset type with thermal
protection and provided with external fusing.
2. Provide photocell /time clock system to control exterior lighting.
Interconnect with existing lighting control so the existing and new go
on and off together.
1
1
1
TOC BUILDING ADDITION DIVISION 16: ELECTRICAL
SEP 00 PAGE 1
FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM: SECTION 16500
A. Provide system meeting all the requirements of NFPA 13,70,72,90,101; state
1 and local codes.
' 1. Provide UL listed and FM approved system.
2. 24 -volt DC, non - coded, supervised, continuously sounding, automatic
fire alarm system.
' 3. System that provides alarm, supervisory and trouble indication.
4. System annunciation at fireman's entry and to and offsite monitoring
service.
1
END OF DIVISION 16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
t TOC BUILDING ADDITION LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE
SEP 00 PAGE 1
Type Manufacture and Catalog # Lamps Input
I _ Watts*
A Louis Poulsen ' 1 -250w MH #1 294
_ PH6- 184 - White -250MH open rated
I B Elliptipar 1- #1, 4 294
M 104- 0250 -Z -02- volt -V0 -0 MH250/HOR
II Balt Winona #1, 4 294
P2- LS -M250- volt- LD1 -SGW -X -STD
C Louis Poulsen 2 -32w PLT 68
1 M7- 2- 32- CFH -S- volt -OS
D -8 Prudential 4 -32w T8 #5 114/8'
Pru- 1- D- 8- 2T8- SC- YMW -S- volt - CA48- FYC063
I D -12 Prudential 6 -32w T8 #5 209/12'
Pru- 1 -D -12- 2T8 -S C- YMW -S- volt - CA48- FYCO63
D -16 Prudential 8 -32w T8 #5 228/16'
I Pru- l -D -16- 2T8- SC- YMW -S- volt - CA48- FYC063
E Zumtobel/Staff 1 -32W PLT 35 -
I S5D6308HK- S4- 6313HRC -9930
F Zumtobel /Staff 1 1 -32W PLT #2 • 35
S5D6308HK- S4- 6313HWC -9930
Falt I Elliptipar 1 -42w PLT #3 46
1 F211- H142 -L -02- volt -000
G 1 Lithonia 2 -40w CFL 82
I 2PM3N- G- B- 2- CF40 -9- volt- LD -GEB
H Lithonia 3 -32w T8 95
2PM3N -G -B -3 32 -181d- volt -geb
i
I Peerless 2 -54w T5HO #6 120
MRM4- 1- 54T5H0 -8 -R8- volt- 0- 0- SCT- LP835 -F 1 -24-
_ 00
II IE Archietcural 4 -13w PL
LF 31 -F
K Louis 'o . • - -2. - • - 37
SKT -Max 564/591/582 2 pin
I L -33 Nulite: 1 -F8 /T5 and 29
NU33 1 -F13T5
L -42 Nulite: 2-F13/T5 38
I NU42
M Zumtobel/Staff 1 -32W PLT #7 35
S5D6308HK- S4- 6313HRC -9930 .
I X Lithonia LED 2
Exit LED Universal
II
1
LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE TOC BUILDING ADDITION 1
PAGE 2 SEP 00
1
Notes: * Input watts vary slightly by manufacture. These input watts are approximate and may vary
slightly depending on manufacture.
1. Remote Ballast 1
2. This is a wall washer. For best results space 1:1 (3' out: 3' o.c.) 4' out — 4' o.c. This of
course is optimum. 3' of and 4'o.c. is okay
3. This is an alternate wall washer and you can space 2:1 (3' out 5 -6' o.c. 2 -1/2' out 4 -5'
o.c.)
4. The voltage and size must be verified and looked at
5. There may be some areas where we have to use a 3 light or we may have to use 2 units
•
This is to be determined
6. Items to be verified. Over hang height, which white finish, ceiling condition
7. Verify recess height 1
MAKE SURE YOU VISIT EXITS, EMERGENCY LIGHTING AND PATH
OF EGRESS
END OF SECTION 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
•